contract provisions and plans - stellar-jsctp biosolids cake transfer screw replacement discovery...

CONTRACT PROVISIONS AND PLANS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF:

Schedule A and B Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Discovery Clean Water Alliance Project No. 92-2017-0053

VOLUME III – SPECIFICATIONS

A Discovery Clean Water Alliance Capital Project with Clark Regional Wastewater District as Administrative Lead

CLARK REGIONAL WASTEWATER DISTRICT 8000 N.E. 52nd COURT VANCOUVER, WASHINGTON 98665 (360) 750-5876FAX (360) 750-7570crwwd.com

January 2020

CONTRACT PROVISIONS AND PLANS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF:

Schedule A and B Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Discovery Clean Water Alliance Project No. 92-2017-0053

VOLUME III – SPECIFICATIONS

FOR INFORMATION REGARDING THIS PROJECT CONTACT:

Tom Lebo Alliance Construction Program Manager CLARK REGIONAL WASTEWATER DISTRICT 8000 N.E. 52nd COURT VANCOUVER, WASHINGTON 98665 (360) [email protected]

CLARK REGIONAL WASTEWATER DISTRICT

VANCOUVER (CLARK COUNTY), WA

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

for the construction of the

Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements

Discovery Clean Water Alliance Project No. 92-2017-0053

AND

Schedule B: Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Repair and Replacement Projects:

SCTP Digester Maintenance and Modifications. Discovery Clean Water Alliance Project No. 93-2018-0086

SCTP Biosolids Cake Transfer Screw Replacement Discovery Clean Water Alliance Project No. 93-2018-0089

SCTP Boiler Exhaust Stack Replacement Discovery Clean Water Alliance Project No. 93-2018-0096

SCTP Boiler Gas Boosters Discovery Clean Water Alliance Project No. 93-2019-0012

SCTP HVAC Systems Replacement (Buildings 70 and 72) Discovery Clean Water Alliance Project No. 93-2019-0072

VOLUME III

JACOBS

Corvallis, OR

January 2020

© JACOBS 2020. All rights reserved. This document and the ideas and designs incorporated herein, as an instrument of professional service, is the property of Jacobs and is not to be used in whole or part, for any other project without the written authorization of Jacobs. Any reuse, modification, or alteration of this document and the ideas and designs incorporated herein is at the sole risk of the party(ies) reusing, modifying, or altering it. All references to Jacobs and its employees and all professional seals shall be removed prior to any reuse, modification, or alteration of this document.

Project No. 708335 Copy No.

SALMON CREEK TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

PW\DEN003\708335 SEALS PAGE JANUARY 2020 00 01 07 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 00 01 07 SEALS PAGE

SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

Digitally Signed on January 6, 2020

Benjamin Stephen Herman


SEALS PAGE PW\DEN003\708335 00 01 07 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE DIVISION 04 – MASONRY DIVISION 05 – METALS DIVISION 44 – POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT Section 44 42 25.02

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Luke Aaron Scoggins



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS DIVISION 09 – FINISHES DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Geoffrey Barlow Kirsten



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) Sections 23 05 93, 23 31 13, 23 31 16.16, 23 34 00, 23 34 01, 23 37 00 DIVISION 44 – POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT Sections 44 31 00, 44 47 28.26

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Kenneth J. Galardi



SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) Sections 23 00 00, 23 07 00, 23 08 00, 23 09 00, 23 09 93, 23 20 00, 23 74 00, 23 81 00


Terry Leslie Gatlin

9



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) Section 23 52 00 DIVISION 44 – POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT Section 44 46 23.02

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Jason Thomas Krumsick



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Tiana Afua Michaud



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Donald E. Martens

39454

WASHINGTON

OF

STAT

E

REGISTERED

DONALD

PROFESSIONAL ENGIN

EER

E. MARTENS

07Jan2020

Exp: 03/28/2020



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Matthew John Baldwin



SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Section 40 90 01


David I. Star

8



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS DIVISION 41 – MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT DIVISION 43 – PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT Section 43 12 01 DIVISION 44 – POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT Section 44 31 00 Section 44 42 25.04

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Craig W. Massie



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Sections 40 90 00, 40 91 00, 40 99 90

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Jeffrey David Kanyuch



SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 43 – PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT Section 43 11 46

Digitally Signed on

January 6, 2020

Quinn Philip Behnke

END OF SECTION

8

Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Alliance Capital and Repair and Replacement Program Project Numbers: 92-2017-0053, 93-2018-0086, 93-2018-0089, 93-2018-0096, 93-2019-0012, and 93-2019-0072 TOC - i

TABLE OF CONTENTS for the

Contract Provisions and Plans

VOLUME I – CONTRACT PROVISIONS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BIDDING REQUIREMENTS

CALL FOR BIDS PROPOSAL FORM INSTRUCTIONS PROPOSAL FORM NOTICE TO BIDDER NON-COLLUSION DECLARATION CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH WAGE PAYMENT STATUTES SUBCONTRACTOR LIST SUPPLEMENTAL CRITERIA INFORMATION FORM WORK EXPERIENCE FORM PROPOSAL SIGNATURE PAGE

CONTRACT FORMS

AGREEMENT CONTRACT BOND

PREVAILING WAGE RATES

STATE OF WASHINGTON PREVAILING WAGE RATES

CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS CLARK COUNTY BUILDING PERMIT (PLACEHOLDER) BUILDING INSPECTION APPROVAL CARD (PLACEHOLDER) CLARK COUNTY RIGHT-OF-WAY PERMIT CLARK COUNTY GRADING AND DRAINAGE PERMIT

(PLACEHOLDER) STANDARD DETAILS

Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Alliance Capital and Repair and Replacement Program Project Numbers: 92-2017-0053, 93-2018-0086, 93-2018-0089, 93-2018-0096, 93-2019-0012, and 93-2019-0072 TOC - ii

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 01—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 15 00 Mitigating Community Impacts Supplement: Traffic Access for Phase 5B to SCTP 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures Supplements: Change Control Form Request for Information 01 29 00 Payment Procedures Supplement: District Reportable Expense Template 01 31 13 Project Coordination Supplement: Removal From Service (RFS) Request Form 01 31 15 Construction Sequencing and Constraints Supplement: Construction Constraints by Facility 01 31 19 Project Meetings 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Supplement: Transmittal of Contractor’s Submittal 01 42 13 Abbreviations and Acronyms 01 43 33 Manufacturers’ Field Services Supplement: Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation 01 45 16.13 Contractor Quality Control 01 45 33 Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Supplement: Inadvertent Discovery Plan (IDP) 01 56 50 Special Utility Field Explorations 01 57 13 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control 01 61 00 Common Product Requirements Supplement: Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance 01 64 00 Owner-Furnished Products 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data Supplements: Maintenance Summary Form Template: Operation and Maintenance Manual Cover

Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Alliance Capital and Repair and Replacement Program Project Numbers: 92-2017-0053, 93-2018-0086, 93-2018-0089, 93-2018-0096, 93-2019-0012, and 93-2019-0072 TOC - iii

Template: Operation and Maintenance Manual Spine Template: Operation and Maintenance Manual

Table of Contents 01 88 15 Anchorage and Bracing 01 91 14 Equipment Testing and Facility Startup Supplements: Unit Process Startup Form Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification Form

DIVISION 02—EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 00 Demolition Supplements: Regulated Building Materials Survey Facility 87 – Asbestos Material Locations 117th Street Pump Station Forcemain Street Odor Control

System Submittal Data

DIVISION 03—CONCRETE

03 01 32 Repair of Vertical and Overhead Concrete Surfaces 03 01 33 Repair of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 15 00 Concrete Joints and Accessories 03 21 00 Steel Reinforcement 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete Supplements: Concrete Mix Design, Class 4000F1S1W0C1 Concrete Mix Design, Class 3500F1S0W0C1 03 39 00 Concrete Curing 03 62 00 Grouting Supplement: 24-hour Evaluation of Nonshrink Grout Test Form and Grout Testing Procedures 03 63 00 Concrete Doweling 03 64 23 Epoxy Resin Injection Grouting

VOLUME II – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 04—MASONRY

04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry 04 23 00 Glass Unit Masonry

Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Alliance Capital and Repair and Replacement Program Project Numbers: 92-2017-0053, 93-2018-0086, 93-2018-0089, 93-2018-0096, 93-2019-0012, and 93-2019-0072 TOC - iv

DIVISION 05—METALS

05 05 19 Post-Installed Anchors 05 05 23 Welding Supplement: Welding and Nondestructive Testing Table 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 05 41 00 Structural Metal Stud Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 52 16 Aluminum Railings 05 53 00 Metal Gratings

DIVISION 06—WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 82 01 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Baffle Wall System

DIVISION 07—THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 41 13 Metal Roof and Wall Panels 07 53 23 Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer Roofing 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 70 01 Roof Specialties and Accessories 07 92 00 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 08—OPENINGS

08 11 00 Metal Doors and Frames 08 30 00 Specialty Doors 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing 08 90 00 Louvers

DIVISION 09—FINISHES

09 90 00 Painting and Coating Supplements: Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS) Paint Product Data Sheet (PPDS)

DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES

10 14 00 Signage Supplement: Sign Schedule

Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Alliance Capital and Repair and Replacement Program Project Numbers: 92-2017-0053, 93-2018-0086, 93-2018-0089, 93-2018-0096, 93-2019-0012, and 93-2019-0072 TOC - v

10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 10 80 00 Miscellaneous Specialties

DIVISIONS 11 THROUGH 21—NOT USED

DIVISION 22—PLUMBING

22 07 00 Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 10 10 Plumbing Piping and Accessories 22 10 01.01 Plumbing Piping Schedule Data Sheet 22 10 01.02 Polyvinyl Chloride Drain Waste and Vent (PVC-DWV) Pipe and Fittings Data Sheet 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures

DIVISION 23—HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 00 00 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Basic Requirements

23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC and Odor Control 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC 23 09 00 HVAC Instrumentation Control Performance Specifications 23 09 93 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls 23 20 00 HVAC Piping 23 31 13 Metal Ducts and Accessories 23 31 16.16 Thermoset Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Ducts

and Accessories 23 34 00 Odor Control Fans Supplement: Fan Schedule 23 34 01 HVAC Fans 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets

23 52 00 Boiler Exhaust Stack 23 74 00 Air Supply Units 23 81 00 Unitary HVAC Equipment

DIVISIONS 24 AND 25—NOT USED

DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL

26 05 02 Basic Electrical Requirements 26 05 04 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 26 05 05 Conductors 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes 26 05 70 Electrical Systems Analysis 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems

Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Alliance Capital and Repair and Replacement Program Project Numbers: 92-2017-0053, 93-2018-0086, 93-2018-0089, 93-2018-0096, 93-2019-0012, and 93-2019-0072 TOC - vi

26 20 00 Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 24 19 Low-Voltage Motor Control 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 29 23 Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System 26 42 01 Pipe Bonding and Test Stations Supplement: Joint Bond Continuity Test Schematic 26 42 02 Galvanic Anode Cathodic Protection System

DIVISION 27—NOT USED

DIVISION 28—ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 13 00 Security Systems

DIVISIONS 29 AND 30—NOT USED

VOLUME III – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 31—EARTHWORK

31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 23 13 Subgrade Preparation 31 23 16 Excavation 31 23 19.01 Dewatering 31 23 23 Fill and Backfill 31 23 23.15 Trench Backfill 31 41 00 Shoring

DIVISION 32—EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 11 23 Aggregate Base Course 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving 32 16 00 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks 32 31 13 Chain Link Fences and Gates 32 91 13 Soil Preparation 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses

DIVISION 33—UTILITIES

33 13 00 Disinfection of Water Utility Distribution Facilities


Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Alliance Capital and Repair and Replacement Program Project Numbers: 92-2017-0053, 93-2018-0086, 93-2018-0089, 93-2018-0096, 93-2019-0012, and 93-2019-0072 TOC - vii

DIVISION 40—PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS

40 05 15 Piping Support Systems 40 05 33 Pipe Heat Tracing 40 27 00 Process Piping—General 40 27 00.01 Cement-Mortar-Lined and Glass-Lined and Epoxy-

Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Data Sheet 40 27 00.03 Carbon Steel Pipe and Fittings—General Service Data Sheet 40 27 00.08 Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings—General Service Data Sheet 40 27 00.10 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings Data Sheet 40 27 00.13 Copper and Copper Alloy Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings Data Sheet 40 27 00.21 Profile Wall Polyethylene (PWPE) Data Sheet 40 27 01 Process Piping Specialties 40 27 02 Process Valves and Operators Supplements: Solenoid Actuated Valve Schedule Self-Regulated Valve Schedule 40 42 13 Process Piping Insulation Supplement: Service and Insulation Thickness Table 40 80 01 Process Piping Leakage Testing 40 90 00 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems Supplements: Loop Specifications Instrument List PLC Equipment List PLC Input/Output List Control Panel Schedule Loop Status Report Instrument Calibration Sheet I&C Valve Adjustment Sheet Performance Test Sheet 40 90 01 Supplemental Loop Specifications Supplements: PLC Equipment List PLC I/O List 40 91 00 Instrumentation and Control Components 40 99 90 Package Control Systems

Phase 5B Project: Package 1 – Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Odor Control and Existing Facilities Improvements Alliance Capital and Repair and Replacement Program Project Numbers: 92-2017-0053, 93-2018-0086, 93-2018-0089, 93-2018-0096, 93-2019-0012, and 93-2019-0072 TOC - viii

DIVISION 41—MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT

41 22 23.21 Jib Cranes Supplement: Jib Crane Data Sheet

DIVISION 42—NOT USED

DIVISION 43—PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT

43 11 46 Centrifugal Digester Gas Blower Skid 43 12 01 Compressed Air Systems Supplement: Facility 88 Air Compressor Induction Motor Data Sheet

DIVISION 44—POLLUTION AND WASTE CONTROL EQUIPMENT

44 31 00 Biotrickling Filter System 44 42 25.02 Prefabricated Aluminum Flat Cover 44 42 25.04 Prefabricated FRP Secondary Clarifier Launder Covers 44 44 13.01 Chemical Metering Pumps Supplement: Sodium Hypochlorite Feed Pump 1 Data Sheet

44 46 13.02 Screw Conveyor System Supplement: Cake Transfer Screw Induction Motor Data Sheet

44 47 28.26 Activated Carbon Odor Control Systems


VOLUME IV – DRAWINGS

VOLUME V – STANDARD DETAILS

VOLUME VI – SCHEDULE B DRAWINGS


PW\DEN003\708335 SITE CLEARING JANUARY 2020 31 10 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Interfering or Objectionable Material: Trash, rubbish, and junk; vegetation and other organic matter, whether alive, dead, or decaying; topsoil.

B. Clearing: Removal of interfering or objectionable material lying on or protruding above ground surface.

C. Grubbing: Removal of vegetation and other organic matter including stumps, buried logs, and roots greater than 2-inch caliper to a depth of 6 inches below subgrade.

D. Scalping: Removal of sod without removing more than upper 3 inches of topsoil.

E. Stripping: Removal of topsoil remaining after applicable scalping is completed.

F. Project Limits: Areas, as shown or specified, within which Work is to be performed.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Obtain Engineer’s approval of staked clearing, grubbing, and stripping limits, prior to commencing clearing, grubbing, and stripping.

1.03 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING

A. Prepare Site only after adequate erosion and sediment controls are in place. Limit areas exposed uncontrolled to erosion during installation of temporary erosion and sediment controls.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Clear, grub, and strip areas actually needed for waste disposal, borrow, or Site improvements within limits shown or specified.


SITE CLEARING PW\DEN003\708335 31 10 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

B. Do not injure or deface vegetation that is not designated for removal.

3.02 LIMITS

A. As follows, but not to extend beyond Project limits.

1. Excavation Excluding Trenches: 5 feet beyond top of cut slopes. 2. Trench Excavation: 4 feet from trench centerline, regardless of actual

trench width. 3. Fill:

a. Clearing and Grubbing: 5 feet beyond toe of permanent fill. b. Stripping and Scalping: 2 feet beyond toe of permanent fill.

4. Waste Disposal: a. Clearing: 5 feet beyond perimeter. b. Scalping and Stripping: Not required. c. Grubbing: Around perimeter as necessary for neat finished

appearance. 5. Structures: 1 foot outside of new structures. 6. Other Areas: As shown.

B. Remove rubbish, trash, and junk from entire area within Project limits.

3.03 TEMPORARY REMOVAL OF INTERFERING PLANTINGS

A. Remove and store, as shown on Civil Demolition Drawings, plants, shrubs and trees that are not designated for removal but do interfere with construction or could be damaged by construction activities.

B. Photograph and document location, orientation, and condition of each plant prior to its removal. Record sufficient information to uniquely identify each plant removed and to assure accurate replacement.

3.04 CLEARING

A. Clear areas within limits shown or specified.

B. Fell trees so that they fall away from facilities and vegetation not designated for removal.

C. Cut stumps not designated for grubbing flush with ground surface.

D. Cut off shrubs, brush, weeds, and grasses to within 2 inches of ground surface.

3.05 GRUBBING

A. Grub areas within limits shown or specified.


PW\DEN003\708335 SITE CLEARING JANUARY 2020 31 10 00 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

3.06 SCALPING

A. Do not remove sod until after clearing and grubbing is completed and resulting debris is removed.

B. Scalp areas within limits shown or specified.

3.07 STRIPPING

A. Do not remove topsoil until after scalping is completed.

B. Strip areas within limits to minimum depths shown or specified. Do not remove subsoil with topsoil.

C. Stockpile strippings, meeting requirements of Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation, for topsoil, separately from other excavated material.

3.08 DISPOSAL

A. Clearing and Grubbing Debris:

1. Dispose of debris offsite. 2. Burning of debris onsite will not be allowed. 3. Woody debris may be chipped. Chips may be sold to Contractor’s

benefit or used for landscaping onsite as mulch or uniformly mixed with topsoil, provided that resulting mix will be fertile and not support combustion. Dispose of chips that are unsaleable or unsuitable for landscaping or other uses with unchipped debris.

4. Limit offsite disposal of clearing and grubbing debris to locations that are approved by federal, state, and local authorities, and that will not be visible from Project.

B. Scalpings: As specified for clearing and grubbing debris.

C. Strippings:

1. Dispose of strippings that are unsuitable for topsoil or that exceed quantity required for topsoil offsite.

2. Stockpile topsoil in sufficient quantity to meet Project needs. Dispose of excess strippings as specified for clearing and grubbing.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 SUBGRADE PREPARATION JANUARY 2020 31 23 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 31 23 13 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:

1. ASTM International (ASTM): D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Optimum Moisture Content: As defined in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

B. Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of clearing and grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil, excavation to grade, and scarification and compaction of subgrade.

C. Relative Compaction: As defined in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

D. Subgrade: Layer of existing soil after completion of clearing, grubbing, scalping of topsoil prior to placement of fill, roadway structure or base for floor slab.

E. Proof-rolling: Testing of subgrade by compactive effort to identify areas that will not support the future loading without excessive settlement.

1.03 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Complete applicable Work specified in Sections 02 41 00, Demolition; 31 10 00, Site Clearing; and 31 23 16, Excavation, prior to subgrade preparation.


A. Notify Engineer when subgrade is ready for compaction or proof-rolling or whenever compaction or proof-rolling is resumed after a period of extended inactivity.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Prepare subgrade when unfrozen and free of ice and snow.


SUBGRADE PREPARATION PW\DEN003\708335 31 23 13 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Keep subgrade free of water, debris, and foreign matter during compaction or proof-rolling.

B. Bring subgrade to proper grade and cross-section and uniformly compact surface.

C. Do not use sections of prepared ground surface as haul roads. Protect prepared subgrade from traffic.

D. Maintain prepared ground surface in finished condition until next course is placed.

3.02 COMPACTION

A. Under Earthfill: Compact upper 12 inches to minimum of 92 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D698.

B. Under Pavement Structure, Floor Slabs-on-Grade, Footings, or Granular Fill Under Structures: Compact the upper 12 inches to minimum of 97 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D698.

3.03 MOISTURE CONDITIONING

A. Dry Subgrade: Add water, then mix to make moisture content uniform throughout.

B. Wet Subgrade: Aerate material by blading, discing, harrowing, or other methods, to hasten drying process.

3.04 CORRECTION

A. Soft or Loose Subgrade:

1. Adjust moisture content and recompact, or 2. Over excavate as specified in Section 31 23 16, Excavation, and replace

with suitable material from the excavation, as specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.


PW\DEN003\708335 SUBGRADE PREPARATION JANUARY 2020 31 23 13 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

B. Unsuitable Material: Over excavate as specified in Section 31 23 16, Excavation, and replace with suitable material from the excavation, as specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 EXCAVATION JANUARY 2020 31 23 16 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 31 23 16 EXCAVATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Informational Submittals:

1. Excavation Plan, Detailing: a. Methods and sequencing of excavation. b. Proposed locations of stockpiled excavated material. c. Proposed onsite and offsite spoil disposal sites. d. Anticipated difficulties and proposed resolutions.


A. Provide adequate survey control to avoid unauthorized overexcavation.

1.03 WEATHER LIMITATIONS

A. Material excavated when frozen or when air temperature is less than 32 degrees F shall not be used as fill or backfill until material completely thaws.

B. Material excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or backfill until after material drains and dries sufficiently for proper compaction.


A. Demolition: Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition, prior to excavating.

B. Clearing, Grubbing, and Stripping: Complete applicable Work specified in Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing, prior to excavating.

C. Dewatering: Conform to applicable requirements of Section 31 23 19.01, Dewatering, prior to initiating excavation.

D. Excavation Support: Install and maintain, as specified in Section 31 41 00, Shoring, as necessary to support sides of excavations and prevent detrimental settlement and lateral movement of existing facilities, adjacent property, and completed Work.


EXCAVATION PW\DEN003\708335 31 23 16 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Excavate to lines, grades, and dimensions shown and as necessary to accomplish Work. Excavate to within tolerance of plus or minus 0.1 foot, except where dimensions or grades are shown or specified as maximum or minimum. Allow for forms, working space, granular base, topsoil, and similar items, wherever applicable. Trim to neat lines where concrete is to be deposited against earth.

B. Do not overexcavate without written authorization of Engineer.

C. Remove or protect obstructions as shown and as specified in Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls, Article Protection of Work and Property.

D. Use of explosives shall not be allowed.

3.02 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION

A. Excavation is unclassified. Complete all excavation regardless of the type, nature, or condition of the materials encountered.

3.03 TRENCH WIDTH

A. Minimum Width of Trenches:

1. Single Pipes, Conduits, Direct-Buried Cables, and Duct Banks: a. Less than 4-inch Outside Diameter or Width: 18 inches. b. Greater than 4-inch Outside Diameter or Width: 18 inches greater

than outside diameter or width of pipe, conduit, direct-buried cable, or duct bank.

2. Multiple Pipes, Conduits, Cables, or Duct Banks in Single Trench: 18 inches greater than aggregate width of pipes, conduits, cables, duct banks, plus space between.

3. Increase trench widths by thicknesses of sheeting.

B. Maximum Trench Width: Unlimited, unless otherwise shown or specified, or unless excess width will cause damage to existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work.


PW\DEN003\708335 EXCAVATION JANUARY 2020 31 23 16 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

3.04 EMBANKMENT AND CUT SLOPES

A. Shape, trim, and finish cut slopes to conform with lines, grades, and cross-sections shown, with proper allowance for topsoil or slope protection, where shown.

B. Remove stones and rock that exceed 3-inch diameter and that are loose and may roll down slope. Remove exposed roots from cut slopes.

C. Round tops of cut slopes in soil to not less than a 6-foot radius, provided such rounding does not extend offsite or outside easements and rights-of-way, or adversely impacts existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work.

3.05 STOCKPILING EXCAVATED MATERIAL

A. Stockpile excavated material that is suitable for use as fill or backfill until material is needed.

B. Post signs indicating proposed use of material stockpiled. Post signs that are readable from all directions of approach to each stockpile. Signs should be clearly worded and readable by equipment operators from their normal seated position.

C. Confine stockpiles to within easements, rights-of-way, and approved work areas. Do not obstruct roads or streets.

D. Do not stockpile excavated material adjacent to trenches and other excavations, unless excavation side slopes and excavation support systems are designed, constructed, and maintained for stockpile loads.

E. Do not stockpile excavated materials near or over existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work, if weight of stockpiled material could induce excessive settlement.

3.06 DISPOSAL OF SPOIL

A. Dispose of excavated materials, which are unsuitable or exceed quantity needed for fill or backfill, offsite. Dispose of debris resulting from removal of underground facilities as specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition, for demolition debris.


EXCAVATION PW\DEN003\708335 31 23 16 - 4 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

B. Dispose of debris resulting from removal of organic matter, trash, refuse, and junk as specified in Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing, for clearing and grubbing debris.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 DEWATERING JANUARY 2020 31 23 19.01 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 31 23 19.01 DEWATERING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS


1. Water control plan. 2. Discharge permits.

1.02 WATER CONTROL PLAN

A. As a minimum, include:

1. Descriptions of proposed groundwater and surface water control facilities including, but not limited to, equipment; methods; standby equipment and power supply, pollution control facilities, discharge locations to be utilized, and provisions for immediate temporary water supply as required by this section.

2. Drawings showing locations, dimensions, and relationships of elements of each system.

3. Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of proposed dewatering systems and components.

B. If system is modified during installation or operation revise or amend and resubmit Water Control Plan.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Continuously control water during course of construction, including weekends and holidays and during periods of work stoppages, and provide adequate backup systems to maintain control of water.

3.02 SURFACE WATER CONTROL

A. See Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls, Article Temporary Controls.

B. Remove surface runoff controls when no longer needed.


DEWATERING PW\DEN003\708335 31 23 19.01 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

3.03 DEWATERING SYSTEMS

A. Provide, operate, and maintain dewatering systems of sufficient size and capacity to permit excavation and subsequent construction in dry and to lower and maintain groundwater level a minimum of 5 feet below the lowest point of excavation. Continuously maintain excavations free of water, regardless of source, and until backfilled to final grade.

B. Design and Operate Dewatering Systems:

1. To prevent loss of ground as water is removed. 2. To avoid inducing settlement or damage to existing facilities, completed

Work, or adjacent property. 3. To relieve artesian pressures and resultant uplift of excavation bottom.

C. Provide sufficient redundancy in each system to keep excavation free of water in event of component failure.

D. Provide supplemental ditches and sumps only as necessary to collect water from local seeps. Do not use ditches and sumps as primary means of dewatering.

3.04 MONITORING FLOWS

A. Monitor volume of water pumped per calendar day from excavations, as Work progresses. Also monitor volume of water introduced each day into excavations for performance of Work. Monitor flows using measuring devices acceptable to Engineer.

3.05 DISPOSAL OF WATER

A. Obtain discharge permit for water disposal from authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Treat water collected by dewatering operations, as required by regulatory agencies, prior to discharge.

C. Discharge water as required by discharge permit and in manner that will not cause erosion or flooding, or otherwise damage existing facilities, completed Work, or adjacent property.

D. Remove solids from treatment facilities and perform other maintenance of treatment facilities as necessary to maintain their efficiency.


PW\DEN003\708335 DEWATERING JANUARY 2020 31 23 19.01 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

3.06 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY

A. Securely support existing facilities, completed Work, and adjacent property vulnerable to settlement due to dewatering operations. Support shall include, but not be limited to, bracing, underpinning, or compaction grouting.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 FILL AND BACKFILL JANUARY 2020 31 23 23 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 31 23 23 FILL AND BACKFILL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C117, Standard Test Method for Materials Finer Than

75-Micrometers (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.

b. C136, Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

c. D75, Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates. d. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).

e. D4253, Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table.

f. D6938, Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Relative Compaction:

1. Ratio, in percent, of as-compacted field dry density to laboratory maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D698.

2. Apply corrections for oversize material to either as-compacted field dry density or maximum dry density, as determined by Engineer.

B. Optimum Moisture Content:

1. Determined in accordance with ASTM Standard specified to determine maximum dry density for relative compaction.

2. Determine field moisture content on basis of fraction passing 3/4-inch sieve.

C. Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of required demolition, clearing and grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil, excavation to grade, and subgrade preparation.


FILL AND BACKFILL PW\DEN003\708335 31 23 23 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

D. Completed Course: A course or layer that is ready for next layer or next phase of Work.

E. Lift: Loose (uncompacted) layer of material.

F. Geosynthetics: Geotextiles, geogrids, or geomembranes.

G. Well-Graded:

1. A mixture of particle sizes with no specific concentration or lack thereof of one or more sizes.

2. Does not define numerical value that must be placed on coefficient of uniformity, coefficient of curvature, or other specific grain size distribution parameters.

3. Used to define material type that, when compacted, produces a strong and relatively incompressible soil mass free from detrimental voids.

H. Influence Area:

1. Area within planes sloped downward and outward at 60-degree angle from horizontal measured from: a. 1 foot outside outermost edge at base of foundations or slabs. b. 1 foot outside outermost edge at surface of roadways or shoulder. c. 0.5 foot outside exterior at spring line of pipes or culverts.

I. Selected Backfill Material: Materials available onsite that Engineer determines to be suitable for specific use.

J. Imported Material: Materials obtained from sources offsite, suitable for specified use.

K. Structural Fill: Fill materials as required under structures, pavements, and other facilities.

L. Embankment Material: Fill materials required to raise existing grade in areas other than under structures.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals:

1. Certified test results from independent testing agency. 2. Shop Drawings: Tank manufacturer’s recommendations for backfill

around each buried tank.



B. Informational Submittals: Manufacturer’s data sheets for compaction equipment.


A. Notify Engineer when:

1. Structure or tank is ready for backfilling, and whenever backfilling operations are resumed after a period of inactivity.

2. Soft or loose subgrade materials are encountered wherever embankment or site fill is to be placed.

3. Fill material appears to be deviating from Specifications.


A. Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition; Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing; Section 31 23 16, Excavation; and Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation, prior to placing fill or backfill.

B. Backfill against concrete structures only after concrete has attained compressive strength, specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of concrete work and attained strength prior to placing backfill.

C. Backfill around water-holding structures only after completion of satisfactory leakage tests as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

D. Backfill around buried tanks only after tank is set in position, securely anchored, and ready to be backfilled.

E. Do not place granular base, subbase, or surfacing until after subgrade has been prepared as specified in Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Gradation Tests: As necessary to locate acceptable sources of imported material.

2.02 EARTHFILL

A. Excavated material from required excavations free from rocks larger than 3 inches, from roots and other organic matter, ashes, cinders, trash, debris, and other deleterious materials.



B. Provide imported material of equivalent quality, if required to accomplish Work.

2.03 GRANULAR FILL

A. 1-inch minus crushed gravel or crushed rock.

B. Free from dirt, clay balls, and organic material.

C. Well-graded from coarse to fine and containing sufficient fines to bind material when compacted, but with maximum 8 percent by weight passing No. 200 sieve.

2.04 SAND

A. Free from clay, organic matter, or other deleterious material.

B. Gradation as determined in accordance with ASTM C117 and ASTM C136:

Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight

1/4-inch 100

No. 4 95 - 100

No. 200 0 - 8

2.05 BACKFILL AROUND BURIED TANKS

A. As recommended by tank manufacturer.

2.06 GRANULAR DRAIN MATERIAL

A. As specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.

2.07 WATER FOR MOISTURE CONDITIONING

A. Free of hazardous or toxic contaminates, or contaminants deleterious to proper compaction.

2.08 BASE COURSE ROCK

A. As specified in Section 32 11 23, Aggregate Base Course.



2.09 FOUNDATION STABILIZATION ROCK

A. Crushed rock or pit run rock.

B. Uniformly graded from coarse to fine.

C. Free from excessive dirt and other organic material.

D. Maximum 2-1/2-inch particle size.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Keep placement surfaces free of water, debris, and foreign material during placement and compaction of fill and backfill materials.

B. Place and spread fill and backfill materials in horizontal lifts of uniform thickness, in a manner that avoids segregation, and compact each lift to specified densities prior to placing succeeding lifts. Slope lifts only where necessary to conform to final grades or as necessary to keep placement surfaces drained of water.

C. During filling and backfilling, keep level of fill and backfill around each structure and buried tank even.

D. Do not place fill or backfill, if fill or backfill material is frozen, or if surface upon which fill or backfill is to be placed is frozen.

E. If pipe, conduit, duct bank, or cable is to be laid within fill or backfill:

1. Fill or backfill to an elevation 2 feet above top of item to be laid. 2. Excavate trench for installation of item. 3. Install bedding, if applicable, as specified in Section 31 23 23.15,

Trench Backfill. 4. Install item. 5. Backfill envelope zone and remaining trench, as specified in

Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill, before resuming filling or backfilling specified in this section.

F. Tolerances:

1. Final Lines and Grades: Within a tolerance of 0.1 foot unless dimensions or grades are shown or specified otherwise.

2. Grade to establish and maintain slopes and drainage as shown. Reverse slopes are not permitted.



G. Settlement: Correct and repair any subsequent damage to structures, pavements, curbs, slabs, piping, and other facilities, caused by settlement of fill or backfill material.

3.02 BACKFILL UNDER AND AROUND STRUCTURES

A. Under Facilities: Within influence area beneath structures, slabs, pavements, curbs, footings, piping, conduits, duct banks, and other facilities, backfill with 12-inches of granular fill, unless otherwise shown. Place granular fill in lifts of 6-inch maximum thickness and compact each lift to minimum of 97 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D698.

B. Other Areas for General Grading: Backfill with earthfill to lines and grades shown, with proper allowance for topsoil thickness where shown. Place in lifts of 12-inch maximum thickness and compact each lift to minimum 92 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D698.

3.03 BACKFILL AROUND TANKS

A. Backfill to top of tank, unless otherwise shown, with granular fill and thoroughly water settle by saturating backfill and vibrating saturated backfill with a concrete vibrator inserted through full depth of backfill on 1-foot maximum centers.

B. Backfill above top of tank with earthfill placed in 12-inch lifts. Compact per manufacturers recommendations.

3.04 SITE TESTING

A. Gradation:

1. One sample from each 1,500 tons of finished product or more often as determined by Engineer, if variation in gradation is occurring, or if material appears to depart from Specifications.

2. If test results indicate material does not meet Specification requirements, terminate material placement until corrective measures are taken.

3. Remove material placed in Work that does not meet Specification requirements.

B. In-Place Density Tests: In accordance with ASTM D6938. During placement of materials, test as follows:

1. Granular Fill: Minimum two tests every other lift per structure.



3.05 GRANULAR BASE, SUBBASE, AND SURFACING

A. Place and Compact as specified in Section 32 11 23, Aggregate Base Course.

3.06 REPLACING OVEREXCAVATED MATERIAL

A. Replace excavation carried below grade lines shown or established by Engineer as follows:

1. Beneath Footings: Concrete of strength equal to that of respective footing, as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2. Beneath Fill or Backfill: Same material as specified for overlying fill or backfill.

3. Beneath Slabs-On-Grade: Granular fill. 4. Trenches:

a. Unauthorized Overexcavation: Either trench stabilization material or granular pipe base material, as specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.

b. Authorized Overexcavation: Trench stabilization material, as specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.

5. Permanent Cut Slopes (Where Overlying Area is Not to Receive Fill or Backfill): a. Flat to Moderate Steep Slopes (3:1, Horizontal Run: Vertical Rise

or Flatter): Earthfill. b. Steep Slopes (Steeper than 3:1):

1) Correct overexcavation by transitioning between overcut areas and designed slope adjoining areas, provided such cutting does not extend offsite or outside easements and rights-of-way, or adversely impacts existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work.

2) Backfilling overexcavated areas is prohibited, unless in Engineer’s opinion, backfill will remain stable, and overexcavated material is replaced as compacted earthfill.

3.07 PLACING FILL OVER GEOSYNTHETICS

A. General:

1. Place fill over geosynthetics with sufficient care so as not to damage them.

2. Place fill only by back dumping and spreading only. 3. Dump fill only on previously placed fill. 4. While operating equipment, avoid sharp turns, sudden starts or stops

that could damage geosynthetics.



B. Hauling: Operate hauling equipment on minimum of 3 feet of covering.

C. Compaction: Compact fill only after uniformly spread to full thickness shown.

D. Geosynthetic Damage:

1. Mark punctures, tears, or other damage to geosynthetics, so repairs may be made.

2. Clear overlying fill as necessary to repair damage. 3. Repairs to geosynthetics shall be made by respective installers as

specified in respective specification section for each geosynthetic.

3.08 ACCESS ROAD SURFACING

A. Place and compact as specified in Section 32 11 23, Aggregate Base Course.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 TRENCH BACKFILL JANUARY 2020 31 23 23.15 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 31 23 23.15 TRENCH BACKFILL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Public Works Association (APWA): Uniform Color Code. 2. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. C33/C33M, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. c. C117, Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than

75 Micrometer (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.

d. C136, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

e. C150/C150M, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. f. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or

Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. g. C1012/C1012M, Standard Test Method for Length Change of

Hydraulic-Cement Mortars Exposed to a Sulfate Solution. h. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).

i. D1140, Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer than No. 200 (75 micrometer) Sieve.

j. D1557, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)).

k. D2487, Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System).

l. D4253, Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table.

m. D4254, Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density.

n. D4318, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.

o. D4832, Standard Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders.

3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Z535.1, Safety Colors.


TRENCH BACKFILL PW\DEN003\708335 31 23 23.15 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Base Rock: Granular material upon which manhole bases and other structures are placed.

B. Bedding Material: Granular material upon which pipes, conduits, cables, or duct banks are placed.

C. Imported Material: Material obtained by Contractor from source(s) offsite.

D. Lift: Loose (uncompacted) layer of material.

E. Pipe Zone: Backfill zone that includes full trench width and extends from prepared trench bottom to an upper limit above top outside surface of pipe, conduit, cable or duct bank.

F. Prepared Trench Bottom: Graded trench bottom after excavation and installation of stabilization material, if required, but before installation of bedding material.

G. Relative Compaction: The ratio, in percent, of the as-compacted field dry density to the laboratory maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698. Corrections for oversize material may be applied to either as-compacted field dry density or maximum dry density, as determined by Engineer.

H. Selected Backfill Material: Material available onsite that Engineer determines to be suitable for a specific use.

I. Well-Graded: A mixture of particle sizes that has no specific concentration or lack thereof of one or more sizes producing a material type that, when compacted, produces a strong and relatively incompressible soil mass free from detrimental voids. Satisfying both of the following requirements, as defined in ASTM D2487:

1. Coefficient of Curvature: Greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3.

2. Coefficient of Uniformity: Greater than or equal to 4 for materials classified as gravel, and greater than or equal to 6 for materials classified as sand.



1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Certified Gradation Analysis: Submit not less than 30 days prior to delivery for imported materials or anticipated use for excavated materials, except for trench stabilization material that will be submitted prior to material delivery to Site.

2. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer’s descriptive literature for marking tapes and tracer wire.

B. Informational Submittals:

1. Catalog and manufacturer’s data sheets for compaction equipment. 2. Controlled Low Strength Material: Certified mix design and test results.

Include material types and weight per cubic yard for each component of mix.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GEOTEXTILE

A. As specified in Section 31 32 19.16, Geotextile.

2.02 MARKING TAPE

A. Nondetectable:

1. Inert polyethylene, impervious to known alkalis, acids, chemical reagents, and solvents likely to be encountered in soil.

2. Thickness: Minimum 5 mils. 3. Width: 3 inches. 4. Identifying Lettering: Minimum 1-inch high, permanent black lettering

imprinted continuously over entire length. 5. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Reef Industries; Terra Tape. b. Mutual Industries; Non-detectable Tape. c. Presco; Non-detectable Tape.

B. Detectable:

1. Solid aluminum foil, visible on unprinted side, encased in protective high visibility, inert polyethylene plastic jacket.

2. Foil Thickness: Minimum 0.35 mils. 3. Laminate Thickness: Minimum 5 mils.



4. Width: 3 inches. 5. Identifying Lettering: Minimum 1-inch high, permanent black lettering

imprinted continuously over entire length. 6. Joining Clips: Tin or nickel-coated furnished by tape manufacturer. 7. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Reef Industries; Terra Tape, Sentry Line Detectable. b. Mutual Industries; Detectable Tape. c. Presco; Detectable Tape.

C. Color: In accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code.

Color* Facility

Red Electric power lines, cables, conduit, and lightning cables

Orange Communicating alarm or signal lines, cables, or conduit

Yellow Gas, oil, steam, petroleum, or gaseous materials

Green Sewers and drain lines

Blue Potable water

Purple Reclaimed water, irrigation, and slurry lines

*As specified in NEMA Z535.1, Safety Color Code.

2.03 TRACER WIRE

A. Material: Minimum 12-gauge solid copper or copper jacket with a steel core, with high-density polyethylene (HDPE) or high-molecular weight polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation suitable for direct bury.

B. Splices: Use wire nut or lug suitable for direct burial as recommended by tracer wire manufacturer.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Copperhead Industries, LLC. 2. Performance Wire & Cable Inc. 3. Pro-line Safety Products Company.

2.04 TRENCH STABILIZATION MATERIAL

A. Base Rock:

1. Clean, hard, durable 3-inch minus crushed rock or gravel, or pit run, free from clay balls, other organic materials, or debris.



2. Uniformly graded from coarse to fine, less than 8 percent by weight passing the 1/4-inch sieve.

2.05 BEDDING MATERIAL AND PIPE ZONE MATERIAL

A. Unfrozen, friable, and no clay balls, roots, or other organic material.

B. Clean or gravelly sand with less than 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve, as determined in accordance with ASTM D1140, or gravel or crushed rock within maximum particle size and other requirements as follows unless otherwise specified.

1. Duct Banks: 3/4-inch maximum particle size. 2. PVC Irrigation System Piping and Ductile Iron Pipe with Polyethylene

Wrap: 3/8-inch maximum particle size. 3. Pipe Under 18-Inch Diameter: 3/4-inch maximum particle size, except

1/4 inch for stainless steel pipe, copper pipe, tubing, and plastic pipe under 3-inch diameter.

4. Pipe 18-Inch Diameter and Greater: 1-1/2-inch maximum particle size for ductile iron pipe, concrete pipe, welded steel pipe, and pretensioned or prestressed concrete cylinder pipe.

5. Perforated Pipe: Granular drain material. 6. Conduit and Direct-Buried Cable:

a. Sand, clean or clean to silty, less than 12 percent passing No. 200 sieve.

b. Individual Particles: Free of sharp edges. c. Maximum Size Particle: Pass a No. 4 sieve. d. If more than 5 percent passes No. 200 sieve, the fraction that

passes No. 40 sieve shall be nonplastic as determined in accordance with ASTM D4318.

2.06 EARTH BACKFILL

A. Soil, loam, or other excavated material suitable for use as backfill.

B. Free from roots or organic matter, refuse, boulders and material larger than 1/2 cubic foot, or other deleterious materials.

2.07 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)

A. Select and proportion ingredients to obtain compressive strength between 50 psi and 150 psi at 28 days in accordance with ASTM D4832.



B. Materials:

1. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or Type II. 2. Aggregate: ASTM C33/C33M, Size 7. 3. Fly Ash (Pozzolan): Class F fly ash in accordance with ASTM C618,

except as modified herein: a. ASTM C618, Table 1, Loss on Ignition: Unless permitted

otherwise, maximum 3 percent. 4. Water: Clean, potable, containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides.

2.08 GRAVEL SURFACING ROCK

A. As specified in Section 32 11 23, Aggregate Base Course.

2.09 TOPSOIL

A. As specified in Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation.


A. Perform gradation analysis in accordance with ASTM C136 for:

1. Earth backfill, including specified class. 2. Trench stabilization material. 3. Bedding and pipe zone material.

B. Certify Laboratory Performance of Mix Designs:

1. Controlled low strength material. 2. Concrete.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 TRENCH PREPARATION

A. Water Control:

1. As specified in Section 31 23 19.01, Dewatering. 2. Remove water in a manner that minimizes soil erosion from trench sides

and bottom. 3. Provide continuous water control until trench backfill is complete.

B. Remove foreign material and backfill contaminated with foreign material that falls into trench.



3.02 TRENCH BOTTOM

A. Firm Subgrade: Grade with hand tools, remove loose and disturbed material, and trim off high areas and ridges left by excavating bucket teeth. Allow space for bedding material if shown or specified.

B. Soft Subgrade: If subgrade is encountered that may require removal to prevent pipe settlement, notify Engineer. Engineer will determine depth of overexcavation, if any required.

3.03 GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION

A. Where shown and as specified in Section 31 32 19.16, Geotextile, except as follows:

1. Extend geotextile for full width of trench bottom and up the trench wall to the top of the pipe zone, or base material for manholes and miscellaneous structures.

2. Anchor geotextile trench walls prior to placing trench stabilization or bedding material.

3. Provide 24-inch minimum overlap at joints.

3.04 TRENCH STABILIZATION MATERIAL INSTALLATION

A. Rebuild trench bottom with trench stabilization material.

B. Place material over full width of trench in 6-inch lifts to required grade, providing allowance for bedding thickness.

C. Compact each lift so as to provide a firm, unyielding support for the bedding material prior to placing succeeding lifts.

3.05 BEDDING

A. Furnish imported bedding material where, in the opinion of Engineer, excavated material is unsuitable for bedding or insufficient in quantity.

B. Place over full width of prepared trench bottom in two equal lifts when required depth exceeds 8 inches.

C. Hand grade and compact each lift to provide a firm, unyielding surface.

D. Minimum thickness as follows:

1. Pipe 15 Inches and Smaller: 4 inches. 2. Pipe 18 Inches to 36 Inches: 6 inches.



3. Pipe 42 Inches and Larger: 8 inches. 4. Conduit: 3 inches. 5. Direct-Buried Cable: 3 inches. 6. Duct Banks: 3 inches.

E. Check grade and correct irregularities in bedding material. Loosen top 1 inch to 2 inches of compacted bedding material with a rake or by other means to provide a cushion before laying each section of pipe, conduit, direct-buried cable, or duct bank.

F. Install to form continuous and uniform support except at bell holes, if applicable, or minor disturbances resulting from removal of lifting tackle.

G. Bell or Coupling Holes: Excavate in bedding at each joint to permit proper assembly and inspection of joint and to provide uniform bearing along barrel of pipe or conduit.

3.06 BACKFILL PIPE ZONE

A. Upper limit of pipe zone shall not be less than following:

1. Pipe: 12 inches, unless shown otherwise. 2. Conduit: 3 inches, unless shown otherwise. 3. Direct-Buried Cable: 3 inches, unless shown otherwise. 4. Duct Bank: 3 inches, unless shown otherwise.

B. Restrain pipe, conduit, cables, and duct banks as necessary to prevent their movement during backfill operations.

C. Place material simultaneously in lifts on both sides of pipe and, if applicable, between pipes, conduit, cables, and duct banks installed in same trench.

1. Pipe 10-Inch and Smaller Diameter: First lift less than or equal to 1/2 pipe diameter.

2. Pipe Over 10-Inch Diameter: Maximum 6-inch lifts.

D. Thoroughly tamp each lift, including area under haunches, with handheld tamping bars supplemented by “walking in” and slicing material under haunches with a shovel to ensure voids are completely filled before placing each succeeding lift.

E. Do not use power-driven impact compactors to compact pipe zone material. After full depth of pipe zone material has been placed as specified, compact material by a minimum of three passes with a hand operated vibratory plate compactor only over area between sides of pipe and trench walls.



3.07 MARKING TAPE INSTALLATION

A. Continuously install marking tape along centerline of buried piping, at depth of 2 feet. Coordinate with piping installation drawings.

1. Detectable Marking Tape: Install with nonmetallic piping and waterlines.

2. Nondetectable Marking Tape: Install with metallic piping.

3.08 TRACER WIRE INSTALLATION AND TESTING

A. Install tracer wire continuously along centerline of nonmetallic buried piping.

B. Attach wire to top of pipe using tape at maximum of 10-foot intervals. In areas where depth of cover is excessive for allowing detection of tracer wire with electronic pipe locator, install tracer wire within pipe backfill directly above pipe centerline at a minimum depth of 3 feet.

C. Install splices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions for direct bury applications. Tie ends of wire to be joined in a knot as required to reduce tension on splice.

D. Bring tracer wire to surface at each valve box, curb box, vault, air valve, blowoff valve, hydrant, and pipeline marker and as directed by Engineer. Tracer wire shall be brought to surface at least every 1,000 feet. If distance between pipe appurtenances exceeds 1,000 feet, install valve box to allow access to tracer wire. Mark valve box cover with the word “TRACER”. Coil enough excess tracer wire at each appurtenance to extend wire 12 inches above ground.

E. Test continuity of tracer wire using electronic pipe locator in presence of Engineer prior to paving.

3.09 BACKFILL ABOVE PIPE ZONE

A. General:

1. Process excavated material to meet specified gradation requirements for Earth backfill.

2. Adjust moisture content as necessary to obtain specified compaction. 3. Do not allow backfill to free fall into trench or allow heavy, sharp

pieces of material to be placed as backfill until after at least 2 feet of backfill has been provided over top of pipe.

4. Do not use power driven impact type compactors for compaction until at least 4 feet of backfill is placed over top of pipe.



5. Backfill to grade with proper allowances for topsoil, crushed rock surfacing, and pavement thicknesses, wherever applicable.

6. Backfill around structures with same class backfill as specified for adjacent trench, unless otherwise shown or specified.

B. Controlled Low Strength Material:

1. Discharge from truck mounted drum type mixer into trench. 2. Place in lifts as necessary to prevent uplift (flotation) of new and

existing facilities. 3. In other areas fill trench section as shown.

3.10 REPLACEMENT OF TOPSOIL

A. Replace topsoil in top 12 inches of backfilled trench.

B. Maintain finished grade of topsoil even with adjacent area and grade as necessary to restore drainage.

3.11 MAINTENANCE OF TRENCH BACKFILL

A. After each section of trench is backfilled, maintain surface of backfilled trench even with adjacent ground surface until final surface restoration is completed.

B. Gravel Surfacing Rock: Add gravel surfacing rock where applicable and as necessary to keep surface of backfilled trench even with adjacent ground surface, and grade and compact as necessary to keep surface of backfilled trenches smooth, free from ruts and potholes, and suitable for normal traffic flow.

C. Topsoil: Add topsoil where applicable and as necessary to maintain surface of backfilled trench level with adjacent ground surface.

D. Concrete Pavement: Replace settled slabs as specified in Section 32 12 16, Asphalt Paving.

E. Asphaltic Pavement: Replace settled areas or fill with asphalt as specified in Section 32 12 16, Asphalt Paving.

F. Other Areas: Add excavated material where applicable and keep surface of backfilled trench level with adjacent ground surface.



3.12 SETTLEMENT OF BACKFILL

A. Settlement of trench backfill, or of fill, or facilities constructed over trench backfill will be considered a result of defective compaction of trench backfill.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 SHORING JANUARY 2020 31 41 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 31 41 00 SHORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Informational Submittals: Excavation support plan.


A. Provide surveys to monitor movements of critical facilities.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Design, provide, and maintain shoring, sheeting, and bracing as necessary to support the sides of excavations and to prevent detrimental settlement and lateral movement of existing facilities, adjacent property, and completed the Work.

3.02 EXCAVATION SUPPORT PLAN

A. Prepare excavation support plan addressing following topics:

1. Details of shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions for worker protection from hazards of caving ground.

2. Design assumptions and calculations. 3. Methods and sequencing of installing excavation support. 4. Proposed locations of stockpiled excavated material. 5. Minimum lateral distance from the crest of slopes for vehicles and

stockpiled excavated materials. 6. Anticipated difficulties and proposed resolutions.

3.03 REMOVAL OF EXCAVATION SUPPORT

A. Remove excavation support in a manner that will maintain support as excavation is backfilled.

B. Do not begin to remove excavation support until support can be removed without damage to existing facilities, completed Work, or adjacent property.


SHORING PW\DEN003\708335 31 41 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

C. Remove excavation support in a manner that does not leave voids in the backfill.

3.04 TRENCHES

A. Provide trench excavations exceeding 4 feet in depth with adequate safety systems meeting the requirements of the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act, Chapter 49.17 RCW.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 AGGREGATE BASE JANUARY 2020 COURSE ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 32 11 23 - 1

SECTION 32 11 23 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C29, Standard Test Method for Bulk Density (Unit Weight) and

Voids in Aggregate. b. C88, Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium

Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate. c. C117, Standard Method of Test for Materials Finer Than 75m

(No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. d. C131, Standard Specification for Resistance to Degradation of

Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.

e. C183, Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

f. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3

(600 kN-m/m3)). g. D1557, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lb/ft3

(2700 kN-m/m3)). h. D1883, Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of

Laboratory Compacted Soils. i. D2216, Standard Methods for Laboratory Determination of Water

(Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass. j. D2419, Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine

Aggregate. k. D2844, Standard Specification for Resistance R-Value and

Expansion Pressure of Compacted Soils. l. D4318, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and

Plasticity Index of Soils. m. D4791, Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat

and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate. n. D5195, Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Rock In-

Place Below Surface by Nuclear Methods.


AGGREGATE BASE PW\DEN003\708335 COURSE JANUARY 2020 32 11 23 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

o. D6938, Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Completed Course: Compacted, unyielding, free from irregularities, with smooth, tight, even surface, true to grade, line, and cross-section.

B. Completed Lift: Compacted with uniform cross-section thickness.

C. Standard Specifications: When referenced in this section, shall mean 2018 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, Washington State Department of Transportation.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Certified Test Results on Source Materials: Submit copies from commercial testing laboratory 20 days prior to delivery of materials to Project showing materials meeting the physical qualities specified.

2. Certified results of in-place density tests from independent testing agency.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BASE COURSE

A. Crushed surfacing base course meeting all the requirements of Section 9.03.9 of the Standard Specifications.

2.02 LEVELING COURSE AND GRAVEL SURFACING

A. Crushed surfacing top course meeting all the requirements of Section 9.03.9 of the Standard Specifications.


A. Perform tests necessary to locate acceptable source of materials meeting specified requirements.

B. Final approval of aggregate material will be based on test results of installed materials.



C. Should separation of coarse from fine materials occur during processing or stockpiling, immediately change methods of handling materials to correct uniformity in grading.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. As specified in Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation.

B. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of subgrade before placing base course or surfacing material.

C. Do not place base course or surfacing materials in snow or on soft, muddy, or frozen subgrade.

3.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Compaction Equipment: Adequate in design and number to provide compaction and to obtain specified density for each layer.

3.03 HAULING AND SPREADING

A. Hauling Materials:

1. Do not haul over surfacing in process of construction. 2. Loads: Of uniform capacity. 3. Maintain consistent gradation of material delivered; loads of widely

varying gradations will be cause for rejection.

B. Spreading Materials:

1. Distribute material to provide required density, depth, grade, and dimensions with allowance for subsequent lifts.

2. Produce even distribution of material upon roadway or prepared surface without segregation.

3. Should segregation of coarse from fine materials occur during placing, immediately change methods of handling materials to correct uniformity in grading.

3.04 CONSTRUCTION OF COURSES

A. Aggregate Base Course:

1. Maximum Completed Lift Thickness: 6 inches. 2. Completed Course Total Thickness: As shown.



3. Spread lift on preceding course to required cross-section. 4. Lightly blade and roll surface until thoroughly compacted. 5. Add keystone to achieve compaction and as required when aggregate

does not compact readily because of lack of fines or natural cementing properties, as follows: a. Use leveling course or surfacing material as keystone. b. Spread evenly on top of base course, using spreader boxes or chip

spreaders. c. Roll surface until keystone is worked into interstices of base

course without excessive displacement. d. Continue operation until course has become thoroughly keyed,

compacted, and will not creep or move under roller. 6. Blade or broom surface to maintain true line, grade, and cross-section.

B. Leveling Course:

1. Maximum Completed Lift Thickness: 4 inches. 2. Completed Course Total Thickness: As shown. 3. Spread on roadway or preceding course to depth, grade, and cross-

section shown. 4. Lightly blade surface and roll until thoroughly compacted to line and

grade shown. 5. Maintain moisture levels to prevent loss of fines during processing.

C. Gravel Surfacing:

1. Maximum Completed Lift Thickness: 9 inches. 2. Completed Course Total Thickness: As shown. 3. Spread on preceding course in accordance with cross-section shown. 4. Blade lightly and roll surface until material is thoroughly compacted.

3.05 ROLLING AND COMPACTION

A. Commence compaction of each layer of after spreading operations and continue until density of 95 percent of maximum density has been achieved as determined by ASTM D1557.

B. Roll each layer of material until material does not creep under roller before succeeding layer is applied.

C. Commence rolling at outer edges and continue toward center; do not roll center of road first.

D. Apply water as needed to obtain specified densities.



E. Place and compact each lift to the required density before succeeding lift is placed.

F. Remove floating or loose stone from surface of preceding course before placing leveling course.

G. Surface Defects: Remedy by loosening and rerolling. Reroll entire area, including surrounding surface, until thoroughly compacted.

H. Finished surface shall be true to grade and crown before proceeding with surfacing.

3.06 SURFACE TOLERANCES

A. Blade or otherwise work surfacing as necessary to maintain grade and cross-section at all times, and to keep surface smooth and thoroughly compacted.

B. Finished Surface of Untreated Aggregate Base and Leveling Course: Within plus or minus 0.04 foot of grade shown at any individual point.

C. Gravel Surfacing: Within 0.04 foot from lower edge of 10-foot straightedge placed on finished surface, parallel to centerline.

D. Overall Average: Within plus or minus 0.01 foot from crown and grade specified.

3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. In-Place Density Tests:

1. Provide Engineer at least 2 hours advance notification prior to testing. 2. Show proof that areas meet specified requirements before requesting

that Engineer identify density test locations. 3. Minimum sampling and testing requirements for aggregate base course

and surfacing shall be by ASTM D2922 or ASTM D1556 at the locations directed by Engineer at the following frequency. Additional tests to verify compaction in areas that fail initial testing shall be at no additional cost to Owner. a. Base Course: One per lift for every 1,500 square feet of surface

area.



3.08 CLEANING

A. Remove excess material from the Work area. Clean stockpile and staging areas of all excess aggregate.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 ASPHALT PAVING JANUARY 2020 32 12 16 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. M17, Standard Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous

Paving Mixtures. b. M81, Standard Specification for Cut-Back Asphalt (Rapid Curing

Type). c. M82, Standard Specification for Cut-Back Asphalt (Medium

Curing Type). d. M140, Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt. e. M156, Standard Specification for Requirements for Mixing Plants

for Hot-mixed, Hot-laid Bituminous Paving Mixes. f. M208, Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt. g. R35, Standard Practice for Superpave Volumetric Design for Hot

Mix Asphalt. h. T166, Standard Method of Test for Bulk Specific Gravity (Gmb)

of Compacted Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Mixtures Using Saturated Surface-Dry Specimens.

i. T176 Standard Method of Test for Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by Use of the Sand Equivalent Test.

j. T209, Standard Method of Test for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity (Gmm) and Density of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA).

k. T245, Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Plastic Flow of Asphalt Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus.

l. T246, Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Deformation and Cohesion of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) by Means of Hveem Apparatus.

m. T247, Standard Method of Test for Preparation of Test Specimens of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) by Means of California Kneading Compactor.

n. T283, Standard Method of Test for Resistance of Compacted Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) to Moisture-Induced Damage.

o. T304, Standard Method of Test for Uncompacted Void Content of Fine Aggregate.


ASPHALT PAVING PW\DEN003\708335 32 12 16 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

p. T312, Standard Method of Test for Preparing and Determining the Density of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Specimens by Means of a Superpave Gyratory Compactor.

2. Asphalt Institute (AI): a. Manual Series No. 2 (MS-2), Mix Design Methods for Asphalt

Concrete. b. Superpave Series No. 2 (SP-2), Superpave Mix Design.

3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D75, Standard Method of Test for Sampling of Aggregates. b. D140, Standard Method of Test for Sampling Bituminous

Materials. c. D979, Standard Method of Test for Sampling Bituminous Paving

Mixtures. d. D2041, Standard Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific

Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures. e. D2489, Standard Method of Test for Determining Degree of

Particle Coating of Asphalt Mixtures. f. D4318, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit,

and Plasticity Index of Soils. g. D4791, Standard Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated

Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate. h. D5821, Standard Test Method for Determining the Percentage of

Fractured Particles in Coarse Aggregate. i. E329, REV A, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in

Construction Inspection Testing, or Special Inspection.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Combined Aggregate: All mineral constituents of asphalt concrete mix, including mineral filler and separately sized aggregates.

B. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP): Removed and/or processed pavement materials containing binder and aggregate.

C. Standard Specifications: As defined in 2018 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, Washington State Department of Transportation.

1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Prepare asphalt concrete mix design, meeting the design criteria, tolerances, and other requirements of this specification.



1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Asphalt Concrete Mix Formula: a. Submit minimum of 15 days prior to start of production. b. Submittal to include the following information:

1) Gradation and portion for each aggregate constituent used in mixture to produce a single gradation of aggregate within specified limits.

2) Bulk specific gravity for each aggregate constituent. 3) Measured maximum specific gravity of mix at optimum

asphalt content determined in accordance with ASTM D2041.

4) Properties as stated in Section 5-04 of the Standard Specifications, for at least four different asphalt contents other than optimum, two below optimum, and two above optimum.

5) Percent of asphalt lost due to absorption by aggregate. 6) Index of Retained Strength (TSR) at optimum asphalt

content as determined by AASHTO T283. 7) Percentage of asphalt cement, to nearest 0.1 percent, to be

added to mixture. 8) Optimum mixing temperature. 9) Optimum compaction temperature. 10) Temperature-viscosity curve of asphalt cement to be used. 11) Brand name of any additive to be used and percentage

added to mixture.

B. Mix formula approved by Washington Department of Transportation for the current paving season may be submitted in lieu of establishing a job mix formula for this project, provided the job mix formula meets the requirements specified herein. Perform additional supplemental testing as necessary to meet all the requirements.

1. Test Report for Asphalt Cement: a. Submit minimum 10 days prior to start of production. b. Show appropriate test method(s) for each material and the test

results. 2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with

Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, for the following materials: a. Aggregate: Gradation, source test results as defined in

Section 9-03.1(2) of the Standard Specifications.



b. Asphalt for Binder: Type, grade, and viscosity-temperature curve. c. Prime Coat: Type and grade of asphalt. d. Tack Coat: Type and grade of asphalt. e. Additives. f. Mix: Conforms to job-mix formula.

3. Statement of qualification for independent testing laboratory. 4. Test Results:

a. Mix design. b. Asphalt concrete core. c. Gradation and asphalt content of uncompacted mix. d. Field density. e. Quality control.


A. Qualifications:

1. Independent Testing Laboratory: In accordance with ASTM E329, REV A.

2. Asphalt concrete mix formula shall be prepared by approved certified independent laboratory under the supervision of a certified asphalt technician.


A. Temperature: Do not apply asphalt materials or place asphalt mixes when ground temperature is lower than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) or air temperature is lower than 40 degrees F (4 degrees C). Measure ground and air temperature in shaded areas away from heat sources or wet surfaces.

B. Moisture: Do not apply asphalt materials or place asphalt mixes when application surface is wet.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Tack Coat:

1. Emulsified Asphalt for Tack Coat or Seal Coat: Grade CSS-1, conform to Section 9-02.1(6) of the Standard Specifications.

B. Sand for Blotter Material or Sand Seal: Clean, dry, with 100 percent passing No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve, and a maximum of 10 percent passing No. 200 (75 m) sieve.



2.02 ASPHALT CONCRETE MIX

A. General:

1. Mix formula shall not be modified except with written approval of Engineer.

2. Source Changes: a. Should material source(s) change, establish new asphalt concrete

mix formula before new material(s) is used. b. Perform check tests of properties of plant-mix bituminous

materials on first day of production and as requested by Engineer to confirm that properties are in compliance with design criteria.

c. Make adjustments in gradation or asphalt content as necessary to meet design criteria.

B. Asphalt Concrete: Superpave mix design for up to three million ESALs meeting all the requirements of Section 9-03.8 of the Standard Specifications. Surface course shall be HMA Class 1/2-inch and base course shall be HMA Class 1-inch.

C. Composition: Hot-plant mix of aggregate, mineral filler if required, and paving grade asphalt cement. The several aggregate fractions shall be sized, uniformly graded, and combined in such proportions that resulting mixture meets grading requirements of mix formula.

D. Aggregate:

1. General: Class HMA 1/2 inch as specified in Section 9-03.8 of the Standard Specifications.

E. Mineral Filler: In accordance with AASHTO M17.

F. Asphalt Cement: Paving Grade PG 64-22, as specified in Section 9-02.1(4) of the Standard Specifications.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Traffic Control:

1. In accordance with Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls.

2. Minimize inconvenience to traffic, but keep vehicles off freshly treated or paved surfaces to avoid pickup and tracking of asphalt.



3.02 LINE AND GRADE

A. Provide and maintain intermediate control of line and grade, independent of underlying base, to meet finish surface grades and minimum thickness.

B. Shoulders: Construct to line, grade, and cross-section shown.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Prepare subgrade as specified in Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation.

B. Thoroughly coat edges of contact surfaces (curbs, manhole frames) with emulsified asphalt or asphalt cement prior to laying new pavement. Prevent staining of adjacent surfaces.

3.04 PAVEMENT APPLICATION

A. General: Place asphalt concrete mixture on approved, prepared base in conformance with this section.

B. Tack Coat:

1. Apply uniformly to clean, dry surfaces avoiding overlapping of applications.

2. Do not apply more tack coat than necessary for the day’s paving operation.

3. Touch up missed or lightly coated surfaces and remove excess material. 4. Application Rate: Minimum 0.25 liter to maximum 0.70 liter of asphalt

(residual if diluted emulsified asphalt) per square meter (0.05 gallon per square yard to 0.15 gallon per square yard) of surface area.

C. Pavement Mix:

1. Prior to Paving: a. Sweep primed surface free of dirt, dust, or other foreign matter. b. Patch holes in primed surface with asphalt concrete pavement

mix. c. Blot excess prime material with sand.

2. Place asphalt concrete pavement mix in two equal lifts. 3. Compacted Lift Thickness:

a. Minimum: Twice maximum aggregate size, but in no case less than 1 inch (25 mm).

b. Maximum: 4 inches (100 mm). 4. Total Compacted Thickness: As shown.



5. Sequence placement so that meet lines are straight and edges are vertical.

6. Collect and dispose of segregated aggregate from raking process. Do not scatter material over finished surface.

7. Joints: a. Offset edge of each layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) so

joints are not directly over those in underlying layer. b. Offset longitudinal joints in roadway pavements so longitudinal

joints in wearing layer coincide with pavement centerlines and lane divider lines.

c. Form transverse joints by cutting back on previous day’s run to expose full vertical depth of layer.

8. Succeeding Lifts: Apply tack coat to pavement surface between each lift.

9. After placement of pavement, seal meet line by painting a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) on each side of joint with cutback or emulsified asphalt. Cover immediately with sand.

D. Compaction:

1. Uniformly compact each course until no further evidence of consolidation is visible and roller marks are eliminated. When placement rate exceeds 100 tons (90 mg) per hour, operate minimum of two rollers for compaction.

2. Joint Compaction: a. Place top or wearing layer as continuously as possible. b. Pass roller over unprotected end of freshly laid mixture only when

placing of mix is discontinued long enough to permit mixture to become chilled.

c. Cut back previously compacted mixture when Work is resumed to produce slightly beveled edge for full thickness of layer.

d. Cut away waste material and lay new mix against fresh cut.

E. Tolerances:

1. General: Conduct measurements for conformity with crown and grade immediately after initial compression. Correct variations immediately by removal or addition of materials and by continuous rolling.

2. Completed Surface or Wearing Layer Smoothness: a. Uniform texture, smooth, and uniform to crown and grade. b. Maximum Deviation: 1/8 inch (3 mm) from lower edge of a

12-foot (3.6-meter) straightedge, measured continuously parallel and at right angle to centerline.



c. If surface of completed pavement deviates by more than twice specified tolerances, remove and replace wearing surface.

3. Transverse Slope Maximum Deviation: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 12 feet (3.6 meters) from rate of slope shown.

4. Finished Grade: a. Perform field differential level survey on maximum 50-foot

(15-meter) grid and along grade breaks. b. Maximum Deviation: 0.02 foot (6 mm) from grade shown.

F. Seal Coat:

1. General: Apply seal coat of paving grade or emulsified asphalt to finished surface at longitudinal and transverse joints, joints at abutting pavements, areas where asphalt concrete was placed by hand, patched surfaces, and other areas as directed by Engineer.

2. Preparation: a. Surfaces that are to be sealed shall be maintained free of holes,

dry, and clean of dust and loose material. b. Seal in dry weather and when temperature is above 35 degrees F

(2 degrees C). 3. Application:

a. Fill cracks over 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in width with asphalt-sand slurry or approved crack sealer prior to sealing.

b. When sealing patched surfaces and joints with existing pavements, extend minimum 6 inches (150 mm) beyond edges of patches.

3.05 PATCHING

A. Preparation:

1. Remove damaged, broken, or unsound asphalt concrete adjacent to patches. Trim to straight lines exposing smooth, sound, vertical edges.

2. Prepare patch subgrade as specified in Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation.

B. Application:

1. Patch Thickness: 3 inches (75 mm) or thickness of adjacent asphalt concrete, whichever is greater.

2. Place asphalt concrete mix across full width of patch in layers of equal thickness.

3. Spread and grade asphalt concrete with hand tools or mechanical spreader, depending on size of area to be patched.



C. Compaction:

1. Roll patches with power rollers capable of providing compression of 200 pounds per linear inch to 300 pounds per linear inch (350 Newtons per linear centimeter to 525 Newtons per linear centimeter). Use hand tampers where rolling is impractical.

2. Begin rolling top course at edges of patches, lapping adjacent asphalt surface at least one-half the roller width. Progress toward center of patch overlapping each preceding track by at least one-half width of roller.

3. Make sufficient passes over entire area to remove roller marks and to produce desired finished surface.

D. Tolerances:

1. Finished surface shall be flush with and match grade, slope, and crown of adjacent surface.

2. Tolerance: Surface smoothness shall not deviate more than plus 1/4 inch (6 mm) or minus 0 inch when straightedge is laid across patched area between edges of new pavement and surface of old surfacing.


A. General: Provide services of approved certified independent testing laboratory to conduct tests.

B. Field Density Tests:

1. Perform tests from cores or sawed samples in accordance with AASHTO T166.

2. Measure with properly operating and calibrated nuclear density gauge in accordance with ASTM D2950.

3. Maximum Density: In accordance with ASTM D2041, using sample of mix taken prior to compaction from same location as density test sample.

C. Testing Frequency:

1. Quality Control Tests: a. Asphalt Content, Aggregate Gradation: Once per every 500 tons

(400 mg) of mix or once every 4 hours, whichever is greater. b. Mix Design Properties, Measured Maximum (Rice’s) Specific

Gravity: Once every 1,000 tons (900 mg) or once every 8 hours, whichever is greater.



2. Density Tests: Once every 500 tons (450 mg) of mix or once every 4 hours, whichever is greater.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 CONCRETE CURBS JANUARY 2020 AND SIDEWALKS ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 32 16 00 - 1

SECTION 32 16 00 CONCRETE CURBS AND SIDEWALKS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): T 99, Standard Specification for the Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 2.5 kg (5.5 pound) Rammer and a 305 mm (12 in.) Drop.

2. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 304R, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.

3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. b. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming

Compounds for Curing Concrete. c. D994, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint

Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type).

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Form Material: Information on metal forms, if used, including type, condition, surface finish, and intended function.

2. Complete data on concrete mix, including aggregate gradations and admixtures in accordance with requirements of ASTM C94.


1. Curing Compound: Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance and application instructions.

2. Ready-mix delivery ticket for each truck in accordance with ASTM C94.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to the 2018 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, Washington State Department of Transportation.


CONCRETE CURBS PW\DEN003\708335 AND SIDEWALKS JANUARY 2020 32 16 00 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER

A. Preformed asphalt-impregnated, expansion joint material meeting ASTM D994, 1/2-inch thick.

2.02 CONCRETE

A. As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inch.

C. Slump: 2 inches to 4 inches.

2.03 CURING COMPOUND

A. Liquid membrane forming, clear or translucent, suitable for spray application and meeting ASTM C309, Type 1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Perform Work in accordance with the referenced Standard Specification.

3.02 FORMWORK

A. Lumber Materials:

1. 2-inch dressed dimension lumber, or metal of equal strength, straight, free from defects that would impair appearance or structural quality of completed curb and sidewalk.

2. 1-inch dressed lumber or plywood may be used where short-radius forms are required.

B. Metals: Steel in new undamaged condition.

C. Setting Forms:

1. Construct forms to shape, lines, grades, and dimensions. 2. Stake securely in place.



D. Bracing:

1. Brace forms to prevent change of shape or movement resulting from placement.

2. Construct short-radius curved forms to exact radius.

E. Tolerances:

1. Do not vary tops of forms from gradeline more than 1/8 inch when checked with 10-foot straightedge.

2. Do not vary alignment of straight sections more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

3.03 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Prior to placing concrete, remove water from excavation and debris and foreign material from forms.

B. Place concrete as soon as possible, and within 1-1/2 hours after adding cement to mix without segregation or loss of ingredients, and without splashing.

C. Place, process, finish, and cure concrete in accordance with applicable requirements of ACI 304, and this section. Wherever requirements differ, the more stringent shall govern.

D. To compact, vibrate until concrete becomes uniformly plastic.

3.04 CURB CONSTRUCTION

A. Construct ramps at pedestrian crossings.

B. Expansion Joints: Place at maximum 45-foot intervals and at the beginning and end of curved portions of curb and at connections to existing curbs. Install expansion joint filler at each joint.

C. Curb Facing: Do not allow horizontal joints within 7 inches from top of curb.

D. Contraction Joints:

1. Maximum 15-foot intervals in curb. 2. Provide open joint type by inserting thin, oiled steel sheet vertically in

fresh concrete to force coarse aggregate away from joint. 3. Insert steel sheet to full depth of curb. 4. Remove steel sheet with sawing motion after initial set has occurred in

concrete and prior to removing front curb form. 5. Finish top of curb with steel trowel and finish edges with steel edging

tool.


CONCRETE CURBS PW\DEN003\708335 AND SIDEWALKS JANUARY 2020 32 16 00 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

E. Front Face:

1. Remove front form and finish exposed surfaces when concrete has set sufficiently to support its own weight.

2. Finish formed face by rubbing with burlap sack or similar device to produce uniformly textured surface, free of form marks, honeycomb, and other defects.

3. Remove and replace defective concrete. 4. Apply curing compound to exposed surfaces of curb upon completion of

finishing. 5. Continue curing for minimum of 5 days.

F. Backfill curb with earth upon completion of curing period, but not before 7 days has elapsed since placing concrete.

1. Backfill shall be free from rocks 2 inches and larger and other foreign material.

2. Compact backfill firmly.

3.05 SIDEWALK CONSTRUCTION

A. Thickness:

1. 4 inches in walk areas. 2. 6 inches in driveway areas.

B. Connection to Existing Sidewalk:

1. Remove old concrete back to an existing contraction joint. 2. Clean the surface. 3. Apply a neat cement paste immediately prior to placing new sidewalk.

C. Expansion Joints: Place in adjacent curb, where sidewalk ends at curb, and around posts, poles, or other objects penetrating sidewalk. Install expansion joint filler at each joint.

D. Contraction Joints:

1. Provide transversely to walks at locations opposite contraction joints in curb.

2. Dimensions: 3/16-inch by 1-inch weakened plane joints. 3. Construct straight and at right angles to surface of walk.



E. Finish:

1. Broom surface with fine-hair broom at right angles to length of walk and tool at edges, joints, and markings.

2. Mark walks transversely at 5-foot intervals with jointing tool; finish edges with rounded steel edging tool.

3. Apply curing compound to exposed surfaces upon completion of finishing.

4. Protect sidewalk from damage and allow to cure for at least 7 days.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES JANUARY 2020 32 31 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A121, Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel

Barbed Wire. b. A313/A313M, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Spring

Wire. c. A392, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link

Fence Fabric. d. A491, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Coated Steel Chain-

Link Fence Fabric. e. A497/A497M, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete. f. A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain

Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. g. A780, Standard Specification for Repair of Damaged and

Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dipped Galvanized Coatings. h. A824, Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled

Tension Wire for Use with Chain Link Fence. i. A1011/A1011M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and

Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

j. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. k. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. l. C387, Standard Specifications for Packaged, Dry, Combined

Materials for Mortar and Concrete. m. F552, Standard Terminology Relating to Chain Link Fencing. n. F567, Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence. o. F626, Standard Specification for Fence Fittings. p. F668, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and

Other Organic Polymer-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric. q. F900, Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial

Swing Gates. r. F934, Standard Specification for Standard Colors for Polymer-

Coated Chain Link Fence Materials.


CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PW\DEN003\708335 32 31 13 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

s. F1043, Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Metal Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework.

t. F1083, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures.

u. F1183, Standard Specifications for Aluminum Alloy Chain Link Fence Fabric.

v. F1184, Standard Specifications for Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates.

w. F1379, Standard Terminology Relating to Barbed Tape. x. F1911, Standard Practice for Installation of Barbed Tape. y. F1916, Standard Specification for Selecting Chain Link Barrier

Systems with Coated Chain Link Fence Fabric and Round Posts for Detention Applications.

2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), Inc.: C2, National Electrical Safety Code.

3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts max.).

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Terms as defined in ASTM F552.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: a. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions,

dimensions of individual components, and finishes for chain link fences and gates. 1) Fence, gate posts, rails, and fittings. 2) Chain link fabric. 3) Gates and hardware. 4) Gate operators, motors, and mounting arrangements,

switches, and controls; include operating instructions. 5) Gate access system, including access control features,

power and control wiring diagrams, and operating instructions. Power and control wiring diagrams shall include wire labels, terminal block numbers, and indicate customer provided connections.

6) Accessories: Barbed wire.



2. Test Reports: Field test result for compliance of installation of chain link fence, gates, and gate operators. Gate operator test results for full power and pressure of all hydraulic components, full stress tests of all mechanical components and electrical tests of all overload devices.

3. Calculations for architectural fence, architectural gate and chain link and architectural foundations shall be stamped and signed by a civil or structural engineer registered in the State of Washington. Calculations shall include design of post foundations.


1. Manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions. 2. Evidence of Supplier and installer qualifications. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,

Operation and Maintenance Data.


A. Qualifications:

1. Automatic Gate Operator System Supplier: 5 years’ experience in gate operator systems.

2. Automatic Gate Operator System Installer: Experienced installer who has completed chain link fences and gates similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for Project and whose work has resulted with a record of successful in-service performance with a minimum 3 years’ experience.

B. Design, supply of equipment and components, installation, and on-call service shall be product of individual company with record of installations meeting requirements specified.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project Site with gate installer to verify layout and operations of automatic gate operating system.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to Site in undamaged condition. Store materials off the ground to provide protection against oxidation caused by ground contact.

1.06 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING

A. Complete necessary Site preparation and grading before installing chain link fence and gates.



B. Interruption of Existing Utility Service: Notify owner of utility 72 hours prior to interruption of utility services. Do not proceed with interruption of utility service without written permission from utility owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Match style, finish, and color of each fence component with that of other fence components.

2.02 CHAIN LINK FENCE FABRIC

A. Galvanized fabric conforming to ASTM A392, Type II, Class 1, 1.2 ounces per square foot galvanized after weaving.

B. Height: 72 inches, unless otherwise shown.

C. Core Wire Gauge: No. 9.

D. Pattern: 2-inch diamond-mesh.

E. Diamond Count: Manufacturer’s standard and consistent for fabric furnished of same height.

F. Loops of Knuckled Selvages: Closed or nearly closed with space not exceeding diameter of wire.

G. Wires of Twisted Selvages:

1. Twisted in a closed helix three full turns. 2. Cut at an angle to provide sharp barbs that extend minimum 1/4 inch

beyond twist.

2.03 POSTS

A. General:

1. Strength and Stiffness Requirements: ASTM F1043, heavy industrial fence, except as modified in this section.

2. Round Steel Pipe, Schedule 40: ASTM F1083. 3. Roll-Formed Steel Shapes: Roll-formed from ASTM A1011/A1011M,

Grade 45, High-Strength Low-Alloy steel. 4. Lengths: Manufacturer’s standard with allowance for minimum

embedment below finished grade of 34 inches.



5. Protective Coatings: a. Zinc Coating: ASTM F1043, Type A external and internal

coating.

B. Line Posts:

1. Round Steel Pipe: a. Outside Diameter: 2.375 inches. b. Weight: 3.65 pounds per foot.

C. End, Corner, Angle, and Pull Posts:

1. Round Steel Pipe: a. Outside Diameter: 2.875 inches. b. Weight: 5.79 pounds per foot.

D. Posts for Swing Gates 8 Feet High and Under:

1. ASTM F900. 2. Round Steel Pipe:

a. Outside Diameter: 2.875 inches. b. Weight: 4.64 pounds per foot.

E. Posts for Swing Gates Over 8 Feet High: As recommended by fence manufacturer.

2.04 TOP AND BRACE RAILS

A. Galvanized Round Steel Pipe:

1. ASTM F1083. 2. Outside Diameter: 1.66 inches. 3. Weight: 2.27 pounds per foot.

B. Protective Coatings: As specified for posts.

C. Strength and Stiffness Requirements: ASTM F1043, top rail, heavy industrial fence.

2.05 FENCE FITTINGS

A. General: In conformance with ASTM F626, except as modified by this article.

B. Post and Line Caps: Designed to accommodate passage of top rail through cap, where top rail required.



C. Tension and Brace Bands: No exceptions to ASTM F626.

D. Tension Bars:

1. One-piece. 2. Length not less than 2 inches shorter than full height of chain link

fabric. 3. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and

pull post.

E. Truss Rod Assembly: 3/8-inch diameter, steel, hot-dip galvanized after threading rod and turnbuckle or other means of adjustment.

F. Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: According to ASTM F626.

G. Barbed Wire Supporting Arms: Pressed steel or cast iron with clips, slots, or other means for attaching strands of barbed wire integral with post cap for each post, with single 45-degree arms for supporting three strands of barbed wire. Arms shall withstand 250 pounds of downward pull at outermost ends of the arms without failure.

2.06 TENSION WIRE

A. Zinc-coated steel marcelled tension wire conforming to ASTM A824 Type II, Class 2.

2.07 BARBED WIRE

A. Zinc-Coated Barbed Wire:

1. ASTM A121, Chain Link Fence Grade: a. Line Wire: Two strands of No. 12-1/2 gauge. b. Barbs:

1) Number of Points: Four. 2) Length: 3/8 inch minimum. 3) Shape: Round. 4) Diameter: No. 14 gauge. 5) Spacing: 5 inches.

2.08 GATES

A. Chain Link, General:

1. Gate Operation: Opened and closed easily by one person.



2. Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM F1043 and ASTM F1083 for materials and protective coatings.

3. Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round galvanized steel tubing with outside dimension and weight according to ASTM F900.

4. Gate leaves more than 8-feet wide shall have intermediate tubular members and diagonal truss rods to provide rigid construction, free from sag or twist.

5. Gate Fabric Height: Same as for adjacent fence height. 6. Welded Steel Joints: Paint with zinc-based paint. 7. Chain Link Fabric: Attached securely to gate frame at intervals not

exceeding 15 inches. 8. Gate Posts and Frame Members: Extend gateposts and frame end

members above top of chain-link fabric at both ends of gate frame to attach barbed wire assemblies.

9. Latches: Arranged for padlocking so padlock will be accessible from both sides of gate.

B. Pedestrian Swing Gates: Comply with ASTM F900 for single swing gate types.

1. Leaf Width: As shown. 2. Hinges: Offset type, malleable iron.

a. Furnished with large bearing surfaces for clamping in position. b. Designed to swing either 180 degrees outward, 180 degrees

inward, or 90 degrees in or out, as shown, and not twist or turn under action of gate.

3. Latches: Plunger bar arranged to engage stop, except single gates of openings less than 10 feet wide may each have forked latch.

4. Gate Stops: Mushroom type or flush plate with anchors, suitable for setting in concrete.

5. Locking Device and Padlock Eyes: Integral part of latch, requiring one padlock for locking both leaves of double gate.

6. Hold-Open Keepers: Designed to automatically engage gate leaf and hold it in open position until manually released.

C. Architectural, General:

1. Gate Frame: a. The gate frame shall be fabricated from 6063-T6 aluminum alloy

extrusions. The top member shall be a 3-inch by 5-inch aluminum structural channel/tube extrusion weighing not less than 3.0 lb/lf. The bottom member shall be a 2-inch by 5-inch aluminum structural tube weighing not less than 2.0 lb/lf.



b. Vertical Members: The vertical members at the ends of the opening portion of the frame shall be 2 inch by 2 inch in the cross section weighing not less than 1.1 lb/lf. The intermediate vertical members shall be 1 inch by 2 inch in cross section weighing not less than 0.82 lb/lf. The spacing for the vertical intermediates shall be less than 50 percent of the gate frame height.

c. All welds on the gate frame shall conform to the AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code. All individual welders shall be certified to AWS D1.2 welding code.

d. Each gate leaf shall be provided with a minimum of two pivoting hinges to allow proper operation, and shall be connected to the gate side of the hinge by means of two through-bolts.

2. Diagonal Bracing: Diagonal "X" bracing of 3/16-inch or 1/4-inch diameter stainless or galvanized steel cable shall be installed throughout the gate to provide additional vertical adjustment.

3. Posts: a. Gate hanger posts shall be sized in accordance with gate

dimensions as specified by the manufacturer. b. Pickets: Picket sizes shall be 1-inch square. Pickets will extend

through entire length of the gate panel as required. 4. Finish: Gate to be color coated with polyester powder as specified. If

powder coated, the gate and all accessories shall be pretreated chemically by sand blasting or other acceptable method to ensure proper coating adherence

5. Color: Black.

D. Architectural Swing Gate:

1. Single swing gate with opening width as shown on Drawings. Provide manufacturer’s standard configuration including gate, posts, operators and accessories for complete installation.

2. Height: 96 inches. 3. Manufacturer and Product:

a. Tymetal Corp.; Ornamental Swing Gate Heavy Duty. b. “Or-equal.”



2.09 GATE OPERATOR SYSTEM

A. General: Provide factory-assembled automatic operating system designed for gate size, type, weight, and operation frequency. Provide operation control system with characteristics suitable for Project conditions, safety devices, and weatherproof enclosures; coordinate electrical requirements with Division 26, Electrical.

1. Provide operator designed so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting auxiliary emergency operator.

2. Provide operator with UL approved components. 3. Provide electronic components with built-in troubleshooting diagnostic

feature. 4. Provide unit designed and wired for both right-hand/left-hand opening,

permitting universal installation.

B. Motor Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, within installed environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate rating or considering service factor.

C. Gate Operator:

1. Heavy-duty, high frequency, electrical hydraulic models designed to open and close gates provided.

2. For each gate, supply manufacturer of gate operator with complete details of gate, hardware, adjacent fence posts, and fence construction for development and detailing of gate operator.

3. Furnish with following features: a. Metal enclosure, including attachments shall be constructed with

finish and design suitable for exterior installation in all-weather environment.

b. Maximum 3-hp motor, capable of receiving a 208V ac, single-phase input power.

c. Operation shall be by means of a hydraulic cylinder acting horizontally to cause the post and the gate panel to rotate from 0 degree to 100 degrees without the use of articulating arms, screw drives, or mechanical devices. The closing action of the gate panel shall cause the free end of the gate to be hydraulically locked in place without the use of externally operated electric or mechanical locks. Operator shall be capable of handling gates up to 30 feet wide and weighing up to 8,000 pounds. Actuator



assembly shall be supported on sealed bearing or nonlubricated synthetic bearing surfaces.

d. Adjustable length cylinder rod to allow precise closing adjustment.

e. Fully sealed absolute position senor for limiting device. f. NEMA 250 Enclosure per Area Classification and Material

Selection Table on Drawings. g. Motor Overload Protection: Industrial quality with manual reset. h. 24V dc control circuit to power remote control gate activation

devices. i. Manual operation: in the event of a power outage a hydraulic hand

pump or lever actuated release will allow the gate to be moved manually.

j. Gate Travel Speed: 1) 15 second to 25 second opening and closing cycle. 2) Speed adjusting feature that provides range of appropriate

speeds for swing gate operation is acceptable but not required.

3) Maximum Gate Weight: 8,000 pounds. 4) Frequency of Use: 30 cycles per hour. 5) Operating Type: Enclosed with manual release.

k. Compatible with gate operator control devices provided. See Section 28 13 00, Security Systems, for control components associated with gate system.

l. Gate edge sensors that provide a reverse signal to operator when gate hits any obstruction.

m. For safety, provide loop detectors minimum of 4 feet away from each side of gate.

n. Includes AC output power UPS/Battery backup system in the event of loss of power. 1) Capable of a minimum of 1 minute battery backup. 2) Sized to provide backup to gate operator and controls.

4. Manufacturers: a. Hy-Security Gate Operator, Seattle, WA. b. Automated Equipment Co., Seattle, WA. c. Stanley. d. Richards Wilcox, Aurora, IL.

2.10 CONCRETE

A. Provide as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.



2.11 FENCE GROUNDING

A. Conductors: See Section 26 05 05, Conductors.

B. Connectors and Grounding Rods: Comply with UL 467 and Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CHAIN LINK

A. Install chain link fences and gates in accordance with ASTM F567, except as modified in this section, and in accordance with fence manufacturer’s recommendations, as approved by Engineer. Erect fencing in straight lines between angle points.

B. Provide necessary hardware for a complete fence and gate installation.

C. Any damage to galvanized surfaces, including welding, shall be repaired with paint containing zinc dust in accordance with ASTM A780.

D. Drainage Crossings: Where the chain-link fence must cross drainage ditches or swales, the main fence shall be carried across a ditch or swale with additional fence added below.

1. Frames and Bracing: The fence added below shall be fabricated with galvanized round steel pipe conforming to the requirements for top and brace rails.

2. The construction of the frame shall be welded or assembled with corner fittings. The frame shall be rigid and to the extent necessary to maintain a 2-inch clearance between bottom of the frame and finish grade. If necessary to maintain rigidity, attach to the frame a series of 3/8-inch diameter galvanized steel pipe stakes that are embedded a minimum of 2 feet to the sides and bottom of the ditch.

3. Attach chain link fabric securely to frame at intervals not exceeding 12 inches.

3.02 ARCHITECTURAL

A. General Provisions: Architectural gates shall be installed in accordance with the approved Shop Drawings and descriptive data, as specified, and the following requirements.



B. Cutting and Fitting: Cutting, drilling, and fitting required shall be performed for the installation of architectural metal work. Cutting, drilling, and fitting shall be executed carefully; when required, work shall be fitted in-place before fastening.

C. Welding: Welding of fence panel components shall be performed as approved by the supplier of the product.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Clear area on either side of fence to the extent specified on Civil Drawings. Eliminate ground surface irregularities along fence line to the extent necessary to maintain a 2-inch clearance between bottom of fabric and finish grade.

B. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.

C. Embedment Coating: Coat portion of galvanized or aluminum-coated steel posts that will be embedded in concrete as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. Extend coating 1 inch above top of concrete.

3.04 POST SETTING

A. Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacing indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil. Driven posts are not acceptable. Postholes shall be clear of loose materials. Waste materials from postholes shall be removed from Site or regraded into slopes on Site.

B. Posthole Depth:

1. Minimum 3 feet below finished grade. 2. 2 inches deeper than post embedment depth below finish grade.

C. Set posts with minimum embedment below finished grade of 34 inches and with top rail at proper height above finished grade. Verify posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing. Brace posts, as necessary, to maintain correct position and plumbness until concrete sets.

D. Backfill postholes with concrete to 2 inches above finished grade. Vibrate or tamp concrete for consolidation. Protect above ground portion of posts from concrete splatter.

E. Before concrete sets, crown and finish top of concrete to readily shed water.



F. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F567 and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 15 degrees or more.

G. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet on centers between terminal end, corner, and gate posts.

3.05 POST BRACING

A. Install according to ASTM F567, maintaining plumb position, and alignment of fencing. Install braces at gate, end, pull, and corner posts diagonally to adjacent line posts to ensure stability. Install braces on both sides of corner and pull posts.

1. Locate horizontal braces at mid-height of fabric or higher, on fences with top rail, and 2/3-fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal truss rod assembly is under proper tension.

3.06 TOP RAILS

A. Install according to ASTM F567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps and terminating into rail end attached to posts or posts caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Install top rail sleeves with springs at 105 feet maximum spacing to permit expansion in rail.

3.07 BARBED WIRE SUPPORTING ARMS

A. Barbed wire supporting arms shall be installed as indicated and as recommended by manufacturer. Bolt or rivet supporting arm to top of post in a manner to prevent easy removal with hand tools. Angle single arms to outside of fence.

3.08 TENSION WIRE

A. Install according to ASTM F567 and ASTM F1916, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with tie wires at a maximum spacing of 24 inches on center.

B. Install tension wire within 6 inches of bottom of fabric and tie to each post with not less than same diameter and type of wire.



3.09 CHAIN LINK FABRIC

A. Do not install fabric until concrete has cured minimum 7 days.

B. Install fabric with twisted and barbed selvage at top.

C. Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Pull fabric taut to provide a smooth and uniform appearance free from sag, without permanently distorting fabric diamond or reducing fabric height. Tie fabric to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released.

D. Splicing shall be accomplished according to ASTM F1916 by weaving a single picket into the ends of the rolls to be joined.

E. Leave 2 inches between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches on center.

G. Tie Wires: Fasten ties to wrap a full 360 degrees around rail or post and a minimum of one complete diamond of fabric. Twist ends of tie wire three full twists, and cut off protruding ends to preclude untwisting by hand.

1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 12 inches on center and to brace and top rails at 24 inches on center.

3.10 BARBED WIRE

A. Install barbed wire uniformly in configurations of three strands of barbed wire on supporting arms. Pull wire taut and install securely to supporting arms and secure to end terminal post or terminal arms.

3.11 GATES

A. Install gates according to manufacturer’s written instructions, level, plumb and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric and hardware to gate using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary so gates operate satisfactorily from open or closed position.



3.12 GATE OPERATOR SYSTEMS

A. Install gate operator systems in accordance with the safety regulations and the manufacturer’s recommendations, aligned and true to fence line and grade.

B. Furnish with equipment and accessories necessary for complete installation.

C. Hand excavate holes for pads in firm undisturbed soil to dimensions, depths, and locations as required by gate operator component manufacturer’s written instructions and as shown on Drawings.

D. Vehicle Loop Detector System: Cut grooves in pavement and bury and seal wire loop according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Connect to gate operator system.

E. See Section 28 13 00, Security Systems, for interface between gate operator and security system.

1. Gate operator shall not open gate until permissive signal received from gate security cabinet.

2. Gate shall remain in open position when center loop detector senses a vehicle.

3. Gate shall open when exterior or interior loop detectors are activated and a permissive is received from gate security cabinet.

4. Gate shall not open without permissive from gate security cabinet.

3.13 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING

A. Ground fences at a maximum interval of 1,000 feet in accordance with applicable requirements of IEEE C2, National Electrical Safety Code.

B. Protection at Crossings of Overhead Electrical Power Lines: Ground fence at location of crossing and at a maximum distance of 150 feet on each side of crossing.

C. Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until top is 6 inches below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor. Connect conductor to each fence component at grounding location.


A. Post and Fabric Testing: Test fabric tension and line post rigidity according to ASTM F1916.



B. Gate Tests:

1. Prior to acceptance of installed gates, demonstrate proper operation of gates under each possible open and close condition specified.

2. Adjust gate to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range.

3. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing and binding.

C. Automatic Gate Operator:

1. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 2. Adjust operators, controls, safety devises, and limit switches. 3. Test operator through ten full open and close cycles and adjust for

operation without binding, scraping or uneven motion. Test limit switches for proper open and close limit positions.

4. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 5. Lubricate hardware, gate operator and other moving parts. 6. All anchor bolts and support post connections shall be fully tightened in

the finished installation. 7. Owner, or Owner’s Representative, shall complete “check list” with

installing contractor prior to final acceptance of the installation and submit completed warranty documentation to manufacturer.

3.15 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES

A. Provide manufacturer’s representative at Site in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, to train Owner’s personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gates.

3.16 CLEANUP

A. Remove excess fencing materials and other debris from Site.

3.17 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS

A. Finished Architectural Metal Work Requirements:

1. Architectural metal work will be rejected for any of the following deficiencies: a. Finish of exposed-to-view metal surfaces having color and

appearance that are outside the color and appearance range of the approved samples for metal finish.



b. Installed architectural metal items having stained, discolored, abraded, or otherwise damaged exposed-to-view metal surfaces that cannot be removed by cleaning or repairing; and/or installed architectural metal items that do not match the approved sample.

B. Repair of Defective Work: Defective work shall be removed and replaced with architectural metal materials that meet the requirements of this Section.

C. Gate Tests:

1. Prior to acceptance of installed gates, demonstrate proper operation of gates under each possible open and close condition specified.

2. Adjust gate to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 SOIL PREPARATION JANUARY 2020 32 91 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 32 91 13 SOIL PREPARATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C33/C33M, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. C602, Standard Specification for Agricultural Liming Materials. c. D2974, Standard Test Methods for Moisture, Ash, and Organic

Matter of Peat and Other Organic Soils. d. D5268, Standard Specification for Topsoil Used for Landscaping

Purposes.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Certified Topsoil Analysis Reports: a. Indicate quantities of materials necessary to bring onsite topsoil

into compliance with textural/gradation requirements. b. Indicate quantity of lime, quantity and analysis of fertilizer, and

quantity and type of soil additive.


A. Perform Work specified in Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing, prior to performing Work specified under this section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TOPSOIL

A. General: Natural, friable, sandy loam, obtained from well-drained areas, free from objects larger than 1-1/2 inches maximum dimension, and free of subsoil, roots, grass, other foreign matter, hazardous or toxic substances, and deleterious material that may be harmful to plant growth or may hinder grading, planting, or maintenance.


SOIL PREPARATION PW\DEN003\708335 32 91 13 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

B. Composition: In general accordance with ASTM D5268:

1. Gravel-Sized Fraction: Maximum 5 percent by weight retained on a No. 10 sieve.

2. Sand-Sized Fraction: Minimum 20 percent to 60 percent passing No. 10 sieve.

3. Silt and Clay-Sized Fraction: Minimum 35 percent to 70 percent.

C. Organic Matter:

1. Minimum 10 percent by dry weight in planting beds, as determined in accordance with ASTM D2974.

2. Minimum 5 percent by dry weight in turf areas, as determined in accordance with ASTM D2974.

D. pH: Range 6.0 to 8.0.

E. Textural Amendments: Amend as necessary to conform to required composition by incorporating sand, peat, manure, or sawdust.

F. Source: Stockpile material onsite, in accordance with Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing. If quantity of topsoil required to achieve depths specified, exceeds stockpiled quantity, import material as needed. Imported topsoil must meet the requirements of this Section.


A. Topsoil Analysis/Testing: Performed by county or state soil testing service or approved certified independent testing laboratory.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. Scarify subgrade to minimum depth of 6 inches where topsoil is to be placed.

B. Remove stones over 2-1/2 inches in any dimension, sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous material.

C. Limit preparation to areas which will receive topsoil within 2 days after preparation.


PW\DEN003\708335 SOIL PREPARATION JANUARY 2020 32 91 13 - 3 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

3.02 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT

A. Do not place topsoil when subsoil or topsoil is frozen, excessively wet, or otherwise detrimental to the Work.

B. Mix soil amendments, lime, and other soil additives, identified in analysis reports with topsoil before placement or spread on topsoil surface and mix thoroughly into entire depth of topsoil before planting or seeding. Delay mixing of fertilizer if planting or seeding will not occur within 3 days.

C. Place one-half of the total depth of topsoil and work into top 4 inches of subgrade soil to create a transition layer. Place remainder of topsoil to depth of 4 inches where seeding and planting are scheduled.

D. Uniformly distribute to within 1/2 inch of final grades. Fine grade topsoil eliminating rough or low areas and maintaining levels, profiles, and contours of subgrade.

E. Remove stones exceeding 1-1/2-inch diameter, roots, sticks, debris, and foreign matter during and after topsoil placement.

F. Remove surplus subsoil and topsoil from Site. Grade stockpile area as necessary and place in condition acceptable for planting or seeding.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 TURF AND GRASSES JANUARY 2020 32 92 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Maintenance Period: Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted (seed, sod, or sprig) and continue for a period of 8 weeks after all planting under this section is completed.

B. Satisfactory Stand:

1. Lawn and grass or section of lawn and grass of 10,000 square feet or larger that has: a. No bare spots larger than 3 square feet. b. Not more than 10 percent of total area with bare spots larger than

1 square foot. c. Not more than 15 percent of total area with bare spots larger than

6 square inches.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Product labels/data sheets.


1. Seed: Certification of seed analysis, germination rate, and inoculation: a. Certify that each lot of seed has been tested by a testing laboratory

certified in seed testing, within 6 months of date of delivery. Include with certification: 1) Name and address of laboratory. 2) Date of test. 3) Lot number for each seed specified. 4) Test Results: (i) name, (ii) percentages of purity and of

germination, and (iii) weed content for each kind of seed furnished.

b. Mixtures: Proportions of each kind of seed. 2. Seed Inoculant Certification: Bacteria prepared specifically for legume

species to be inoculated. 3. Certification of sod; include source and harvest date of sod, and sod

seed mix. 4. Certification of sprig type and name.


TURF AND GRASSES PW\DEN003\708335 32 92 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

5. Description of required maintenance activities and activity frequency.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Seed:

1. Furnish in standard containers with seed name, lot number, net weight, percentages of purity, germination, and hard seed and maximum weed seed content, clearly marked for each container of seed.

2. Keep dry during storage.

B. Hydroseeding Mulch: Mark package of wood fiber mulch to show air dry weight.

1.04 WEATHER RESTRICTIONS

A. Perform Work under favorable weather and soil moisture conditions as determined by accepted local practice.


A. Prepare topsoil as specified in Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation, before starting Work of this section.

B. Complete Work under this section within 10 days following completion of soil preparation.

C. Notify Engineer at least 3 days in advance of:

1. Each material delivery. 2. Start of planting activity.

D. Planting Season: March 15 through September 15.

1.06 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Contractor:

1. Perform maintenance operations during maintenance period to include: a. Watering: Keep surface moist. b. Washouts: Repair by filling with topsoil, liming, fertilizing,

seeding, and mulching. c. Mulch: Replace wherever and whenever washed or blown away. d. Mowing: Mow to 2 inches after grass height reaches 3 inches, and

mow to maintain grass height from exceeding 3-1/2 inches.



e. Fence: Repair and maintain until satisfactory stand of grass is established.

f. Reseed unsatisfactory areas or portions thereof immediately at the end of the maintenance period if a satisfactory stand has not been produced.

g. Reseed/replant during next planting season if scheduled end of maintenance period falls after September 15.

h. Reseed/replant entire area if satisfactory stand does not develop by July 1 of the following year.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FERTILIZER

A. Commercial, uniform in composition, free-flowing, suitable for application with equipment designed for that purpose. Minimum percentage of plant food by weight.

B. Mix:

1. Type A: PAR EX 18-16-16 with slow release, BDU starter mix, as available from Wilbur-Ellis, Portland, OR, (503) 277-3525, “or-equal.”

2. Type B: Woodburn Fertilizer 25-5-10 with 50 percent slow release, as available from Turf Care Products, (503) 620-0946, “or-equal.”

2.02 SEED

A. Fresh, clean new-crop seed that complies with the tolerance for purity and germination established by Official Seed Analysts of North America.

B. Seeds of Legumes: Inoculated with pure culture of nitrogen-fixing bacteria prepared specifically for legume species in accordance with inoculant manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Seed by Weight:

1. Lawn Grass: J.B. Signature Blend.

Species Proportion By Weight

J.B. II Perennial Ryegrass

Patriot II Perennial Ryegrass

Evening Shade Perennial Ryegrass

50 percent

25 percent

25 percent

As available from J.B. Sod and Seed (1-800-527-1439).



2. Rough Grass: Pro-Time No. 700.

Species Proportion By Weight

Elka Perennial Ryegrass

Barclay II Perennial Ryegrass

Cindy Creeping Red Fescue

Cobra Creeping Bentgrass

50 percent

20 percent

20 percent

10 percent

As available from Hobbs and Hopkins, Portland, OR (503) 239-5718).

2.03 HYDROSEEDING MULCH

A. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch:

1. Specially processed wood fiber containing no growth or germination inhibiting factors.

2. Dyed a suitable color to facilitate inspection of material placement. 3. Manufactured such that after addition and agitation in slurry tanks with

water, the material fibers will become uniformly suspended to form homogenous slurry.

4. When hydraulically sprayed on ground, material will allow absorption and percolation of moisture.

5. Silva-FiberPlus as manufactured by Weyerhaeuser.

2.04 NETTING

A. Jute:

1. Heavy-duty, twisted, weighing 1 pound per square yard. 2. Openings Between Strands: Approximately 2 inch.

B. Plastic:

1. Extruded Polypropylene: 20 mils. 2. Opening Between Strands: 1 inch by 2 inch.

C. Matting:

1. Excelsior mat or straw blanket; staples as recommended by matting manufacturer.

2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Akzo Industries, Ashville, NC; Curlex mat.



b. North American Green, Evansville, IN; S150 blanket.

2.05 TACKIFIER

A. Derived from natural organic plant sources containing no growth or germination-inhibiting materials.

1. Capable of hydrating in water, and to readily blend with other slurry materials.

2. Wood Cellulose Fiber: Add as tracer, at rate of 150 pounds per acre. 3. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Chevron Asphalt Co.; CSS 1. b. Terra; Tack AR. c. J Tack; Reclamare.

2.06 FENCE

A. 2-inch by 2-inch posts 4 feet high, spaced 10 feet on center, and strung with single strand of No. 12 gauge wire marked with cloth strips at 3-foot intervals.

2.07 LIME

A. Calpril lime as available from Wilbur-Ellis, Portland, OR, (503) 227-3525.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Grade areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture.

1. Roll and rake, remove ridges, fill depressions to meet finish grades. 2. Limit such Work to areas to be planted within immediate future. 3. Remove debris, and stones larger than 1-1/2-inch diameter, and other

objects that may interfere with planting and maintenance operations.

B. Moisten prepared areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry off before seeding. Do not create muddy soil.

C. Restore prepared areas to specified condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed after preparation and before planting.

3.02 FERTILIZER

A. Apply evenly over area in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Mix into top 2 inches of topsoil, when applied by broad cast method.



B. Application Rate: 23 pounds per 1,000 square feet (1,000 pounds per acre).

3.03 SEEDING

A. Start within 2 days of preparation completion.

B. Hydroseed slopes steeper than 3H:1V. Flatter slopes may be mechanically seeded.

C. Mechanical: Broadcast seed in two different directions, compact seeded area with cultipacter or roller.

1. Sow seed at uniform rate of 7 pounds per 1,000 square feet. 2. Use Brillion type seeder. 3. Broadcasting will be allowed only in areas too small to use Brillion type

seeder. Where seed is broadcast, increase seeding rate 20 percent. 4. Roll with ring roller to cover seed, and water with fine spray.

D. Hydroseeding:

1. Application Rate: 42 pounds per 1,000 square feet. 2. Apply on moist soil, only after free surface water has drained away. 3. Prevent drift and displacement of mixture into other areas. 4. Upon application, allow absorption and percolation of moisture into

ground. 5. Mixtures: Seed and fertilizer may be mixed together, apply within

30 minutes of mixing to prevent fertilizer from burning seed.

E. Mulching: Apply uniform cover of wood fiber mulch at rate of 1,500 pounds per acre.

F. Netting: Immediately after mulching, place over mulched areas with slopes steeper than 3:1, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Locate strips parallel to slope and completely cover seeded areas.

G. Tackifier: Apply over mulched areas with slopes steeper than 4:1 at rate of 5 gallons per 1,000 square feet in accordance with the manufacturers recommended requirements.

H. Water: Apply with fine spray after mulching to saturate top 4 inches of soil.




A. 8 weeks after seeding is complete and on written notice from Contractor, Engineer will, within 15 days of receipt, determine if a satisfactory stand has been established.

B. If a satisfactory stand has not been established, Engineer will make another determination after written notice from Contractor following the next growing season.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect from pedestrian traffic by erecting temporary fence around each newly seeded area.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 DISINFECTION OF WATER UTILITY JANUARY 2020 DISTRIBUTION FACILITIES ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 33 13 00 - 1

SECTION 33 13 00 DISINFECTION OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION FACILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. B300, Hypochlorites. b. B301, Liquid Chlorine. c. B302, Ammonium Sulfate. d. B303, Sodium Chlorite. e. C651, Disinfecting Water Mains.

2. NSF International (NSF): a. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health

Effects. b. NSF/ANSI 372, Drinking Water System Components - Lead

Content. 3. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, as

published by American Public Health Association, American Water Works Association, and the Water Environment Federation.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Plan describing and illustrating conformance to appropriate AWWA standards and this Specification.

2. Procedure and plan for cleaning system. 3. Procedures and plans for disinfection and testing. 4. Proposed locations within system where Samples will be taken. 5. Type of disinfecting solution and method of preparation. 6. Method of disposal for highly chlorinated disinfecting water. 7. Certified Bacteriological Test Results:

a. Facility tested is free from coliform bacteria contamination. b. Forward results directly to Engineer.


DISINFECTION OF WATER UTILITY PW\DEN003\708335 DISTRIBUTION FACILITIES JANUARY 2020 333 13 100 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS


A. Independent Testing Agency: Certified in the State of Washington with 10 years’ experience in field of water sampling and testing. Agency shall use calibrated testing instruments and equipment, and documented standard procedures for performing specified testing.

1.04 SEQUENCING

A. Commence initial disinfection after completion of following:

1. Hydrostatic and pneumatic testing, pressure testing, functional and performance testing and acceptance of pipelines, pumping systems, structures, and equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption: Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification by manufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by the Authority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with the maximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372.

1. Use or reuse of components and materials without a traceable certification is prohibited.

2.02 WATER FOR DISINFECTION AND TESTING

A. Clean, uncontaminated, and potable.

B. Owner will supply potable quality water. Contractor shall convey in disinfected pipelines or containers.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Conform to AWWA C651 for pipes and pipelines, except as modified in these Specifications.



B. Contractor’s Equipment:

1. Furnish chemicals and equipment, such as pumps and hoses, to accomplish disinfection.

2. Water used to fill pipeline may be supplied using a temporary connection to existing distribution system. Provide protection against cross-connections as required by AWWA C651.

C. Disinfect the following items installed or modified under this Project, intended to hold, transport, or otherwise contact potable water:

1. Pipelines: Disinfect new pipelines that connect to existing pipelines up to point of connection.

D. Prior to application of disinfectants, clean pipelines of loose and suspended material.

E. Allow freshwater and disinfectant solution to flow into pipe or vessel at a measured rate so chlorine-water solution is at specified strength. Do not place concentrated liquid commercial disinfectant in pipeline or other facilities to be disinfected before it is filled with water.

3.02 TURBIDITY

A. Cleaning of equipment and facilities shall include removal of materials that result in a turbidity exceeding limits stated in Article Testing.

3.03 PIPING AND PIPELINES

A. Cleaning:

1. Before disinfecting, clean foreign matter from pipe in accordance with AWWA C651.

2. If continuous feed method or slug method of disinfection, as described in AWWA C651, are used flush pipelines with potable water until clear of suspended solids and color. Provide hoses, temporary pipes, ditches, and other conduits as needed to dispose of flushing water without damage to adjacent properties.

3. Flush service connections and hydrants. Flush distribution lines prior to flushing hydrants and service connections. Operate valves during flushing process at least twice during each flush.

4. Flush pipe through flushing branches and remove branches after flushing is completed.


DISINFECTION OF WATER UTILITY PW\DEN003\708335 DISTRIBUTION FACILITIES JANUARY 2020 333 13 100 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

B. Disinfecting Procedure: In accordance with AWWA C651, unless herein modified.

3.04 DISPOSAL OF CHLORINATED WATER

A. Do not allow flow into a waterway without neutralizing disinfectant residual.

B. See appendix of AWWA C651 for acceptable neutralization methods.

3.05 TESTING

A. Collection of Samples:

1. Coordinate activities to allow Samples to be taken in accordance with this Specification.

2. Provide valves at sampling points. 3. Provide access to sampling points.

B. Test Equipment:

1. Clean containers and equipment used in sampling and make sure they are free of contamination.

2. Obtain sampling bottles with instructions for handling from an independent testing laboratory.

C. Chlorine Concentration Sampling and Analysis:

1. Collect and analyze Samples in accordance with AWWA standards. 2. Residual Free Chlorine Samples: One Sample per 1,000 feet of pipe per

pipeline. 3. Analysis to be performed by an independent test laboratory. Samples

will be analyzed using amperometric titration method for free chlorine as described in latest edition of Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater.

D. After pipelines have been cleaned, disinfected, and refilled with potable water, an independent laboratory will take water Samples and have them analyzed for conformance to bacterial limitations for public drinking water supplies.

1. Collect Samples in accordance with applicable AWWA Standard. 2. Analyze Samples for coliform concentrations in accordance with latest

edition of Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater.



3. Obtain and analyze a minimum of two Samples on each of 2 consecutive days from every 1,000 feet of pipe per pipeline by standard procedures outlined by state and local regulatory agencies.

E. Turbidity Sampling and Analysis:

1. After pipelines have been cleaned, disinfected, and refilled with potable water, an independent laboratory will take water Samples and have them analyzed for conformance to turbidity limitations for public drinking water supplies. Turbidity shall not exceed 0.3 NTU.

2. If turbidity is in excess of the limit, dispose of the water in accordance with this Specification and applicable regulations, take action to remove source of turbidity, refill system, and retest.

F. If minimum Samples required above are bacterially positive, disinfecting procedures and bacteriological testing shall be repeated until bacterial limits are met.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS JANUARY 2020 40 05 15 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 40 05 15 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B31.1, Power Piping.

3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip

Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-

Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

c. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

4. International Code Council (ICC): a. International Building Code (IBC). b. International Mechanical Code (IMC).

5. Manufacturers’ Standardization Society (MSS): a. SP 58, Pipe Hangers and Supports—Materials, Design and

Manufacture. b. SP 127, Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic-Wind-Dynamic

Design, Selection, and Application.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Wetted or Submerged: Submerged, less than 1 foot above liquid surface, below top of channel wall, under cover or slab of channel or tank, or in other damp locations.


PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS PW\DEN003\708335 40 05 15 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Catalog information and drawings of piping support system, locating each support, sway brace, seismic brace, hanger, guide, component, and anchor for piping 6 inches and larger. Identify support, hanger, guide, and anchor type by catalog number and Shop Drawing detail number.

2. Calculations for each type of pipe support, attachment and anchor where Contractor design of pipe support system is required.

3. Revisions to support systems resulting from changes in related piping system layout or addition of flexible joints.

4. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.


1. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.

2. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as required by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing.

3. Maintenance information on piping support system. 4. Temporary Pipe Support Plan and Details, as Designed by Contractor,

for supporting all temporary piping associated with the Project.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Where Contractor design of piping support systems is required, the design and Shop Drawings shall be prepared and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer in the State of Washington.


A. General:

1. Design, size, and locate piping support systems for pipes throughout the project for temporary pipes. All other pipe supports have been designed by Engineer and the Contractor shall install pipe supports as directed on Drawings and Details. Contractor designed supports shall comply with requirements listed herein and allow access to all equipment and shall not obstruct walkways needed by plant personnel.

2. Meet requirements of MSS SP 58 and ASME B31.1, or as modified by this section.



B. Pipe Support Systems:

1. Design pipe support systems for gravity and thrust loads imposed by weight of pipes or internal pressures, including insulation and weight of fluid in pipes.

2. Seismic loads in accordance with governing codes and as shown on Structural General Drawings.

3. Wind loads in accordance with governing codes and as shown on Structural General Drawings.

4. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Rod Size: In accordance MSS SP 58 Table 3 and Table 4. a. Ductile-iron Pipe 8 Inches and Under: Maximum span limited to

that for standard weight steel pipe for water service. b. Ductile-iron Pipe 10 Inches and Larger: Maximum span limited to

20 feet.

C. Anchoring Devices: Design, size, and space support anchoring devices, including anchor bolts, inserts, and other devices used to anchor support, to withstand shear and pullout loads imposed by loading and spacing on each particular support.

D. Vertical Sway Bracing: 10-foot maximum centers or as shown.

E. Existing Support Systems: Use existing supports systems to support new piping only if Contractor can show they are adequate for additional load, or if they are strengthened to support additional load.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. When specified items are not available, fabricate pipe supports of correct material and to general configuration indicated.

B. Special support and hanger details may be required for cases where standard catalog supports are not applicable.

C. Materials: In accordance with the selections noted in Drawing 01-G-024, Area Classification and Material Schedule. When not noted, supports shall be aluminum or galvanized steel when outdoors or indoors, and Type 316 stainless steel when in a submerged space. Paint pipe supports in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, when applicable.



2.02 HANGERS

A. Clevis:

1. MSS SP 58, Type 1: a. Anvil; Figure 260 for steel pipe and Figure 590 for ductile-iron

pipe, sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches. b. Insulated Steel Pipe: Anvil; Figure 260 with insulated saddle

system (ISS), sizes 1/2 inch through 16 inches. c. B-Line; Figure B3100, sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches.

B. Adjustable Swivel Split-Ring Pipe Clamp:

1. MSS SP 58, Type 6: a. Anvil; Figure 104, sizes 3/4 inch through 8 inches. b. B-Line; Figure B3171, sizes 3/4 inch through 8 inches.

C. Steel Yoke Pipe Rolls and Roller Supports:

1. MSS SP 58, Type 41 or Type 43: a. Anvil; Figure 181 for sizes 2-1/2 inches through 24 inches, and

Figure 171 for sizes 1 inch through 30 inches. b. B-Line; Figure B3110 for sizes 2 inches through 24 inches and

Figure B3114 for 30 inches.

D. Pipe Rollers and Supports:

1. MSS SP 58, Type 44: a. Anvil; Figure 175, sizes 2 inches through 30 inches. b. B-Line; Figure B3120, sizes 2 inches through 24 inches.

2.03 WALL BRACKETS, SUPPORTS, AND GUIDES

A. Welded Steel Wall Bracket:

1. MSS SP 58, Type 33 (heavy-duty): a. Anvil; Figure 199, 3,000-pound rating. b. B-Line; Figure B3067, 3,000-pound rating.

B. Adjustable “J” Hanger MSS SP 58, Type 5:

1. Anvil; Figure 67, sizes 1/2 inch through 8 inches. 2. B-Line; Figure B3690, sizes 1/2 inch through 8 inches.

C. Offset Pipe Clamp: Anvil; Figure 103, sizes 3/4 inch through 8 inches.



D. Channel Type:

1. Unistrut. 2. Anvil; Power-Strut. 3. B-Line; Strut System. 4. Aickinstrut (FRP).

2.04 PIPE SADDLES

A. Provide 90-degree to120-degree pipe saddle for pipe 6 inches and larger with baseplates drilled for anchors bolts.

1. In accordance with Standard Detail 4005-515. 2. Sizes 20 inches though 60 inches, Piping Technology & Products, Inc.;

Fig. 2000.

B. Saddle Supports, Pedestal Type:

1. Minimum standard weight pipe stanchion, saddle, and anchoring flange. 2. Nonadjustable Saddle: MSS SP 58, Type 37 with U-bolt.

a. Anvil; Figure 259, sizes 4 inches through 36 inches with Figure 63C base.

b. B-Line; Figure B3095, sizes 1 inch through 36 inches with B3088S base.

3. Adjustable Saddle: MSS SP 58, Type 38 without clamp. a. Anvil; Figure 264, sizes 2-1/2 inches through 36 inches with

Figure 62C base. b. B-Line; Figure B3092, sizes 3/4 inch through 36 inches with

Figure B3088S base.

2.05 CHANNEL TYPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

A. Channel Size: 12-gauge, 1-5/8-inch wide minimum steel/stainless steel, or 1-1/2-inch wide, minimum FRP.

B. Members and Connections: Design for loads using one-half of manufacturer’s allowable loads.

C. Fasteners: Vinyl ester fiber, polyurethane base composite nuts and bolts, or encapsulated steel fasteners.



D. Manufacturers and Products:

1. B-Line; Strut System. 2. Unistrut. 3. Anvil; Power-Strut. 4. Aickinstrut (FRP System). 5. Enduro-Durostrut (FRP Systems).

2.06 FRP PIPE SUPPORTS SYSTEMS

A. General:

1. Fire Retardant: ASTM E84. 2. Include hangers, rods, attachments, and fasteners.

B. Clevis Hangers:

1. Factor of Safety: 3 to 1. 2. Minimum Design Load: 200 pounds.

C. Design:

1. Design pipe supports spacing, hanger rod sizing based upon manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Identify and highlight non-FRP fasteners or components in Shop Drawing.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Aickinstrut. 2. Enduro. 3. Century Composite.

2.07 PIPE CLAMPS

A. Riser Clamp: MSS SP 58, Type 8.

1. Anvil; Figure 261, sizes 3/4 inch through 24 inches. 2. B-Line; Figure B3373, sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches.

2.08 ELBOW AND FLANGE SUPPORTS

A. Elbow with Adjustable Stanchion: Sizes 2 inches through 18 inches, Anvil; Figure 62C base.



B. Elbow with Nonadjustable Stanchion: Sizes 2-1/2 inches through 42 inches, Anvil; Figure 63A or Figure 63B base.

C. Flange Support with Adjustable Base: Sizes 2 inches through 24 inches, Standon; Model S89.

2.09 INTERMEDIATE PIPE GUIDES

A. Type: Hold down pipe guide.

1. Manufacturer and Product: B-Line; Figure B3552, 1-1/2 inches through 30 inches.

B. Type: U-bolts with double nuts to provide nominal 1/8-inch to 1/4-inch clearance around pipe; MSS SP 58, Type 24.

1. Anvil; Figure 137 and Figure 137S. 2. B-Line; Figure B3188 and Figure B3188NS.

2.10 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES

A. Type: Spider.

B. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Anvil; Figure 255, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches. 2. B-Line; Figure B3281 through Figure B3287, sizes 1/2 inch through

24 inches.

2.11 PIPE ANCHORS

A. Type: Anchor chair with U-bolt strap.

B. Manufacturer and Product: B-Line; Figure B3147A or Figure B3147B.

2.12 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

A. Solid pipe bracing attachment to pipe clevis with clevis cross brace and angle rod reinforcement.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Mason Industries. 2. B-Line. 3. Anvil.



2.13 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchor Bolts:

1. Size and Material: Sized by Contractor for required loads, 1/2-inch minimum diameter, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

2. Bolt Length (Extension Above Top of Nut): a. Minimum Length: Flush with top of nut preferred. If not flush,

shall be no more than one thread recessed below top of nut. b. Maximum Length: No more than a full nut depth above top of nut.

B. Dielectric Barriers:

1. Plastic coated hangers, isolation cushion, or tape. 2. Manufacturer and Products:

a. B-Line; B1999 Vibra Cushion. b. B-Line; Iso Pipe, Isolation Tape.

C. Insulation Shields:

1. Type: Galvanized steel or stainless steel, MSS SP 58, Type 40. 2. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Anvil; Figure 167, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches. b. B-Line; Figure B3151, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches.

D. Welding Insulation Saddles:

1. Type: MSS SP 58, Type 39. 2. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Anvil; Figure Series 160, sizes 1 inch through 36 inches. b. B-Line; Figure Series B3160, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches.

E. Plastic Pipe Support Channel:

1. Type: Continuous support for plastic pipe and to increase support spacing.

2. Manufacturer and Product: B-Line; Figure Series B3106V, sizes 1/2 inch through 6 inches with Figure B3106 Vee bottom hanger.

F. Hanger Rods, Clevises, Nuts, Sockets, and Turnbuckles: In accordance with MSS SP 58.



G. Attachments:

1. I-Beam Clamp: Concentric loading type, MSS SP 58, Type 21, Type 28, Type 29, or Type 30, which engage both sides of flange.

2. Concrete Insert: MSS SP 58, Type 18, continuous channel insert with load rating not less than that of hanger rod it supports.

3. Welded Beam Attachment: MSS SP 58, Type 22. a. Anvil; Figure 66. b. B-Line; Figure B3083.

4. U-Channel Concrete Inserts: As specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

5. Concrete Attachment Plates: a. Anvil; Figure 47, Figure 49, or Figure 52. b. B-Line; Figure B3084, Figure B3085, or Figure B3086.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install support systems in accordance with MSS SP 58, unless shown otherwise.

2. Install pipe hanger rods plumb, within 4 degrees of vertical during shut down, start up or operations.

3. Support piping connections to equipment by pipe support and not by equipment.

4. Support large or heavy valves, fittings, and appurtenances independently of connected piping.

5. Support no pipe from pipe above it. 6. Support pipe at changes in direction or in elevation, adjacent to flexible

joints and couplings, and where shown. 7. Do not use adhesive anchors for attachment of supports to ceiling or

walls. 8. Do not install pipe supports and hangers in equipment access areas or

bridge crane runs. 9. Brace hanging pipes against horizontal movement by both longitudinal

and lateral sway bracing and to reduce movement after startup. 10. Install lateral supports for seismic loads at changes in direction. 11. Install pipe anchors where required to withstand expansion thrust loads

and to direct and control thermal expansion. 12. Repair mounting surfaces to original condition after attachments are

completed.



B. Standard Pipe Supports:

1. Horizontal Suspended Piping: a. Single Pipes: Clevis hangers or adjustable swivel split-ring. b. Grouped Pipes: Trapeze hanger system.

2. Horizontal Piping Supported from Walls: a. Single Pipes: Wall brackets, or attached to wall, or to wall

mounted framing with anchors. b. Stacked Piping: Wall mounted framing system and “J” hangers

acceptable for pipe smaller than 3 inches. c. Pipe clamp that resists axial movement of pipe through support is

not acceptable. Use pipe rollers supported from wall bracket. 3. Horizontal Piping Supported from Floors:

a. Saddle Supports: 1) Pedestal type, elbow and flange. 2) Provide minimum 1-1/2-inch grout beneath baseplate.

b. Floor Mounted Channel Supports: 1) Use for pipe smaller than 3 inches running along floors and

in trenches at pipe elevations lower than can be accommodated using pedestal pipe supports.

2) Attach channel framing to floors with baseplate on minimum 1-1/2-inch nonshrink grout and with anchor bolts.

3) Attach pipe to channel with clips or pipe clamps. c. Concrete Cradles: Use for pipe larger than 3 inches along floor

and in trenches at pipe elevations lower than can be accommodated using stanchion type.

4. Insulated Pipe: a. Pipe hanger and support shall be on outside of insulation. Do not

enclose within insulation. b. Provide precut 120-degree sections of rigid insulation (minimum

length same as shield), shields and oversized hangers or insulated saddle system (ISS).

c. Wall-mounted pipe clips not acceptable for insulated piping. 5. Vertical Pipe: Support with wall bracket and elbow support, or riser

clamp on floor penetration.

C. Standard Attachments:

1. New Concrete Ceilings: a. Concrete inserts, concrete attachment plates, or concrete anchors

as limited below: 1) Single point attachment to ceiling allowed only for 3/4-inch

rod and smaller (8 inches and smaller pipe).



2) Where there is vibration or bending considerations, do not connect a single pipe support hanger rod directly to a drilled concrete anchor (single point attachment) regardless of size.

2. Existing Concrete Ceilings: a. Channel type support with minimum of two anchor points,

concrete attachment plates or concrete anchors as limited below: 1) Single point attachment to ceiling is allowed only for

3/4-inch rod and smaller (8 inches and smaller pipe). 2) Where there is vibration or bending considerations do not

connect a single pipe support hanger rod directly to a drilled concrete anchor (single point attachment) regardless of size.

3. Steel Beams: I-beam clamp or welded attachments. 4. Wooden Beams: Lag screws and angle clips to members not less than

2-1/2 inches thick. 5. Concrete Walls: Concrete inserts or brackets or clip angles with

concrete anchors. 6. Concrete Beams: Concrete inserts, or if inserts are not used attach to

vertical surface similar to concrete wall. Do not drill into beam bottom.

D. Saddles for Steel or Concrete Pipe: Provide 90-degree to120-degree pipe saddle for pipe sizes 6 inches and larger when installed on top of steel or concrete beam or structure, pipe rack, trapeze, or where similar concentrated point supports would be encountered.

E. Intermediate and Pipe Alignment Guides:

1. Provide pipe alignment guides, or pipe supports that provide same function, at expansion joints and loops.

2. Guide pipe on each side of expansion joint or loop at 4 pipe and 14 pipe diameters from each joint or loop.

3. Install intermediate guides on metal framing support systems not carrying pipe anchor or alignment guide.

F. Accessories:

1. Insulation Shield: Install on insulated piping with oversize rollers and supports.

2. Welding Insulation Saddle: Install on insulated steel pipe with oversize rollers and supports.

3. Dielectric Barrier: a. Provide between painted or galvanized carbon steel members and

copper or stainless steel pipe or between stainless steel supports and nonstainless steel ferrous metal piping.



b. Install rubber wrap between submerged metal pipe and oversized clamps.

3.02 FIELD FINISHING

A. Paint atmospheric exposed surfaces hot-dip galvanized steel components as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PIPE HEAT TRACING JANUARY 2020 40 05 33 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 40 05 33 PIPE HEAT TRACING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Factory Mutual. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics engineers, Inc (IEEE): 515,

Testing, Design, Installation and Maintenance of Electrical Resistance Heat Tracing for Industrial Applications.

3. National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association (NEMA): 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

4. UL.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer’s descriptive literature. 2. Plastic Pipe Installations: Output adjustment factors for heating tape for

the services indicated. 3. Pipe heat loss calculations for each pipe size to be heat traced.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Design Heating Load:

1. Heating load to be calculated based upon a 50 degree F delta, 20 mph wind if pipes are located outdoors, insulation as specified in Section 40 42 13, Process Piping Insulation, pipe as specified in Section 40 27 00, Process Piping—General, and shall include a 10 percent safety factor.

2. Heat loss calculations shall be based on IEEE 515, Equation 1, Page 19.


PIPE HEAT TRACING PW\DEN003\708335 40 05 33 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

2.02 ELECTRICAL HEATING TAPE

A. Cable: Self-limiting, parallel circuit construction consisting of continuous inner core of variable resistance conductive heating material between two parallel copper bus wires. Provide tinned copper braid for PVC, FRP, and stainless steel pipe applications.

B. UL Listing: Listed as self-limiting pipe tracing material for pipe freeze protection application in ordinary conditions.

C. Maximum Maintenance Temperature: 150 degrees F (65 degrees C).

D. Maximum Intermittent Temperature: 185 degrees F (85 degrees C).

E. Service Voltage: As indicated by branch circuits provided for heat tracing on Drawings.

F. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Raychem; BTV-CR. 2. Thermon; BSX. 3. Nelson; CL1-J1 or L1-J1.

2.03 CONNECTION SYSTEM

A. Rating: NEMA 250, Type 4 and Factory Mutual approved.

B. Operating Monitor Light: Furnish with each circuit power connection kit to indicate when heat tracing is energized.

C. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Power Connection Kit: a. Raychem; JBS-100. b. Thermon; PCA-1-SR or DP-L. c. Nelson; PLT-BC.

2. Splice Kit: a. Raychem; S-150. b. Thermon; PCS-1-SR. c. Nelson; PLT-BS.

3. Tee Kit: a. Raychem; T-100. b. Thermon; DS-S. c. Nelson; PLT-BY.



4. End Seal Kit: a. Raychem; E-150. b. Thermon; DE-S. c. Nelson; LT-ME.

5. Lighted End Seal Kit: a. Raychem; E-100-L. b. Thermon; DLS. c. Nelson; LT-L.

2.04 SECURING TAPE

A. Plastic Piping Systems:

1. Type: Aluminum foil coated adhesive tape. 2. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Raychem; AT-180. b. Thermon; AL-20P. c. Nelson; AT-50.

B. Metallic Piping Systems:

1. Type: Glass or polyester cloth pressure sensitive tape. 2. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Raychem; GS54 or GT66. b. Thermon; PF-1. c. Nelson; GT-6 or GT-60.

2.05 PIPE MOUNTED THERMOSTAT

A. Type: Fixed, nonadjustable, set at 40 degrees F.

B. Sensor: Fluid-filled with 3-foot capillary.

C. Enclosure: Glass-filled nylon, NEMA 250, Type 4X weatherproof with gasketed lid.

D. Switch: SP-ST, UL listed, rated 22 amps, 120V ac to 240V ac.

E. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Raychem; DigiTrace Model AMC-F5. 2. Thermon; E4X-1. 3. Raychem; DigiTrace Model E507S-LS for hazardous areas. 4. Thermon; E7-25325 for hazardous areas.


PIPE HEAT TRACING PW\DEN003\708335 40 05 33 - 4 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

2.06 AMBIENT THERMOSTAT

A. Type: Adjustable setting (15 degrees F to 140 degrees F).

B. Sensor: Fluid-filled probe.

C. Enclosure: Epoxy-coated NEMA 250, Type 4X aluminum enclosure with exposed hardware of stainless steel.

D. Switch: SP-DT, UL or FM listed, rated 22 amps, 125V ac to 250V ac.

E. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Raychem; DigiTrace Model AMC-1A. 2. Thermon; B4X-15140. 3. Raychem; DigiTrace Model AMC-1H for hazardous areas. 4. Thermon; B7-15140 for hazardous areas.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommended practices.

2. Provide insulation as specified in Section 40 42 13, Process Piping Insulation, over all pipe heat tracing.

3. Ground metallic structures or materials used for support of heating cable or on which it is installed in accordance with applicable codes.

4. Wiring between power connection points of heat tracing cable branch lines shall be provided by heat tracing system supplier.

5. Provide end of circuit pilot lights on heat tracing circuits for buried piping.

B. Electrical Heating Tape:

1. Determine required length of electrical heating tape by considering length of circuit, number and type of fittings and fixtures, design heating load, and heating tape output.

2. Where design heating load exceeds heating tape capacity, install by spiraling.

3. Derate heating tape capacity when installed on plastic piping. 4. Install on services when indicated on the Piping Schedule on Drawings.



5. Install additional heating tape at bolted flanges, valves, pipe supports, and other fittings and fixtures as recommended by supplier, but not less than the following:

Item Heating Tape Length

(min. feet)

Bolted flanges (per pair) Two times pipe diameter

Valves Four times valve length

Pipe hanger or support penetrating insulation

Three times pipe diameter

C. Heat Tracing Circuits: Limit individual lengths of heat tracing circuits such that maximum single circuit capacity is 20 amps when starting the circuit at 40 degrees F. Provide multiple 20-amp circuits as required at individual heat tracing locations.

D. Thermostats:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as approved by Engineer.

2. For each group of heat traced circuit, install one ambient thermostat.


A. Test each circuit with 500-volt insulation tester between circuit and ground with neutrals isolated from ground.

1. Insulation Resistance: Minimum 1,000 megohms per 1,000 feet.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL JANUARY 2020 40 27 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 40 27 00 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section and any supplemental Data Sheets:

1. Air Force: A-A-58092, Tape, Antiseize, Polytetrafluorethylene. 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO): HB-17, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. 3. American Petroleum Institute (API): SPEC 5L, Specification for Line Pipe. 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

a. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators.

b. B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). c. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125,

and 250. d. B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 150 and 300. e. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 through NPS 24

Metric/Inch Standard. f. B16.9, Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings. g. B16.11, Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded. h. B16.15, Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250. i. B16.21, Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges. j. B16.22, Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure

Fittings. k. B16.24, Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

Classes 150, 300, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500. l. B16.25, Buttwelding Ends. m. B16.42, Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 150

and 300. n. B31.3, Process Piping. o. B31.9, Building Services Piping. p. B36.10M, Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.

5. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT): SNT-TC-1A, Recommended Practice for Personal Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing.


PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW\DEN003\708335 40 27 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

6. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C104/A21.4, Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and

Fittings. b. C105/A21.5, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. c. C110/A21.10, Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings. d. C111/A21.11, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe

and Fittings. e. C115/A21.15, Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-

Iron Threaded Flanges. f. C151/A21.51, Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. g. C153/A21.53, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings. h. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service, Sizes 4 In.

Through 144 In. (100 mm Through 3,600 mm). i. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints.

7. American Welding Society (AWS): a. Brazing Handbook. b. A5.8M/A5.8, Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze

Welding. c. D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code - Steel. d. QC1, Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors.

8. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A47/A47M, Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron

Castings. b. A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-

Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. c. A105/A105M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for

Piping Applications. d. A106/A106M, Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe

for High-Temperature Service. e. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,

Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. f. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on

Iron and Steel Hardware. g. A181/A181M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for

General-Purpose Piping. h. A182/A182M, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and

Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service.

i. A183, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts. j. A193/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless

Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.



k. A194/A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.

l. A197/A197M, Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron. m. A216/A216M, Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon,

Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service. n. A234/A234M, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought

Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.

o. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.

p. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. q. A269, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic

Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. r. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,

60,000 psi Tensile Strength. s. A312/A312M, Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and

Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. t. A320/A320M, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless

Steel Bolting for Low-Temperature Service. u. A351/A351M, Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for

Pressure-Containing Parts. v. A395/A395M, Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron

Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. w. A403/A403M, Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic

Stainless Steel Piping Fittings. x. A409/A409M, Standard Specification for Welded Large Diameter

Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or High-Temperature Service. y. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. z. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. aa. A587, Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Low-

Carbon Steel Pipe for the Chemical Industry. bb. A743/A743M, Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium,

Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application. cc. A744/A744M, Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium-

Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for Severe Service. dd. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. ee. B43, Standard Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe, Standard

Sizes. ff. B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. gg. B62, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal

Castings. hh. B75/B75M, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube.



ii. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. jj. B98/B98M, Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod,

Bar and Shapes. kk. B462, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled UNS N06030,

UNS N06022, UNS N06035, UNS N06200, UNS N06059, UNS N10362, UNS N06686, UNS N08020, UNS N08024, UNS N08026, UNS N08367, UNS N10276, UNS N10665, UNS N10675, UNS N10629, UNS N08031, UNS N06045, UNS N06025, and UNS R20033 Alloy Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for Corrosive High-Temperature Service.

ll. B464, Standard Specification for Welded UNS N08020 Alloy Pipe. mm. B474, Standard Specification for Electric Fusion Welded Nickel and

Nickel Alloy Pipe. nn. C582, Standard Specification for Contact-Molded Reinforced

Thermosetting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant Equipment.

oo. D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension.

pp. D413, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to Flexible Substrate.

qq. D543, Standard Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents.

rr. D1248, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable.

ss. D1330, Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Gaskets. tt. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

uu. D1785, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.

vv. D2000, Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications.

ww. D2310, Standard Classification for Machine-Made “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.

xx. D2464, Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.

yy. D2466, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.

zz. D2467, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.

aaa. D2564, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.



bbb. D2837, Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Products.

ccc. D2996, Standard Specification for Filament-Wound “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.

ddd. D3222, Standard Specification for Unmodified Poly(Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and Coating Materials.

eee. D3350, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials.

fff. D4101, Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials.

ggg. D4894, Standard Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Granular Molding and Ram Extrusion Materials.

hhh. D4895, Standard Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Resin Produced from Dispersion.

iii. F423, Standard Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Plastic-Lined Ferrous Metal Pipe, Fittings, and Flanges.

jjj. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. kkk. F437, Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl

Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. lll. F439, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. mmm. F441/F441M, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl

Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. nnn. F493, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. ooo. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap

Screws, and Studs. ppp. F656, Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement

Joints of Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 9. FM Global (FM). 10. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry,

Inc. (MSS): SP-43, Wrought and Fabricated Butt-Welding Fittings for Low-Pressure, Corrosion Resistant Applications.

11. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): LI 1, Industrial Laminating Thermosetting Products.

12. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 24, Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.

13. NSF International (NSF): a. ANSI 61: Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. b. ANSI 372: Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content.



1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Submerged or Wetted: Zone below elevation of area beneath top of wall or top of deck of any water holding structure.


A. Where pipe diameter, thickness, pressure class, pressure rating, or thrust restraint is not shown or specified, design piping system in accordance with the following:

1. Process Piping: ASME B31.3, Normal Fluid Service unless a more stringent service is shown or specified.

2. Buried Piping: H20-S16 traffic load with 1.5 impact factor, AASHTO HB-17, as applicable.

3. Thrust Restraints: a. Design for test pressure shown in Piping Schedule as shown on

Drawings. b. Low Pressure Pipelines:

1) When bearing surface of the fitting against soil provides an area equal to or greater than area required for thrust restraint, concrete thrust blocks will not be required.

2) Determine bearing area for fittings without thrust blocks by projected area of 70 percent of internal diameter multiplied by chord length for fitting centerline curve.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Fabricated Piping: a. Detailed pipe fabrication or spool drawings showing special fittings

and bends, dimensions, coatings, and other pertinent information. b. Layout drawing showing location of each pipe section and each

special length; number or otherwise designate laying sequence on each piece.

2. Pipe Wall Thickness: Identify wall thickness and rational method or standard applied to determine wall thickness for each size of each different service including exposed, submerged, buried, and concrete-encased installations for Contractor-designed piping.

3. Dissimilar Buried Pipe Joints: Joint types and assembly drawings. 4. Pipe Corrosion Protection: Product data. 5. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by

Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.




1. Manufacturer’s Certification of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements: a. Pipe and fittings. b. Factory applied resins and coatings.

2. Anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.

3. Flanged Pipe and Fittings: Manufacturer’s product data sheets for gaskets including torqueing requirements and bolt tightening procedures.

4. Qualifications: a. Nondestructive Testing Personnel: SNT-TC-1A Level II certification

and qualifications. b. AWS QC1 Certified Welding Inspector: Submit evidence of current

certification prior to commencement of welding activities. c. Welders:

1) Continuity log for welders and welding operators. 2) Welder qualification test records conducted by Contractor or

manufacturer in the 2G and 5G positions. 5. Welding Procedures: Qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX for weld type(s) and base metal(s). 6. Nondestructive inspection and testing procedures. 7. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as

required by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing.


A. Qualifications:

1. Independent Inspection and Testing Agency: a. Ten years’ experience in field of welding and welded pipe and

fittings’ testing required for this Project. b. Calibrated instruments and equipment, and documented standard

procedures for performing specified testing. c. Certified in accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-1A for testing

procedures required for this Project. d. Testing Agency: Personnel performing tests shall be NDT Level II

certified in accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-1A. e. Verification Welding Inspector: AWS QC1 Certified.

2. Welding Procedures: In accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX (Forms QW-482 and QW-483) or AWS D1.1/D1.1M (Annex M Forms).

3. Welder Qualifications: In accordance ASME BPVC SEC IX (Form QW-484) or AWS D1.1/D1.1M (Annex M Forms).



4. Contractor’s CWI: Certified in accordance with AWS QC1, and having prior experience with specified welding codes. Alternate welding inspector qualifications require approval by Engineer.


A. In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, and:

1. Flanges: Securely attach metal, hardboard, or wood protectors over entire gasket surface.

2. Threaded or Socket Welding Ends: Fit with metal, wood, or plastic plugs or caps.

3. Linings and Coatings: Prevent excessive drying. 4. Cold Weather Storage: Locate products to prevent coating from freezing to

ground. 5. Handling: Use heavy canvas or nylon slings to lift pipe and fittings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption: Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification by manufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by the Authority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with the maximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ ANSI 372.


2.02 PIPING

A. As specified on Piping Data Sheet(s) located at the end of this section as Supplement and on Piping Schedule located on Drawings.

B. Diameters Shown:

1. Standardized Products: Nominal size. 2. Fabricated Steel Piping (Except Cement-Lined): Outside diameter,

ASME B36.10M. 3. Cement-Lined Steel Pipe: Lining inside diameter.



2.03 JOINTS

A. Grooved End System:

1. Rigid type. 2. Use of flexible grooved joints allowed where shown on Drawings, where

allowed by designation on the Piping Schedule, or with prior approval by Engineer.

3. Flanges: When required, furnish with grooved type flange adapters of same manufacturer as grooved end couplings.

B. Flanged Joints:

1. Flat-faced, carbon steel, or alloy flanges when mating with flat-faced cast or ductile iron flanges.

2. Higher pressure rated flanges as required to mate with equipment when equipment flange is of higher pressure rating than required for piping.

C. Threaded Joints: NPT taper pipe threads in accordance with ASME B1.20.1.

D. Mechanical Joint Anchor Gland Follower:

1. Ductile iron anchor type, wedge action, with break-off tightening bolts. 2. Thrust rated to 250 psi minimum. 3. Rated operating deflection not less than:

a. 3 degrees for sizes through 12 inches. b. 2 degrees for sizes 14 inches through 16 inches. c. 1.5 degrees for sizes 18 inches through 24 inches. d. 1 degree for sizes 30 inches through 48 inches.

4. UL and FM approved.

E. Flexible Mechanical Compression Joint Coupling:

1. Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 305 bands. 2. Manufacturers:

a. Pipeline Products Corp. b. Fernco Joint Sealer Co.

F. Mechanical connections of high-density polyethylene pipe to auxiliary equipment such as valves, pumps, tanks, and other piping systems shall be through-flanged connections consisting of the following:

1. Polyethylene stub end thermally butt-fused to end of pipe. 2. ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 stainless steel backing flange, 125-pound,

ASME B16.1 standard. Use insulating flanges where shown.



3. Bolts and nuts of sufficient length to show a minimum of three complete threads when joint is made and tightened to manufacturer’s standard. Retorque nuts after 4 hours.

4. Gaskets as specified on Data Sheet.

2.04 GASKET LUBRICANT

A. Lubricant shall be supplied by pipe manufacturer and no substitute or “or-equal” will be allowed.

2.05 PIPE CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Coatings: See Piping Schedule on Drawings for coating/lining requirements and Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, for details of coating systems.

B. Heat Shrink Wrap:

1. Type: Cross-linked polyolefin wrap or sleeve with mastic sealant. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Raychem; WPC or TPS.

C. Insulating Flanges, Couplings, and Unions:

1. Materials: a. In accordance with applicable piping material specified in Pipe Data

Sheet. Complete assembly shall have ASME B31.3 working pressure rating equal to or higher than that of joint and pipeline.

b. Galvanically compatible with piping. c. Resistant for intended exposure, operating temperatures, and products

in pipeline. 2. Union Type, 2 Inches and Smaller:

a. Screwed or solder-joint. b. O-ring sealed with molded and bonded insulation to body.

3. Flange Type, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: a. Flanged, complete with bolt insulators, dielectric gasket, bolts, and

nuts. b. Bolt insulating sleeves shall be provided full length between

insulating washers. c. Ensure fit-up of components of insulated flange assembly to provide a

complete functioning installation. d. AWWA C207 steel flanges may be drilled oversize up to 1/8-inch to

accommodate insulating sleeves. e. No less than minimum thread engagement in accordance with

specified bolting standards will be permitted to accommodate thicknesses of required washers, flanges, and gasket.



4. Flange Insulating Kits: a. Gaskets: Full-face, Type E with elastomeric sealing element. Sealing

element shall be retained in a groove within retainer portion of gasket. b. Insulating Sleeves: Full-length fiberglass reinforced epoxy

(NEMA LI-1, G-10 grade). c. Insulating Washers: Fiberglass-reinforced epoxy (NEMA LI-1, G-10

grade). d. Washers:

1) Compatible with Carbon Steel Fasteners: Hardened steel, ASTM F436, 1/8 inch thick. a) Flange Diameters 36 Inches or Less: Provide two washers

per bolt. b) Flange Diameters Larger than 36 Inches: Provide four

washers per bolt. 2) Compatible with Stainless Steel Fasteners: Type 316 stainless

steel 1/8 inch thick. a) Flange Diameters 36 Inches or Less: Provide two washers

per bolt. b) Flange Diameters Larger than 36 Inches: Provide four

washers per bolt. 5. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Dielectric Flanges and Unions: 1) PSI, Houston, TX. 2) Advance Products and Systems, Lafayette, LA.

b. Insulating Couplings: 1) Dresser; STAB-39. 2) Baker Coupling Company, Inc.; Series 216.

2.06 THRUST TIES

A. Buried Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings: Unless restraint is otherwise specified or shown, conform to NFPA 24. Tie-rod attachments relying on clamp friction with pipe barrel to restrain thrust are unacceptable.

2.07 VENT AND DRAIN VALVES

A. Pipeline 2-Inch Diameter and Smaller: 1/2-inch vent, 1-inch drain, unless shown otherwise.

B. Pipelines 2-1/2-Inch Diameter and Larger: 3/4-inch vent, 1-inch drain, unless shown otherwise.



2.08 FABRICATION

A. Mark each pipe length on outside with the following:

1. Size or diameter and class. 2. Manufacturer’s identification and pipe serial number. 3. Location number on laying drawing. 4. Date of manufacture.

B. Code markings according to approved Shop Drawings.

C. Shop fabricate flanged pipe in shop, not in field, and delivered to Site with flanges in place and properly faced. Threaded flanges shall be individually fitted and machine tightened on matching threaded pipe by manufacturer.

D. Required Weld Examinations:

1. Perform examinations in accordance with Piping Code ASME B31.3 for Normal Fluid Service Category.

2. Perform examinations for every pipe thickness and for each welding procedure, progressively, for piping covered by this Section.

3. Examine at least one of each type and position of weld made by each welder or welding operator.

4. For each weld found to be defective under the acceptance standards or limitations on imperfections contained in the applicable Piping Code, examine two additional welds made by the same welder that produced the defective weld. Such additional examinations are in addition to the minimum required above. Examine, progressively, two additional welds for each tracer examination found to be unsatisfactory.

2.09 FINISHES

A. Factory prepare, factory prime, and field finish coat in accordance with Piping Schedule.

B. Galvanizing:

1. Hot-dip applied, meeting requirements of ASTM A153/A153M. 2. Electroplated zinc or cadmium plating is unacceptable. 3. Stainless steel components may be substituted where galvanizing is

specified.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify size, material, joint types, elevation, horizontal location, and pipe service of existing pipelines to be connected to new pipelines or new equipment.

B. Inspect size and location of structure penetrations to verify adequacy of wall pipes, sleeves, and other openings.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. See Piping Schedule on Drawings and Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, for additional requirements.

B. Notify Engineer at least 2 weeks prior to field fabrication of pipe or fittings.

C. Inspect pipe and fittings before installation, clean ends thoroughly, and remove foreign matter and dirt from inside.

D. Damaged Coatings and Linings: Repair using original coating and lining materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, except for damaged glass-lined pipe or PVDF-lined pipe that is to be promptly removed from Site.

3.03 WELDING

A. Perform in accordance with Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and ASME B31.3 for Normal Fluid Service Category.

B. Weld Identification: Keep paper record of which welder welded each joint.

C. Pipe End Preparation:

1. Machine Shaping: Preferred. 2. Oxygen or Arc Cutting: Smooth to touch, true, and slag removal by

chipping or grinding. 3. Beveled Ends for Butt Welding: ASME B16.25.

D. Surfaces:

1. Clean and free of paint, oil, rust, scale, slag, or other material detrimental to welding.

2. Clean stainless steel joints with stainless steel wire brushes or stainless steel wool prior to welding.



3. Thoroughly clean each layer of deposited weld metal, including final pass, prior to deposition of each additional layer of weld metal with a power-driven wire brush.

E. Alignment and Spacing:

1. Align ends to be joined within existing commercial tolerances on diameters, wall thicknesses, and out-of-roundness.

2. Root Opening of Joint: As stated in qualified welding procedure. 3. Minimum Spacing of Circumferential Butt Welds: Minimum four times

pipe wall thickness or 1 inch, whichever is greater.

F. Climatic Conditions: Do not perform welding if there is impingement of any rain, snow, sleet, or wind exceeding 5 mph on the weld area, or if ambient temperature is below 32 degrees F.

G. Tack Welds: Performed by qualified welder using same procedure as for completed weld, made with electrode similar or equivalent to electrode to be used for first weld pass, and not defective. Remove those not meeting requirements prior to commencing welding procedures.

H. Surface Defects: Chip or grind out those affecting soundness of weld.

I. Weld Quality: Meet requirements of governing welding codes.

3.04 INSTALLATION—GENERAL

A. Join pipe and fittings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, unless otherwise shown or specified.

B. Remove foreign objects prior to assembly and installation.

C. Flanged Joints:

1. Install perpendicular to pipe centerline. 2. Bolt Holes: Straddle vertical centerlines, aligned with connecting equipment

flanges or as shown. 3. Use torque-limiting wrenches to ensure uniform bearing and proper bolt

tightness. 4. Plastic Flanges: Install annular ring filler gasket at joints of raised-face

flange. 5. Grooved Joint Flange Adapters: Include stainless steel washer plates as

required for mating to serrated faces and lined valves and equipment. 6. Raised-Face Flanges: Use flat-face flange when joining with flat-faced

ductile or cast iron flange.



7. Verify compatibility of mating flange to adapter flange gasket prior to selecting grooved adapter flanging.

8. Flange fillers are to be avoided, but if necessary, may be used to make up for small angles up to 6 degrees and for filling gaps up to 2 inches between flanges. Stacked flange fillers shall not be used.

9. Threaded flanged joints shall be shop fabricated and delivered to Site with flanges in-place and properly faced.

10. Manufacturer: Same as pipe manufacturer or grooved joint flange adapter manufacturer.

D. Threaded and Coupled Joints:

1. Conform to ASME B1.20.1. 2. Produce sufficient thread length to ensure full engagement when screwed

home in fittings. 3. Countersink pipe ends, ream and clean chips and burrs after threading. 4. Make connections with not more than three threads exposed. 5. Lubricate male threads only with thread lubricant or tape as specified on

Piping Data Sheets.

E. Grooved-End Joints:

1. Piping shall be grooved in accordance with manufacturer’s latest published instructions and shall be accurately cut with tools conforming to coupling manufacturer’s standards and to AWWA C606.

2. Install grooved joint couplings and gaskets in accordance with manufacturer’s latest published installation instructions.

F. Soldered Joints:

1. Use only solder specified for particular service. 2. Cut pipe ends square and remove fins and burrs. 3. After thoroughly cleaning pipe and fitting of oil and grease using solvent

and emery cloth, apply noncorrosive flux to the male end only. 4. Wipe excess solder from exterior of joint before hardened. 5. Before soldering, remove stems and washers from solder joint valves.

G. Pipe Connections at Concrete Structures: As specified in Article Piping Flexibility Provisions in Section 40 27 01, Process Piping Specialties.

H. PVC and CPVC Piping:

1. Provide Schedule 80 threaded nipple where necessary to connect to threaded valve or fitting.



2. Use strap wrench for tightening threaded plastic joints. Do not overtighten fittings.

3. Do not thread Schedule 40 pipe.

I. Ductile Iron Piping:

1. Cutting Pipe: Cut pipe with milling type cutter, rolling pipe cutter, or abrasive blade cutter. Do not flame cut.

2. Dressing Cut Ends: a. General: As required for the type of joint to be made. b. Rubber Gasketed Joints: Remove sharp edges or projections. c. Push-On Joints: Bevel, as recommended by pipe manufacturer. d. Flexible Couplings, Flanged Coupling Adapters, and Grooved End

Pipe Couplings: As recommended by the coupling or adapter manufacturer.

J. PVDF-Lined Steel Pipe Installation:

1. Cut, make up, and install pipe in accordance with pipe manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. Weld vent extension half-couplings in-place prior to lining pipe. 3. Do not weld on pipe after lining is installed. 4. Prevent plugging of vent extensions with insulation or paint.

K. High-Density Polyethylene Piping:

1. Join pipes, fittings, and flange connections by means of thermal butt-fusion. 2. Perform butt-fusion in accordance with pipe manufacturer’s

recommendations as to equipment and technique. 3. Special Precautions at Flanges: Polyethylene pipe connected to heavy

fittings, manholes, and rigid structures shall be supported in such a manner that no subsequent relative movement between polyethylene pipe at flanged joint and rigid structures is possible.

L. Fiberglass Reinforced Piping:

1. Cut, fabricate, and install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. Provide manufacturer’s representative for instructing workers on proper installation and jointing methods.

3. Installation shall be made by workers experienced in FRP pipe lay-up techniques.



3.05 INSTALLATION—EXPOSED PIPING

A. Piping Runs:

1. Parallel to building or column lines and perpendicular to floor, unless shown otherwise.

2. Piping upstream and downstream of flow measuring devices shall provide straight lengths as required for accurate flow measurement.

B. Supports: As specified in Section 40 05 15, Piping Support Systems.

C. Group piping wherever practical at common elevations; install to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space and other work.

D. Unions or Flanges: Provide at each piping connection to equipment or instrumentation on equipment side of each block valve to facilitate installation and removal.

E. Install piping so that no load or movement in excess of that stipulated by equipment manufacturer will be imposed upon equipment connection; install to allow for contraction and expansion without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

F. Piping clearance, unless otherwise shown:

1. Over Walkway and Stairs: Minimum of 7 feet 6 inches, measured from walking surface or stair tread to lowest extremity of piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems.

2. Between Equipment or Equipment Piping and Adjacent Piping: Minimum 3 feet, measured from equipment extremity and extremity of piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/ support systems.

3. From Adjacent Work: Minimum 1 inch(es) from nearest extremity of completed piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems.

4. Do not route piping in front of or to interfere with access ways, ladders, stairs, platforms, walkways, openings, doors, or windows.

5. Headroom in front of openings, doors, and windows shall not be less than the top of the opening.

6. Do not install piping containing liquids or liquid vapors in transformer vaults or electrical equipment rooms.

7. Do not route piping over, around, in front of, in back of, or below electrical equipment including controls, panels, switches, terminals, boxes, or other similar electrical work.



3.06 INSTALLATION—BURIED PIPE

A. Joints:

1. Dissimilar Buried Pipes: a. Provide flexible mechanical compression joints for pressure pipe. b. Provide concrete closure collar for gravity and piping when shown.

2. Concrete Encased or Embedded Pipe: Do not encase joints in concrete, unless specifically shown.

B. Placement:

1. Keep trench dry until pipe laying and joining are completed. 2. Pipe Base and Pipe Zone: As specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench

Backfill. 3. Exercise care when lowering pipe into trench to prevent twisting or damage

to pipe. 4. Measure for grade at pipe invert, not at top of pipe. 5. Excavate trench bottom and sides of ample dimensions to permit visual

inspection and testing of entire flange, valve, or connection. 6. Prevent foreign material from entering pipe during placement. 7. Close and block open end of last laid pipe section when placement

operations are not in progress and at close of day’s work. 8. Lay pipe upgrade with bell ends pointing in direction of laying. 9. Deflect pipe at joints for pipelines laid on a curve using unsymmetrical

closure of spigot into bell. If joint deflection of standard pipe lengths will not accommodate horizontal or vertical curves in alignment, provide: a. Shorter pipe lengths. b. Special mitered joints. c. Standard or special fabricated bends.

10. After joint has been made, check pipe alignment and grade. 11. Place sufficient pipe zone material to secure pipe from movement before

next joint is installed. 12. Prevent uplift and floating of pipe prior to backfilling.

C. Tolerances:

1. Deflection from Horizontal Line Except PVC, CPVC, or HDPE: Maximum 2 inches.

2. Deflection From Vertical Grade: Maximum 1/4 inch. 3. Joint Deflection: Maximum of 75 percent of manufacturer’s

recommendation. 4. Pipe Cover: Minimum 3 feet, unless otherwise shown.



3.07 INSTALLATION—CONCRETE ENCASED

A. Provide reinforced concrete pipe encasement where shown on Drawings and where otherwise required. Some piping may be required to be concrete encased for pipe strength requirements that are included in the Specifications. Piping under and within the influence of buildings, utility trenches, vaults, slabs, and other structures shall be concrete encased. See details on Drawings for encasement requirements.

B. Where concrete encased piping crosses structure construction and expansion joints, provide flexible piping joints to coincide with structure joints to prevent excessive pipe stress and breakage.

3.08 PIPE CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Ductile Iron Pipe:

1. Exposed: As shown in the Piping Schedule on Drawings and specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

2. Buried: System No. 8 as specified in Section 09 90 00, Paint and Coating, and as shown in the Piping Schedule on Drawings.

3. Submerged or Embedded: System No. 2 as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. If in potable water service, use NSF/ANSI 61 approved epoxy.

B. Carbon Steel Pipe:

1. Exposed: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, and as shown in the Piping Schedule on Drawings.

2. Buried: a. Pipe: Wrap with tape coating system as specified in Section 09 90 00,

Painting and Coating. b. Joints: Wrap with tape coating system as specified in

Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, or heat shrink wrap as specified herein.

3. Submerged or Embedded: Shop coat with coal-tar epoxy or high build epoxy as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. If in potable water service, use NSF/ANSI 61 approved epoxy.

C. Copper Pipe:

1. Exposed: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, and the Piping Schedule on Drawings.



D. PVC and CPVC Pipe, Exposed: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, and the Piping Schedule on Drawings.

E. Piping Accessories:

1. Exposed: a. Field paint black and galvanized steel, brass, copper, and bronze

piping components as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, as applicable to base metal material.

b. Accessories include, but are not limited to, pipe hangers, supports, expansion joints, pipe guides, flexible couplings, vent and drain valves, and fasteners.

2. Buried: a. Ferrous Metal and Stainless Steel Components: System No. 8 as

specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. b. Bolts, Nuts, and Similar Items: Coat with epoxy or bituminous paint. c. Flexible Couplings, Grooved Couplings, and Similar Items: Wrap

with heat shrink wrap or coat with cement. d. Buried Valves and Similar Elements on Wrapped Pipelines: Coat with

bituminous paint or epoxy and wrap entire valve in polyethylene encasement.

e. Cement-Coated Pipelines: Cement coat appurtenances same as pipe.

F. Polyethylene Encasement: Install in accordance with AWWA C105/A21.5 and manufacturer’s instructions.

G. Tape Coating System: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

H. Heat Shrink Wrap: Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to surfaces that are cleaned, prepared, and primed.

I. Insulating Flanges, Couplings, and Unions:

1. Applications: a. Dissimilar metal piping connections. b. Cathodically protected piping penetration to buildings and watertight

structures. c. Where required for electrically insulated connection.

2. Pipe Installation: a. Submerged carbon steel, ductile iron, or galvanized piping in

reinforced concrete shall be isolated from the concrete reinforcement steel.



b. Align and install insulating joints as shown on Drawings and according to manufacturer’s recommendations. Bolt lubricants that contain graphite or other metallic or electrically conductive components that can interfere with the insulating capabilities of the completed flange shall not be used.

J. Pipe Bonding for Buried Piping: As specified in Section 26 42 01, Pipe Bonding and Test Stations.

K. Cathodic Protection for Buried Piping: As specified in Section 26 42 02, Galvanic Anode Cathodic Protection System, and as shown.

3.09 THRUST RESTRAINT

A. Location:

1. Buried Piping: Where shown and where required to restrain force developed at pipeline tees, plugs, caps, bends, and other locations where unbalanced forces exist because of hydrostatic testing and normal operating pressure.

2. Exposed Piping: At all joints in piping.

B. Thrust Ties:

1. Ductile Iron Pipe: Attach with socket clamps anchored against grooved joint coupling or flange.

2. Flanged Coupling Adapters: For exposed installations, install manufacturer’s anchor studs through coupling sleeve or use dismantling joints.

C. Mechanical Joint Valve Restraint in Proprietary Restrained Joint Piping: Install pipe joint manufacturer’s adapter gland follower and pipe end retainer, or mechanical joint anchor gland follower.

3.10 SLAB, FLOOR, WALL, AND ROOF PENETRATIONS

A. Application and Installation: As specified in Section 40 27 01, Process Piping Specialties.

3.11 BRANCH CONNECTIONS

A. Do not install branch connections smaller than 1/2-inch nominal pipe size, including instrument connections, unless shown otherwise.



B. When line of lower pressure connects to a line of higher pressure, requirements of Piping Data Sheet for higher pressure rating prevails up to and including first block valve in the line carrying the lower pressure, unless otherwise shown.

C. Threaded Pipe Tap Connections:

1. Ductile Iron Piping: Connect only with service saddle or at tapping boss of a fitting, valve body, or equipment casting.

2. Welded Steel or Alloy Piping: Connect only with welded threadolet or half-coupling as specified on Piping Data Sheet.

3. Limitations: Threaded taps in pipe barrel are unacceptable.

3.12 VENTS AND DRAINS

A. Vents and drains at high and low points in piping required for completed system may or may not be shown. Install vents on high points and drains on low points of pipelines at all low and high point locations.

3.13 INSULATION

A. See Section 40 42 13, Process Piping Insulation.

3.14 HEAT TRACING

A. See Section 40 05 33, Pipe Heat Tracing.


A. Notify Engineer at least 3 days prior to start of surface preparation or coating application work.

B. As shown on the Piping Schedule on Drawings and specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

3.16 PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.


A. Pressure Leakage Testing: As specified in Section 40 80 01, Process Piping Leakage Testing.



B. Minimum Duties of Welding Inspector:

1. Job material verification and storage. 2. Qualification of welders. 3. Certify conformance with approved welding procedures. 4. Maintenance of records and preparation of reports in a timely manner. 5. Notification to Engineer of unsatisfactory weld performance within

24 hours of weld test failure.

C. Required Weld Examinations:

1. Perform examinations in accordance with Piping Code ASME B31.3 for Normal Fluid Service.

2. Perform examinations for every pipe thickness and for each welding procedure, progressively, for piping covered by this section.

3. Examine at least one of each type and position of weld made by each welder or welding operator.

4. For each weld found to be defective under the acceptance standards or limitations on imperfections contained in the applicable Piping Code, examine two additional welds made by the same welder that produced the defective weld. Such additional examinations are in addition to the minimum required above. Examine, progressively, two additional welds for each tracer examination found to be unsatisfactory.

3.18 CLEANING

A. Following assembly and testing, and prior to final acceptance, flush pipelines, except as stated below, with water at 2.5 fps minimum flushing velocity until foreign matter is removed.

B. Blow clean of loose debris plant process air with compressed air at 4,000 fpm; do not flush with water.

C. If impractical to flush large diameter pipe at 2.5 fps or blow at 4,000 fpm velocity, clean in-place from inside by brushing and sweeping, then flush or blow line at lower velocity.

D. Insert cone strainers in flushing connections to attached equipment and leave in-place until cleaning is complete.

E. Remove accumulated debris through drains 2 inches and larger or by removing spools and valves from piping.



3.19 SUPPLEMENTS

A. The supplements listed below, following “End of Section,” are a part of this Specification:

1. Data Sheets.

Number Title

40 27 00.01 Cement-Mortar-Lined and Glass-Lined and Epoxy-Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings

40 27 00.03 Carbon Steel Pipe and Fittings—General Service

40 27 00.08 Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings—General Service

40 27 00.10 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings

40 27 00.13 Copper and Copper Alloy Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings

40 27 00.21 Profile Wall Polyethylene (PWPE) Piping

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 CEMENT-MORTAR-LINED AND GLASS-LINED JANUARY 2020 AND EPOXY-LINED DUCTILE IRON ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS PIPE AND FITTINGS 40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 1

SECTION 40 27 00.01 CEMENT-MORTAR-LINED AND GLASS-LINED AND EPOXY-LINED

DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

Item Description

General Materials in contact with potable water shall conform to NSF 61 acceptance.

Pipe manufacturer shall submit certification that source manufacturing facility has been producing ductile iron pipe of specified diameters, dimensions, and standards for a period of not less than 10 years. Testing of pipe required by AWWA C151/A21.51 shall be conducted in testing and laboratory facilities located in the USA and operating under USA laws and regulations. Pipe shall be handled during manufacture and shipped without nesting (without insertion of one pipe inside another).

Pipe Buried Liquid Service Using Mechanical or Proprietary Restrained Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, and AWWA C151/A21.51, pressure class conforming to Table 5 and Table 7 for Type 4 trench, 250 psi minimum working pressure. Follower glands shall be ductile iron.

Exposed Pipe Using Grooved End and Flange Joints: AWWA C115/ A21.15, thickness Class 53 minimum, 250 psi minimum working pressure.

Lining Cement-mortar with Asphaltic Seal Coat: AWWA C104/A21.4.

Glass: ASTM B1000.

Epoxy: Protecto 401, 40 mils thick minimum dry film thickness. No “or-equal.”

Fittings Lined and coated same as pipe.

Mechanical: AWWA C110/A21.10, AWWA C111/A21.11, and AWWA C153/A21.53 ductile iron, 250 psi minimum working pressure. Follower glands shall be ductile iron.

Proprietary Restrained: AWWA C110/A21.10, AWWA C111/A21.11, and AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile iron, 250 psi minimum working pressure. Restraint shall be achieved with removable metal elements fitted between a welded bar on the pipe barrel and the inside of the joint bell or fitting sizes smaller than 16 inches may be mechanical joint, restrained by anchor gland followers, ductile iron anchor type, wedge action, with break-off tightening bolts. Assembled joints shall


CEMENT-MORTAR-LINED AND GLASS-LINED PW\DEN003\708335 AND EPOXY-LINED DUCTILE IRON JANUARY 2020 PIPE AND FITTINGS ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 2



Item Description be rated for deflection in operation at rated pressure. Rated deflection shall be not less than 1-1/2 degrees for 36-inch and smaller pipe. Rated deflection shall be not less than 1/2 degree for 42-inch and larger pipe. Clow Corp., American Cast Iron Pipe Co., U.S. Pipe. Restrained joints relying on metal teeth molded into the gasket to prevent joint separation under pressure will not be accepted.

Grooved End: AWWA C606 and AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile iron, 250 psi minimum working pressure; Victaulic; Gruvlok, no “or equals” or substitutions allowed.

Flange: AWWA C110/A21.10 ductile iron, faced and drilled, Class 125 flat face. Gray cast iron will not be allowed. When mated with FRP or PVC pipe, provide a 1/4 inch minimum thickness ductile iron or steel backing ring behind the elastomer flange. Backing ring shall be coated with System No. 5 when above grade, and coated with a fusion bonded epoxy when buried.

Joints Mechanical: 250 psi minimum working pressure.

Proprietary Restrained: 150 psi minimum working pressure. U.S. Pipe, TR Flex, or American Pipe; Flex-Ring. No equal or substitutions allowed.

Grooved End: Rigid type radius cut conforming to AWWA C606, 250 psi minimum working pressure; Victaulic; Gruvlok, no “or-equals” or substitutions allowed.

Flange: Dimensions per AWWA C110/A21.10 flat face ductile iron, threaded conforming to AWWA C115/A21.15. Gray cast iron will not be allowed.

Branch connections 3 inches and smaller, except from glass lined pipe shall be made with service saddles as specified in Section 40 27 01, Process Piping Specialties. Branch connections, 3 inches and smaller from glass lined pipe shall be made with glass lined tee with a flanged branch for adapting to branch piping.


PW\DEN003\708335 CEMENT-MORTAR-LINED AND GLASS-LINED JANUARY 2020 AND EPOXY-LINED DUCTILE IRON ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS PIPE AND FITTINGS 40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 3



Item Description

Couplings Grooved End: 250 psi minimum working pressure, malleable iron per ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron per ASTM A536; Victaulic; Gruvlok, no “or equals” or substitutions allowed.

Grooved End Adapter Flanges: 250 psi minimum working pressure, malleable iron per ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron per ASTM A536; Victaulic.

Bolting Mechanical, Proprietary Restrained, and Grooved End Joints: Manufacturer’s standard.

Flanged: ASTM A307, Grade B carbon steel heavy hex head or stud bolts, ASTM A563, Grade A carbon steel heavy hex head nuts and ASTM F436 hardened steel washers at nuts and bolt heads. Stud bolts are not allowed when bolting to tapped flanges. Torque bolts per gasket manufacturer recommendations.

Flanged Joints in Sumps, Wet Wells, and Submerged and Wetted Installations: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A320/A320M, Grade B8M heavy hex head or stud bolts; ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8M heavy hex nuts and ASTM F436 Type 3 alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads. Stud bolts are not allowed when bolting to tapped flanges. Torque bolts per gasket manufacturer recommendations.

For buried bolts, apply a wax tape or epoxy per System No. 8 of Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, after installation and hydrostatic testing and before backfill.

Gaskets General: Gaskets in contact with potable water shall be NSF ANSI 61 certified.

Mechanical and Proprietary Restrained Joints; Water and Sewage Service: Halogenated butyl or EPDM, Shore A hardness durometer 60, conforming to AWWA C111/A21.11.

Grooved End Joints: Halogenated butyl conforming to ASTM D2000 and AWWA C606.

Flanged, Water, Sewage and Hot Air Services: 1/8-inch-thick, homogeneous black rubber (EPDM), hardness 60-80 (Shore A), rated to 275 degrees F, conforming to ASME B16.21 and ASTM D2000.


CEMENT-MORTAR-LINED AND GLASS-LINED PW\DEN003\708335 AND EPOXY-LINED DUCTILE IRON JANUARY 2020 PIPE AND FITTINGS ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 4



Item Description

Full face for flat-faced flanges, flat-ring type for raised-face flanges. Blind flanges shall be epoxy-lined in accordance with the system specified above.

Gasket pressure rating to equal or exceed the system hydrostatic test pressure.

Joint Lubricant Manufacturer’s standard.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 CARBON STEEL PIPE AND JANUARY 2020 FITTINGS—GENERAL SERVICE ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 40 27 00.03 DATA SHEET - 1

SECTION 40 27 00.03 CARBON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS—GENERAL SERVICE

Item Size Description

Pipe All Black carbon steel, ASTM A106/A106M, Grade B seamless or ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B seamless or ERW. Threaded, butt-welded, grooved end, and flanged joints:

Threaded:

1-1/2" & smaller Standard weight.

Welded and Flanged:

2" thru 10" Standard weight.



Grooved:

2-1/2" thru 6" Standard weight.


14" Standard weight.

Joints 1-1/2" & smaller Threaded or flanged at valves and equipment or grooved end meeting the requirements of AWWA C606.

2" & larger Butt-welded or flanged at valves and equipment, or grooved end meeting the requirements of AWWA C606.


CARBON STEEL PIPE AND PW\DEN003\708335 FITTINGS—GENERAL SERVICE JANUARY 2020 40 27 00.03 DATA SHEET - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS



Fittings 1-1/2" & smaller Threaded: 150-pound or 300-pound malleable iron, ASTM A197/A197M or ASTM A47/A47M, dimensions in accordance with ASME B16.3. Fire sprinkler fittings to be UL listed.

Grooved End: Malleable iron ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron ASTM A536, grooved ends to accept couplings without field preparation. Victaulic Co.; Anvil International, Inc., Gruvlok.

2" & larger Butt Welded: Wrought carbon steel buttwelding, ASTM A234/A234M, Grade WPB meeting the requirements of ASME B16.9; fitting wall thickness to match adjoining pipe; long radius elbows unless shown otherwise.

Grooved End: Malleable iron ASTM A47/A47M, ductile iron ASTM A536, forged steel ASTM A234/A234M, or factory fabricated from ASTM A53/A53M pipe. Grooved ends to accept couplings without field preparation. Victaulic Co.; Anvil International, Inc., Gruvlok; Shurjoint Piping Products.

Branch Connections

1-1/2" & smaller For Threaded Pipe: Threaded, straight, or reducing tees in conformance with Fittings specified above.

For welded or grooved pipe, use threadolet.

2" & larger Butt-welding or grooved end tee in conformance with Fittings specified above.





Flanges 1-1/2" & smaller Forged carbon steel, ASTM A105/A105M, Grade II, ASME B16.5 Class 150 or Class 300 socket-weld or threaded, 1/16-inch raised face.

2" & larger Butt-Welded Systems Standard Flange (RFWN): Forged carbon steel, ASTM A105/A105M, ASME B16.5 Class 150 or Class 300 slip-on or welding neck, 1/8-inch raised face; weld neck bore to match pipe internal diameter. Use weld neck flanges when abutting butt-weld fittings. Weld slip-on flanges inside and outside.

Butt-Welded Systems Standard Flange (FFWN): Forged carbon steel, ASTM A105/A105M, ASME B16.5 Class 150 or Class 300 slip-on or welding neck, 1/8-inch flat face; weld neck bore to match pipe internal diameter. Use weld neck flanges when abutting butt-weld fittings. Weld slip-on flanges inside and outside.

Butt-Welded Systems Blind Flange: Forged carbon steel, ASTM A105/A105M, ASME B16.5 Class 150, 1/8-inch flat face.

Grooved End Adapter Flange: Malleable iron ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron ASTM A536. Victaulic Style 741 or 743; Anvil International, Inc., Gruvlok Figure 7012 or 7013; Shurjoint Model 7041-A. Include stainless steel washer plates as required for mating to serrated faces and lined valves and equipment.

Cast Iron Mating Flange: AWWA C207, Class D or E, hub or ring type to mate with ASME B16.1, Class 125 cast-iron flange. AWWA C207 Class F hub type or ASTM A105/A105M, ASME B16.5 Class 300 to mate with ASME B16.1 Class 250 cast-iron flange.





Unions 1-1/2" & smaller Threaded malleable iron, ASTM A197/A197 or ASTM A47/A47M, 150-pound or 300-pound WOG, meeting the requirements of ASME B16.3.

Couplings 2" & larger Grooved End: Rigid joint malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron, ASTM A536. Victaulic Co.; Anvil International, Inc., Gruvlok; Shurjoint Piping Products.

Screwed End: Malleable iron, ASTM A197/A197M or ASTM A47/A47M.

Bolting All Flanges: Carbon steel ASTM A307, Grade A hex head bolts; ASTM A563, Grade A hex head nuts and ASTM F436 hardened steel washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.

When mating flange on equipment is cast iron and gasket is flat ring, provide ASTM A307, Grade B hex head bolts; ASTM A563, Grade A heavy hex nuts and ASTM F436 hardened steel washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.

Grooved End Couplings: Carbon steel, ASTM A183 bolts and nuts, 110,000 psi minimum tensile strength.

Flanged Joints in Sumps, Wet Wells, and Submerged and Wetted Installations: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A320/A320M, Grade B8M hex head bolts; ASTM A194/ A194M, Grade 8M hex nuts and ASTM F436 Type 3 alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.





Gaskets All flanges Water, Steam, and Air Services: Gasket, inorganic aramid fiber with nitrile binder, CL150, 1/8-inch thick, Shore A 80 Durometer, ASME B16.21 and ASME B16.5, ASTM D2000, NSF 61, full-face gasket for raised-face flange, extended to inner edge of bolt.

Fuel Gas Service: 1/8-inch thick, homogeneous black rubber (EPDM), hardness 60 (Shore A), rated 250 degrees F continuous and conforming to ASME B16.21, ASTM D1330, Steam Grade.

Blind Flanges: Gasketed covering the entire inside face with the gasket cemented to the blind flange. Gasket, inorganic aramid fiber with nitrile binder, CL150, 1/8-inch thick, Shore A 80 Durometer, ASME B16.21 and ASME B16.5, ASTM D2000, NSF 61, flat-ring gasket for flat-face flange.

Insulating Gasket: ASME B16.21 and ASME 16.5, fabric reinforced phenolic neoprene faced gasket, sleeves, washers, CL150, 1/8-inch thick, 175 degrees F Step-Ko Type E DW or approved equal.

Grooved Couplings: Gasket, inorganic aramid fiber with nitrile binder, CL150, 1/8-inch thick, Shore A 80 Durometer, ASME B16.21 and ASME B16.5, ASTM D2000, NSF 61, full-face gasket for raised-face flange, extended to inner edge of bolt. NSF 61 approved for potable water service.





Thread Lubricant

1-1/2" & smaller General Service: 100 percent virgin PTFE Teflon tape.

Fuel Gas Service: Yellow Teflon tape designed for fuel gas service, Air Force A-A-58092, AA Thread Seal Tape, Inc.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND JANUARY 2020 FITTINGS—GENERAL SERVICE ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 40 27 00.08 DATA SHEET - 1

SECTION 40 27 00.08 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS—GENERAL SERVICE


Pipe 2-1/2" & smaller Schedule 40S: ASTM A312/A312M, Type 316 seamless, pickled and passivated.

3" thru 6" Schedule 10S: ASTM A312/A312M Type 316L, pickled and passivated.

8" & larger Schedule 5S: ASTM A312/A312M, Type 316L, pickled and passivated.

Joints 1-1/2" & smaller Threaded or flanged at equipment as required or shown.

2" & larger Butt-welded or flanged at valves and equipment.

Fittings 1-1/2" & smaller Threaded: Forged 1,000 CWP minimum, ASTM A182/A182M, Grade F316 or cast Class 150, ASTM A351/A351M, Grade CF8M/316.

2" & 2-1/2" Butt Welded: ASTM A403/A403M, Grade WP316L conforming to ASME B16.9 and MSS SP 43, annealed, pickled and passivated; fitting wall thickness to match adjoining pipe; long radius elbows, unless shown otherwise.

3" & larger Butt-Welded: ASTM A774/A774M conforming to MSS SP 43, “as-welded” grade, Type 316L pickled and passivated; fitting wall thickness to match adjoining pipe; long radius elbows, unless shown otherwise.

Branch Connections 1-1/2" & smaller Tee or reducing tee in conformance with fittings above.

2" & larger Butt-welding tee or reducing tee in accordance with fittings above.


STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND PW\DEN003\708335 FITTINGS—GENERAL SERVICE JANUARY 2020 40 27 00.08 DATA SHEET - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS



Flanges All Forged Stainless Steel: ASTM A182/A182M, Grade F316L, ASME B16.5 Class 150 or Class 300, slip-on weld neck or raised face. Weld slip-on flanges inside and outside.

Cast Carbon Steel: ASTM A216/A216M Grade WCA, drilled, ASME B16.5 Class 150 or Class 300 Van Stone Type with stainless steel stub ends, ASTM A240/A240M Type 316L “as-welded grade”, conforming to MSS SP 43, wall thickness same as pipe.

Blind Flanges, exposed to the atmosphere and not buried nor immersed in liquid, may be either stainless steel or Class 125 ductile iron or Class 150 carbon steel with gaskets as specified herein.

Unions 2" & smaller Threaded Forged: ASTM A182/A182M, Grade F316, 2,000-pound or 3,000-pound WOG, integral ground seats, AAR design meeting the requirements of ASME B16.11, bore to match pipe.

Bolting All Forged Flanges: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A320/A320M Grade B8M hex head bolts, ASTM A194/A194M Grade 8M hex head nuts and ASTM F436 Type 3 alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.


PW\DEN003\708335 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND JANUARY 2020 FITTINGS—GENERAL SERVICE ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 40 27 00.08 DATA SHEET - 3



Van Stone Flanges and anywhere mating flange on equipment is cast iron and gasket is flat ring: Carbon steel ASTM A307 Grade B hex head bolts, ASTM A563 Grade A hex head nuts and ASTM F436 hardened steel washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.

Flanged Joints in Sumps, Wet Wells, and Submerged and Wetted Installations: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A320/A320M, Grade B8M hex head bolts and ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8M hex nuts and ASTM F436 Type 3 alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.

Gaskets All Flanges Flanged, Water, Hot Air, Fuel Gas and Sewage Services: 1/8 inch thick, homogeneous black rubber (EPDM), hardness 60 (Shore A), rated to 250 degrees F. continuous and conforming to ASME B16.21 and ASTM D1330, Steam Grade.

Blind Flanges: Gasketed covering entire inside face with gasket cemented to blind flange.

Thread Lubricant 2" & smaller General Service: 100 percent virgin PTFE Teflon tape

Fuel Gas Service: Yellow Teflon tape designed for fuel gas service, Air Force A-A-58092, AA Thread Seal Tape, Inc.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) JANUARY 2020 PIPE AND FITTINGS ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 40 27 00.10 DATA SHEET - 1

SECTION 40 27 00.10 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS


General All Materials in contact with potable water shall conform to NSF 61 acceptance.

Pipe All Schedule 80 PVC: Type I, Grade I or Class 12454-B conforming to ASTM D1784 and ASTM D1785. Pipe shall be manufactured with titanium dioxide for ultraviolet protection.

Threaded Nipples: Schedule 80 PVC.

Fittings All Schedule to Match Pipe Above: ASTM D2466 and ASTM D2467 for socket weld type and Schedule 80 ASTM D2464 for threaded type. Fittings shall be manufactured with titanium dioxide for ultraviolet protection.

Joints All Solvent socket weld except where connection to threaded valves and equipment may require future disassembly.

Flanges All One-piece, molded hub type PVC flat face flange in accordance with Fittings above, ASME B16.1, Class 125 drilling.

When mating to a ductile iron or steel flange, provide a fusion bonded epoxy coated ductile iron backing ring behind the PVC flange.

Bolting All Flat Face Mating Flange and In Corrosive Areas: ASTM A193/A193M, Type 316 stainless steel Grade B8M hex head bolts, ASTM A194/A194M Grade 8M hex head nuts and ASTM F436 Type 3 alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.

With Raised Face Mating Flange: Carbon steel ASTM A307 Grade B square head bolts, ASTM A563 Grade A heavy hex head nuts and ASTM F436 hardened steel washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.


POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PW\DEN003\708335 PIPE AND FITTINGS JANUARY 2020 40 27 00.10 DATA SHEET - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 40 27 00.10 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS


Gaskets All Flat Face Mating Flange: Full faced 1/8-inch-thick ethylene propylene (EPR) rubber.

Raised Face Mating Flange: Flat ring 1/8-inch ethylene propylene (EPR) rubber, with filler gasket between OD of raised face and flange OD to protect the flange from bolting moment.

Solvent Cement All Socket type joints shall be made employing solvent cement that meets or exceeds the requirements of ASTM D2564 and primer that meets or exceeds requirements of ASTM F656, chemically resistant to the fluid service, and as recommended by pipe and fitting manufacturer, except solvent weld cement for PVC pipe joints in sodium hypochlorite service (Chlorine Solution) shall be free of silica filler and shall be certified by the manufacturer to be suitable for that service, IPS Weld-On 724 or approved equal. Certification shall be submitted. Solvent cement and primer shall be listed by NSF 61 for contact with potable water.

Thread Lubricant All Teflon Tape.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY JANUARY 2020 PIPE, TUBING, AND FITTINGS ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 40 27 00.13 DATA SHEET - 1

SECTION 40 27 00.13 COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY PIPE, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

Item Description

General Materials in contact with potable water shall conform to NSF 61 acceptance.

Pipe Oxygen Service: Red brass, seamless, standard wall thickness, conforming to ASTM B43.

Tubing Seamless, conforming to ASTM B88 as follows:

Water (buried) .......................... Type K, soft or hard temper Water (exposed) ........................ Type L, hard drawn Domestic hot water ................... Type L, hard drawn Compressed air service ............. Type L, hard drawn

Fittings ASTM B75/B75M commercially pure wrought copper, socket joint, dimensions conforming to ASME B16.22.

Flanges Class 150, ASTM B75/B75M commercially pure wrought copper, socket joint, ASME B16.24 standard.

Bolting ASTM A307, carbon steel, Grade A hex head bolts, ASTM A563 Grade A hex head nuts and ASTM F436 hardened steel washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.

Gaskets 1/16-inch-thick nonasbestos compression type, full face, Cranite, John Manville.

Solder Joints 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller: Wire solder (95 percent tin), conforming to ASTM B32 Alloy Grade Sn95. Do not use cored solder.

Joints Larger Than 2-1/2 Inch: Wire solder, melt range approximately 440 degrees F to 660 degrees F, conforming to ASTM B32 Alloy Grade HB or HN. Do not use cored solder.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PROFILE WALL JANUARY 2020 POLYETHYLENE (PWPE) ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 40 27 00.21 DATA SHEET - 1

SECTION 40 27 00.21 PROFILE WALL POLYETHYLENE (PWPE)

Item Description

Pipe ASTM F894, PE4710 profile wall type pipe (Spirolite, “or-equal”), minimum class 63. Calculations shall be submitted based on site conditions to verify pipe class.

Provide magnetic tracer tape.

Profile Extruded ribs for structural rigidity and strength.

Joints Bell and spigot, gasketed type. Gaskets per ASTM F477.

Flanges: Flange dimensions and bolt pattern shall be coordinated between above grade and below grade duct to ensure a mating pattern. Minimum 1-inch thick HDPE fabricated flanges for connections to FRP ductwork. Stainless steel backing rings shall be used for connections to valves, stainless steel pipe, or flanged expansion joints. Flange gasket to be 1/8-inch thick EPDM. Flange adapter may be butt-fusion welded or extrusion welded to solid wall pipe for attaching to profile wall pipe. Interior of pipe to remain smooth (no step down) at any transitions.

Fittings Manufacturer’s standard; same stiffness and class as adjacent pipe.

Where mitered elbows are provided, interior of fitting shall remain smooth. Trim any residual material as necessary. Provide double mitered as a minimum, unless otherwise noted.

Source Quality Control Resin shall meet 445574C per ASTM D3350.

Flexible Connections Neoprene with coated stainless steel clamps, 1/2-inch thick or EPDM, 3/8-inch thick with backing rings.


PROFILE WALL PW\DEN003\708335 POLYETHYLENE (PWPE) JANUARY 2020 40 27 00.21 DATA SHEET - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 40 27 00.21 PROFILE WALL POLYETHYLENE (PWPE)

Item Description

Remarks:

1. Connections to stainless steel or FRP ductwork shall be made with flanged connections. Flange dimensions and bolt pattern shall match.

2. Manufacture from materials that meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM D3350-04 for a minimum cell classification of PE 445574C.

3. Place bells facing upstream. Locate bell and spigot joints, pushed home, at each structural joint indicated on Drawings.

4. Elbows shall be two piece for angles equal to or less than 22.5 degrees, three piece for angles between 22.5 and 45 degrees, 4 piece for angles between 45 and 67.5 degrees, and five piece for angles greater than 67.5 degrees.

5. Where joining of profile wall pipe by extrusion welding, all joints shall be performed by factory trained technicians.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES JANUARY 2020 40 27 01 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 40 27 01 PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25,

125, and 250). b. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through

NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

a. C110/A21.10, Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings. b. C153/A21.53, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service. c. C210, Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior

of Steel Water Pipelines. d. C213, Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior

of Steel Water Pipelines. e. C219, Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe. f. Manual M11, Steel Pipe—A Guide for Design and Installation.

3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)

on Iron and Steel Hardware. b. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 24, Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.



Content.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer’s data on materials, construction, end connections, ratings, overall lengths, and live lengths (as applicable).


PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES PW\DEN003\708335 40 27 01 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

2. Metal Bellows Field Finishing: a. Manufacturer’s recommended weld procedures for joining welded

carbon steel piping to stainless steel bellows. b. Welder qualifications for joining welded carbon steel piping to

stainless steel bellows. c. Product data for field-applied System No. 4, high temperature,

epoxy lining and coating in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

3. Chemical Injectors: a. Type, size, quantity, materials, and model number of each. b. Sketch of each showing major parts, main pipe, and dimensions. c. Details and model number of each support system and component. d. Details and model of connects (for example, service saddle,

weld-o-let).


1. Coupling Harness: a. Details, ratings, calculations and test reports for thrust restraints

relying on welded bars or rings. b. Weld procedure qualifications. c. Load proof-testing report of prototype restraint for any size

coupling.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Provide required piping specialty items, whether shown or not shown on Drawings, as required by applicable codes and standard industry practice.

B. Rubber ring joints, mechanical joints, flexible couplings, and proprietary restrained ductile iron pipe joints are considered flexible joints; welded, screwed, and flanged pipe joints are not considered flexible.

C. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption: Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification by manufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by the Authority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with the



maximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372.


2.02 CONNECTORS

A. Elastomer Bellows Connector:

1. Type: Fabricated spool, with single filled arch. 2. Materials: Nitrile tube and wrap-applied neoprene cover. 3. End Connections: Flanged, drilled 125-pound ASME B16.1 standard,

with full elastomer face and steel retaining rings. 4. Working Pressure Rating: 140 psig, minimum, at 180 degrees F for

sizes 12 inches and smaller. 5. Thrust Restraint: Control rods to limit travel of elongation and

compression. 6. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Goodall Rubber Co.; Specification E-1462. b. Garlock; Style 204. c. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.; Style 1501. d. Proco Products, Inc.; Series 220.

B. Quick Connect Couplings for Chemical Services:

1. Type: Twin cam arm actuated, male and female, locking, for chemical loading and transfer.

2. Materials: Glass-filled polypropylene or PVDF with EPDM, Viton-A or Teflon gaskets as recommended for the service by manufacturer.

3. End Connections: NPT threaded or flanged to match piping connections. Hose shank for chemical installations.

4. Plugs and Caps: Female dust cap for each male end; male dust plug for each female end.

5. Pressure Rating: 125 psi, minimum, at 70 degrees F. 6. Manufacturers and Products:

a. OPW; Kamlock. b. Ryan Herco; 1300 Series.



2.03 COUPLINGS

A. General:

1. Coupling linings for use in potable water systems shall be in conformance with NSF/ANSI 61.

2. Couplings shall be rated for working pressure not less than indicated in Piping Schedule as shown on Drawings for the service and not less than 150 psi.

3. Couplings shall be lined and coated with liquid epoxy in accordance with AWWA C210.

4. Unless thrust restraint is provided by other means, couplings shall be harnessed in accordance with requirements of AWWA Manual M11 or as shown on Drawings.

5. Sleeve type couplings shall conform to AWWA C219 and shall be hydraulically expanded beyond minimum yield for accurate sizing and proofing of tensile strength.

B. Flanged Coupling Adapter:

1. Anchor studs where required for thrust restraint. 2. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Steel Pipe: 1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 128. 2) Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 913.

b. Ductile Iron Pipe: 1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 128. 2) Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 912.

C. Restrained Flange Coupling Adapter:

1. Pressure Rating: a. Minimum Working Pressure Rating: Not less than 150 psi. b. Safety Factor: Not less than two times working pressure and shall

be supported by manufacturer’s proof testing. 2. Thrust Restraint:

a. Provide hardened steel wedges that bear against and engage outer pipe surface, and allow articulation of pipe joint after assembly while wedges remain in their original setting position on pipe surface.

b. Products employing set screws that bear directly on pipe will not be acceptable.

3. Manufacturer and Product: EBAA Iron Sales Co.; Mega-Flange.



D. Restrained Dismantling Joints:

1. Pressure Rating: a. Minimum working pressure rating shall not be less than rating of

the connecting flange. b. Proof testing shall conform to requirements of AWWA C219 for

bolted couplings. 2. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 131. b. Smith Blair, Inc.; Model 975.

E. Exposed Metallic Piping Plain End Couplings:

1. Plain end pipe couplings shall be self-restrained against hydrostatic thrust forces equal to not less than two times the working pressure rating of the coupling. Couplings shall accommodate 4 degrees angular deflection at the time of installation and subsequent to pressurization.

2. Casing, bolts, and nuts shall be Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. The sealing sleeve shall be EPDM or NBR elastomer as best suited for the fluid service.

3. Couplings manufacturer and products shall be Straub Couplings, Grip-L or Metal Grip, “or-equal.”

2.04 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Elastomer Bellows:

1. Type: Reinforced molded wide arch. 2. End Connections: Flanged, drilled 125-pound ASME B16.1 standard,

with split galvanized steel retaining rings. 3. Washers: Over retaining rings to help provide leak-proof joint under test

pressure. 4. Thrust Protection: Control rods to protect the bellows from

overextension. 5. Bellows Arch Lining: Buna-N, nitrile, or butyl. 6. Rated Temperature: 250 degrees F. 7. Rated Deflection and Pressure:

a. Lateral Deflection: 3/4 inch, minimum. b. Burst Pressure: Four times the working pressure.



c. Compression deflection and minimum working pressure as follows:

Size (inch)

Deflection (inch)

Pressure (psig)

2-1/2 to 12 1.06 150

14 1.65 130

16 to 20 1.65 110

8. Manufacturers and Products: a. General Rubber Corp.; Style 1015 Maxijoint. b. Mercer; Flexmore Style 450. c. Goodall Rubber Co.; Specification E-711. d. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.; Series 1500. e. Proco Products, Inc.; Series 251.

2.05 SERVICE SADDLES

A. Double-Strap Iron:

1. Pressure Rating: Capable of withstanding 150 psi internal pressure without leakage or over stressing.

2. Run Diameter: Compatible with outside diameter of pipe on which saddle is installed.

3. Taps: Iron pipe threads. 4. Materials:

a. Body: Malleable or ductile iron. b. Straps: Galvanized steel. c. Hex Nuts and Washers: Steel. d. Seal: Rubber.

5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Smith-Blair; Series 313 or Series 366. b. Dresser; Style 91.

B. Nylon-Coated Iron:

1. Pressure Rating: Capable of withstanding 150 psi internal pressure without leakage or over stressing.

2. Run Diameter: Compatible with outside diameter of pipe on which saddle is installed.



3. Materials: a. Body: Nylon-coated iron. b. Seal: Buna-N. c. Clamps and Nuts: Stainless steel.

4. Manufacturer and Product: Smith-Blair; Style 315 or Style 317.

2.06 OUTLET/TAPPING SADDLES

A. Materials:

1. Straps: Alloy steel with 3/4-inch threaded ends. 2. Seal: O-Ring SBR rubber gasket. 3. Compatible with ductile iron pipe.

B. Connection: As shown.

C. Pressure Rating: Capable of withstanding 250 psi internal pressure without leakage over stressing.

D. Manufacturer and Product: American Ductile Iron; Outlet/Tapping Saddle.

2.07 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeve:

1. Minimum Thickness: 3/16 inch. 2. Seep Ring:

a. Center steel flange for water stoppage on sleeves in exterior or water-bearing walls, 3/16-inch minimum thickness.

b. Outside Diameter: Unless otherwise shown, 3 inches greater than pipe sleeve outside diameter.

c. Continuously fillet weld on each side all around. 3. Factory Finish:

a. Galvanizing: 1) Hot-dip applied, meeting requirements of

ASTM A153/A153M. 2) Electroplated zinc or cadmium plating is unacceptable.

b. Shop Lining and Coating: Factory prepare, prime, and finish coat to match piping as shown in the Pipe Schedule on Drawings and in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

B. Molded Polyethylene Pipe Sleeve:

1. Molded HDPE with integral water stop ring not less than 3 inches larger than sleeve.



2. Provided with end caps for support during concrete placement. 3. Manufacturer and Product: Century-Line, Model CS sleeves as

manufactured by PSI-Thunderline/Link-Seal.

C. Insulated and Encased Pipe Sleeve:

1. Manufacturer and Product: Pipe Shields, Inc.; Models WFB, WFB-CS and -CW Series, as applicable.

D. Modular Mechanical Seal:

1. Type: Interconnected synthetic rubber links shaped and sized to continuously fill annular space between pipe and wall sleeve opening.

2. Fabrication: a. Assemble interconnected rubber links with ASTM A276,

Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. b. Pressure plates shall be reinforced nylon polymer.

3. Size: According to manufacturer’s instructions for size of pipes shown to provide a watertight seal between pipe and wall sleeve opening.

4. Manufacturer: Thunderline Corp., Link-Seal Division.

2.08 SLAB, FLOOR, WALL AND ROOF PENETRATIONS

A. Ductile Iron Wall Pipe:

1. Diameter, Lining, and Ends: Same as connecting ductile iron pipe. 2. Thickness: Equal to or greater than remainder of pipe in line. 3. Fittings: In accordance with applicable Pipe Data Sheet. 4. Thrust Collars:

a. Rated for thrust load developed at 250 psi. b. Safety Factor: 2, minimum. c. Material and Construction: Ductile iron or cast iron, cast integral

with wall pipe wherever possible, or thrust rated, welded attachment to wall pipe.

5. Manufacturers: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co. b. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Co.

B. Steel or Stainless Steel Wall Pipe:

1. Same material and thickness as connecting pipe, except 1/4-inch minimum thickness.

2. Lining: Same as connecting pipe.



3. Thrust Collar: a. Outside Diameter: Unless otherwise shown, 3 inches greater than

outside diameter of wall pipe. b. Continuously fillet welded on each side all around.

2.09 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

A. Strainers, Water Service, 2 Inches and Smaller:

1. Type: Bronze body, Y-pattern, 200 psi nonshock rated, with screwed gasketed bronze cap.

2. Screen: Heavy-gauge Type 304 stainless steel or Monel, 20-mesh. 3. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Armstrong International; Inc.; Model F. b. Mueller Steam Specialty; Model 351M.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Provide accessibility to piping specialties for control and maintenance.

3.02 PIPING FLEXIBILITY PROVISIONS

A. General:

1. Thrust restraint shall be provided as specified in Section 40 27 00, Process Piping—General.

2. Install flexible couplings to facilitate piping installation, in accordance with approved shop drawings.

B. Flexible Joints at Concrete Backfill or Encasement: Install within 18 inches or one-half pipe diameter, whichever is less, from the termination of any concrete backfill or concrete encasement.

C. Flexible Joints at Concrete Structures:

1. Install 18 inches or less from face of structures; joint may be flush with face.

2. Install a second flexible joint, whether or not shown. a. Pipe Diameter 18 Inches and Smaller: Within 18 inches of first

joint. b. Pipe Diameter Larger than 18 Inches: Within two to three pipe

diameter of first joint.



D. Flexible expansion joints shall be provided to compensate for earth settlement at buried piping connections to structure wall pipes. Wrap complete joint assembly in a double layer of polyethylene encasement, as specified in Section 40 27 00, Process Piping—General.

3.03 PIPING TRANSITION

A. Applications:

1. Provide complete closure assembly where pipes meet other pipes or structures.

2. Pressure Pipeline Closures: Plain end pieces with double flexible couplings, unless otherwise shown.

3. Restrained Joint Pipe Closures: Install with thrust tie-rod assemblies as shown or in accordance with NFPA 24.

4. Gravity Pipe Closures: As specified for pressure pipelines, or concrete closures.

5. Concrete Closures: Use to make connections between dissimilar pipe where standard rubber gasketed joints or flexible couplings are impractical, as approved.

6. Elastomer sleeves bonded to pipe ends are not acceptable.

B. Installation:

1. Flexible Transition Couplings: Install in accordance with coupling manufacturer’s instructions to connect dissimilar pipe and pipes with a small difference in outside diameter.

2. Concrete Closures: a. Locate away from structures so there are at least two flexible

joints between closure and pipe entering structure. b. Clean pipe surface before placing closure collars. c. Wet nonmetallic pipe thoroughly prior to pouring collars. d. Prevent concrete from entering pipe. e. Extend collar a minimum of 12 inches on each side of joint with

minimum thickness of 6 inches around outside diameter of pipe. f. Make entire collar in one placement. g. After concrete has reached initial set, cure by covering with well-

moistened earth.



3.04 PIPING EXPANSION

A. Piping Installation: Allow for thermal expansion due to differences between installation and operating temperatures.

B. Expansion Joints:

1. Grooved Joint and Flanged Piping Systems: Elastomer bellows expansion joint.

2. Nonmetallic Pipe: Teflon bellows expansion joint. 3. Screwed and Soldered Piping Systems: Copper or galvanized and black

steel pipe expansion compensator, as applicable. 4. Air and Water Service above 120 Degrees F: Metal bellows expansion

joint. 5. Pipe Run Offset: Flexible metal hose.

3.05 SERVICE SADDLES

A. Ferrous Metal Piping (except stainless steel): Double-strap iron.

B. Plastic Piping: Nylon-coated iron.

3.06 OUTLET/TAPPING SADDLE

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.07 COUPLINGS

A. General:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Before coupling, clean pipe holdback area of oil, scale, rust, and dirt. 3. Application:

a. Metallic Piping Systems: Flexible couplings, transition couplings, and flanged coupling adapters.

3.08 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT

A. Install to prevent piping from being supported by equipment, for vibration isolation, and where shown.

B. Product Applications Unless Shown Otherwise:

1. Nonmetallic Piping: Teflon bellows connector. 2. Copper Piping: Flexible metal hose connector.



3. Compressor and Blower Discharge: Metal bellows connector. 4. All Other Piping: Elastomer bellows connector.

C. Limit Bolts and Control Rods: Tighten snug prior to applying pressure to system.

3.09 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Application:

1. As specified in Section 40 27 00, Process Piping—General. 2. Above Grade in Nonsubmerged Areas: Hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication. 3. Below Grade or in Submerged or Damp Environments: Shop-lined and

coated. 4. Alternatively, Molded Polyethylene Pipe Sleeve as specified may be

applied.

B. Installation:

1. Support noninsulating type securely in formwork to prevent contact with reinforcing steel and tie-wires.

2. Caulk joint with specified sealant in non-submerged applications and seal below grade and submerged applications with wall penetration seal.

3.10 SLAB, FLOOR, WALL AND ROOF PENETRATIONS

A. Applications:

1. Watertight and Below Ground Penetrations: a. Wall pipes with thrust collars. b. Provide taps for stud bolts in flanges to be set flush with wall face.

2. Nonwatertight Penetrations: Pipe sleeves with seep ring. 3. Existing Walls: Rotary drilled holes. 4. Fire-Rated or Smoke-Rated Walls, Floors or Ceilings: Insulated and

encased pipe sleeves.

B. Wall Pipe Installation:

1. Isolate embedded metallic piping from concrete reinforcement using coated pipe penetrations as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

2. Support wall pipes securely by formwork to prevent contact with reinforcing steel and tie-wires.



3.11 CHEMICAL INJECTOR SYSTEM

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS JANUARY 2020 40 27 02 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 40 27 02 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z21.15, Manually Operated Gas Valves for Appliances, Appliance Connector Valves and Hose End Valves.

2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25,

125, and 250. b. B16.44, Manually Operated Metallic Gas Valves for Use in

Above Ground Piping Systems up to 5 psi. 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

a. C111/A21.11, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.

b. C508, Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2-In. Through 24-In. (50-mm Through 600-mm) NPS.

c. C542, Electric Motor Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates. d. C550, Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. e. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints.

4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. b. A351/A351M, Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for

Pressure-Containing Parts. c. A380, Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation

of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems. d. A564/A564M, Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled and Cold-

Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. e. B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. f. B62, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce

Metal Castings. g. B98/B98M, Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod,

Bar, and Shapes. h. B127, Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy

(UNS N04400) Plate, Sheet, and Strip. i. B139/B139, Standard Specification for Phosphor Bronze Rod, Bar

and Shapes.


PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS PW\DEN003\708335 40 27 02 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

j. B164, Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy Rod, Bar, and Wire.

k. B194, Standard Specification for Copper-Beryllium Alloy Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar.

l. B584, Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications.

m. D429, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid Substrates.

n. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

5. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS): a. SP-80, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves. b. SP-110, Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint,

Grooved and Flared Ends. 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250,

Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 7. NSF International (NSF):

a. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.

b. NSF/ANSI 372, Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content.

8. UL. 9. USC Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: a. Product data sheets for each make and model. Indicate valve Type

Number, applicable Tag Number, and facility name/number or service where used.

b. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction.

c. Certification for compliance to NSF/ANSI 61 for valves used for drinking water service.

d. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers.

e. For each power actuator provided, manufacturer’s standard data sheet, with application specific features and options clearly identified.

f. Sizing calculations for open-close/throttle and modulating valve actuators.




1. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, for: a. Electric actuators; full compliance with AWWA C542.

2. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as required by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection, Observation, and Testing.

3. Tests and inspection data. 4. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,

Operation and Maintenance Data. 5. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with

Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Valves to include operator, actuator, handwheel, chain wheel, extension stem, floor stand, operating nut, chain, wrench, and accessories to allow a complete operation from the intended operating level.

B. Valve to be suitable for intended service. Renewable parts not to be of a lower quality than specified.

C. Valve same size as adjoining pipe, unless otherwise called out on Drawings or in Supplements.

D. Valve ends to suit adjacent piping.

E. Resilient seated valves shall have no leakage (drip-tight) in either direction at valve rated design pressure. All other valves shall have no leakage (drip-tight) in either direction at valve rated design pressure, unless otherwise allowed for in this section or in stated valve standard.

F. Size operators and actuators to operate valve for full range of pressures and velocities.

G. Valve to open by turning counterclockwise, unless otherwise specified.

H. Factory mount operator, actuator, and accessories.



I. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption: Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification by manufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by the Authority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with the maximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372.


2.02 SCHEDULE

A. Additional requirements relative to this section are shown on Solenoid Actuated Valve Schedule and Self-Regulated Valve Schedule located at the end of this section.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Bronze and brass valve components and accessories that have surfaces in contact with water to be alloys containing less than 16 percent zinc and 2 percent aluminum.

1. Approved alloys are of the following ASTM designations: B61, B62, B98/B98M (Alloy UNS No. C65100, C65500, or C66100), B139/B139M (Alloy UNS No. C51000), B584 (Alloy UNS No. C90300 or C94700), B164, B194, and B127.

2. Stainless steel Alloy 18-8 may be substituted for bronze.

B. Valve materials in contact with or intended for drinking water service to meet the following requirements:

1. Materials to comply with requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements.

2. Coatings materials to be formulated from materials deemed acceptable to NSF/ANSI 61.

3. Supply certification product is certified as suitable for contact with drinking water by an accredited certification organization in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61. Provide certification for each valve type used for drinking water service.



2.04 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General:

1. Interior coatings for valves and hydrants shall be in accordance with AWWA C550, unless otherwise specified.

2. Exterior coating for valves and hydrants shall be in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

3. Material in contact with potable water shall conform to NSF/ANSI 61. 4. Exposed safety isolation valves and lockout valves with handles,

handwheels, or chain wheels shall be “safety yellow.”

B. Where epoxy lining and coating are specified, factory finishing shall be as follows:

1. In accordance with AWWA C550. 2. Either two-part liquid material or heat-activated (fusion) material except

only heat-activated material if specified as “fusion” or “fusion bonded” epoxy.

3. Minimum 7-mil dry film thickness except where limited by valve operating tolerances.

2.05 VALVES

A. Where valves in this section are identified by manufacturer and/or model, no “or-equals” or substitutions allowed.

B. Globe Valves:

1. Type V237 Angle Pattern Hose Valve 1 Inch to 2 Inches: a. All-bronze, NPT threaded ends, inside screw-type rising stem,

TFE disc, cast brass male NPT by male NHT adapter with hexagonal center wrench nut, brass cap with chain, complies with MSS SP-80, rated 300 WOG.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Stockham; Figure B-222T. 2) Crane Co.; Cat. No. 17TF. 3) Nibco; Figure T-335-Y.

2. Type V240 Post Hydrant: a. Nonfreeze, bronze casing, 3/4-inch to 2-inch inlet and outlet, for

3 foot of bury. b. Size as indicated on Drawings. c. Manufacturers and Products:

1) J. R. Smith; Figure 5910 Series. 2) Wade, Division of Tyler Pipe; 8610 Series.



3) Zurn; 1385 (3/4 inch to 1 inch) and 1390 (1-1/4 inch to 2 inch).

C. Ball Valves:

1. Type V300 Ball Valve 3 Inches and Smaller for General Water and Air Service: a. Two-piece, standard port, NPT threaded ends, bronze body and

end piece, hard chrome-plated solid bronze or brass ball, RTFE seats and packing, blowout-proof stem, adjustable packing gland, zinc-coated steel hand lever operator with vinyl grip, rated 600-pound WOG, 150-pound SWP, complies with MSS SP-110.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Threaded:

a) Conbraco Apollo; 70-100. b) Nibco; T-580-70.

2) Soldered: a) Conbraco Apollo; 70-200. b) Nibco; S-580-70.

2. Type V306 Stainless Steel Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller: a. Two-piece, full port, ASTM A276 GR 316 or ASTM A351/

A351M GR CF8M stainless steel body and end piece, NPT threaded ends, ASTM A276 Type 316 stainless steel ball, reinforced PTFE seats, seals, and packing, adjustable packing gland, blowout proof stainless steel stem, stainless steel lever operator with vinyl grip, rated 1,000 psig CWP, complies with MSS SP-110.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Conbraco Apollo; 76F-100 Series. 2) Nibco; T-585-S6-R-66-LL.

3. Type V330 PVC Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller: a. Rated 150 psi at 73 degrees F, with ASTM D1784, Type I,

Grade 1 polyvinyl chloride body, ball, and stem, end entry, double union design, solvent-weld socket ends, elastomer seat, Viton or Teflon O-ring stem seals, to block flow in both directions. Provide pressure relief hole drilled on low pressure side of ball.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Nibco; Chemtrol Tru-Bloc. 2) ASAHI/America; Type 21. 3) Spears; True Union.



4. Type V335 CPVC Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller: a. Rated 150 psi at 100 degrees F, 80 psi at 140 degrees, with

ASTM D1784, Type IV, Grade 1 chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) body, ball, and stem, end entry, double union design, with solvent-weld socket ends or single union ball with flanged ends drilled to ASME B16.1, replaceable Teflon seat, Viton or Teflon O-ring stem seals, to block flow in both directions. Provide pressure relief hole drilled on low pressure side of ball.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Nibco; Chemtrol Tru-Bloc. 2) ASAHI/America; Type 21. 3) Spears; True Union.

D. Plug Valves:

1. Type V400 Eccentric Plug Valve 2 Inches and Smaller: a. Nonlubricated type rated 175 psig CWP, drip-tight shutoff with

pressure from either direction, cast-iron body, threaded ends, lever operator, cast-iron plug with round or rectangular port, plug coated with Buna-N, stem bearing lubricated stainless steel or bronze, stem seal multiple V-rings, or U-cups with O-rings of nitrile rubber.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Pratt; Ballcentric. 2) DeZurik; Style PEC. 3) Milliken; Millcentric Series 603.

2. Type V405 Eccentric Plug Valve 3 Inches to 12 Inches: a. Nonlubricated type rated 175 psig CWP, drip-tight shutoff with

pressure from either direction, cast-iron body, exposed service flanged ends per ASME B16.1 or grooved ends in accordance with AWWA C606 for rigid joints, buried service mechanical joint ends, unless otherwise shown.

b. Plug cast iron with round or rectangular port of no less than 80 percent of connecting pipe area and coated with Buna-N, seats welded nickel, stem bearings lubricated stainless steel or bronze, stem seal multiple V-rings, or U-cups with O-rings of nitrile rubber, grit seals on both upper and lower bearings.

c. For buried service, provide external epoxy coating. d. Operators:

1) 3-Inch to 4-Inch Valves: Wrench lever manual. 2) 6-Inch to 12-Inch Valves: Totally enclosed, geared, manual

operator with handwheel, 2-inch nut or chain wheel. Size operator for 1.5 times maximum operating shutoff pressure differential for direct and reverse pressure, whichever is



higher. For buried service, provide completely sealed operator filled with heavy lubricant and 2-inch nut.

e. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Pratt; Ballcentric. 2) DeZurik; Style PEC. 3) Milliken; Millcentric Series 600.

3. Type V406 Eccentric Plug Valve 14 Inches to 20 Inches: a. Nonlubricated type rated 150 psig CWP, drip-tight shutoff with

pressure from either direction, cast-iron body, exposed service flanged ends per ASME B16.1 or grooved ends in accordance with AWWA C606 for rigid joints, buried service mechanical joints ends, unless otherwise shown, plug cast iron with round or rectangular port of no less than 80 percent of connecting pipe area and coated with Buna-N, seats welded nickel, stem bearings lubricated stainless steel or bronze, stem seal multiple V-rings or U-cups with O-rings of nitrile rubber, grit seals on both upper and lower bearings.

b. Totally enclosed, geared, manual operator with handwheel, 2-inch nut or chain wheel. Size operator for 1.5 times maximum operating shutoff pressure differential for direct and reverse pressure, whichever is higher. For buried service, provide completely sealed operator filled with heavy lubricant and 2-inch nut.

c. For buried service, provide external epoxy coating. d. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Pratt; Ballcentric. 2) DeZurik; Style PEC. 3) Milliken; Millcentric Series 600.

E. Check and Flap Valves:

1. Type V600 Check Valve 2 Inches and Smaller: a. All bronze, threaded cap, threaded or soldered ends, swing type

replaceable bronze disc, rated 125-pound SWP, 200-pound WOG. b. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Stockham; Figure B-319, threaded ends. 2) Milwaukee; Figure 509, threaded ends. 3) Stockham; Figure B-309, soldered ends. 4) Milwaukee; Figure 1509, soldered ends.

2. Type V608 Swing Check Valve 2 Inches to 24 Inches: a. AWWA C508, 125-pound flanged ends, cast-iron body, bronze

body seat, bronze mounted cast-iron clapper with rubber facing, stainless steel hinge shaft.



b. Valves, 2 inches through 12 inches rated 175-pound WWP and 14 inches through 24 inches rated 150-pound WWP. Valves to be fitted with adjustable outside lever and weight. Increasing-pattern body valve may be used where increased outlet piping size is shown.

c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Pratt; Series 9001. 2) Mueller Co.; 8001 Series. 3) Kennedy Figure 106. 4) No “or-equal” or substitutes allowed.

3. Type V630 PVC Ball Check Valve 4 Inches and Smaller: a. ASTM D1784, Type I, Grade 1 polyvinyl chloride body, dual

union socket weld ends, rated 150 psi at 73 degrees F, and Viton seat and seal.

b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Nibco; Chemtrol Tru Union. 2) ASAHI/America. 3) Spears; True Union.

F. Self-Regulated Automatic Valves:

1. Type V710 Pressure-Reducing Valve 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: a. Direct diaphragm operated, spring controlled, bronze body, NPT

threaded ends, 200-psig rated minimum. b. Size/Rating: As shown in Valve Schedule. c. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Fisher; Type 75A. 2) Watts; Series 223.

G. Miscellaneous Valves:

1. Type V940 Solenoid Valve 1/4 Inch to 2-1/2 Inches: a. Two-way internal pilot operated diaphragm type, brass body,

resilient seat suitable for air or water, solenoid coil molded epoxy, NEMA insulation Class F, 120V ac, 60-Hz, unless otherwise indicated. Solenoid enclosure NEMA 250, Type 4 unless otherwise indicated. Size and normal position (when de-energized) as indicated on the Valve Schedule.

b. Minimum operating pressure differential no greater than 5 psig, maximum operating pressure differential not less than 125 psig.

c. Manufacturers: 1) ASCO. 2) Skinner.



2.06 OPERATORS AND ACTUATORS

A. Manual Operators:

1. General: a. For AWWA valves, operator force not to exceed requirements of

applicable valve standard. Provide gear reduction operator when force exceeds requirements.

b. For non-AWWA valves, operator force not to exceed applicable industry standard or 80 pounds, whichever is less, under operating condition, including initial breakaway. Provide gear reduction operator when force exceeds requirements.

c. Operator self-locking type or equipped with self-locking device. d. Position indicator on quarter-turn valves. e. Worm and gear operators one-piece design, worm-gears of gear

bronze material. Worm of hardened alloy steel with thread ground and polished. Traveling nut type operator’s threaded steel reach rod with internally threaded bronze or ductile iron nut.

2. Exposed Operator: a. Galvanized and painted handwheel. b. Cranks on gear type operator. c. Chain wheel operator with tieback, extension stem, floor stand,

and other accessories to permit operation from normal operation level.

d. Valve handles to take a padlock, and wheels a chain and padlock. 3. Buried Operator:

a. Buried service operators on valves larger than 2-1/2 inches shall have a 2-inch AWWA operating nut. Buried operators on valves 2 inches and smaller shall have cross handle for operation by forked key. Enclose moving parts of valve and operator in housing to prevent contact with the soil.

b. Buried service operators to be grease packed and gasketed to withstand submersion in water to 20 feet minimum.

c. Buried valves shall have extension stems, bonnets, and valve boxes.

B. Electric Motor Actuators, 120 Volts:

1. General: a. Unit shall be low profile to reduce amount of required space and

weigh 15 pounds or less. b. Size to 1-1/2 times required operating torque. Motor stall torque

not to exceed torque capacity of the valve.



c. Provide mounting bracket to mount actuator to valve providing minimal torque to piping system when operating.

2. Operation, General: a. Suitable for full 90-degree rotation of quarter-turn valves. b. Manually override handwheel. c. Mechanical valve position indication.

3. Electronic Control: a. Torque Limiting Switches: Two single pole, double throw

mechanical switches. Switches operate at any point in valve travel.

b. Jammed-valve detection and protection. c. Motor over-temperature detection and protection. d. Travel limit switches, single pole double throw.

4. Open-Close (O/C) Service: a. Duty cycle for intermittent ON-OFF operation shall be 25 percent. b. Actuator shall power to OPEN and power to CLOSE. c. Local Indication and Control:

1) Integral mechanical valve POSITION indication, 0 percent to 100 percent OPENED.

2) Integral OPENED and CLOSED indication lights. 3) Integral LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE (L-O-R). 4) Integral OPEN maintained switch which causes the valve to

stroke full OPENED, even if OPEN switch is released, while L-O-R switch is in LOCAL.

5) Integral CLOSE maintained switch which causes valve to stroke full CLOSED, even if CLOSED switch is released, while L-O-R switch is in LOCAL.

d. Remote Indication and Control: 1) Relay contact that closes when valve is capable of being

controlled remotely (L-O-R switch in REMOTE) for connection to and monitoring by plant control system.

2) Limit switch that closes when valve is fully OPENED for connection to and monitoring by plant control system.

3) Limit switch that closes when valve is fully CLOSED for connection to and monitoring by plant control system.

5. Manufacturer: Rotork.

C. Electric Motor Actuators, 480-volt:

1. General: a. Comply with latest version of AWWA C542. b. Size to 1-1/2 times required operating torque. Motor stall torque

not to exceed torque capacity of valve.



c. Controls integral with actuator and fully equipped as specified in AWWA C542.

d. Stem protection for rising stem valves. 2. Actuator Operation—General:

a. Suitable for full 90-degree rotation of quarter-turn valves or for use on multiturn valves, as applicable.

b. Manual override handwheel. c. Valve position indication. d. Operate from FULL CLOSED to FULL OPEN positions or the

reverse in 60 seconds, unless noted otherwise. e. Nonintrusive Electronic Control: Local controls, diagnostics, and

calibration, including limit and torque settings, shall be accomplished nonintrusively. Electronic valve position display with capability to show continuous torque output. If applicable, provide two hand-held configuration units for every 10 actuators provided, two minimum.

3. Open-Close(O/C)/Throttling(T) Service: a. Size motors for one complete OPEN-CLOSE-OPEN cycle no less

than once every 10 minutes. b. Actuator suitable for throttling operation of valve at intermediate

positions. c. LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE Selector Switch, padlockable in each

position: 1) Integral OPEN-STOP-CLOSE momentary pushbuttons with

seal-in circuits to control valve in LOCAL position. 2) Remote OPEN-STOP-CLOSE momentary control dry

contact inputs in REMOTE position. Integral seal-in circuits for remote OPEN and CLOSE commands; valve travel stops when remote STOP contact opens.

3) Auxiliary contact that closes in REMOTE position. d. OPEN and CLOSED indicating lights. e. Integral reversing motor starter with built-in overload protection.

4. Modulating (M) Service: a. Size actuators for continuous modulating duty. b. Feedback potentiometer, or equivalent, and integral electronic

positioner/comparator circuit to maintain valve position. c. HAND-OFF-AUTO (Local-Off-Remote) Selector Switch,

padlockable in each position: 1) Integral OPEN-STOP-CLOSE momentary pushbuttons with

seal-in circuits to control valve in HAND (Local) position. 2) 4 to 20 mA dc input signal to control valve in AUTO

(Remote) position. 3) Auxiliary contact that closes in AUTO (Remote) position.

d. OPEN and CLOSED indicating lights.



e. Ac motor with solid state reversing starter or dc motor with solid state reversing controller, and built-in overload protection. Controller capable of 1,200 starts per hour.

f. Duty cycle limit timer and adjustable band width, or equivalent, to prevent actuator hunting.

g. Valve position output converter that generates isolated 4 mA dc to 20 mA dc signal in proportion to valve position, and is capable of driving into loads of up to 500 ohms at 24V dc.

5. Limit Switch: a. Single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) type, field adjustable, with

contacts rated for 5 amps at 120V ac. b. Each valve actuator to have a minimum of two auxiliary transfer

contacts at end position, one for valve FULL OPEN and one for valve FULL CLOSED.

c. Housed in actuator control enclosure. 6. Control Features: Electric motor actuators with features as noted above,

and as modified/supplemented in Electric Actuated Valve Schedule. 7. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Rotork Controls; IQ3 Series. b. Flowserve Limitorque. c. AUMA.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Tagging: 1-1/2-inch diameter heavy brass or stainless steel tag attached with No. 16 solid brass or stainless steel jack chain for each valve, bearing valve tag number shown on Solenoid Actuated Valve Schedule and Self-Regulated Valve Schedule.

B. Limit Switch:

1. Factory installed NEMA 4X limit switch by actuator manufacturer. 2. SPST, rated at 5 amps, 120V ac.

C. Floor Box:

1. Plain type, for support of nonrising type stem. 2. Complete with solid extension stem, operating nut, and stem guide

brackets. Stem length as required to extend valve operating nut to within 3 inches of finish floor.

3. Stem Guide: Space such that stem L/R ratio does not exceed 200. 4. Anchor Bolts: Type 304 stainless steel.



5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Neenah Foundry; R 7506. b. Clow; No. F5690.

D. Chain Wheel and Guide:

1. Handwheel direct-mount type. 2. Complete with chain. 3. Galvanized or cadmium-plated. 4. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Clow Corp.; Figure F-5680. b. Walworth Co.; Figure 804. c. DeZurik Corp.; Series W or LWG.

E. Cast-Iron Valve Box: Designed for traffic loads, sliding type, with minimum of 5-1/4-inch ID shaft.

1. Box: Cast iron with minimum depth of 9 inches. 2. Lid: Cast iron, minimum depth 3 inches, nonlocking type, marked as

indicated on Drawing. 3. Extensions: Cast iron, ABS, or PVC pipe. 4. Two-piece box and lid for valves 4 inches through 12 inches, three-

piece box and lid for valves larger than 12 inches with base sized for valve.

5. Valve extension stem for valves with operating nuts 3 feet or greater below finish grade.

6. Manufacturers and Products: a. East Jordan Iron Works; Cast-Iron Valve Boxes. b. Bingham & Taylor; Cast-Iron Valve Boxes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Flange Ends:

1. Flanged valve bolt holes shall straddle vertical centerline of pipe. 2. Clean flanged faces, insert gasket and bolts, and tighten nuts

progressively and uniformly.

B. Screwed Ends:

1. Clean threads by wire brushing or swabbing. 2. Apply joint compound.



C. PVC and CPVC Valves: Install using solvents approved for valve service conditions.

D. Valve Installation and Orientation:

1. General: a. Install valves so handles operate from fully open to fully closed

without encountering obstructions. b. Install valves in location for easy access for routine operation and

maintenance. c. Install valves per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Gate, Globe, and Ball Valves: a. Install operating stem vertical when valve is installed in horizontal

runs of pipe having centerline elevations 4 feet 6 inches or less above finished floor, unless otherwise shown.

b. Install operating stem horizontal in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations greater than 4 feet 6 inches above finish floor, unless otherwise shown.

3. Eccentric Plug Valves: a. Unless otherwise restricted or shown on Drawings, install valve as

follows: 1) Liquids with suspended solids service with horizontal flow:

Install valve with stem in horizontal position with plug up when valve is open. Install valve with seat end upstream (flow to produce unseating pressure).

2) Liquids with suspended solids service with vertical flow: Install valve with seat in highest portion of valve (seat up).

3) Clean Liquids and Gas Service: Install valve with seat end downstream of higher pressure when valve is closed (higher pressure forces plug into seat).

4. Check Valves: a. Install valve in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and

provide required distance from immediate upstream fitting. b. Install valve in vertical flow (up) piping only for gas services. c. Install swing check valve with shaft in horizontal position. d. Install double disc swing check valve to be perpendicular to flow

pattern when discs are open. 5. Solenoid Valves: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Install line size ball valve and union upstream of each solenoid valve, in-line flow switch, or other in-line electrical device, excluding magnetic flowmeters, for isolation during maintenance.



F. Locate valve to provide accessibility for control and maintenance. Install access doors in finished walls and plaster ceilings for valve access.

G. Extension Stem for Operator: Where depth of valve operating nut is 3 feet or greater below finish grade, furnish operating extension stem with 2-inch operating nut to bring operating nut to a point within 6 inches of finish grade.

H. Torque Tube: Where operator for quarter-turn valve is located on floor stand, furnish extension stem torque tube of a type properly sized for maximum torque capacity of valve.

I. Floor Box and Stem: Steel extension stem length shall locate operating nut in floor box.

J. Chain Wheel and Guide: Install chain wheel and guide assemblies or chain lever assemblies on manually operated valves over 6 feet 9 inches above finish floor. Install chain to within 3 feet of finish floor. Where chains hang in normally traveled areas, use appropriate “L” type tie-back anchors. Install chains to within operator horizontal reach of 2 feet 6 inches maximum, measured from normal operator standing location or station.

3.02 TESTS AND INSPECTION

A. Valve may be either tested while testing pipelines, or as a separate step.

B. Test that valves open and close smoothly under operating pressure conditions. Test that two-way valves open and close smoothly under operating pressure conditions from both directions.

C. Count and record number of turns to open and close valve; account for discrepancies with manufacturer’s data.

D. Set, verify, and record set pressures for relief and regulating valves.

E. Automatic valves to be tested in conjunction with control system testing. Set opening and closing speeds, limit switches, as required or recommended by Engineer.

F. Test hydrostatic relief valve seating; record leakage. Adjust and retest to maximum leakage of 0.1 gpm per foot of seat periphery.



3.03 SUPPLEMENTS

A. The supplements listed below, following “End of Section,” are part of this Specification.

1. Solenoid Actuated Valve Schedule. 2. Self-Regulated Valve Schedule.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS JANUARY 2020 40 27 02 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

Solenoid Actuated Valve Schedule

Tag Number

Valve Type

Actuator Power Supply

Valve Size

(inches) Process Fluid

Maximum Operating

Flow (gpm)

Maximum P (psi)

Control Feature Modifications/ Supplements

20FV0601A V940 120V/1 phase 2-1/2'' W3 160 20, 80 psi inlet Normally Closed

20FV0601B V940 120V/1 phase 2-1/2'' W3 160 20, 80 psi inlet Normally Closed








PW\DEN003\708335 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS JANUARY 2020 40 27 02 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

Self-Regulated Valve Schedule

Tag No. Valve Type

No. Size

(inches) Inlet*

Pressure Outlet* Pressure

Maximum psig

Flow (gpm) Fluid

20PCV0601 V710 2-1/2'' 80 70 to 40, adjustable

150 160 W3


150 160 W3


150 160 W3


150 160 W3


150 105 W3

*Inlet Pressure = Normal operating pressure

*Outlet Pressure = Desired outlet pressure at rated flow


PW\DEN003\708335 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION JANUARY 2020 40 42 13 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 40 42 13 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers Inc. (ASHRAE): 90.1, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Sheet and Plate. b. C165, Standard Test Method for Measuring Compressive

Properties of Thermal Insulations. c. C177, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux

Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.

d. C518, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

e. C534/C534M, Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.

f. C547, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. g. C552, Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal

Insulation. h. C585, Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of

Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing. i. C1136, Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance

Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. j. C1729, Standard Specification for Aluminum Jacketing for

Insulation. k. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials. l. E96/E96M, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission

of Materials. 3. International Code Council (ICC): International Energy Conservation

Code (IECC). 4. UL.


PROCESS PIPING INSULATION PW\DEN003\708335 40 42 13 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals: Manufacturer’s descriptive literature.

B. Informational Submittals: Maintenance information.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE AND FITTING INSULATION

A. Type 1—Elastomeric:

1. Material: Flexible elastomeric pipe insulation, closed-cell structure in accordance with ASTM C534/C534M.

2. Temperature Rating: Minus 297 degrees F to 220 degrees F. 3. Nominal Density: 3 pcf to 6 pcf. 4. Conductivity in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 and maximum

numerical value of 0.25 Btu-in./hr-square foot degrees F at 75 degrees F per ASTM C177 or ASTM C518.

5. Maximum water vapor transmission of 0.06 perm-inch per ASTM E96/E96M, Procedure A.

6. Joints: Manufacturer’s adhesive. 7. Flame Spread Rating: Less than 25 per ASTM E84. 8. Smoke Developed Index: Less than 50 per ASTM E84. 9. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Nomaco; K-Flex. b. Armacell; AP Armaflex.

B. Type 2—Fiberglass:

1. Material: UL rated, preformed, sectional bonded fiberglass per ASTM C585 with factory applied, Kraft paper with aluminum foil vapor barrier jacket with pressure-sensitive, self-sealing lap.

2. Insulation Temperature Rating: 0 degree F to 850 degrees F. 3. Conductivity in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 and maximum

numerical value of 0.23 Btu-in./hr-square foot degrees F at 75 degrees F.

4. Jacketing per ASTM C1136 with minimum water vapor transmission for jacket of 0.02 perm-inch per ASTM E96/E96M. Furnish with no jacket if field finish system specified.

5. Joints: Matching pressure-sensitive butt strips for sealing circumferential joints.

6. Flame Spread Rating: Less than 25 per ASTM E84. 7. Smoke Developed Index: Less than 50 per ASTM E84.



8. Manufacturers and Products: a. Owens Corning Fiberglass; ASJ/SSL-11. b. John Manville; Micro-Lok with Jacket.

C. Type 3—Foamglass:

1. Material: Cellular glass per ASTM C552. 2. Nominal Density: 7.5 pcf. 3. Compressive Strength: 90 psi per ASTM C165. 4. Temperature Rating: Minus 290 degrees F to 900 degrees F. 5. Conductivity in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 and maximum

numerical value of 0.29 Btu-in./hr-square foot degrees F. 6. Minimum water vapor transmission for insulation of 0.00 perm-inch per

ASTM E96/E96M. 7. Joints: Matching pressure-sensitive butt strips for sealing

circumferential joints. 8. Flame Spread Rating: 0 per ASTM E84. 9. Smoke Developed Index: 0 per ASTM E84. 10. Follow manufacturer’s recommendation, based upon temperature of

piping to be insulated. 11. Manufacturer and Product: Pittsburgh Corning; Foamglas One.

2.02 ROOF DRAIN AND OVERFLOW DRAIN SUMP INSULATION

A. Type 1: 1-inch-thick.

2.03 INSULATION AT PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Refer to Section 40 05 15, Piping Support Systems.

B. Copper, Ductile Iron, and Nonmetallic Pipe: High-density insert, thickness equal to adjoining insulation of Type 3 or other rigid insulation or manufactured pre-insulated pipe hanger and insulation shield. Extend insert beyond shield.

C. Steel Pipe: Insulation saddle or high-density insert, thickness equal to adjoining insulation of Type 3 or other rigid insulation or manufactured pre-insulated pipe hanger and insulation shield at support location. Extend insert beyond shield.



2.04 INSULATION FINISH SYSTEMS

A. Type F1—PVC:

1. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing, minimum 20 mils indoors and 30 mils outdoors, for straight run piping and fitting locations, temperatures to 140 degrees F.

2. Color: PVC jacketing shall be color coded to match colors listed in pipe schedule where suitable matching colors are available. If no suitable colors are available jacketing shall be white.

3. Flame Spread Rating: 25 per ASTM E84. 4. Smoke Developed Index: 50 per ASTM E84. 5. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Knauf Insulation; Proto 1000. b. Johns Manville; Zeston 2000 or 300. c. Speedline; 25/50 Smoke-Safe.

B. Type F2—Paint:

1. Type 1 Insulation: Acrylic latex paint, white, and suitable for outdoor use. a. Manufacturer and Product: Armacell; WB Armaflex finish.

2. Type 2 Insulation: In accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

C. Type F3—Aluminum:

1. Aluminum Roll Jacketing: For straight run piping, wrought aluminum Alloy 3003, 5005, 1100, or 3105 to ASTM B209 with H-14 temper, in accordance with ASTM C1729, minimum 0.016-inch thickness, with smooth mill finish.

2. Vapor Barrier: Provide factory applied vapor barrier, heat and pressure bonded to inner surface of aluminum jacketing.

3. Fitting Covers: Material as for aluminum roll jacketing, premolded, one or two piece covers, which includes elbows, tee/valves, end caps, mechanical line couplings, and specialty fittings.

4. Manufacturers and Products: a. RPR Products; Insul-Mate. b. ITW; Pabco-Childers.



D. Type F4—Foamglass Jacketing:

1. Type 3 Insulation—Buried and Up to 1 Foot Above Grade: 70-mil bituminous resin with woven, glass fabric, aluminum foil layer, and plastic film coating, self-sealing manual pressure seals; Pittsburgh Corning Pittwrap SS.

2. Type 3 Insulation—Greater that 1 Foot Above Grade: 30-mil modified bituminous membrane with self-sealing manual pressure seals; Pittsburgh Corning Pittwrap CW30.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION

A. General:

1. Insulate valve bodies, flanges, and pipe couplings. 2. Insulate and vapor seal hangers, supports, anchors, and other piping

appurtenances that are secured directly to cold surfaces. 3. Do not insulate flexible pipe couplings and expansion joints. 4. Service and Insulation Thickness: Refer to Supplement Service and

Insulation Thickness table following “End of Section,” and to Pipe Schedule as shown on Drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as specified herein.

2. Install after piping system has been pressure tested and leaks corrected. 3. Install over clean dry surfaces. 4. Use insulating cements, lagging adhesives, and weatherproof mastics

recommended by insulation manufacturer. 5. Do not allow insulation to cover nameplates or code inspection stamps. 6. Run insulation or insulation inserts continuously through pipe hangers

and supports, wall openings, ceiling openings, and pipe sleeves, unless otherwise shown.

7. Install removable insulation sections on devices that require access for maintenance of equipment or removal, such as unions and strainer end plates.

8. Personnel Protection: Install on pipes from floor to 8 feet high. Install on pipes within 4 feet of platforms and to 8 feet high above platforms.



B. Connection to Existing Piping: Cut back existing insulation to remove portion damaged by piping revisions. Install new insulation.

C. Cold Surfaces: Provide continuous vapor seal on insulation on cold surfaces where vapor barrier jackets are used.

D. Placement:

1. Insulate valves and fittings with sleeved or cut pieces of same material. 2. Seal and tape joints.

E. Heat Traced Piping: Apply insulation after heat-tracing work is completed and inspected.

F. Roof Drains: Insulate vertical drops from roof drains to horizontal pipe, exposed and concealed horizontal piping, and 2 feet down on vertical risers from horizontal pipe.

G. Roof Drains and Overflow Drains: Insulate entire pipe runs. Where roof and overflow drains exist through an exterior wall ensure annular space between pipes and walls are properly sealed prior to insulating.

H. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Sumps: Insulate entire sumps.

I. Vapor Barrier:

1. Provide continuous vapor barrier at joints between rigid insulation and pipe insulation.

2. Install vapor barrier jackets with pipe hangers and supports outside jacket.

3. Do not use staples and screws to secure vapor sealed system components.

J. Aluminum Jacket:

1. Use continuous friction type joint to hold jacket in place, providing positive weatherproof seal over entire length of jacket.

2. Secure circumferential joints with preformed snap straps containing weatherproof sealant.

3. On exterior piping, apply coating over insulation and vapor barrier to prevent damage when aluminum fitting covers are installed.

4. Do not use screws or rivets to fasten fitting covers. 5. Install removable prefabricated aluminum covers on exterior flanges and

unions. 6. Caulk and seal exterior joints to make watertight.




A. Apply coating of insulating cement where needed to obtain smooth and continuous appearance.

B. Where pipe labels or banding are specified, apply to finished insulation, not to pipe.

C. Painting Piping Insulation (Exposed to View):

1. Aluminum or color coded PVC jacketing does not require painting. 2. If insulated piping system is indicated to be painted in Section 40 27 00,

Process Piping—General, piping shall receive the following: a. Prime coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and

Coating. b. Finished insulation (and not pipe) shall be painted in accordance

with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, and Pipe Schedule on Drawings.

3.04 SUPPLEMENT

A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is a part of this specification:

1. Service and Insulation Thickness Table.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION JANUARY 2020 40 42 13 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

Service and Insulation Thickness

Service Type Pipe

Legend Thickness

Fluid Temperature (degrees F)* Insulation

Finish Systems

Concealed from View

Indoors Exposed Outdoors Buried

Piping requiring heat tracing as indicated by the pipe schedule.

See pipe schedule

Pipe Size: Insulation Thickness Inches:* 1/4-3: 1 3.5-10: 1.5 12-16: 2 18-24: 2.5

40-70 Type 2 Insulate and heat trace outside lines 1' above grade. Use Type 3 insulation from 1' above grade to frost depth.

None NA F3 NA

*Use these fluid temperatures unless otherwise noted in the Pipe Schedule. Inches*: Based upon insulation with glass fiber per ASTM C547, outdoors with 20 mph wind with 10 percent safety and no value assigned to cladding or air space at cladding. Matches the watts per foot in Section 40 05 33, Pipe Heat Tracing. 2012 IECC requires 1-inch minimum thickness.


PW\DEN003\708335 PROCESS PIPING LEAKAGE TESTING JANUARY 2020 40 80 01 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 40 80 01 PROCESS PIPING LEAKAGE TESTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS


1. Testing Plan: a. Submit prior to testing and include at least the information that

follows. 1) Testing dates. 2) Piping systems and section(s) to be tested. 3) Test type. 4) Method of isolation. 5) Calculation of maximum allowable leakage for piping

section(s) to be tested. 2. Certifications of Calibration: Testing equipment. 3. Certified Test Report.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Notify Engineer in writing 5 days in advance of testing. Perform testing in presence of Engineer.

B. Pressure Piping:

1. Install temporary thrust blocking or other restraint as necessary to protect adjacent piping or equipment and make taps in piping prior to testing.

2. Prior to test, remove or suitably isolate appurtenant instruments or devices that could be damaged by pressure testing.

3. New Piping Connected to Existing Piping: a. Isolate new piping with grooved-end pipe caps, spectacle blinds,

blind flanges, or as acceptable to Engineer. 4. Items that do not require testing include:

a. Piping between wetwells and wetwell isolation valves, equipment seal drains, tank overflows to atmospheric vented drains, and tank atmospheric vents.


PROCESS PIPING LEAKAGE TESTING PW\DEN003\708335 40 80 01 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

5. Test Pressure: As indicated on Pipe Schedule as shown on Drawings.

C. Test section may be filled with water and allowed to stand under low pressure prior to testing.

D. Gravity Piping:

1. Perform testing after service connections, manholes, and backfilling have been completed between stations to be tested.

2. Determine groundwater level at time of testing by exploratory holes or other method acceptable to Engineer.

3. Pipe 42 Inches Diameter and Larger: Joint testing device may be used to isolate and test individual joints.

3.02 HYDROSTATIC TEST FOR PRESSURE PIPING

A. Fluid: Clean water of such quality to prevent corrosion of materials in piping system.

B. Exposed Piping:

1. Perform testing on installed piping prior to application of insulation. 2. Maximum Filling Velocity: 0.25 foot per second, applied over full area

of pipe. 3. Vent piping during filling. Open vents at high points of piping system or

loosen flanges, using at least four bolts, or use equipment vents to purge air pockets.

4. Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 30 minutes, minimum, and for such additional time as necessary to conduct examinations for leakage.

5. Examine joints and connections for leakage. 6. Correct visible leakage and retest as specified. 7. Leave pipe full of water after repair of leaks.

C. Buried Piping:

1. Test after backfilling has been completed. 2. Expel air from piping system during filling. 3. Apply and maintain specified test pressure with hydraulic force pump.

Valve off piping system when test pressure is reached. 4. Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 2 hours minimum,

reopening isolation valve only as necessary to restore test pressure. 5. Determine actual leakage by measuring quantity of water necessary to

maintain specified test pressure for duration of test.



6. Maximum Allowable Leakage:

000,148)D(PS

= L2/1

where:

L = Allowable leakage, in gallons per hour. S = Length of pipe tested, in feet. D = Nominal diameter of pipe, in inches. P = Test pressure during leakage test, in pounds per square inch.

7. Correct leakage greater than allowable, and retest as specified.

3.03 PNEUMATIC TEST FOR PRESSURE PIPING

A. Do not perform on:

1. PVC or CPVC pipe. 2. Piping not indicated for pneumatic testing in the Pipe Schedule as

shown on Drawings. 3. Buried and other nonexposed piping.

B. Fluid: Oil-free, dry air.

C. Procedure:

1. Apply preliminary pneumatic test pressure of 25 psig maximum to piping system prior to final leak testing, to locate visible leaks. Apply soap bubble mixture to joints and connections; examine for leakage.

2. Correct visible leaks and repeat preliminary test until visible leaks are corrected.

3. Gradually increase pressure in system to half of specified test pressure. Thereafter, increase pressure in steps of approximately one-tenth of specified test pressure until required test pressure is reached.

4. Maintain pneumatic test pressure continuously for minimum of 10 minutes and for such additional time as necessary to conduct soap bubble examination for leakage.

5. Correct visible leakage and retest as specified.

D. Allowable Leakage: Piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packing, shall show no visual evidence of leakage.


PROCESS PIPING LEAKAGE TESTING PW\DEN003\708335 40 80 01 - 4 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

E. After testing and final cleaning, purge with nitrogen those lines that will carry flammable gases to assure no explosive mixtures will be present in system during filling process.

3.04 HYDROSTATIC TEST FOR GRAVITY PIPING

A. Testing Equipment Accuracy: Plus or minus 1/2-gallon water leakage under specified conditions.

B. Maximum Allowable Leakage: 0.16 gallon per hour per inch diameter per 100 feet. Include service connection footage in test section, subjected to minimum head specified.

C. Gravity Sanitary and Roof Drain Piping: Test with 15 feet of water to include highest horizontal vent in filled piping. Where vertical drain and vent systems exceed 15 feet in height, test systems in 15-foot vertical sections as piping is installed.

D. Exfiltration Test:

1. Hydrostatic Head: a. At least 6 feet above maximum estimated groundwater level in

section being tested. b. No less than 6 feet above inside top of highest section of pipe in

test section, including service connections. 2. Length of Pipe Tested: Limit length such that pressure on invert of

lower end of section does not exceed 30 feet of water column.

E. Piping with groundwater infiltration rate greater than allowable leakage rate for exfiltration will be considered defective even if pipe previously passed a pressure test.

F. Defective Piping Sections: Replace or test and seal individual joints, and retest as specified.


A. Test Report Documentation:

1. Test date. 2. Description and identification of piping tested. 3. Test fluid. 4. Test pressure.



5. Remarks, including: a. Leaks (type, location). b. Repair/replacement performed to remedy excessive leakage.

6. Signed by Contractor to represent that test has been satisfactorily completed.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL JANUARY 2020 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 40 90 00 - 1

SECTION 40 90 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section gives general requirements for Process Instrumentation and Control (PIC). The following PIC subsections expand on requirements of this section:

1. Section 40 91 00, Instrumentation and Control Components. 2. Section 40 90 01, Supplemental Loop Specifications.

B. Major Work Items: Includes but is not limited to engineering, furnishing, installing, calibrating, adjusting, testing, documenting, starting up, and training for complete PIC.

1. Process instrumentation including primary elements, transmitters, control devices, and control panels.

2. Programmable controllers (PLC) hardware and components, for expansion of existing plant PLC network.

3. Network interface to Intelligent Adjustable Frequency Drives for control and data acquisition.

4. Documentation of control system work in Owner’s electronic format and using existing drawing standards. a. Provide final drawings in AutoCAD 2014 electronic format, or

compatible file type. b. Documentation of existing network diagrams, control panel

layouts, and wiring diagrams will be provided during construction, for use in developing drawings showing new work. Obtain files from Owner or Engineer prior to developing drawings for submittals.

c. Provide all new drawings following the same style and format as existing drawings. Examples are included in Drawings for reference.

5. Applications Software: Provided by Engineer for PLCs and HMI. Contractor’s Work related to supporting this activity includes: a. Provide required PLC hardware and associated wiring and

modifications to existing PLC panels. b. Functional testing. c. Assistance with onsite checkout of applications software.


INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW\DEN003\708335 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 2020 40 90 00 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

d. For additional related requirements refer to Article Sequencing and Scheduling in this section.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section and other PIC subsections:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. A182/A182M, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service.

b. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. c. A312/A312M, Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and

Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. d. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. e. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.

3. Deutsche Industrie-Norm (DIN): VDE 0611, Specification for modular terminal blocks for connection of copper conductors up to 1,000V ac and up to 1,200V dc.

4. International Conference on Energy Conversion and Application (ICECA).

5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): C62.41, Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

6. International Society of Automation (ISA): a. RP12.06.01, Recommended Practice for Wiring Methods for

Hazardous (Classified) Locations Instrumentation Part 1: Intrinsic Safety.

b. S5.1, Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. c. S5.4, Instrument Loop Diagrams. d. S50.1, Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electronic Industrial

Process Instruments. e. TR20.00.01, Specification Forms for Process Measurement and

Control Instruments, Part 1: General. 7. National Electrical Code (NEC). 8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).

b. ICS 1, Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements. 9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 820, Standard for Fire

Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities.





Content. 11. UL: 508A, Standard for Safety, Industrial Control Panels.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Abbreviations:

1. FDT: Factory Demonstration Test. 2. HMI: Human-Machine Interface. 3. HVAC: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning. 4. I&C: Instrumentation and Control. 5. I/O: Input and Output. 6. MCC: Motor Control Center. 7. O&M: Operation and Maintenance. 8. P&ID: Process and Instrument Diagram. 9. PIC: Process Instrumentation and Control. 10. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. 11. SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition.

B. Enclosure: Control panel, console, cabinet, or instrument housing.

C. Instructor Day: Eight hours of actual instruction time.

D. Standard Software: Software packages that are independent of Project on which they are used. Standard software includes system software, supervisory control, and data acquisition (SCADA) software.

1. System Software: Application independent (non-project specific) software developed by digital equipment manufacturers and software companies. Includes, but is not limited to, operating systems; network support, programming languages (C, C++, Visual C++, BASIC, Visual Basic, etc.); Office Suites (word processor, spreadsheet, database, etc.); e-mail; security (firewall, antivirus; spam, spyware, etc.) debugging aids; and diagnostics.

2. SCADA Software: Software packages independent of specific process control project on which they are used. Includes, but is not limited to, providing configuring and run-time capability for, data acquisition (I/O driver, OPC servers, etc.), monitoring, alarming, human-machine interface, supervisory control, data collection, data retrieval, trending, report generation, control, and diagnostics.



3. Controller Programming Software: Software packages for the configuring of PLCs, networked devices, and fieldbus devices.

E. Application Software: Software to provide functions unique to this Project and that are not provided by standard software alone, including but not limited to:

1. Configuring databases, tables, displays, historians, reports, parameter lists, ladder logic, function block, and control strategies required to implement functions unique to this Project.

2. Programming in any programming or scripting language.

F. Rising/Falling: Define action of discrete devices about their setpoint.

1. Rising: Contacts close when an increasing process variable rises through setpoint.

2. Falling: Contacts close when a decreasing process variable falls through setpoint.

G. Signal Types:

1. Analog Signal, Current Type: a. 4 mA dc to 20 mA dc signals conforming to ISA S50.1. b. Unless otherwise indicated for specific PIC subsection

components, use the following ISA S50.1 options. 1) Transmitter Type: Number 2, two-wire. 2) Transmitter Load Resistance Capacity: Class L. 3) Fully isolated transmitters and receivers.

2. Analog Signal, Voltage Type: 1V dc to 5V dc within panel where common high precision dropping resistor is used.

3. Discrete signals, two-state logic signals using dc or 120V ac sources as indicated.

4. Pulse Frequency Signals: a. Direct-current pulses whose repetition rate is linearly proportional

to process variable. b. Pulses generated by contact closures or solid state switches. c. Power source less than 30V dc.

5. Special Signals: Other types of signals used to transmit analog and digital information between field elements, transmitters, receivers, controllers, and digital devices.



1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Wiring Diagrams: Typical wiring diagrams are included in Contract Drawings to show typical requirements for control panel wiring, terminations, wire numbers, interfaces with other systems, hardwired functions, interlocks, and wiring of components to be provided. Use typical wiring diagrams to create a complete set of wiring diagrams for the project.

B. Design Requirements:

1. Complete detailed design of PIC components and PIC drawings. 2. Provide consistent hardware and software functions for PIC. For

example, provide display layouts in same or similar manner. 3. PIC design as shown and specified includes:

a. Functional requirements, performance requirements, and component specifications.

b. P&IDs, block diagrams, and network diagrams. c. Typical drawings for installation details, PLC I/O module wiring,

panel power, and control diagrams.

C. Use a qualified PIC System Integrator for at least the following work:

1. For PIC Equipment and Ancillaries: a. Completing detail design. b. Submittals. c. Equipment, enclosures, and ancillaries. d. Instructions, details, and recommendations to, and coordination

with Contractor for Certificate of Proper Installation. e. Verify readiness for operation. f. Verify correctness of final power and signal connections (lugging

and connecting). g. Adjusting and calibrating. h. Starting up. i. Testing and coordination of testing. j. Training. k. Assist Engineer with Functional Test Part 2 as defined in Article

Field Quality Control. 2. Verify following Work not by PIC System Integrator is provided:

a. Correct type, size, and number of signal wires with their raceways.

b. Correct electrical power circuits and raceways. c. Correct size, type, and number of PIC-related pipes, valves,

fittings, and tubes.



d. Correct size, type, materials, and connections of process mechanical piping for in-line primary elements.

3. Non-PIC Equipment Directly Connected to PIC Equipment: a. Obtain from Contractor, manufacturers’ information on

installation, interface, function, and adjustment. b. Coordinate with Contractor to allow required interface and

operation with PIC. c. For operation and control, verify installations, interfacing signal

terminations, and adjustments have been completed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

d. Test to demonstrate required interface and operation with PIC. e. Examples of items in this category, but not limited to the

following: 1) Valve operators, position switches, and controls. 2) Chemical feed pump and feeder speed/stroke controls. 3) Vendor-provided package equipment systems and controls. 4) Motor control centers. 5) Adjustable speed and adjustable frequency drive systems.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Submit proposed Submittal breakdown consisting of sequencing and packaging of information in accordance with Project Schedule.

2. Partial Submittals not in accordance with Project Schedule will not be accepted.

3. Submittal Format: a. Electronic Copies:

1) Format: Adobe Acrobat PDF. 2) Final As-Built Version of Documents created specifically

for Project: a) Text and Graphics: Microsoft Word. b) Lists: Microsoft Excel, unless otherwise noted for

specific items. c) Drawings: AutoCAD 2014 or compatible file type.

4. Identify proposed items, options, installed spares, and other provisions for future work (for example, reserved panel space; unused components, wiring, and terminals).



5. Legends and Abbreviation Lists: a. Definition of symbols and abbreviations used; for example,

engineering units, flowstreams, instruments, structures, and other process items used in nameplates, legends, data sheets, point descriptions, HMI displays, alarm/status logs, and reports.

b. Use identical abbreviations in PIC subsections. 6. Activity Completion:

a. Action Submittals: Completed when reviewed and approved. b. Informational Submittals: Completed when reviewed and found to

meet conditions of the Contract.

B. Action Submittals:

1. Bill of Materials: List of required equipment. a. Group equipment items by enclosure and field, and within an

enclosure, as follows: 1) PIC Components: By component identification code. 2) Other Equipment: By equipment type.

b. Data included: 1) Equipment tag number. 2) Description. 3) Manufacturer, complete model number and all options not

defined by model number. 4) Quantity supplied. 5) Component identification code where applicable. 6) For panels, include panel reference number and name plate

inscription. c. Formats: Hard copy and Microsoft Excel.

2. Catalog Cuts: a. I&C Components, Electrical Devices, and Mechanical Devices:

1) Catalog information, marked to identify proposed items and options.

2) Descriptive literature. 3) External power and signal connections. 4) Scaled drawings showing exterior dimensions and locations

of electrical and mechanical interfaces. 3. Instrument List:

a. Refer to Supplement Instrument List at the end of this Section. Data from this may be used as starting point for creating final Instrument List and Component Data Sheets.

b. Complete the Instrument List by adding manufacturer and complete model number for each instrument and device.

c. Submit updated version of Instrument List.



4. Component Data Sheets: Data sheets for I&C components. a. Format:

1) Similar to ISA TR20.00.01. 2) One component per data sheet.

b. Content: 1) Specific features and configuration data for each

component, including but not limited to: a) Tag Number. b) Component type identification code and description. c) Location or service. d) Service conditions. e) Manufacturer and complete model number. f) Size and scale range. g) Setpoints. h) Materials of construction. i) Options included. j) Power requirements. k) Signal interfaces. l) Name, address, and telephone number of

manufacturer’s local office, representative, distributor, or service facility.

5. Sizing and Selection Calculations: a. Primary Elements:

1) Complete calculations plus process data used. Example for Flow Elements: a) Minimum and maximum values, permanent head loss,

and assumptions made. 6. Control Panel Construction Drawings, Wiring Diagrams, and Network

Drawings, General Requirements: a. Draft all diagrams in electronic files compatible with Owner’s

standard AutoCAD 2014. b. Format to match existing documentation, see examples in

Drawings. c. Obtain copies of existing panel drawings from Owner or Engineer

and update to show new work. Follow format and style of existing drawings for all new work.

7. Panel Construction Drawings: a. Scale Drawings: Show dimensions and locations of panel-

mounted devices, doors, louvers, subpanels, internal and external. b. Panel Legend (Bill of Material): List front of panel devices by tag

numbers, nameplate inscriptions, service legends, and annunciator inscriptions.



c. Bill of Materials: List devices mounted within panel that are not listed in panel legend. Include tag number, description, manufacturer, and model number.

d. Construction Details: NEMA rating, materials, material thickness, structural stiffeners and brackets, lifting lugs, mounting brackets and tabs, door hinges and latches, and welding and other connection callouts and details.

e. Construction Notes: Finishes, wire color schemes, wire ratings, wire, terminal block numbering, and labeling scheme.

f. Submit electronic copies of Drawings. 8. Detailed Wiring Diagrams:

a. Detailed Wiring Diagrams including: 1) Panel Wiring Diagrams for discrete control and power

circuits. 2) Loop Wiring Diagrams showing individual wiring diagram

for each analog or pulse frequency loop. 3) Interconnecting Wiring Diagrams showing electrical

connections between equipment, consoles, panels, terminal junction boxes, and field-mounted components.

9. Panel Wiring Diagrams: a. Show wiring within a panel including, but not limited to,

instrumentation, control, power, communications, and digital networks.

b. Objectives: For use in wiring panels, making panel connections, and future panel trouble shooting.

c. Diagram Type: 1) Ladder or loop diagrams where applicable in a format

similar to those shown on Drawings. Include devices that are mounted in or on the panel that require electrical connections.

2) Schematic drawings for wiring of circuits that cannot be well represented by ladder diagrams.

d. Item Identification: Identify each item with attributes listed. 1) Wires: Wire number and color. Cable number if part of

multiconductor cable. 2) Terminals: Location (enclosure number, terminal junction

box number, or MCC number), terminal strip number, and terminal block number.

3) Components: a) Tag number, terminal numbers, and location

(“FIELD”, enclosure number, or MCC number).



b) Switching action (open or close on rising or falling process variable), setpoint value and units, and process variable description (for example, Sump Level High).

4) I/O Points: PLC unit number, I/O tag number, I/O address, terminal numbers, and terminal strip numbers.

5) Relay Coils: Tag number and its function. 6) Relay Contacts: Coil tag number and function. 7) Communications and Networks: Network type, address or

node identification, port or channel number, and type of connector.

e. Show each circuit individually. No “typical” diagrams or “typical” wire lists will be allowed.

f. Ground wires, surge protectors, and connections. g. Wire and Cable Names: Show names and wire color for circuits

entering and leaving a panel. Refer to Division 26, Electrical. 10. Communications and Digital Networks Diagrams:

a. Scope: Includes connections to Ethernet networks, remote I/O, and fieldbus (for example, Modbus, Profibus, Foundation Fieldbus, Device Net, etc.).

b. Format: Network schematic diagrams for each different type of network.

c. Show: 1) Interconnected devices, both passive and active. 2) Device names and numbers. 3) Terminal numbers. 4) Communication Media: Type of cable. 5) Connection Type: Type of connector. 6) Node and device address numbers. 7) Wire and cable numbers and colors.

11. Panel Power Requirements: a. For control panels, tabulate and summarize:

1) Required voltages, currents, and phases(s). 12. Panel Plumbing Diagrams:

a. For each panel containing piping and tubing. Show type and size for: 1) Pipes and Tubes: Thickness, pressure rating, and materials. 2) Components: Valves, regulators, and filters. 3) Connections to panel-mounted devices. 4) Panel interface connections.

13. Installation Details: Include modifications or further details required and define installation of I&C components.

14. Spares, expendables, and test equipment.



15. PLC I/O List: a. Managed by Engineer:

1) During construction Engineer will maintain PLC I/O List and give electronic Microsoft Excel copies to PIC System Integrator.

2) Engineer will assign PLC I/O points to specific chassis, slot, and point addresses.

b. PLC I/O List Changes: Changes to PLC I/O List reflecting actual equipment and instrumentation provided. 1) Mark up electronic file of latest PLC I/O List from

Engineer. Highlight changed cells with yellow, new rows with red, and rows to be deleted with green.

2) Submit marked up copies at 30-day intervals. 16. Configuration Documentation:

a. For equipment for which Engineer does not provide applications software provide: 1) Complete configuration documentation for microprocessor

based programmable devices. 2) For each device, include configuration guide and parameter

table, as appropriate, showing: a) Default parameters. b) Parameters modified from default setting. c) Options and modes selected.

C. Informational Submittals:

1. Statements of Qualification: a. PIC System Integrator. b. PIC System Integrator’s site representative. c. Resume for each PIC System Integrator’s onsite startup and

testing team member (engineers, technicians, and software/configuring personnel).

2. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. In accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance

Data, and in addition the following: 1) General:

a) Provide sufficient detail to allow operation, removal, installation, adjustment, calibration, maintenance and purchasing replacements for PIC components.

b) Submittal Format: Both hard copy and electronic copies for all submittals.

2) Final versions of Legend and Abbreviation Lists.



3) Process and Instrumentation Diagrams: Marked up copy of revised P&ID to reflect as-built PIC design.

4) Provide the following items as defined under heading Action Submittals: a) Bill of materials. b) Catalog cuts. c) Instrument list. d) Component data sheets. e) Detailed Wiring Diagrams: As-built drawings.

(1) Panel wiring diagrams. (2) Interconnecting wiring diagrams.

f) Panel plumbing diagrams. 5) Manufacturer’s O&M manuals for components, electrical

devices, and mechanical devices: a) Content for Each O&M Manual:

(1) Table of Contents. (2) Operations procedures. (3) Installation requirements and procedures. (4) Maintenance requirements and procedures. (5) Troubleshooting procedures. (6) Calibration procedures. (7) Internal schematic and wiring diagrams. (8) Component Calibration Sheets from field

quality control calibrations. b) Provide PDF file with linked index to all manuals.

6) List of spares, expendables, test equipment and tools provided.

7) List of additional recommended spares, expendables, test equipment, and tools. Include quantities, unit prices, and total costs.

3. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation where specified.

4. Testing Related Submittals: a. Factory Demonstration Test:

1) Preliminary Test Procedures: Outline of proposed tests, forms, and checklists.

2) Final Test Procedures: a) Complete set of test procedures, forms, and checklists. b) Describe simulation and monitoring methods used to

demonstrate compliance. 3) Test Documentation: Copy of signed off test results.



b. Functional Test: 1) Preliminary Test Procedures: Outline of proposed tests,

forms, and checklists. 2) Final Test Procedures: Complete set of test procedures,

forms, and checklists. 3) Test Documentation:

a) Copy of signed-off test results. b) Completed component calibration sheets.

c. Performance Test: 1) Preliminary Test Procedures: Outline of proposed tests,

forms, and checklists. 2) Final Test Procedures: Complete set of test procedures,

forms, and checklists. 3) Test Documentation: Copy of signed-off test results.

5. Owner Training Plan: In accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.


A. Qualifications:

1. PIC System Integrator: Minimum of 5 years’ experience providing, integrating, installing, and starting up similar systems as required for this Project.

2. PIC System Integrator’s Site Representative: Minimum of 5 years’ experience installing systems similar to PIC required for this Project.

B. PIC Coordination Meetings:

1. General: Refer to Section 01 31 19, Project Meetings, for PIC coordination meetings.

2. PIC Schedule Coordination Meeting: a. Timing: Following Engineer review of PIC Schedule. b. Purpose: Discuss Engineer’s comments and resolve scheduling

issues. 3. Testing Coordination Meeting:

a. Timing: During Functional Testing Part 1, at least 2 weeks prior to Functional Testing Part 2.

b. Purpose: Coordinate schedule and procedures for Functional Testing Part 2 including Application Software testing by Engineer.



4. Training Coordination Meeting: a. Timing: Following Engineer review of preliminary training plan. b. Purpose:

1) Resolve required changes to proposed training plan. 2) Identify specific Owner personnel to attend training.


A. In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

B. Prior to shipment, include corrosive inhibitive vapor capsules in shipping containers, and related equipment as recommended by capsule manufacturer.

C. Prior to installation, store items in dry indoor locations. Provide heating in storage areas for items subject to corrosion under damp conditions.

D. Cover panels and other elements that are exposed to dusty construction environments.


A. Refer to Section 01 31 13, Project Coordination, for Contractor’s scheduling requirements for applications software testing.

B. Prerequisite Activities and Lead Times:

1. Do not start following key Project activities until prerequisite activities and lead times listed below have been completed and satisfied: a. Shop Drawing Reviews by Engineer:

1) Prerequisite: Engineer acceptance of Schedule of Values and Progress Schedule.

2) Schedule: In accordance with completed schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals specified in Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.

b. Test Prerequisite: Associated test procedures Submittals completed.

c. Training Prerequisite: Associated training plan Submittal completed.

d. Functional Test Part 1 Prerequisite: Instruments and PLC hardware installation complete.

e. Functional Test Part 2 Prerequisite: Functional Test Part 1 completed.

f. Performance Test Prerequisite: Functional Test Part 2 completed and facility started up.



1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. In computing spare parts quantities based on specified percentages, round up to nearest whole number.

B. Spare Parts:

Description

Percent of Each Type

and Size Used No Less Than

dc power supplies 10 1

Fuses 20 5

Relays 20 3

Terminal Blocks 10 10

Surge Suppressors 10 2

C. Expendables: For following items provide manufacturer’s recommended 2-year supply, unless otherwise noted.

1. Chemical for analyzers. 2. Calibration/test gas for combustible gas detection. 3. Corrosion-inhibiting vapor capsules.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Provide PIC functions shown on Drawings and required in PIC subsections for each system and loop. Furnish equipment items required in PIC subsections. Furnish materials, equipment, and software (except for Engineer provided applications software), whether indicated or not, necessary to effect required system and loop performance.

B. First Named Manufacturer: PIC design is based on first named manufacturers of equipment, materials, and software.

1. If an item is proposed from other than first named manufacturer, obtain approval from Engineer for such changes in accordance with the General Conditions, Article 7.04 “Or Equals,” and Article 7.05 Substitutes.



2. If proposed item requires, but not limited to, different installation, wiring, raceway, enclosures, intrinsically safe barriers, and accessories, provide such equipment and work.

C. Like Equipment Items:

1. Use products of one manufacturer and of the same series or family of models to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer’s services.

2. Implement same or similar functions in same or similar manner. For example, control logic and panel layouts.

2.02 I&C COMPONENTS

A. Specifications: Refer to Section 40 91 00, Instrumentation and Control Components, for specifications for I&C components.

B. Components for Each Loop: Major components for each loop are listed in Instrument List referenced in Article Supplements. Furnish equipment that is necessary to achieve required loop performance.

C. Control Panels: Reference Control Panel Schedule in Article Supplements.

2.03 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS

A. Reference:

1. PLC Equipment List in Article Supplements. 2. PLC components in Section 40 91 00, Instrumentation and Control

Components. 3. PLC Input/Output List in Article Supplements. 4. Drawings, P&IDs. 5. Drawings, Network Diagram.

2.04 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. Standard Service Conditions: Refer to Contract Drawings for Area Classification Table for environment and classification of areas of the facility. The following defines certain types of environments. Design equipment for continuous operation in these environments:

1. Control Room, Air Conditioned: a. Temperature: 60 degrees F to 80 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 40 percent to 60 percent. c. NEC Classification: Nonhazardous.



2. Inside, Air Conditioned: a. Temperature:

1) Normal: 60 degrees F to 80 degrees F. 2) With Up to 4-Hour HVAC System Interruptions:

40 degrees F to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity:

1) Normal: 10 percent to 70 percent. 2) With Up to 4-Hour HVAC System Interruption: 10 percent

to 95 percent. c. NEC Classification: Nonhazardous.

3. Inside: a. Temperature: 35 degrees F to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 percent to 95 percent. c. NEC Classification: Nonhazardous.

4. Inside, Corrosive: a. Temperature: 35 degrees F to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 percent to 100 percent. c. Corrosive Environment: As noted. d. NEC Classification: Nonhazardous.

5. Inside, Hazardous: a. Temperature: 20 degrees F to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 percent to 100 percent. c. NEC Classification: As shown on Electrical Drawings.

6. Outside: a. Temperature: 0 degree F to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 percent to 100 percent, rain, snow, freezing

rain. c. NEC Classification: Nonhazardous.

7. Outside, Corrosive: a. Temperature: 0 degree F to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 percent to 100 percent, rain, snow, freezing

rain. c. Corrosive Environment: As noted. d. NEC Classification: Nonhazardous.

8. Outside, Hazardous: a. Temperature 0 degree F to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 percent to 100 percent, rain, snow, freezing

rain. c. NEC Classification: As shown on Electrical Drawings.



B. Standard Service Conditions for Panels and Consoles:

1. Unless otherwise noted, in Instrument List and Control Panel Schedule located in Article Supplements at End of Section, design equipment for continuous operation in these environments: a. Freestanding Panel and Consoles:

1) Inside: NEMA 12. b. Smaller Panels and Assemblies (that are not freestanding):

1) Inside, Air Conditioned: NEMA 12. 2) All Other Locations: NEMA 4X.

c. Field Elements: Outside.

C. Special Environmental Requirements: Select and design instruments and panels for continuous operation in environments listed where noted.

2.05 NAMEPLATES AND TAGS

A. Panel Nameplates: Enclosure identification located on enclosure face.

1. Location and Inscription: Refer to Example Control Panel Layouts and Control Panel Schedule drawings.

2. Materials: Laminated plastic attached to panel with stainless steel screws.

3. Letters: 1/2-inch-high, white on black background, unless otherwise noted.

B. Component Nameplates, Panel Face: Component identification located on panel face under or near component.

1. Location and Inscription: As shown on panel drawing. 2. Materials: Adhesive-backed, laminated plastic. 3. Letters: 3/16-inch-high, white on black background, unless otherwise

noted.

C. Component Nameplates, Back of Panel: Component identification located on or near component inside of enclosure.

1. Inscription: Component tag number. 2. Materials: Adhesive-backed, laminated plastic. 3. Letters: 3/16-inch-high, white on black background, unless otherwise

noted.



D. Legend Plates for Panel Mounted Pushbuttons, Lights, and Switches:

1. Inscription: a. Refer to table under Paragraph Standard Pushbutton Colors and

Inscriptions. b. Refer to table under Paragraph Standard Light Colors and

Inscriptions. c. Refer to P&IDs on Drawings.

2. Materials: Stainless steel, keyed legend plates. Secured to panel by mounting nut for pushbutton, light, or switch.

3. Letters: Black on gray or white background.

E. Service Legends: Component identification nameplate located on face of component.

1. Inscription: As shown on panel drawing. 2. Materials: Adhesive-backed, laminated plastic. 3. Letters: 3/16-inch-high, white on black background, unless otherwise

noted.

F. Nametags: Component identification for field devices.

1. Inscription: Component tag number. 2. Materials: 16-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel. 3. Letters: 3/16-inch-high, engraved. 4. Mounting: Affix to component with 16-gauge or 18-gauge stainless

steel wire, stainless steel ball chain, or stainless steel screws.

2.06 MECHANICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Reference Section 40 91 00, Instrumentation and Control Components.

2.07 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTROL LOOPS

A. Shown on Drawings, in control diagrams, and Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID). P&ID format and symbols are in accordance with ISA S5.1, except as specified or shown on Drawings.

B. Supplemented by Loop Specifications that describe requirements not obvious on P&IDs, network diagrams, or typical control diagrams.

C. Supplemented by standard functional requirements in PIC subsections.



2.08 LOOP SPECIFICATIONS

A. See Article Supplements located at End of Section.

B. Organization: By unit process and loop number.

C. Loop Subheadings:

1. Local: Clarifies functional performance of loop, including interlocks for hard wired logic, for example in MCCs and control panels.

2. PLC Special Functions: Specifies nonstandard PLC functions. When required for clarification, additional definition is shown by logic diagrams or sequence diagrams on Drawings. Application software provided by Engineer.

3. HMI Special Functions: Specifies nonstandard HMI functions. Application software provided by Engineer.

2.09 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Raceways: As specified in Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes.

B. Wiring External to PIC Equipment:

1. Special Control and Communications Cable: Provided by PIC System Integrator as noted in Component Specifications and PIC subsections.

2. Other Wiring and Cable: As specified in Section 26 05 05, Conductors.

C. I&C and electrical components, terminals, wires, and enclosures UL recognized or UL listed.

D. Wires within Enclosures:

1. ac Circuits: a. Type: 600-volt, Type MTW stranded copper. b. Size: For current to be carried, but not less than No. 18 AWG.

2. Analog Signal Circuits: a. Type: 600-volt stranded copper, twisted shielded pairs or triad

with a 100 percent, aluminum-polyester shield, rated 60 degrees C.

b. Panels with Circuits Less Than 600 volts: Rated at 600 volts. Belden No. 18 AWG Type 9341, Triad Beldon No. 1121A.

c. Size: No. 18 AWG, minimum. 3. Other dc Circuits.

a. Type: 600-volt, Type MTW stranded copper. b. Size: For current carried, but not less than No. 18 AWG.



4. Special Signal Circuits: Use manufacturer’s standard cables. 5. Wire Identification: Numbered and tagged at each termination.

a. Wire Tags: Machine printed, heat shrink. b. Manufacturers:

1) Brady Perma Sleev. 2) Tyco Electronics.

E. Terminate and identify wires entering or leaving enclosures as follows:

1. Analog and discrete signal, terminate at numbered terminal blocks. 2. Special signals terminated using manufacturer’s standard connectors. 3. Identify wiring in accordance with requirements in Section 26 05 05,

Conductors.

F. Terminal Blocks for Enclosures:

1. Quantity: a. Accommodate present and spare indicated needs. b. Wire spare PLC I/O points to terminal blocks. c. One wire per terminal for field wires entering enclosures. d. Maximum of two wires per terminal for internal enclosure wiring. e. Spare Terminals: 20 percent of connected terminals, but not less

than 5 per terminal block, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 2. Terminal Block Types: Reference Section 40 91 00, Instrumentation

and Control Components, Part 2, Article Electrical Components.

G. Grounding of Enclosures:

1. Furnish grounding terminals for signal and shield ground connections. 2. Ground equipment in accordance with National Electrical Code

requirements. 3. Single Point Ground for each Analog Loop:

a. Locate signal ground terminal at panel containing dc power supply for loop.

b. Use to ground wire shields for loop. 4. Ground terminal block rails.

H. Analog Signal Isolators:

1. Furnish signal isolation for analog signals that are sent from one enclosure to another.

2. Do not wire in series instruments on different panels, cabinets, or enclosures.



I. Intrinsic Safety System Installation:

1. Comply with NEC Article 504, Intrinsically Safe Systems. 2. Install intrinsically safe circuits in a separate wire way that:

a. Is separated from nonintrinsically safe circuits as specified by NEC.

b. Is colored light blue and has message “Intrinsically Safe Circuits Only” on raceway cover every 6 inches.

J. Wiring Interface: Terminate and identify wiring entering or leaving enclosures.

1. Analog and Discrete Signal Wires: Terminate at numbered terminal blocks.

2. Wiring for Special Signals: Terminate communications, digital data, and multiplexed signals using manufacturer’s standard connectors for the device to which the signals terminate.

2.10 PANEL FABRICATION

A. General:

1. Nominal Panel Dimensions: Refer to Control Panel Schedule in Article Supplements for maximum external dimensions allowed for individual control panels.

2. Panel Construction and Interior Wiring: In accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC), state and local codes, and applicable sections of NEMA, ANSI, UL, and ICECA.

3. Fabricate panels, install instruments and wire, and plumb at PIC System Integrator’s facility. No fabrication other than correction of minor defects or minor transit damage permitted onsite.

4. UL Listing Mark for Enclosures: Mark stating “Listed Enclosed Industrial Control Panel” per UL 508A.

5. Electrical Work: In accordance with the applicable requirements of Division 26, Electrical.

B. Temperature Control:

1. Freestanding Panels: a. Nonventilated Panels: Size to adequately dissipate heat from

equipment mounted inside panel and on panel.



b. Ventilated Panels: 1) Furnish with louvers and forced ventilation as required to

prevent temperature buildup from equipment mounted inside panel and on panel.

2) For panels with backs against wall, furnish louvers on top and bottom of panel sides.

3) For panels without backs against wall, furnish louvers on top and bottom of panel back.

4) Louver Construction: Stamped sheet metal. 5) Ventilation Fans:

a) Furnish where required to provide adequate cooling. b) Create positive internal pressure within panel. c) Fan Motor Power: 120V ac, 60-Hz, thermostatically

controlled. 6) Air Filters: Washable aluminum, Hoffman Series A-FLT.

c. Refrigerated System: Furnish where heat dissipation cannot be adequately accomplished with natural convection or forced ventilation.

2. Smaller Panels (that are not freestanding): Size to adequately dissipate heat from equipment mounted inside panel and on panel face.

3. Space Heaters: a. Thermostatically controlled to maintain internal panel

temperatures above dewpoint. b. Refer to Control Panel Schedule in Article Supplements.

C. Freestanding Panel Construction:

1. Materials: a. Sheet steel, unless otherwise noted in Control Panel Schedule in

Article Supplements. b. Minimum Thickness: 10-gauge, unless otherwise noted.

2. Panel Front: a. Fabricated from a single piece of sheet steel, unless otherwise

shown on Drawings. b. No seams or bolt heads visible when viewed from front. c. Panel Cutouts: Smoothly finished with rounded edges. d. Stiffeners: Steel angle or plate stiffeners or both on back of panel

face to prevent panel deflection under instrument loading or operation.

3. Internal Framework: a. Structural steel for instrument support and panel bracing. b. Permit panel lifting without racking or distortion.



4. Lifting rings to allow simple, safe rigging and lifting of panel during installation.

5. Adjacent Panels: Securely bolted together so front faces are parallel. 6. Door:

a. Full height, fully gasketed access door(s). b. Latch: Three-point, Southco Type 44. c. Handle: “D” ring, foldable type. d. Hinges: Full-length, continuous, piano-type, steel hinges with

stainless steel pins. e. Rear Access: Where shown, extend no further than 24 inches

beyond panel when opened to 90-degree position. f. Rear and Side Access Doors: As shown on Drawings.

D. Nonfreestanding Panel Construction:

1. Based on environmental design requirements and referenced in Article Environmental Requirements, provide the following unless otherwise noted in Control Panel Schedule in Article Supplements: a. Panels listed as inside, air conditioned:

1) Enclosure Type: NEMA 12. 2) Materials: Steel.

b. Other Panels: 1) Enclosure Type: NEMA 4X. 2) Materials: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel.

2. Metal Thickness: 14-gauge, minimum. 3. Doors:

a. Rubber-gasketed with continuous hinge. b. Stainless steel lockable quick-release clamps.

4. Manufacturers: a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. H. F. Cox.

E. Breather and Drains:

1. Furnish with NEMA 250, Type 4 and Type 4X panels: a. Manufacturer and Product: Cooper Crouse-Hinds; ECD Type 4X

Drain and Breather; Drain Model ECD1-N4D, Breather Model ECD1-N4B.



F. Control Panel Electrical:

1. Power Distribution within Panels: a. Feeder Circuits:

1) One or more 120V ac, 60-Hz feeder circuits as shown on Drawings.

2) Make provisions for feeder circuit conduit entry. 3) Furnish terminal block for termination of wires.

b. Power Distribution: Furnish main circuit breaker and circuit breaker on each individual branch circuit distributed from panel. 1) Locate to provide clear view of and access to breakers when

door is open. 2) Breaker Sizes: Coordinate such that fault in branch circuit

will open only branch breaker, but not trip main breaker. a) Branch Circuit Breakers: 15 amps at 250V ac.

c. Circuit Wiring: P&IDs and Control Diagrams on Drawings show function only. Use following rules for actual circuit wiring: 1) Devices on Single Circuit: 20, maximum. 2) Multiple Units Performing Parallel Operations: To prevent

failure of any single branch circuit from shutting down entire operation, do not group all units on same branch circuit.

3) Branch Circuit Loading: 12 amperes continuous, maximum. 4) Panel Lighting and Service Outlets: Put on separate 15 amp,

120V ac branch circuit. 5) Provide 120V ac plugmold for panel components with line

cords. 2. Signal Distribution:

a. Signal Wiring: Separate analog signal cables from power and control within a panel and cross at right angles where necessary.

b. Within Panels: 4 mA dc to 20 mA dc signals may be distributed as 1V dc to 5V dc.

c. Outside Panels: Isolated 4 mA dc to 20 mA dc only. d. Signal Wiring: Twisted shielded pairs or twisted shielded triads. e. RTD and Thermocouple Extension Cable:

1) Continuous field to panel with no intermediate junction boxes or terminations.

2) RTDs in motor windings are considered a 600-volt circuit. 3) Terminate thermocouple extension wire directly to loop

instrument. 3. Relay Types: Reference Section 40 91 00, Instrumentation and Control

Components, Part 2, Article Electrical Components.



4. Internal Panel Lights for Freestanding Panels: a. Type: Switched 40-watt fluorescent or LED back-of-panel lights. b. Quantity: One light for every 6 feet of panel width. c. Mounting: Inside and in the top of back-of-panel area.

5. Service Outlets for Freestanding Panels: a. Type: Three-wire, 120-volt, 15-ampere, GFCI duplex receptacles. b. Quantity:

1) Panels 6 Feet Wide and Smaller: One. 2) Panels Larger than 6 Feet Wide: One for every 6 feet of

panel width, two minimum per panel. c. Mounting: Evenly spaced along back-of-panel area.

6. Standard Pushbutton Colors and Inscriptions: a. Use following unless otherwise noted in Instrument List:

1) EMERGENCY STOP: Red. 2) All Others: Black.

7. Standard Light Colors and Inscriptions: a. Use following color code and inscriptions for service legends and

lens colors for indicating lights, unless otherwise noted in Instrument List:

Tag Function Inscription(s) Color

ON ON Red

OFF OFF Green

OPEN OPEN Red

CLOSED CLOSED Green

LOW LOW Amber

FAIL FAIL Amber

HIGH HIGH Amber

AUTO AUTO White

MANUAL MANUAL Yellow

LOCAL LOCAL White

REMOTE REMOTE Yellow

G. PIC Enclosure Internal Wiring:

1. Restrain by plastic ties or ducts or metal raceways. 2. Hinge Wiring: Secure at each end so bending or twisting will be around

longitudinal axis of wire. Protect bend area with sleeve.



3. Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus wire. 4. Provide abrasion protection for wire bundles that pass through holes or

across edges of sheet metal. 5. Connections to Screw Type Terminals:

a. Locking-fork-tongue or ring-tongue lugs. b. Use manufacturer’s recommended tool with required sized anvil

to make crimp lug terminations. c. Wires terminated in a crimp lug, maximum of one. d. Lugs installed on a screw terminal, maximum of two.

6. Connections to Compression Clamp Type Terminals: a. Strip, prepare, and install wires in accordance with terminal

manufacturer’s recommendations. b. Wires installed in a compression screw and clamp, maximum of

one for field wires entering enclosure, otherwise maximum of two.

7. Splicing and tapping of wires, allowed only at device terminals or terminal blocks.

8. Terminate 24V dc and analog signal circuits on separate terminal block from ac circuit terminal blocks.

9. Separate analog and dc circuits by at least 4 inches from ac power and control wiring, except at unavoidable crossover points and at device terminations.

10. Arrange wiring to allow access for testing, removal, and maintenance of circuits and components.

11. Plastic Wire Duct Fill: Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommendations. 12. Conductors Carrying Foreign Voltages within a Panel:

a. Route foreign voltage conductors into panel and land on a circuit blade disconnect type terminal block.

b. Use wire with yellow insulation to identify foreign voltage circuits within panel from terminal block on. Do not use wires with yellow insulation for any other purpose.

13. Harness Wiring: a. 120V ac: No. 14 AWG, MTW. b. 24V dc: No. 16 AWG, MTW where individual conductors are

used and Type TC shielded tray cable where shielded wire is used. 14. Plastic Wire Ducts Color:

a. 120V ac: White. b. 24V dc: Gray. c. Communications Cables and Fiber Optic Jumpers: Orange.



15. Provide a communications plastic wire duct for communications cables and fiber optic cables between the communications devices in control panel and communications raceways. Design plastic wire duct design to take into account the minimum bending radius of the communications cable.

16. Make plastic wire ducts the same depth. 17. Provide a minimum of 1-1/2 inches between plastic wire ducts and

terminal blocks.

H. Factory Finishing:

1. Furnish materials and equipment with manufacturer’s standard finish system in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

2. Use specific color if indicated. Otherwise use manufacturer’s standard finish color, or light gray if manufacturer has no standard color.

3. Stainless Steel and Aluminum: Not painted. 4. Nonmetallic Panels: Not painted. 5. Steel Panels:

a. Sand panel and remove mill scale, rust, grease, and oil. b. Fill imperfections and sand smooth. c. Paint panel interior and exterior with one coat of epoxy coating

metal primer, two finish coats of two-component type epoxy enamel.

d. Sand surfaces lightly between coats. e. Dry Film Thickness: 3 mils, minimum. f. Color: Manufacturer’s standard.

2.11 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Corrosion-Inhibiting Vapor Capsules:

1. Areas Where Required: Refer to Part 3, Article Protection. 2. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Northern Instruments; Model Zerust VC. b. Hoffmann Engineering; Model A-HCI.


A. General:

1. Engineer may actively participate in many of the tests.



2. Procedures, Forms, and Checklists: a. Except for Unwitnessed Factory Test, conduct tests in accordance

with, and documented on, Engineer accepted procedures, forms, and checklists.

b. Describe each test item to be performed. c. Have space after each test item description for sign off by

appropriate party after satisfactory completion. 3. Required Test Documentation: Test procedures, forms, and checklists

signed by Engineer and Contractor. 4. Conducting Tests:

a. Provide special testing materials and equipment. b. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables,

equipment, and data. c. If not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and

data provide suitable means of simulation. d. Define simulation techniques in test procedures. e. Test Format: Cause and effect.

1) Person conducting test initiates an input (cause). 2) Specific test requirement is satisfied if correct result

(effect), occurs. f. For PIC systems for which Engineer provides applications

software, provide sufficient temporary software configuring to allow FDT testing of these subsystems.

B. Unwitnessed Factory Test:

1. Scope: Inspect and test PIC to ensure it is operational, ready for FDT. 2. Location: PIC System Integrator’s facility. 3. Integrated Test:

a. Interconnect and test PIC, except for primary elements and smaller panels.

b. Exercise and test functions. c. Provide stand-alone testing of smaller panels. d. Simulate inputs and outputs for primary elements, final control

elements, and panels excluded from test.

C. Factory Demonstration Tests (FDT):

1. Notify Engineer of test schedule 4 weeks prior to start of test. 2. Scope:

a. Test panels, with exception of primary elements, final control elements, and certain smaller panels, to demonstrate it is operational.



b. Refer to Control Panel Schedule in Article Supplements for list of panels for which FDT is required.

3. Location: PIC System Integrator’s facility. 4. Correctness of wiring from panel field terminals to PLC system

input/output points and to panel components. a. Simulate each discrete signal at terminal strip. b. Simulate correctness of each analog signal using current source.

5. Operation of communications between PLCs and remote I/O and between PLCs and computers.

6. Loop-Specific Functions: Demonstrate functions shown on P&IDs, control diagrams, and loop specifications: a. One of each type function; for example, if there are starting

sequence control for several identical units, demonstrate controls for one unit.

b. All required and shown loop functions. 7. Nonloop-Specific Functions:

a. Capacity: Demonstrate that PIC systems have required spare capacity for expansion. Include tests for both storage capacity and processing capacity.

b. Timing: Include tests for timing requirements. c. Diagnostics: Demonstrate online and offline diagnostic tests and

procedures. 8. Correct deficiencies found and complete prior to shipment to Site. 9. Failed Tests:

a. Repeat and witnessed by Engineer. b. With approval of Engineer, certain tests may be conducted by PIC

System Integrator and witnessed by Engineer as part of Functional Test.

10. Make following documentation available to Engineer at test site both before and during FDT: a. Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, and Change Orders. b. Master copy of FDT procedures. c. List of equipment to be tested including make, model, and serial

number. d. Approved hardware Shop Drawings for equipment being tested. e. Approved preliminary software documentation Submittal.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. For equipment not provided by PIC System Integrator, but that directly interfaces with PIC, verify the following conditions:

1. Proper installation. 2. Calibration and adjustment of positioners and I/P transducers. 3. Correct control action. 4. Switch settings and dead bands. 5. Opening and closing speeds and travel stops. 6. Input and output signals.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Material and Equipment Installation: Follow manufacturers’ installation instructions, unless otherwise indicated or directed by Engineer.

B. Wiring connected to PIC components and assemblies, including power wiring in accordance with requirements in Section 26 05 05, Conductors.

C. Electrical Raceways: As specified in Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes.

D. Mechanical Systems:

1. Stainless Steel Tubing Support: Continuously supported by aluminum tubing raceway system or pipe supports.

2. Plastic Tubing Support: Except as shown on Drawings, provide continuous support in conduit or by aluminum tubing raceway system.

3. Install conduit for plastic tubing and tubing raceways parallel with, or at right angles to, structural members of buildings. Make vertical runs straight and plumb.

4. Tubing and Conduit Bends: a. Tool-formed without flattening, and of same radius. b. Bend Radius: Equal to or larger than conduit and tubing

manufacturer’s recommended minimum bend radius. c. Slope instrument connection tubing in accordance with

installation details. d. Do not run liquid filled instrument tubing immediately over or

within a 3-foot plan view clearance of electrical panels or motor starters.

e. Straighten coiled tubing by unrolling on flat surface. Do not pull to straighten.



f. Cut tubing square with sharp tubing cutter. Deburr cuts and remove chips. Do not gouge or scratch surface of tubing.

g. Blow debris from inside of tubing. h. Make up and install fittings in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations. Verify make up of tube fittings with manufacturer’s inspection gauge.

i. Use lubricating compound or TFE tape on stainless steel threads to prevent seizing or galling.

j. Run tubing to allow but not limited to, clear access to doors, controls and control panels; and to allow for easy removal of equipment.

k. Provide separate support for components in tubing runs. l. Supply expansion loops and use adapters at pipe, valve, or

component connections for proper orientation of fitting. m. Keep tubing and conduit runs at least 12 inches from hot pipes. n. Locate and install tubing raceways in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations. Locate tubing to prevent spillage, overflow, or dirt from above.

o. Securely attach tubing and tubing raceways to building structural members.

5. Enclosure Lifting Rings: Remove rings following installation and plug holes.

E. Field Finishing: Refer to Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.


A. General:

1. Coordinate PIC testing with Owner and affected Subcontractors. 2. Notify Engineer of Performance Test schedule 4 weeks prior to start of

test. 3. Engineer may actively participate in tests. 4. Engineer reserves right to test or retest specified functions. 5. Engineer’s decision will be final regarding acceptability and

completeness of testing.

B. Onsite Supervision:

1. PIC System Integrator to observe PIC equipment installation to extent required in order to provide Certificates of Proper Installation.

2. PIC site representative to supervise and coordinate onsite PIC activities. 3. PIC site representative to be onsite while onsite work covered by this

section and PIC subsystems is in progress.



C. Leak Tests: During Functional Test Part 1, conduct leak tests in accordance with Section 40 80 01, Process Piping Leakage Testing.

D. Testing:

1. Prior to Facility Startup and Performance Evaluation period for each facility, inspect, test, and document that associated PIC equipment is ready for operation. Divide Functional Test for each facility into two parts.

2. Functional Test Part 1: Performed by PIC System Integrator to test and document PIC, excluding Engineer provided applications software, is ready for operation. a. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests:

1) These inspections and tests will be spot checked by Engineer.

2) Check PIC for proper installation, calibration, and adjustment on loop-by-loop and component-by-component basis.

3) Provide space on forms for signoff by PIC System Integrator.

4) Use loop status report to organize and track inspection, adjustment, and calibration of each loop and include the following: a) Project name. b) Loop number. c) Tag number for each component. d) Checkoffs/Signoffs for Each Component:

(1) Tag/identification. (2) Installation. (3) Termination wiring. (4) Termination tubing. (5) Calibration/adjustment.

e) Checkoffs/Signoffs for the Loop: (1) Panel interface terminations. (2) I/O interface terminations with PLCs.

f) I/O Signals for PLCs are Operational: Received/sent, processed.

g) Total loop operational. h) Space for comments.



5) Component calibration sheet for each active I&C component (except simple hand switches, lights, gauges, and similar items) and each PLC I/O module and include the following: a) Project name. b) Loop number. c) Component tag number or I/O module number. d) Component code number for I&C elements. e) Manufacturer for I&C elements. f) Model number/serial number for I&C elements. g) Summary of Functional Requirements; for example:

(1) Indicators scale ranges. (2) Transmitters/converters, input and output

ranges. (3) Switching elements, unit range, differential

(fixed/adjustable), reset (auto/manual). (4) I/O Modules: Input or output.

h) Calibrations, for example, but not limited to: (1) Analog Devices: Actual inputs and outputs at 0,

50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling. (2) Discrete Devices: Actual trip points and reset

points. (3) I/O Modules: Actual inputs or outputs of 0, 50,

and 100 percent of span, rising and falling. (4) Space for comments.

b. Maintain loop status reports, valve adjustment sheets, and component calibration sheets at Site, and make them available to Engineer at all times.

c. Engineer reviews loop status sheets and component calibration sheets and spot-check their entries periodically, and upon completion of Preparation for Testing. Correct deficiencies found.

d. FDT-Repeat: 1) Repeat FDT onsite with installed PIC equipment and

software. 2) Use FDT test procedures as basis for this test. 3) In general, this test shall not require witnessing. However,

portions of this test, as identified by Engineer during original FDT shall be witnessed.

e. Forms: See Loop Status Report and Instrument Calibration Sheet referenced in Article Supplements.



3. Functional Test Part 2: Combined effort between Contractor, PIC System Integrator, and Engineer to confirm PIC, including applications software, is ready for operation. a. Prerequisite: Completion of Functional Test Part 1. b. Joint test with Engineer. Test using real field sensors and

equipment. Plant interlocking and communications with PLCs and HMI tested on loop-by-loop basis.

c. Test procedures provided by Engineer based on Functional Test Part 1 and on application software tests.

d. Completed when Functional Test has been conducted and Engineer has checked associated test forms and checklists in field.

4. Required Test Documentation: Test procedures, forms, and checklists. Signed by Contractor.

E. Performance Test During and After Facility Startup:

1. Once a facility’s Functional Test has been completed and that facility has been started up, perform jointly with Engineer a Performance Test on associated PIC equipment to demonstrate that it is operating as required by Contract Documents. Demonstrate each required function on a paragraph-by-paragraph, loop-by-loop, and site-by-site basis.

2. Make loop-specific and nonloop-specific tests on entire installed PIC using actual process variables and functions demonstrated.

3. Perform local and manual tests for each loop before proceeding to remote and automatic modes.

4. Where possible, verify test results using visual confirmation of process equipment and actual process variable. Unless otherwise directed, exercise and observe devices supplied by others, as needed to verify correct signals to and from such devices and to confirm overall system functionality. Test verification by means of disconnecting wires or measuring signal levels is acceptable only where direct operation of plant equipment is not possible.

5. Make updated versions of documentation required for Performance Test available to Engineer at Site, both before and during tests.

6. Make O&M data available to Engineer at Site both before and during testing.

7. Determination of Ready for Operation: When Functional Test has been completed.

8. Refer to examples of Performance Test procedures and forms in Article Supplements.




A. Manufacturer’s Representative: As required by each PIC subsection.

B. Specialty Equipment: For certain components or systems provided under this section, but not manufactured by PIC System Integrator, provide services of qualified manufacturer’s representative during installation, startup, demonstration testing, and training.

C. See Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

3.05 TRAINING

A. General:

1. Provide an integrated training program for Owner’s personnel. 2. Perform training to meet specific needs of Owner’s personnel. 3. Include training sessions, classroom and field, for managers, engineers,

operators, and maintenance personnel. 4. Provide instruction on two working shift(s) as needed to accommodate

the Owner’s personnel schedule. 5. Owner reserves the right to reuse videotapes of training sessions.

B. Operations and Maintenance Training:

1. General: a. Refer to specific requirements specified in PIC Subsections. b. Include review of O&M data and survey of spares, expendables,

and test equipment. c. Use equipment similar to that provided. d. Unless otherwise specified in PIC subsections, provide training

suitable for instrument technicians with at least a 2-year associate engineering or technical degree, or equivalent education and experience in electronics, instrumentation, or digital systems.

2. Operations Training: For Owner’s operations personnel on operation of I&C components. a. Training Session Duration: One instructor day. b. Number of Training Sessions: Two. c. Location: Project Site. d. Course Objective: Develop skills needed to use I&C components

and functions to monitor and control the plant on a day-to-day basis.



e. Content: Conduct training on loop-by-loop basis. 1) Loop Functions: Understanding of loop functions, including

interlocks for each loop. 2) Loop Operation: For example, adjusting process variable

setpoints, AUTO/MANUAL control transfer, AUTO and MANUAL control, alarm acknowledgement and resetting.

3) Interfaces with PIC control systems. 3. Maintenance Training:

a. Training Session Duration: One instructor day. b. Number of Training Sessions: Two. c. Location: Project Site. d. Course Objective: Develop skills needed for routine maintenance

of PIC. e. Content: Provide training for each type of component and

function provided. 1) Loop Functions: Understanding details of each loop and

how they function. 2) Component calibration. 3) Adjustments: For example, configuration parameters,

current switch trip points, and similar items. 4) Troubleshooting and diagnosis for equipment. 5) Replacing lamps, fuses, and similar devices. 6) Replenishing reagents and other expendables. 7) I&C components removal and replacement. 8) Periodic cleaning, servicing, and preventive maintenance.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of Work, remove materials, scraps, and debris from interior and exterior of equipment.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Use corrosion-inhibiting vapor capsules in enclosures to protect electrical, instrumentation, and control devices, including spare parts, from corrosion.

B. Periodically replace capsules based on capsule manufacturer’s recommendations.



3.08 SUPPLEMENTS

A. The supplements listed below, following “End of Section,” are part of this Specification.

1. Loop Specifications. 2. Instrument List. 3. PLC Equipment List. 4. PLC Input/Output List. 5. Control Panel Schedule. 6. Preparation for Testing and Functional Test Forms:

a. Loop Status Report: Each sheet shows status of instruments on a loop. Also, gives functional description for loop.

b. Instrument Calibration Sheet: Shows details on each instrument (except simple hand switches, lights, and similar items).

c. I&C Valve Adjustment Sheet: Shows details for installation, adjustment, and calibration of a given valve.

7. Performance Test Sheet: Describe Performance Test for a given loop. a. List requirements of the loop. b. Briefly describe test. c. Cite expected results. d. Provide space for checkoff by witness.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL JANUARY 2020 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

LOOP SPECIFICATIONS

1.01 GENERAL

A. Purpose: Loop Specifications provide requirements for special functions of each unit process and loop. Common and standard functions are not repeated. Refer to common functions listed below, P&IDs, control panel diagrams, and electrical control diagrams, for additional requirements and descriptions of common and standard functions.

B. Application Software:

1. Application Software for PLC and HMI functions are provided by Engineer. Software functions are listed for reference, and to aid in coordination of testing and startup.

2. For each Loop, PLC application software functions are listed under Auto Control, and HMI application software functions are listed under HMI.

3. Provide assistance with testing of Application Software.

1.02 COMMON FUNCTIONS

A. Application Software common and standard functions will be provided by Engineer to match Owner’s existing software. Not all functions are listed herein.

B. Local Control:

1. Hand switches and controls located near or on the equipment: a. Motorized Equipment: ON/OFF/REMOTE. In the ON mode, the

motorized equipment starts and runs. In OFF mode, the equipment is OFF. In REMOTE mode, control is from PLC and HMI.

b. Adjustable Speed Equipment: In the ON (LOCAL) mode, speed is adjusted from the adjustable speed drive human interface module, between the configured maximum and minimum speed range. In the REMOTE mode, speed control is from PLC and HMI.

c. Valve, Gate, and Damper Actuators: LOCAL/REMOTE hand switch and OPEN/CLOSE switches to operate the valve/gate/damper in LOCAL mode. In REMOTE position, control is from PLC and HMI.


INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW\DEN003\708335 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 2020 40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

C. HMI Control: REMOTE MANUAL and REMOTE AUTO.

1. When the equipment is in REMOTE mode, selection of REMOTE MANUAL and REMOTE AUTO is available from HMI.

2. When MANUAL is selected, HMI provides START/STOP or OPEN/CLOSE control to manually operate the equipment via the PLC. For adjustable speed equipment, HMI provides manual speed adjustment, limited to equipment allowable speed range. For modulating valves, HMI provide manual position adjustment.

3. When AUTO is selected, the equipment is controlled by the PLC running an automatic control routine.

D. Equipment Availability:

1. Logic to define equipment availability, for use in equipment operating schemes to control equipment sequences and redundant operation such as Duty/Standby and Lead/Lag. Equipment is available when all of the associated conditions are true: a. Communication Good (when applicable). b. In REMOTE mode (when applicable). c. In REMOTE AUTO mode. d. Not FAILED.

E. Equipment Failure Discrepancy Alarms: When equipment is selected to be controlled in REMOTE mode from PLC and HMI, monitor the equipment feedback (motor running, or valve/gate opened/closed) and activate an equipment failure alarm condition if the equipment has not responded to the control command within a reasonable time delay. For modulating valves, alarm when the position feedback differs from the position command by a deadband (initially set at 2 percent).

F. Analog Signal Alarms:

1. For each analog process variable, whether directly measured or a calculated value.

2. Four Levels of Alarm for Each Analog Signal: Low-low, Low, High, and High-high. Low alarms activate below alarm limit, and high alarms activate above alarm limit. Time delay for each alarm prevents nuisance alarms.

3. Each of these alarms is provided with program interlock capability to override alarm for certain conditions. Use the override on Low Flow alarms when flow is associated with equipment operation, to avoid nuisance alarm if no flow is expected when equipment is off.



4. Each of these alarms is provided with operator Enable/Disable from HMI.

5. Each of these alarms has HMI adjustment of alarm setpoint. 6. Alarm deadband, used to avoid nuisance alarms, is adjustable in the

PLC for each analog signal, nominally set at 1 percent of analog scale range.

7. For Analog Inputs: Detect loss of signal and provide Signal BAD QUALITY alarm.

G. Totalizers:

1. Provide accumulated totals for each of the following: a. Equipment Runtime, resolution of 0.1 hour. b. Process Flow total volumes in gallons or Mgal (million gallons).

Provide totalizers for each flow value, whether measured or calculated (combined). Reset flow totals daily at midnight. Display at HMI the current day accumulated total and yesterday’s total.

H. Duty/Standby Control:

1. Duty/Standby provides control over two redundant equipment items such as pumps or fans.

2. The Duty equipment runs when called to run. This can include continuous operation, or on/off operation based on process conditions.

3. The Standby equipment runs when the Duty is called and is not available and is not ON.

4. HMI provides a FAIL alarm if no equipment is available. 5. HMI provides a 1-2 and 2-1 Duty/Standby sequence selection.

1.03 PRIMARY CLARIFIERS LAUNDER SPRAY

A. Process Overview: Two spray headers are provided at each of four primary clarifier launders, with flow to each header controlled by a solenoid valve. Spray is turned on periodically to help prevent material buildup on the launders. Solenoid valves are 120V ac, energized to open (fail closed).

B. Special Functions:

1. Loop 200600: a. Local:

1) Provide a new 120V fused circuit in control panel 10LCP0001 for each solenoid valve power.

2) For each valve, connect power through PLC output wired to solenoid to create switched circuit for open/close control.



b. Auto Control: 1) Control all 8 spray valves in a timed sequence. At each step

of the sequence, open the valve for a preset OPEN time. When the OPEN time is elapsed, close the valve and continue to the next valve in the sequence. If a valve is not available, skip it in the sequence and continue with the next valve.

2) Open valves in this sequence: a) 20FV0601A. b) 20FV0601B. c) 20FV0602A. d) 20FV0602B. e) 20FV0603A. f) 20FV0603B. g) 20FV0604A. h) 20FV0604B.

3) When the sequence is complete, wait for a preset INTERVAL time, then start the sequence again.

c. HMI: 1) For each valve, MANUAL and AUTO selection. 2) For each valve, OPEN and CLOSE selection in MANUAL

mode. 3) Valve OPEN and CLOSED display based on call to OPEN

and CLOSE. 4) Sequence OPEN time setting, adjustable from 1 minute to

60 minutes. 5) Sequence INTERVAL time setting, adjustable from

60 minutes to 1,440 minutes.

1.04 AERATION BASIN 5 AND 6 ANALYSIS

A. Process Overview:

1. Aeration Basins 5 and 6 are analyzed for Oxidation Reduction Potential (ORP) in the Anoxic Zone, and for ammonia (NH3 as N) in each Aerobic Zone A, B, and C of each Basin.

2. ORP measurement provides an indication of anoxic zone performance and warning of possible anaerobic condition.

3. Ammonia measurement provides an indication of de-nitrification performance of each zone.




1. Loops 320602 and 322602: a. Local:

1) Measure and indicate the ammonia concentration in each Aerobic Zone of Aeration Basins 5 and 6.

2) Provide one common multi-channel transmitter at each basin for connection of three ammonia probes and one ORP probe.

3) Transmit measured ammonia concentrations to PLC. b. Auto Control: None. c. HMI:

1) Indicate and trend ammonia concentration for each Aerobic Zone of Aeration Basins 5 and 6.

2) Standard analog signal alarms. 2. Loops 320603 and 322603:

a. Local: 1) Measure and indicate the ORP in the Anoxic Zone of

Aeration Basins 5 and 6. 2) Connect ORP probe at each basin to the multi-channel

transmitter provided for the ammonia probes. 3) Transmit measured ORP to PLC.

b. Auto Control: None. c. HMI:

1) Indicate and trend ORP for Anoxic Zone of Aeration Basins 5 and 6.

2) Standard analog signal alarms..

1.05 RAS PUMPING

A. Process Overview: New discharge piping and instruments for RAS Pumps 1 through 6 provide streamlining of future RAS pump upgrades.



1) For each RAS Pump 1 through 6, measure and indicate pump discharge pressure.

2) Provide annular seal for each pressure indicator. b. Auto Control: Maintain existing RAS pump controls. c. HMI: Maintain existing RAS pump functions.




1) For each of four RAS Pump flow streams, assigned to Secondary Clarifiers 1 through 4, measure, indicate, and totalize RAS flow rate.

2) Transmit flow rate signals to PLC, re-using existing RAS flow analog inputs.

b. Auto Control: Maintain existing RAS flow controls. c. HMI: Maintain existing RAS flow functions.

1.06 BELT FILTER PRESS ODOR CONTROL


1. Odorous air is collected through an exhaust hood at each belt filter press (BFP) and directed to the Solids Odor Control system. Typically, only one BFP operates at a time. An actuated damper on each exhaust hood duct provides control of which BFP the odorous air is drawn from.

2. Criteria for operation include: a. Odorous air exhaust to the Solids Odor Control system is required

at all times. b. An actuated damper opens for the specific BFP in operation to

permit room air exhaust to the Solids Odor Control system. c. Dampers throttle to partially open position when both BFPs are

not operating. d. Both dampers open when both BFPs are in operation.



1) Provide LOCAL/REMOTE selection at each BFP odorous air damper.

2) Provide OPEN/STOP/CLOSE selection at each damper for LOCAL mode control.

b. Auto Control: 1) When only one BFP is called to run, or is running, open the

associated odorous air damper to full open position, or other maximum position as determined during testing and balancing. Close the damper for the BFP that is not running.

2) If both BFP units are called to run, or are running, open both odorous air dampers to intermediate position as determined during testing and balancing.



3) If neither BFP units are called to run, and are not running, open both odorous air dampers to minimum position as determined during testing and balancing.

4) For each odorous air damper, alarm FAIL when position feedback differs from position setpoint by more than 5 percent for 60 seconds.

c. HMI: 1) For each odorous air damper, display position status. 2) For each odorous air damper, display LOCAL and

REMOTE mode selection. 3) For each odorous air damper, alarm FAIL.

1.07 SOLIDS ODOR CONTROL


1. Odorous air from the plant Solids area is drawn through the odor control system by two Odor Control Exhaust Fans. Each fan is sized for full capacity, so only one fan runs at a time, in a Duty/Standby configuration. Fans are adjustable speed to allow for air flow to be manually adjusted.

2. Pressure is measured on the common suction and discharge odorous air ducts. The difference in pressure is used to calculate odorous air flow rate.

3. The Odor Control Fans are housed in an enclosure for noise mitigation. An enclosure ventilation fan provides air flow for heat rejection. The enclosure is monitored for high temperature.

4. The Odor Control Fans discharge odorous air to a pair of Activated Carbon Adsorbers. An Adsorber is placed online by operation of manual isolation dampers. Both Adsorbers are duty and operate in a parallel arrangement with equal air flow. Differential pressure measured at each Adsorber provides indication that air is flowing through the Adsorber media, to allow trending of performance and maintenance requirements.



1) Measure and indicate suction side pressure (vacuum) for Odor Control Exhaust Fans.

2) Transmit pressure signal to PLC. b. Auto Control: Use suction pressure in fan flow rate calculation.



c. HMI: 1) Indicate and trend Odor Control Exhaust Fan suction

pressure (vacuum). 2) Standard analog signal alarms.


1) Provide ON/OFF/REMOTE control of each Odor Control Exhaust Fan. Provide local speed adjustment at adjustable speed drive. Provide Device-Level Ring (DLR) Ethernet connection of each adjustable speed drive to PLC I/O network, via network switch at control panel.

2) Provide ON/OFF/REMOTE control of Enclosure Vent Fan. 3) Monitor Enclosure for HIGH temperature and send HIGH

temperature signal to PLC. b. Auto Control:

1) Odor Control Exhaust Fans: a) Communicate with adjustable speed drives via

Ethernet/IP on DLR for monitoring and remote control.

b) Operate Fans as Duty/Standby. c) Calculate odorous air flow rate using the difference

between discharge and suction pressures (total fan static pressure), and the duty fan operating speed. Use the fan curves from fan submittal and field data obtained during testing to derive calculation parameters.

d) Provide suction pressure PID controller to adjust Duty fan speed. Suction pressure setpoint is determined during startup and will not normally require adjustment. Recommended setpoint is provided by Adsorber system supplier during testing and air balancing.

2) Odor Control Exhaust Fan Enclosure: Control the Enclosure Vent Fan to run when either Odor Control Exhaust Fan is running, or when enclosure temperature is HIGH.

c. HMI: 1) Odor Control Exhaust Fans:

a) Standard adjustable speed equipment monitoring, control, and alarms.

b) Fan Duty/Standby selection. c) Fan suction pressure setpoint, restricted to high level

access. d) Suction pressure PID controller.



2) Odor Control Exhaust Fan Enclosure: a) Standard equipment monitoring, control, and alarms

for Enclosure Vent Fan. b) Enclosure HIGH temperature alarm.


1) Measure and indicate discharge side pressure for Odor Control Exhaust Fans.

2) Transmit pressure signal to PLC. b. Auto Control: Use discharge pressure in fan flow rate calculation. c. HMI:

1) Indicate and trend Odor Control Exhaust Fan discharge pressure.

2) Standard analog signal alarms. 4. Loop 750400:

a. Local: 1) Measure and indicate differential pressure for each

Activated Carbon Adsorber. 2) Transmit differential pressure signal to PLC.


1) Indicate and trend Activated Carbon Adsorber differential pressure for each unit.

2) Standard analog signal alarms.

1.08 PRELIMINARY AND PRIMARY TREATMENT ODOR CONTROL


1. Odorous air from the plant Preliminary and Primary Treatment area is drawn through the odor control system by two Odor Control Exhaust Fans. Each fan is sized for full capacity, so only one fan runs at a time, in a Duty/Standby configuration. Fans are adjustable speed to allow for air flow to be manually adjusted.

2. Pressure is measured on the common suction and discharge odorous air ducts. The difference in pressure is used to calculate odorous air flow rate.

3. The Odor Control Fans are housed in an enclosure for noise mitigation. An enclosure ventilation fan provides air flow for heat rejection. The enclosure is monitored for high temperature.

4. The Odor Control Fans discharge odorous air to a pair of Biotrickling Filter Towers (BTFs). A BTF is placed online by operation of manual isolation dampers. Both BTFs are duty and operate in a parallel arrangement with equal air flow. The treated air exits each BTF after



passing through an integral mist eliminator that removes any entrained water droplets prior to being exhausted through a stack.

5. Each BTF can be isolated for maintenance and inspection. A single tower can be shut down at a time while half the air is treated by the other BTF and half is routed to the bypass stack. The BTF media does not require replacement under normal operating conditions and expected to last in excess of 10 years.

6. Differential pressure measured at each BTF provides indication of BTF performance and maintenance requirements. This provides a verification for flow going through each tower, as well as an indication of an abnormal pressure drop.

7. The BTF media is automatically and intermittently irrigated using W3 nonpotable water. After passing through a pressure regulator, strainer, and isolation valve, W3 is piped to the irrigation water panel. The panel contains the automatic valves, flow regulating valve, and flow transmitter for monitoring and control of irrigation of the media. Dedicated motorized valves control irrigation flow to each BTF. Only one BTF is irrigated at a time and is expected to occur a few times per day. The irrigation rate (frequency, and duration) is recommended by the media supplier and controlled by the plant PLC. Irrigation flow rate is set using manual balancing valves. The setpoints are provided by the BTF supplier during commissioning and do not normally require adjustment. After flowing through the media, the irrigation water drains from the vessel to the process drain line.

8. A separate solenoid valve located in the water panel is used to flush the drain line of acidic byproducts, using W3 water.

9. A Nutrient Pump located in the water panel is used to periodically feed nutrient to the BTFs during the irrigation cycle.



1) Measure and indicate suction side pressure (vacuum) for Odor Control Exhaust Fans.

2) Transmit pressure signal to PLC. b. Auto Control: Use suction pressure in fan flow rate calculation. c. HMI:

1) Indicate and trend Odor Control Exhaust Fan suction pressure (vacuum).

2) Standard analog signal alarms.




1) Provide ON/OFF/REMOTE control of each Odor Control Exhaust Fan. Provide local speed adjustment at adjustable speed drive. Provide Device-Level Ring (DLR) Ethernet connection of each adjustable speed drive to PLC I/O network, via network switch at control panel.

2) Provide ON/OFF/REMOTE control of Enclosure Vent Fan. 3) Monitor Enclosure for HIGH temperature and send HIGH

temperature signal to PLC. b. Auto Control:

1) Odor Control Exhaust Fans: a) Communicate with adjustable speed drives via

Ethernet/IP on DLR for monitoring and remote control.

b) Operate Fans as Duty/Standby. c) Calculate odorous air flow rate using the difference

between discharge and suction pressures (total fan static pressure), and the duty fan operating speed. Use the fan curves from fan submittal and field data obtained during testing to derive calculation parameters.

d) Duty fan speed is manually set during startup and will not normally require adjustment. Recommended setpoint is determined during testing and air balancing.

e) SHUTDOWN both fans if the HVAC Control Panel ENABLE signal is removed.

f) When either fan is running and calculated air flow is above a threshold value, then the ventilation is OK. If the ventilation is NOT OK for a time delay (nominally 30 seconds), then signal VENTILATION FAIL to the HVAC Control Panel.

2) Odor Control Exhaust Fan Enclosure: Control the Enclosure Vent Fan to run when either Odor Control Exhaust Fan is running, or when enclosure temperature is HIGH.

c. HMI: 1) Odor Control Exhaust Fans:

a) Standard adjustable speed equipment monitoring, control, and alarms.

b) Fan Duty/Standby selection. c) Fan speed setpoint, restricted to high level access.



2) Odor Control Exhaust Fan Enclosure: a) Standard equipment monitoring, control, and alarms

for Enclosure Vent Fan. b) Enclosure HIGH temperature alarm.


1) Measure and indicate discharge side pressure for Odor Control Exhaust Fans.

2) Transmit pressure signal to PLC. b. Auto Control: Use discharge pressure in fan flow rate calculation. c. HMI:

1) Indicate and trend Odor Control Exhaust Fan discharge pressure.

2) Standard analog signal alarms. 4. Loop 220400:

a. Local: 1) Measure and indicate differential pressure for each BTF. 2) Transmit differential pressure signal to PLC.


1) Indicate and trend BTF differential pressure for each unit. 2) Standard analog signal alarms.


1) Irrigation Water Panel is provided with Biotrickling Filter System: a) Measure, indicate, and totalize irrigation water flow. b) Local operation of irrigation flow valves. c) Local operation of nutrient pump. d) Distribute 120V ac power in water panel to valve

actuators, flow meter, nutrient pump, and drain flush solenoid valve.

e) For solenoid valve, connect power through PLC output wired to solenoid to create switched circuit for open/close control.

b. Auto Control: 1) Control description is for generic system. Provide controls

based on control narrative provided by BTF system supplier.

2) Control irrigation valves in a timed sequence. At each step of the sequence, open the valve for a preset OPEN time. When the OPEN time is elapsed, close the valve and continue to the next valve in the sequence. If a valve is not



available, skip it in the sequence and continue with the next step.

3) Open valves in this sequence: a) 22FV0501. b) 22FV0502.

4) When the sequence is complete, wait for a preset INTERVAL time, then start the sequence again.

5) During each irrigation cycle, open the drain flush solenoid valve and keep it open for 10 minutes after the cycle completes.

6) Count the number of irrigation cycles since the Nutrient Pump last ran. When the cycle count reaches an operator-entered setpoint, then run the Nutrient Pump during the next cycle and reset the cycle counter. Only run the Nutrient Pump if irrigation water flow rate is above a threshold value.

c. HMI: 1) For each valve:

a) MANUAL and AUTO selection. b) OPEN and CLOSE selection in MANUAL mode. c) OPEN and CLOSED display.

2) Sequence OPEN time setting, adjustable from 1 minute to 60 minutes.

3) Sequence INTERVAL time setting, adjustable from 60 minutes to 1,440 minutes.

4) Nutrient Pump: a) MANUAL and AUTO selection. b) START and STOP selection in MANUAL mode. c) CALLED TO RUN (ON) display. d) Cycle Counter. e) Cycle Count setpoint for RUN control.

5) Irrigation Flow: a) Indicate and trend flow rate. b) Totalize flow. c) Standard analog signal alarms.

1.09 DIGESTER LEVEL

A. Process Overview: New level instruments for Digesters 1 and 2.




1. Loops 732600 and 732700: a. Local:

1) For each Digester 1 and 2, measure level at existing sludge recirculation line with direct sensing level transmitter. Provide flushing connection.

2) For each Digester 1 and 2, measure level at digester access hatch with radar level transmitter. Provide isolation valve.

b. Auto Control: 1) Maintain existing Digester controls. 2) Calculate level from direct sensing instrument by

subtracting the digester gas pressure. c. HMI:

1) Maintain existing Digester functions including direct sensing level displays.

2) Add level displays for new radar level measurements.

1.10 CAKE TRANSFER SCREW

A. Process Overview: New adjustable speed cake transfer screw.



1) Maintain existing control station in operation with new cake transfer screw, including LOCAL/REMOTE selection and local START and STOP.

2) Provide new adjustable speed control of cake transfer screw. When in LOCAL, screw is started and stopped from control station, and speed is set at the Adjustable Speed Drive HIM module.

3) When in REMOTE, screw is controlled from PLC over Ethernet.

b. Auto Control: 1) Maintain existing Cake Transfer Screw controls. 2) Set speed based on number of BFP units running:

a) If none are running, stop screw after a time delay (match existing).

b) If one is running, set speed at medium set point (adjustable by operator).

c) If two are running, set speed at high set point (adjustable by operator).



c. HMI: 1) Maintain existing Cake Transfer Screw functions. 2) Provide setpoints for screw speed:

a) Medium (One BFP). B) High (Two BFPs).

INSTRUMENT LIST SALMON CREEK TREATMENT

PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

Tag Number(s)Comp. Code

Component Title and Features P&IDInstallation

Detail

32AIT030132AY0301A32AY0301B32AY0301C32AY0603 A150

ANALYTICAL INDICATING TRANSMITTER, MULTI-CHANNELBase Unit Mounting: PanelField Junction Boxes: Four

95-I-112 4091-382

32AE0602A 32AE0602B 32AE0602C A15

AMMONIUM ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTERCalibrated Range: 0 to 50 mg/LTransmitter: 32AIT0602 95-I-112 Mfr Standard

32AE0603 A5

ORP ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTERCalibrated Range: -500 to +500 mVTransmitter: 32AIT0602 95-I-112 Mfr Standard

32AE0301A 32AE0301B 32AE0301C A20

DISSOLVED OXYGEN ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, LUMINESCENT (LDO)Calibrated Range: 0 to 20 mg/L 95-I-112 Mfr Standard

32AIT230132AY2301A32AY2301B32AY2301C32AY2603 A150

ANALYTICAL INDICATING TRANSMITTER, MULTI-CHANNELBase Unit Mounting: PanelField Junction Boxes: Four

95-I-113 4091-382

32AE2602A 32AE2602B 32AE2602C A15

AMMONIUM ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTERCalibrated Range: 0 to 50 mg/LTransmitter: 32AIT2602 95-I-113 Mfr Standard

32AE2603 A5

ORP ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTERCalibrated Range: -500 to +500 mVTransmitter: 32AIT2602 95-I-113 Mfr Standard

32AE2301A 32AE2301B 32AE2301C A20

DISSOLVED OXYGEN ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, LUMINESCENT (LDO)Calibrated Range: 0 to 20 mg/L 95-I-113 Mfr Standard

47FIT2101 47FE2101 F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, ELECTROMAGNETICStream Fluid: Return Activated Sludge (RAS)Flow Range: 0 to 6 mgdMeter Size: 12-inchLiner Material: TeflonElectrode Material: 316 SSTGrounding Ring: 316 SSTTransmitter Mount: Remote 95-I-123 4091-219

47FIT2102 47FE2102 F4


PW\DEN003\708335

JANUARY 2020

©COPYRIGHT 2020 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS

40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT ‐ 1


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



Detail

47FIT2103 47FE2103 F4


47FIT2104 47FE2104 F4


47PE200147PE200247PE200347PE200447PE200547PE2006 P15

PRESSURE SEAL, ANNULARMounting: InlinePipe Size: 12-inchFlange: 316 SST

95-I-123 4091-304

47PI200147PI200247PI200347PI200447PI200547PI2006 P4

PRESSURE GAUGERange: 0 to 30 psigSpecial Feature: Overload stopPressure Seal: P15

95-I-123 4091-304

22PI0501 P4PRESSURE GAUGERange: 0 to 100 psig 95-I-156A 4091-302

22PIT0101 P9PRESSURE TRANSMITTERRange: Minus 10 to 0 inches WC 95-I-156A 4091-306

22PIT0301 P9PRESSURE TRANSMITTERRange: 0 to 10 inches WC 95-I-156A 4091-306

22PDIT0401 P3DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERRange: 0 to 5 inches WC 95-I-156A 4091-306

22PDIT0402 P3DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERRange: 0 to 5 inches WC 95-I-156A 4091-306

22TSH0201 T5TEMPERATURE SWITCHSetpoint: 40 degrees C 95-I-156A Wall mount

73LIT2601 L10

LEVEL TRANSMITTER, DIRECT SENSING, FLANGE MOUNTEDRange: 0 to 40 feetZero Reference: Bottom of DigesterFlange: 4-inch, Class 150 95-I-135 73-S-02

PW\DEN003\708335

JANUARY 2020



FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS



PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



Detail

73LIT2602 L10

LEVEL TRANSMITTER, DIRECT SENSING, FLANGE MOUNTEDRange: 0 to 40 feetZero Reference: Bottom of DigesterFlange: 4-inch, Class 150 95-I-135 73-S-02

73LIT2701 L7

LEVEL ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, RADARRange: 0 to 40 feetZero Reference: Bottom of DigesterMounting: 4-inch flangeAntenna: 3-inch bullet nose 95-I-135 73-S-02

73LIT2702 L7

LEVEL ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, RADARRange: 0 to 40 feetZero Reference: Bottom of DigesterMounting: 4-inch flangeAntenna: 3-inch bullet nose 95-I-135 73-S-02

75PIT0101 P9PRESSURE TRANSMITTERRange: Minus 10 to 0 inches WC 95-I-156B 4091-306

75PIT0301 P9PRESSURE TRANSMITTERRange: 0 to 10 inches WC 95-I-156B 4091-306

75PDIT0401 P3DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERRange: 0 to 5 inches WC 95-I-156B 4091-306

75PDIT0402 P3DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERRange: 0 to 5 inches WC 95-I-156B 4091-306

75TSH0201 T5TEMPERATURE SWITCHSetpoint: 40 degrees C 95-I-156B Wall mount

PW\DEN003\708335

JANUARY 2020



FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS


SALMON CREEK TREATMENT

PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

1 Digital Output Module, 16 point, Isolated Relay Contact 1 Allen-Bradley 1756 OW16I2 Termination Module for Digital Output 1 Allen-Bradley 1756-TBH3 Embedded Switch ETAP, 3 Copper Ports, 24 VDC 1 Allen-Bradley 1783-ETAP4 Ethernet Switch for DLR I/O Network, 16+2 Ports 3 Allen-Bradley 1783 BMS20CA

PLC EQUIPMENT LIST

Item Description Quantity Manufacturer Model

PW\DEN003\708335

JANUARY 2020



FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS



PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

10PLC01 10LCP0001 AI 1 22PIT0101 PRIMARY ODOR CONTROL FAN INLET PRESSURE -10 to 0 inches WC 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 AI 2 22FIT0501 BIOTRICKLING FILTERS IRRIGATION WATER FLOW By Vendor gpm 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 AI 3 22PIT0301 PRIMARY ODOR CONTROL FAN OUTLET PRESSURE 0 to 10 inches WC 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 AI 4 22PDIT0401 BIOTRICKLING FILTER TOWER 1 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE 0 to 5 inches WC 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 AI 5 22PDIT0402 BIOTRICKLING FILTER TOWER 2 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE 0 to 5 inches WC 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 DI 1 22FV0501 BIOTRICKLING FILTER 1 IRRIGATION CONTROL VALVE OPENED 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 DI 2 22FV0501 BIOTRICKLING FILTER 1 IRRIGATION CONTROL VALVE CLOSED 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 DI 3 22FV0502 BIOTRICKLING FILTER 2 IRRIGATION CONTROL VALVE OPENED 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 DI 4 22FV0502 BIOTRICKLING FILTER 2 IRRIGATION CONTROL VALVE CLOSED 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 DI 5 22TSH0201 PRIMARY ODOR CONTROL FAN ENCLOSURE TEMPERATURE HIGH 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 DI 6 22FAN0203 PRIMARY ODOR CONTROL FAN ENCLOSURE VENT FAN ON 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 DI 7 22FAN0203 PRIMARY ODOR CONTROL FAN ENCLOSURE VENT FAN REMOTE 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 DI 8 10ECP HVAC PANEL ODOR CONTROL INTERLOCK ENABLE 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 DO 1 20FV0601A PRIMARY LAUNDER 1 SPRAY A OPEN 95-I-105

10PLC01 10LCP0001 DO 2 20FV0601B PRIMARY LAUNDER 1 SPRAY B OPEN 95-I-105







10PLC01 10LCP0001 DO 9 22LCP0501 BIOTRICKLING FILTERS DRAIN FLUSH VALVE OPEN 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 DO 10 22PMP0501 BIOTRICKLING FILTERS NUTRIENT PUMP RUN 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 DO 11 22FV0501 BIOTRICKLING FILTER 1 IRRIGATION CONTROL VALVE OPEN 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 DO 12 22FV0501 BIOTRICKLING FILTER 1 IRRIGATION CONTROL VALVE CLOSE 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 DO 13 22FV0502 BIOTRICKLING FILTER 2 IRRIGATION CONTROL VALVE OPEN 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 DO 14 22FV0502 BIOTRICKLING FILTER 2 IRRIGATION CONTROL VALVE CLOSE 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 DO 15 22FAN0203 PRIMARY ODOR CONTROL FAN ENCLOSURE VENT FAN RUN 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 DO 16 10ECP HVAC PANEL VENTILATION ALARM FAIL 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 ETH 1 22FAN0201 PRIMARY ODOR CONTROL FAN 1 CONTROL DATA BLOCK 95-I-156A

10PLC01 10LCP0001 ETH 2 22FAN0202 PRIMARY ODOR CONTROL FAN 2 CONTROL DATA BLOCK 95-I-156A

37PLC01 37LCP0001 ETH 1 32AE0602A AERATION BASIN 5 AMMONIUM NO 1 0 to 50 mg/L 95-I-112

37PLC01 37LCP0001 ETH 2 32AE0602B AERATION BASIN 5 AMMONIUM NO 2 0 to 50 mg/L 95-I-112

37PLC01 37LCP0001 ETH 3 32AE0602C AERATION BASIN 5 AMMONIUM NO 3 0 to 50 mg/L 95-I-112

37PLC01 37LCP0001 ETH 4 32AE0603 AERATION BASIN 5 ORP -500 to +500 mV 95-I-112

37PLC01 37LCP0001 ETH 5 32AE0301A AERATION BASIN 5 DISSOLVED OXYGEN NO 1 0 to 20 mg/L 95-I-112

37PLC01 37LCP0001 ETH 6 32AE0301B AERATION BASIN 5 DISSOLVED OXYGEN NO 2 0 to 20 mg/L 95-I-112

37PLC01 37LCP0001 ETH 7 32AE0301C AERATION BASIN 5 DISSOLVED OXYGEN NO 3 0 to 20 mg/L 95-I-112

37PLC01 37LCP0001 ETH 8 32AIT2602A AERATION BASIN 6 AMMONIA NO 1 0 to 50 mg/L 95-I-113

37PLC01 37LCP0001 ETH 9 32AIT2602B AERATION BASIN 6 AMMONIA NO 2 0 to 50 mg/L 95-I-113

37PLC01 37LCP0001 ETH 10 32AIT2602C AERATION BASIN 6 AMMONIA NO 3 0 to 50 mg/L 95-I-113

37PLC01 37LCP0001 ETH 11 32AIT2603 AERATION BASIN 6 ORP -500 to +500 mV 95-I-113

37PLC01 37LCP0001 ETH 12 32AE2301A AERATION BASIN 6 DISSOLVED OXYGEN NO 1 0 to 20 mg/L 95-I-113

37PLC01 37LCP0001 ETH 13 32AE2301B AERATION BASIN 6 DISSOLVED OXYGEN NO 2 0 to 20 mg/L 95-I-113

37PLC01 37LCP0001 ETH 14 32AE2301C AERATION BASIN 6 DISSOLVED OXYGEN NO 3 0 to 20 mg/L 95-I-113

72PLC01 70LCP0603 AI 1 75PIT0101 SOLIDS ODOR CONTROL FAN INLET PRESSURE -10 to 0 inches WC 95-I-156B

72PLC01 70LCP0603 AI 2 75PIT0301 SOLIDS ODOR CONTROL FAN OUTLET PRESSURE 0 to 10 inches WC 95-I-156B

72PLC01 70LCP0603 AI 3 75PDIT0401 ACTIVATED CARBON ADSORBER 1 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE 0 to 5 inches WC 95-I-156B

72PLC01 70LCP0603 AI 4 75PDIT0402 ACTIVATED CARBON ADSORBER 2 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE 0 to 5 inches WC 95-I-156B

72PLC01 70LCP0603 DI 1 75FAN0203 SOLIDS ODOR CONTROL FAN ENCLOSURE VENT FAN ON 95-I-156B

72PLC01 70LCP0603 DI 2 75FAN0203 SOLIDS ODOR CONTROL FAN ENCLOSURE VENT FAN REMOTE 95-I-156B

72PLC01 70LCP0603 DI 3 75TSH0201 SOLIDS ODOR CONTROL FAN ENCLOSURE TEMPERATURE HIGH 95-I-156B

72PLC01 70LCP0603 DO 1 75FAN0203 SOLIDS ODOR CONTROL FAN ENCLOSURE VENT FAN RUN 95-I-156B

72PLC01 72LCP2501 AI 1 75FV1001 BELT FILTER PRESS 1 ODOR CONTROL DAMPER POSITION FB 0 to 100 percent 95-I-147

72PLC01 72LCP2501 AI 2 75FV1002 BELT FILTER PRESS 2 ODOR CONTROL DAMPER POSITION FB 0 to 100 percent 95-I-147

72PLC01 72LCP2501 AO 1 75FV1001 BELT FILTER PRESS 1 ODOR CONTROL DAMPER POSITION FB 0 to 100 percent 95-I-147

72PLC01 72LCP2501 AO 2 75FV1002 BELT FILTER PRESS 2 ODOR CONTROL DAMPER POSITION FB 0 to 100 percent 95-I-147

72PLC01 72LCP2501 DI 1 75FV1001 BELT FILTER PRESS 1 ODOR CONTROL DAMPER REMOTE 95-I-147

72PLC01 72LCP2501 DI 2 75FV1002 BELT FILTER PRESS 2 ODOR CONTROL DAMPER REMOTE 95-I-147

72PLC01 72LCP2501 ETH 1 72M4401 CAKE TRANSFER SCREW DATA BLOCK 72-I-01

72PLC01 72LCP2501 ETH 2 75FAN0201 SOLIDS ODOR CONTROL FAN 1 CONTROL DATA BLOCK 95-I-156B

72PLC01 72LCP2501 ETH 3 75FAN0202 SOLIDS ODOR CONTROL FAN 2 CONTROL DATA BLOCK 95-I-156B

72PLC01 73LCP2701 AI 1 73LIT2701 DIGESTER NO 1 LEVEL, RADAR 0 to 40 feet 95-I-135

72PLC01 73LCP2701 AI 2 73LIT2702 DIGESTER NO 2 LEVEL, RADAR 0 to 40 feet 95-I-135

PLC I/O LIST

PLCNo.

I/OType

I/OIndex

TagNumber Description

ActiveState

Range4-20mA

Engr.Units P&ID

PanelNo.

PW\DEN003\708335

JANUARY 2020



FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS



PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

PLC I/O LIST

PLCNo.

I/OType

I/OIndex

TagNumber Description

ActiveState

Range4-20mA

Engr.Units P&ID

PanelNo.

AI

AO

DI

DO

ETH

Discrete Output

Communicated data block(s) over Ethernet

I/O Type Legend

Analog Input

Analog Output

Discrete Input

PW\DEN003\708335

JANUARY 2020



FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS



PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

New Digital Output Module wired to field terminal block for connecting new Digital Output Signals

Connect new Digital Input Signals to existing spare 120 Vac Digital Input points

Connect new Analog Input Signals to existing spare Analog Input points

One new Ethernet DLR Switch for Ethernet I/O Network expansion

One new ETAP module and new fused 24 Vdc circuit for Ethernet I/O Network expansion

37LCP0001 Aeration Basins 5-6 Control Panel, 37PLC01 (Existing) Two new Analyzer Transmitter Units, mount on panel face

37LCP0002 Aeration Basins 5-6 Control Panel, 37PLC01 (Existing) One new Ethernet DLR Switch for Ethernet I/O Network expansion

Connect new Digital Output signals to existing spare Relay Contact Digital Output points





Connect new Analog Output Signals to existing spare Analog Output points

One new Ethernet DLR Switch on existing 24 Vdc circuit for Ethernet I/O Network expansion

73LCP2701 Digester Control Panel, 72PLC01 (Existing) Connect new Analog Input Signals to existing spare Analog Input points

CONTROL PANEL SCHEDULE

Panel Tag Panel Description Description of Work

Dewatering Control Panel, 72PLC01 (Existing)72LCP2501

Preliminary/Primary Treatment Control Panel, 10PLC01 (Existing)10LCP0001

Thickening Control Panel, 72PLC01 (Existing)70LCP0603

PW\DEN003\708335

JANUARY 2020



FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS




JACOBS LOOP STATUS REPORT—EXAMPLE FORMAT Rev.06.05.92

Project Name: Newport News WTP Project No. WDC23456.C1

FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS:

1. Measure, locally indicate, and transmit RAS flow to LP-10.

2. At LP-10 indicate flow and provide flow control by modulation of FCV-10-2.

3. Provide high RAS flow alarm on LP-10.

COMPONENT STATUS (Check and initial each item when complete)

Tag Number Delivered Tag ID

Checked Installation Termination

Wiring Termination

Tubing Calibration

FE/FIT-10-2 Jan-12-90 DWM Jan-12-90 DWM Feb-7-90 DWM Mar-5-90 DWM N.A. May-6-90 VDA

FIC-10-2 Jan-12-90 DWM Jan-12-90 DWM Mar-5-90 DWM Apr-4-90 DWM May-4-90 VDA

FSH-10-2 Jan-12-90 DWM Jan-12-90 DWM Mar-5-90 DWM Apr-4-90 DWM May-7-90 VDA

FAH-10-2 Jan-12-90 DWM Jan-12-90 DWM Mar-5-90 DWM Apr-4-90 DWM May-7-90 VDA

FCV-10-2 Mar-2-90 DWM Mar-2-90 DWM Apr-20-90 DWM Apr-30-90 DWM May-16-90 VDA

REMARKS: None.

Loop Ready for Operation By: D.W. Munzer Date: May-18-90 Loop No.: 10-2



JACOBS INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION SHEET—EXAMPLE—ANALYZER/TRANSMITTER Rev.06.05.92

COMPONENT MANUFACTURER PROJECT

Code: A7 Name: Leeds & Northrup Number: WDC30715.B2

Name: pH Element & Analyzer/Transmitter Model: 12429-3-2-1-7 Serial #: 11553322 Name: UOSA AWT PHASE 3 FUNCTIONS

RANGE VALUE UNITS COMPUTING FUNCTIONS? N CONTROL? N Indicate? Y Record? N

Chart: Describe: Action? direct / reverse Modes? P / I / D

Scale: 1-14 pH units SWITCH? N Unit Range:

Transmit/ Input: 1-14 pH units Differential: fixed/adjustable Convert? Y Output: 4-20 mA dc Reset? automatic / manual

ANALOG CALIBRATIONS DISCRETE CALIBRATIONS Note REQUIRED AS CALIBRATED REQUIRED AS CALIBRATED No.

Input Indicated Output Increasing Input Decreasing Input Number Trip Point Reset Pt. Trip Point Reset Pt.

Indicated Output Indicated Output (note rising or falling) (note rising or falling)

1.0 1.0 4.0 1.0 4.0 1.0 3.9 1. N.A. N.A.

2.3 2.3 5.6 2.2 5.5 2.3 5.6 2. 1.

7.5 7.5 12.0 7.5 11.9 7.5 12.0 3.

12.7 12.7 18.4 12.7 18.3 12.6 18.3 4.

14.0 14.0 20.0 14.0 20.0 14.0 20.0 5.

CONTROL MODE SETTINGS: P: N.A. I: D: 6. # NOTES: Component Calibrated and Ready 1. Need to recheck low pH calibration solutions. for Start-up By: J.D. Sewell Date: Jun-6-92 Tag No.: AIT-12-6[pH]



JACOBS I&C VALVE ADJUSTMENT SHEET—EXAMPLE Rev.06.05.92

PARTS Project Name: SFO SEWPCP Project Number: SFO10145.G2

Body Type: Vee-Ball Mfr: Fisher Controls

Size: 4-inch Model: 1049763-2

Line Connection: 159 # ANSI Flanges Serial #: 1003220

Operator Type: Pneumatic Diaphragm Mfr: Fisher Controls

Action: Linear – Modulated Model: 4060D

Travel: 3-inch Serial #: 2007330

Positioner Input Signal: 3-15 psi Mfr: Fisher Controls

Action: Direct - air to open Model: 20472T

Cam: Equal percentage Serial #: 102010

Pilot Action: Mfr:

Solenoid Rating: None Model: Serial #:

I/P Input: 4-20 mA dc Mfr: Taylor

Converter Output: 3-15 psi Model: 10-T-576-3

Action: Direct Serial #: 1057-330

Position Settings: Closed / Open 5 deg, rising Mfr: National Switch

Switch Contacts: Close / Close Model: 1049-67-3

Serial #: 156 &157

Power Type: Pneumatic Air Set Mfr: Air Products

Supply Potential: 40 psi Model: 3210D

Serial #: 1107063

ADJUSTMENTS Initial Date VERIFICATION Initial Date

Air Set JDS Jun-06-92 Valve Action JDS Jun-03-92

Positioner JDS Jun-06-92 Installation JDS Jun-03-92

Position Switches JDS Jun-06-92 Wire Connection JDS Jun-04-92

I/P Converter JDS Jun-07-92 Tube Connection JDS Jun-04-92

Actual Speed JDS Jun-07-92

REMARKS: Valve was initially installed backwards. Valve Ready for Start-up

Observed to be correctly installed May-25-92 By: J.D. Sewell

Date: Jun-07-92

Tag No.: FCV-10-2-1



JACOBS PERFORMANCE TEST SHEET - EXAMPLE Rev.06.05.92

Project Name: SFO SEWPCP Plant Expansion Project No.: SFO12345.C1

Demonstration test(s): For each functional Requirement of the loop: (a) List and number the requirement. (b) Briefly describe the demonstration test. (c) Cite the results that will verify the required performance. (d) Provide space for signoff.

1. MEASURE EFFLUENT FLOW

1.a With no flow, water level over weir should be zero and

FIT indicator should read zero. Jun-20-92 BDG

2. FLOW INDICATION AND TRANSMISSION TO LP & CCS

With flow, water level and FIT indicator should be related by expression

Q(MGD) = 429*H**(2/3) (H = height in inches of water over weir).

Vary H and observe that following.

2.a Reading of FIT indicator. Jun-6-92 BDG

2.b Reading is transmitted to FI on LP-521-1 Jun-6-92 BDG

2.c Reading is transmitted and displayed to CCS. Jun-6-92 BDG

H(measured) 0 5 10 15

Q(computed) 0 47.96 135.7 251.7

Q(FIT indicator) 0 48.1 137 253

Q(LI on LP-521-1) 0 48.2 138 254

Q(display by CCS) 0 48.1 136.2 252.4

Forms/Sheets Verified By Date Loop Accepted By Owner

Loop Status Report J.D. Sewell May-18-92 By: J.D. Smith

Instrument Calibration Sheet J.D. Sewell May-18-92 Date: Jun-6-92

I&C Valve Calibration Sheet N.A.

Performance Test By Date

Performed J. Blow MPSDC Co. Jun-6-92

Witnessed B. DeGlanville Jun-6-92 Loop No.: 30-12


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

JANUARY 9, 2020 SUPPLEMENTAL LOOP SPECIFICATIONS

BROWN AND CALDWELL 40 90 01 - 1

SECTION 40 90 01

SUPPLEMENTAL LOOP SPECIFICATIONS

1.01 GENERAL

A. Purpose: Loop Specifications provided requirements for special functions of

each unit process loop. Common and standard functions are not repeated.

Refer to common functions in 40 90 00 1.02, and control panel diagrams for

additional requirements.

B. Contractor Shall provide I/O list indicating point slot and function of existing

I/O being terminated at PLC.

C. Contractor shall add point and slot locations to new I/O list provided in 40 90

01 Supplement-1.

D. Reference Material

1. Christenson Controls as built panel drawings from 1997 shall be

provided for reference.

2. Brown and Caldwell drawings 72-I-500, 72-I-501 and 72-I-502, SCTP

HVAC Systems Replacement (Buildings 70 and 72), Discovery Clean

Water Alliance Project No. 93-2019-0072, Volume VI – Schedule B

Plans.

E. Application Software:

1. Application Software for PLC and HMI functions are provided by

Owner. Software functions are listed for reference, and to aid in

coordination of testing and startup.

2. For each Loop, PLC application software functions are listed under

Auto Control, and HMI application software functions are listed under

HMI.

3. Provide assistance with testing of Application Software.

1.02 HVAC PANEL 72-ECP-1

A. Overview:

1. Provide Auto Control in the PLC to duplicate existing hardwired relay

logic for existing equipment not deleted in HVAC Panel 72-ECP-1.

2. Provide HMI interface to maintain existing lights and switches on 72-

ECP-1 Panel Door and on four adjacent ASU panels for equipment not

being deleted.

3. Indicate Discharge Temp. at HMI for eight existing panel mounted

displays.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

SUPPLEMENTAL LOOP SPECIFICATIONS JANUARY 9, 2020

40 90 01 - 2 BROWN AND CALDWELL

4. Provide functions listed below for new and replaced HVAC

equipment.

B. Deleted Equipment:

1. 72-EF-1-1

2. 72-EF-1-2

3. 72-EF-3

4. 72-EF-6

5. 72-ACU-2

C. 70-ASU-1

1. Local: None.

2. Auto Control:

a. If 72-EF-2 is running on LOW run ASU on LOW

b. If 72-EF-2 is running on HIGH run ASU on HIGH

3. HMI:

a. SUMMER, OFF, WINTER selection.

b. User adjustable TIME DELAY for equipment restart.

c. SUMMER/WINTER Selection can be automatically changed

between summer and winter based on USER SELECTABLE

month range. If temperature gets below USER SELECTABLE

minimum discharge temperature change selection from

SUMMER to WINTER return to Summer after USER

SELECTABLE time delay.

d. RUNNING, FAULT, and CLOGGED FILTER display based

on hardwired inputs from ASU panel.

D. 72-ASU-1

1. Local: None.

2. Auto Control:

a. If Belt Filter Press 1 or 2 is running run ASU on HIGH

b. If no Belt Filter Press is running run ASU on LOW.

3. HMI:

a. SUMMER, OFF, WINTER selection.

b. User adjustable TIME DELAY for equipment restart.

c. SUMMER/WINTER Selection can be automatically changed

between summer and winter based on USER SELECTABLE

month range. If temperature falls below USER SELECTABLE

minimum discharge temperature change selection from

SUMMER to WINTER return to Summer after USER

SELECTABLE time delay.

d. RUNNING, FAULT, and CLOGGED FILTER display based

on hardwired inputs from ASU panel.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



E. 72-ACU-1

1. Local: None.

2. Auto Control:

a. User adjustable TIME DELAY for equipment restart.

3. HMI:

a. AUTO, OFF selection.

b. RUNNING, FAULT, and CLOGGED FILTER display based

on hardwired inputs from ACU panel.

F. 72-HTP-2

1. Local: None.

2. Auto Control:


3. HMI:


b. FAILURE, and RUNNING display based on hardwired inputs

from HTP panel.

G. 72-ACU-2A

1. Local: None.

2. Auto Control:


3. HMI:



from ACU panel.

H. 72-ACU-2B

1. Local: None.

2. Auto Control: None.

3. HMI:



from ACU panel.

END OF SECTION


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS


BROWN AND CALDWELL 40 90 01 - 1 SUPPLEMENT -1

PLC EQUIPMENT LIST

Item Description Quanity Manufacturer Model

1 13 Slot ControlLogix Chassis 1 Allen-Bradley 1756-A13

2 Control Processor 1 Allen-Bradley 1756-L82

3 Ethernet Communication Module 1 Allen-Bradley 1756-EN2TR

4 Digital Input Module, 16 point 4 Allen-Bradley 1756-IA16I

5 Digital Output Module, 16 point 5 Allen-Bradley 1756-OA16I

6 Analog Input Module, 8 point, Isolated 1 Allen-Bradley 1756-IF8I

7 Slot Filler 1 Allen-Bradley 1756-N2


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

SUPPLEMENTAL LOOP SPECIFICATIONS JANUARY 9, 2020

40 90 01 - 2 SUPPLEMENT -1 BROWN AND CALDWELL

PLC I/O LIST

PLC Panel

No.

I/O

Type

I/O

Index

Tag

Number Description Active State Range

Engr.

Units

72-ECP-1 DO 1 70-ASU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING LOWER LEVEL ASU SUMMER

72-ECP-1 DO 2 70-ASU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING LOWER LEVEL ASU WINTER

72-ECP-1 DO 3 70-ASU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING LOWER LEVEL ASU HIGH

72-ECP-1 DI 4 70-ASU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING LOWER LEVEL ASU RUNNING

72-ECP-1 DI 5 70-ASU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING LOWER LEVEL ASU FAULT

72-ECP-1 DI 6 70-ASU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING LOWER LEVEL ASU

CLOGGED

FILTER

72-ECP-1 ETH 7 70-ASU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING LOWER LEVEL ASU

DATA

BLOCK

72-ECP-1 DO 8 72-ASU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING UPPER LEVEL ASU SUMMER

72-ECP-1 DO 9 72-ASU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING UPPER LEVEL ASU WINTER

72-ECP-1 DO 10 72-ASU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING UPPER LEVEL ASU HIGH

72-ECP-1 DI 11 72-ASU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING UPPER LEVEL ASU RUNNING

72-ECP-1 DI 12 72-ASU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING UPPER LEVEL ASU FAULT

72-ECP-1 DI 13 72-ASU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING UPPER LEVEL ASU

CLOGGED

FILTER

72-ECP-1 ETH 14 72-ASU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING UPPER LEVEL ASU

DATA

BLOCK

72-ECP-1 DO 15 72-ACU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING CONTROL ROOM ACU AUTO

72-ECP-1 DI 16 72-ACU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING CONTROL ROOM ACU RUNNING

72-ECP-1 DI 17 72-ACU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING CONTROL ROOM ACU FAULT

72-ECP-1 DI 18 72-ACU-1 SOLIDS PROCESSING CONTROL ROOM ACU

CLOGGED

FILTER

72-ECP-1 DO 19 72-HTP-2 SOLIDS PROCESSING ROOF HTP AUTO

72-ECP-1 DI 20 72-HTP-2 SOLIDS PROCESSING ROOF HTP RUNNING

72-ECP-1 DI 21 72-HTP-2 SOLIDS PROCESSING ROOF HTP FAILURE

72-ECP-1 DO 22 72-ACU-2A SOLIDS PROCESSING ELECTRICAL ROOM ACU AUTO

72-ECP-1 DI 23 72-ACU-2A SOLIDS PROCESSING ELECTRICAL ROOM ACU RUNNING

72-ECP-1 DI 24 72-ACU-2A SOLIDS PROCESSING ELECTRICAL ROOM ACU FAILURE

72-ECP-1 DO 25 72-ACU-2B SOLIDS PROCESSING LOWER LEVEL ACU AUTO

72-ECP-1 DI 26 72-ACU-2B SOLIDS PROCESSING LOWER LEVEL ACU RUNNING

72-ECP-1 DI 27 72-ACU-2B SOLIDS PROCESSING LOWER LEVEL ACU FAILURE

73-LCP-2701 ETH 28 Digester Gas Blower Skid VFD

DATA

BLOCK

73-LCP-2701 AI 29 PIT Digester Gas Blower Discharge Pressure 0-50 inches WC


PW\DEN003\708335 INSTRUMENTATION AND JANUARY 2020 CONTROL COMPONENTS ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 40 91 00 - 1

SECTION 40 91 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL COMPONENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section gives general requirements for instrumentation and control components.

1.02 REFERENCES




Content.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Article Mechanical Systems Components covers requirements of mechanical PIC components that are not specifically referenced by Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems, or Instrument Lists.

B. Article Electrical Components covers requirements for electrical PIC components that are not specifically referenced by Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems, or Instrument Lists.

C. All other Part 2 articles cover components that are referenced by Instrument List in Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems, or by specific component numbers in other sections.


INSTRUMENTATION AND PW\DEN003\708335 CONTROL COMPONENTS JANUARY 2020 40 91 00 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

D. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption: Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification by manufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by the Authority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with the maximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372.


2.02 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMPONENTS

A. Flow Element, Rotameter:

1. For air or water service, as noted. 2. Materials: Glass tube, fiberglass body, stainless steel float, nylon ball

check valve. 3. Direct-Reading Scale Length: 2-1/2 inches, minimum. 4. Scale Ranges: As noted or shown. 5. Integral inlet needle valves. 6. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Fischer & Porter; Series 10A3130. b. Brooks; Series DS-1350.

B. Manifold, Three-valve Equalizing:

1. Type: For isolation and equalization of differential pressure transducers. 2. Materials: Stainless steel. 3. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Anderson, Greenwood and Co.; Type M1. b. Evans.

C. Pressure Gauge: For other than process variable measurement.

1. Dial Size: Nominal 2-inch dial size. 2. Accuracy: 2 percent of span. 3. Scale Range: Such that normal operating pressure lies between

50 percent and 80 percent of scale range. 4. Connection: 1/4-inch NPT through bottom, unless otherwise noted. 5. Isolation Valve: Provide needle valve to allow instrument removal. 6. Manufacturer and Product: Ashcroft Utility; Gauge Series 1000.



D. ON/OFF Valves:

1. Type: Ball valve. 2. Materials: Brass, stainless steel, PVC, or CPCV, as recommended by

manufacturer for designated service, unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Whitey; Series 41 through Series 43. b. Hoke; Flomite 7100 Series. c. Nibco Chemtrol. d. Asahi.

E. Regulating Valves:

1. Type: Needle valves, with regulating stems and screwed bonnets. 2. Materials: Brass, stainless steel, PVC, or CPCV, as recommended by


3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Whitey; Catalog No. RF or No. RS. b. Hoke; 3100 through 3300 Series.

F. Solenoid Valve, Two-Way:

1. Type: Globe valve directly actuated by solenoid and not requiring minimum pressure differential for operation.

2. Materials: a. Body: Brassed or stainless steel globe valves as recommended by


b. Valve Seat: Buna-N. 3. Size: Normally closed or opened, as noted. 4. Coil: 115V ac, unless noted otherwise. 5. Solenoid Enclosure: NEMA 4. 6. Manufacturer and Product: ASCO; Red Hat Series 8260.

G. Test Tap:

1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Imperial-Eastman; quick-disconnect couplings No. 292-P and

caps No. 259-P. b. Crawford Fitting Co.; Swagelok quick-connects Series QC4 and

caps QC4-DC. c. Parker; CPI Series precision quick couplings.



H. Plastic Tubing and Fittings:

1. Tubing: a. Polyethylene capable of withstanding 190 psig at 175 degrees F. b. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Dekoron; Type P. 2) Imperial Eastman; Poly-Flo black instrument tubing.

2. Fittings: a. Type: Brass compression. b. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Imperial Eastman; Poly-Flo tube fittings. 2) Dekoron; E-Z fittings.

I. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A312/A312M, Type 316, 0.065-inch wall, seamless, soft annealed, as shown on Drawings.

J. Stainless Steel Fittings:

1. Compression Type: a. Materials: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A182/A182M forged

bodies or ASTM A276 barstock bodies, flareless. b. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Parker Flodar; BA Series. 2) Swagelok tube fittings. 3) Parker CPI tube fittings; Parker A-LOK dual ferrule tube

fittings. 2. Socket Weld Type:

a. Materials: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A182/A182M forged bodies or ASTM A276 barstock bodies, 3,000 psi maximum working pressure, safety factor 4:1.

b. Manufacturers: 1) Cajon. 2) Swagelok. 3) Parker WELDLOK.

K. Tubing Raceways:

1. Cable tray systems complete with tees, elbows, reducers, and covers. 2. Size in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations for intended

service. 3. Materials: Galvanized steel or aluminum brass as recommended by




4. Manufacturers: a. Globetray. b. Cope.

2.03 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

A. Terminal Blocks for Enclosures:

1. General: a. Connection Type: Screw compression clamp. b. Compression Clamp:

1) Complies with DIN-VDE 0611. 2) Hardened steel clamp with transversal grooves that

penetrate wire strands providing a vibration-proof connection.

3) Guides strands of wire into terminal. c. Screws: Hardened steel, captive, and self-locking. d. Current Bar: Copper or treated brass. e. Insulation:

1) Thermoplastic rated for minus 55 degrees C to plus 110 degrees C.

2) Two funneled shaped inputs to facilitate wire entry. f. Mounting:

1) Standard DIN rail. 2) Terminal block can be extracted from an assembly without

displacing adjacent blocks. 3) End Stops: Minimum of one at each end of rail.

g. Wire Preparation: Stripping only permitted. h. Jumpers: Allow jumper installation without loss of space on

terminal or rail. i. Marking System:

1) Terminal number shown on both sides of terminal block. 2) Allow use of preprinted and field marked tags. 3) Terminal strip numbers shown on end stops. 4) Mark terminal block and terminal strip numbers as shown

on panel control diagrams and loop diagrams. 5) Fuse Marking for Fused Terminal Blocks: Fuse voltage and

amperage rating shown on top of terminal block. 2. Terminal Block, General:

a. Rated Voltage: 600V. b. Wire Size: 24 AWG to 10 AWG. c. Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG. d. Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum.



e. Manufacturer: 1) Allen-Bradley. 2) No “or-equal.”

3. Terminal Block, General Purpose: a. Rated Current: 30 amp.

4. Terminal Block, Ground: a. Color: Green and yellow body. b. Grounding: Electrically grounded to mounting rail.

5. Terminal Block, Blade Disconnect Switch: a. Rated Current: 10 amp. b. Function: Disconnect field side terminal from panel side terminal.

6. Terminal Block Diode: a. Rated Voltage: 24V dc. b. Rated Current: 30 ma. c. Wire Size: 16 AWG.

7. Terminal Block, Fused, 24V dc: a. Rated Current: 25 amp. b. Fuse: 0.25 inch by 1.25 inches. c. Indication: LED diode 24V dc. d. Spacing: 0.512 inch, maximum.

8. Terminal Block, Fused, 120V ac: a. Rated Current: 25 amp. b. Fuse: 0.25 inch by 1.25 inches. c. Indication: Neon lamp, 110V ac. d. Leakage Current: 1.8 mA, maximum. e. Spacing: 0.512 inch, maximum.

9. Terminal Block, Fused, 120V ac, High Current: a. Rated Current: 35 amps. b. Wire Size: 18 AWG to 8 AWG. c. Rated Wire Size: 8 AWG. d. Fuse: 13/32 inch by 1.5 inches. e. Spacing: 0.95 inch, maximum.

B. Relays:

1. General: a. Relay Mounting: Plug-in type socket. b. Relay Enclosure: Furnish dust cover. c. Socket Type: Screw terminal interface with wiring. d. Socket Mounting: Rail. e. Provide holddown clips.



2. PLC Interface Relay: a. Type: Narrow design for high density and direct connection of

field wiring to relay terminals. b. Function: Covert PLC output voltage to dry contact for isolated

discrete signal interface. c. Relay Mounting: Plug into terminal block style socket. d. Socket Mounting: DIN rail. e. Socket Width: 0.25 inch nominal. f. Coil Voltage: 120V ac. g. Coil Power: 0.5 VA. h. Expected Mechanical Life: 10,000,000 operations. i. Operating Indicator: LED lights when coil is energized. j. Contact Arrangement: One Form C, SPDT contact. k. Contact Rating: 5A, at 24V dc and 250V ac. l. Connection Type: Screw compression clamp. m. Terminal Marking: Numbered with preprinted or field-marked

tags. n. Manufacturer and Product:

1) Allen-Bradley; Bulletin 700-HL or 700-HJ Terminal Block Relays.

2) No “or-equal.” 3. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Nonlatching:

a. Type: Compact general purpose plug-in. b. Contact Arrangement: 3 Form C contacts. c. Contact Rating: 10A at 28V dc or 120V ac, and 6.6A at 240V ac. d. Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. e. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. f. Coil Power: 1.8 watts (dc), 2.7VA (ac). g. Expected Mechanical Life: 10,000,000 operations. h. Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 100,000 operations. i. Indication Type: Neon or LED indicator lamp. j. Push-to-test button. k. Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KUP.

4. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Latching: a. Type: Dual coil mechanical latching relay. b. Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts. c. Contact Rating: 10A at 28V dc or 120V ac. d. Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. e. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. f. Coil Power: 2.7 watts (dc), 5.3VA (ac). g. Expected Mechanical Life: 500,000 operations. h. Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 50,000 operations. i. Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KB/KBP.



5. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Time Delay: a. Type: Adjustable time delay relay. b. Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts. c. Contact Rating: 10A at 30V dc or 277V ac. d. Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. e. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. f. Operating Temperature: Minus 10 degrees C to 55 degrees C. g. Repeatability: Plus or minus 2 percent. h. Delay Time Range: Select range such that time delay setpoint fall

between 20 percent to 80 percent of range. i. Time Delay Setpoint: As noted or shown. j. Mode of Operation: As noted or shown. k. Adjustment Type: Integral potentiometer with knob external to

dust cover. l. Manufacturer and Product:

1) Allen-Bradley 700-HR. 2) No “or-equal.”

C. Surge Suppressors:

1. General: a. Construction: First-stage, high-energy metal oxide varistor and

second-stage, bipolar silicon avalanche device separated by series impedance; includes grounding wire, stud, or terminal.

b. Response: 5 nanoseconds maximum. c. Recovery: Automatic. d. Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees C to plus 85 degrees C. e. Enclosure Mounted: Encapsulated inflame retardant epoxy.

2. Suppressors on 120V ac Power Supply Connections: a. Occurrences: Tested and rated for a minimum of 50 occurrences

of IEEE C62.41 Category B test waveform. b. First-Stage Clamping Voltage: 350 volts or less. c. Second-Stage Clamping Voltage: 210 volts or less. d. Power Supplies for Continuous Operation:

1) Four-Wire Transmitter or Receiver: Minimum 5 amps at 130V ac.

2) All Other Applications: Minimum 30 amps at 130V ac. 3. Suppressors on Analog Signal Lines:

a. Test Waveform: Linear 8-microsecond rise in current from 0 amps to a peak current value followed by an exponential decay of current reaching one-half the peak value in 20 microseconds.



b. Surge Rating: Tested and rated for 50 occurrences of 2,000-amp peak test waveform. 1) dc Clamping Voltage: 20 percent to 40 percent above

operating voltage for circuit. 2) dc Clamping Voltage Tolerance: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3) Maximum Loop Resistance: 18 ohms per conductor.

4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Analog Signals Lines: Emerson Edco; PC-642 or SRA-64 series. b. 120V ac Lines: Emerson Edco; HSP-121. c. Field Mounted at Two-Wire Instruments:

1) Encapsulated in stainless steel pipe nipples. 2) Emerson Edco; SS64 series.

d. Field Mounted at Four-Wire Instruments: 1) Enclosure:

a) NEMA 4X Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel with door.

b) Maximum Size: 12 inches by 12 inches by 8 inches deep.

2) Emerson Edco; SLAC series.

D. Power Supplies:

1. Furnish as required to power instruments requiring external dc power, including two-wire transmitters and dc relays. Provide dual power supplies with diode auctioneered outputs.

2. Convert 120V ac, 60-Hz power to dc power of appropriate voltage(s) with sufficient voltage regulation and ripple control to assure that instruments being supplied can operate within their required tolerances.

3. Provide output over voltage and over current protective devices to: a. Protect instruments from damage due to power supply failure. b. Protect power supply from damage due to external failure.

4. Enclosures: NEMA 1. 5. Mount such that dissipated heat does not adversely affect other

components. 6. Fuses: For each dc supply line to each individual two-wire transmitter.

a. Type: Indicating. b. Mount so fuses can be easily seen and replaced.

7. Manufacturer: Sola, to Owner’s standard, no substitutions.

E. Intrinsic Safety Barriers:

1. Intrinsically Safe Relays: Monitor discrete signals that originate in hazardous area and are used in a safe area. a. Manufacturer and Product: MTL, Inc.; Series MTL 5000.



2. Intrinsically Safe Barriers: Interface analog signals as they pass from hazardous area to safe area. a. Manufacturer and Product: MTL, Inc.; Series MTL 5000.

2.04 I&C COMPONENTS

A. Components for Each Loop: Major components for each loop are listed in Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems, supplement Instrument List referenced in Article Supplements. Furnish equipment that is necessary to achieve required loop performance.

2.05 ANALYTICAL COMPONENTS

A. A5 ORP Element and Transmitter:

1. General: a. Function: Measure, indicate, and transmit ORP of process fluid. b. Parts: Element, interconnecting cable, and noted accessories. c. Transmitter: One multi-channel transmitter for each group of

analytic probes as noted or shown. 2. Performance:

a. Process Range: As noted. b. Range: Minus 1,500 mV to plus 1,500 mV. c. Calibrated Range: As noted. d. Operating Temperature: 32 degrees F to 140 degrees F. e. Operating Pressure: 100 psig maximum. f. Accuracy: Plus or minus 20 mV.

3. Element: a. Process Connection: Submersion mounting kit. b. Process Fluid: Wastewater. c. Wetted Materials: Compatible with process fluid. d. Electrode Type: Platinum ring, unless otherwise noted. e. Integral Preamplifier: Required, unless otherwise noted. f. Type: Digital sensor stores calibration. g. Surge Protection: Integral overvoltage protection. h. Mounting/Process Connections:

1) Submersion: a) Sensor handrail assembly. b) Handrail mounting kit.

i. Interconnecting Cable: Length as required. j. Installation: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

and applicable codes. 4. Transmitter: Refer to Component Code A150 Analytical Indicating

Transmitter, Multi-Channel.



5. Accessories: a. Probe Guard: For electrode protection. b. Mounting Hardware: Swing mounting kit and associated hardware

for immersion in open aeration basin. c. Junction Box: NEMA 4X box for cable extension, if required to

suit mounting location. 6. Manufacturer and Product:

a. Xylem YSI; SensoLyt 700 IQ, Type PtA. b. No “or-equal” or substitutions allowed.

B. A15 Ammonium Element and Transmitter:

1. General: a. Function: Continuously measure, indicate and transmit

ammonium (NH4 as N) in wastewater. b. Type: Electrode probe for immersion in open tanks. c. Parts: Element, interconnecting cable, and noted accessories. d. Transmitter: One multi-channel transmitter for each group of


a. Measurement Range: 1) Ammonium as N: 0.1 mg/L to 1,000 mg/L. 2) Calibrated Range: As noted.

b. Process Temperature: 0 degrees C to 40 degrees C (32 degrees F to 104 degrees F).

c. Process pH: 4 to 12. d. Accuracy: Plus or minus 5 percent of measured value, or

0.2 mg/L. e. Response Time: Less than 180 seconds to 90 percent, for a

concentration change of 10 mg/L. 3. Element:

a. Type: Ion-selective electrode. b. Potassium Compensation: Automatic. c. Electrodes: Sensing and reference electrodes. d. Mounting: Submersion in open aeration basin with handrail

mounting kit. e. Interconnecting Cable: Length as required.

4. Accessories (for each unit provided): a. Mounting Hardware: Submersion mounting hardware with

handrail swing mounting kit and associated hardware. b. Junction Box: NEMA 4X box for cable extension, if required to

suit mounting location.



5. Transmitter: Refer to Component Code A150 Analytical Indicating Transmitter, Multi-Channel.

6. Manufacturer and Product: a. Xylem YSI; AmmoLyt Plus. b. No “or-equal” or substitutions allowed.

C. A20 Dissolved Oxygen Element and Transmitter, Luminescent (LDO):

1. General: a. Function: Continuous measurement of dissolved oxygen (DO)

concentration of process fluid. b. Type: Luminescent optical sensor. c. Parts: Element (sensor), interconnecting cable, and noted

accessories. d. Transmitter: One multi-channel transmitter for each group of


a. Measuring Range: 0 mg/L to 20 mg/L. b. Sensor Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.1 mg/L. c. Response Time: Less than 80 seconds to 90 percent of value upon

step change. 3. Element:

a. Type: Luminescent optical digital sensor. b. Process Temperature Range: 32 degrees F to 122 degrees F. c. Submersion Depth: 300 feet maximum. d. Surge Protection: Integral overvoltage protection. e. Sensor Cable: Integral cable, length as required. f. Hazard Rating: Suitable for installation in Class I, Div. 2

hazardous locations. 4. Transmitter: Refer to Component Code A150 Analytical Indicating

Transmitter, Multi-Channel. 5. Accessories:

a. Probe Guard: For electrode protection. b. Mounting Hardware: Submersion mounting hardware with

handrail swing mounting kit and associated hardware. c. Barrier Box: Field termination box for installation in Class I,

Div. 2 hazardous area. 6. Manufacturer and Product:

a. Xylem YSI; FDO 701 IQ H. b. No “or-equal” or substitutions allowed.



D. A150 Analytical Indicating Transmitter, Multi-Channel:

1. General: a. Function: Interface with analytical probes provided by same

vendor. Provide local indication, configuration, calibration, and communicated output of probe measurements.

2. Transmitter System: a. Ambient Conditions:

1) Temperature minus 20 degrees C to 55 degrees C (minus 4 degrees F to 131 degrees F).

2) Humidity: 0 percent to 95 percent, relative, noncondensing. b. Terminal Display:

1) Display: Graphic LCD, with LED backlighting. a) Display primary readout of probe data in engineering

units. b) Auxiliary Readout:

(1) Temperature. (2) Diagnostic warnings. (3) Error messages. (4) Probe configuration. (5) Other information.

c) Mounting: Removable mounting on base power supply and on field units.

c. Controller: 1) Function: Communicate with field units and probes.

Maintain system configuration. 2) Signal Interface: EtherNet/IP communication compatible

with Allen-Bradley I/O network. d. Field Units:

1) Analytical Probe Measurement: As noted. 2) Quantity: As shown. Each system supports up to twenty

probes. Each field unit supports four ports, for probes and system network.

3) Probe Detection: Automatic plug-and-play detection of connected probe.

4) Probe Connection: Provide cable for each probe, length as required to suit installation.

e. Enclosures: NEMA 4X/IP66 polycarbonate/aluminum. f. Mounting:

1) Controller, Power Supply, and Display: Panel mount. 2) Field Units: Handrail mount, unless otherwise shown.

g. Mounting Hardware: 1) General: Type 316 stainless steel hardware.



2) Field Units: Handrail mounting kit. h. Power Requirements: 110V ac plus or minus 10 percent,

50/60-Hz. 3. Accessories:

a. Cable: For interconnecting power supply with field units for power and communication. Length as required for device locations.

b. Field Units: Sun shield. c. Stainless steel equipment tags.

4. Manufacturer and Products: a. Xylem YSI:

1) System: Xylem YSI; System 2020 3G. 2) Terminal Display: Xylem YSI; MIQ/TC 2020 3G. 3) Power Supply: Xylem YSI; MIQ/PS. 4) Controller: Xylem YSI; MIQ/MC3. 5) Field Units: Xylem YSI; MIQ/JB. 6) Cable: Xylem YSI; SNCIQ.

b. No “or-equal” or substitutions allowed.

2.06 FLOW COMPONENTS

A. F4 Flow Element and Transmitter, Electromagnetic:

1. General: a. Function: Measure, indicate, and transmit the flow of a conductive

process liquid in a full pipe. b. Type:

1) Electromagnetic flowmeter, with operation based on Faraday’s Law, utilizing the pulsed dc type coil excitation principle with high impedance electrodes.

2) Full bore meter with magnetic field traversing entire flow-tube cross section.

3) Unacceptable are insert magmeters or multiple single point probes inserted into a spool piece.

c. Parts: Flow element, transmitter, interconnecting cables, and mounting hardware. Other parts as noted.

2. Service: a. Stream Fluid:

1) As noted. 2) Suitable for liquids with a minimum conductivity of

5 microS/cm and for demineralized water with a minimum conductivity of 20 microS/cm.



3. Operating Temperature: a. Element:

1) Ambient: Minus 5 degrees F to 140 degrees F, typical, unless otherwise noted.

2) Process: Minus 5 degrees F to 140 degrees F, typical, unless otherwise noted.

b. Transmitter: 1) Ambient: Minus 5 degrees F to 140 degrees F, typical,

unless otherwise noted. 2) Storage: 15 degrees F to 120 degrees F, typical, unless

otherwise noted. 4. Performance:

a. Flow Range: As noted. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 percent of rate for all flows resulting

from pipe velocities of 2 feet to 30 feet per second. c. Turndown Ratio: Minimum of 10 to 1 when flow velocity at

minimum flow is at least 1 foot per second. 5. Features:

a. Zero stability feature to eliminate the need to stop flow to check zero alignment.

b. No obstructions to flow. c. Very low pressure loss. d. Measures bi-directional flow.

6. Process Connection: a. Meter Size (diameter inches): As noted. b. Connection Type: 150-pound ANSI raised-face flanges;

AWWA C207, Table 2 Class D; or wafer style depending on meter size, unless otherwise noted.

c. Flange Material: Carbon steel, unless otherwise noted. 7. Power (Transmitter): 120V ac, 60-Hz, unless otherwise noted. 8. Element:

a. Meter Tube Material: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted.

b. Liner Material: Teflon, unless otherwise noted. c. Liner Protectors: Covers (or grounding rings) on each end to

protect liner during shipment. d. Electrode Type: Flush or bullet nose as recommended by the

manufacturer for the noted stream fluid. e. Electrode Material: Type 316 stainless steel or Hastelloy C, unless

otherwise noted. f. Grounding Ring:

1) Required, unless otherwise noted. 2) Quantity: One, unless otherwise noted.



3) Material: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. g. Enclosure: NEMA 4X, minimum, unless otherwise noted. h. Submergence:

1) Temporary: If noted. 2) Continuous (up to 10 feet depth), NEMA 6P/IP68: If noted.

i. Direct Buried (3 feet to 10 feet): If noted. j. Hazardous Area Certification:

1) Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D: If noted. 2) Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, and FM approved:

If noted. 3) Class 1, Division 1, Groups C, D, and FM approved: If

noted. 9. Transmitter:

a. Mounting: Integral, unless otherwise noted. b. Display:

1) Digital LCD display, indicating flow rate and total. 2) Bi-directional Flow Display: If noted.

a) Forward and reverse flow rate. b) Forward, reverse and net totalization.

c. Parameter Adjustments: By keypad or nonintrusive means. d. Enclosure: NEMA 4X, minimum, unless otherwise noted. e. Empty Pipe Detection: Drives display and outputs to zero when

empty pipe detected. 10. Signal Interface (at Transmitter):

a. Analog Output: 1) Isolated 4 mA dc to 20 mA dc for load impedance from

0 ohm to at least 500 ohms minimum for 24V dc supply. 2) Supports Superimposed Digital HART Protocol: If noted.

b. Discrete Outputs: If noted. 1) Two discrete outputs, typical, rated for up to 30 volts,

typical. 2) Programmable as noted for the following typical

parameters: a) Totalizer pulse, high/low flow rates, percent of range,

empty pipe zero, fault conditions, forward/reverse, etc.

c. Discrete Input: If noted. 1) Contact closure, configured as noted for the following

typical parameters: Reset totalizer, change range, hold output constant, drive output to zero, and low flow cutoff, etc.

d. Wireless: Bluetooth wireless communication to mobile phone or tablet using manufacturer’s standard application.



11. Cables: a. Types: As recommended by manufacturer. b. Lengths: As required to accommodate device locations.

12. Built-In Diagnostic System: a. Features:

1) Field programmable electronics. 2) Self-diagnostics with troubleshooting codes. 3) Ability to program electronics with full scale flow,

engineering units, meter size, zero flow cutoff, desired signal damping, totalizer unit digit value, etc.

4) Initial flow tube calibration and subsequent calibration checks.

13. Factory Calibration: a. Calibrated in an ISO 9001 and NIST certified factory. b. Factory flow calibration system must be certified by volume or

weight certified calibration devices. c. Factory flow calibration system shall be able to maintain

calibration flow rate for at least 5 minutes for repeatability point checks.

14. Factory Ready for Future In situ Verifications: Original meter parameter values available from vendor by request.

15. Accessories: a. In situ Verification System:

1) Quantity: One complete system provided for the project. 2) Verifies quantitatively that the meter and signal converter’s

present condition is the same as originally manufactured. 3) Physical access to the flow-tube not required (except for

integral-mounted transmitters). 4) Meet standards established by the National Testing

Laboratory. 5) Tests and stores over 50-meter parameters related to

primary coils, electrodes, interconnecting cable and signal converter.

6) Verification standard shall be plus or minus 1 percent of wet calibration for meters produced using the calibration verification service, or plus or minus 2 percent for standard meters.

16. Manufacturers and Products: a. Endress & Hauser, Inc. Flow Measuring System:

1) Promag H200 (size: 1/12 inch to 1 inches). 2) Promag W500 (size: 1 inch to 90 inches).

b. Engineer knows of no “or-equal.”



2.07 LEVEL COMPONENTS

A. L7 Level Element and Transmitter, Radar:

1. General: a. Function: Continuous level measurement. b. Type: Radar; Noncontacting. c. Loop-powered. d. Parts: Element/integral transmitter and accessories as noted.

2. Service: a. Application: Digester Sludge Level. b. Operating Temperature Range:

1) Outside Ambient: Minus 4 degrees F to plus 158 degrees F. 2) Transducer (inside vessel): Minus 40 degrees F to

176 degrees F. 3. Performance:

a. Process Range: As noted. b. Zero Reference: As noted. c. Frequency: 80 GHz FMCW (Frequency Modulating, Continuous

Wave). d. Accuracy: The greater of 25 mm (1 inch) or 0.25 percent of range

from minimum detectable distance to full range. e. Medium Suitability: Noncontacting element for medium with

dielectric constant greater than 1.6. 4. Element/Integral Transmitter:

a. Enclosure Rating: 1) NEMA 4X/IP67 watertight. 2) Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D.

b. Enclosure Material: Type 316L stainless steel. c. Antenna:

1) Process Connection: a) 4-inch ASME 150 pound, flat faced flange, unless

otherwise noted. b) Material: Type 316L stainless steel.

2) Type: Flush mount bullet nose; PTFE cladded. 3) Antenna Size: 3-inch. 4) Pressure Rating: 10 psig. 5) Beam Angle: 3 degrees. 6) Operation: Suitable for measurement through a 4-inch

nozzle up to 70 inches high, with an open 4-inch full-port ball valve.

d. Approvals: FM, Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D. e. Display: Local LCD.



5. Signal Interface: a. Analog: 4 mA dc to 20 mA dc (HART) with maximum impedance

of 550 ohms and nominal 24V dc power supply. b. Digital, HART. c. Wireless: Bluetooth wireless communication to mobile phone or

tablet using manufacturer’s standard application. 6. Conduit Entry: NPT. 7. Accessories:

a. Weather protection cover. b. Stainless steel tag. c. Overvoltage protection module.

8. Manufacturer and Product: a. Endress & Hauser, Inc. Micropilot FMR62. b. “Or-equal. “

B. L10 Level Transmitter, Direct Sensing, Flange Mounted:

1. General: a. Function: Measure level in a process pipe or vessel. b. Type:

1) Capacitive differential pressure cell. 2) Diaphragm for process fluid isolation. 3) Flange mounting. 4) Smart electronics. 5) Two-wire device.

2. Service: a. Process Liquid: As noted. b. Process Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees F to

400 degrees F, unless otherwise noted. c. Ambient Temperature Range: Minus 4 degrees F to

158 degrees F, unless otherwise noted. d. Humidity: 0 percent to 100 percent relative.

3. Performance: a. Range: As noted. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of upper range limit.

4. Features: a. Zero Suppression or Elevation: To suit mounting elevation. b. Damping: User-selectable; 0 second to 36 seconds time constant

of analog output response to step change input. c. Transmitter: Two-wire, powered from external power supply. d. Zero and Span Adjustments: Local, external, non-interactive,

unless otherwise noted.



e. Process Wetted Parts: 1) Flanged Process Connection:

a) Flange Size/Type: 4-inch, Class 150, unless otherwise noted.

b) Process Diaphragm: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted.

c) Mounting Flange: Stainless steel, unless otherwise noted.

d) Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise noted. e) Process Fill Fluid: Silicone oil, unless otherwise

noted. f) Configuration: Level measurement (low pressure

referenced to atmosphere). f. Flange and Adapter Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, unless

otherwise noted. g. Display: LCD meter.

5. Signal Output Interface: a. 4 mA dc to 20 mA dc for load impedance 0 ohm to 580 ohms

minimum at 24V dc supply voltage without load adjustment. b. Superimposed digital signal based on HART protocol.

6. Enclosure: NEMA 4X, coated aluminum, unless otherwise noted. 7. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Endress & Hauser, Inc. Cerabar PMP75. b. Emerson Process Rosemount; 3051L, Liquid Level Transmitter.

2.08 P3 PRESSURE COMPONENTS

A. P3 Pressure Differential Transmitter:

1. General: a. Function:

1) Measure differential pressure. 2) Transmit signal proportional to either differential pressure

or square root of differential pressure, as applicable. b. Type:

1) Electronic variable capacitance or silicon strain gauge. 2) Two-wire transmitter; “smart electronics.”

c. Parts: Transmitter and accessories. 2. Performance:

a. Range: As noted. 1) Select transmitter’s factory upper range limit (URL) such

that upper boundary of noted range is as close as possible to 80 percent of factory URL, but does not exceed it.



b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.10 percent of span, unless otherwise noted.

c. Ambient Operating Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F to plus 175 degrees F, with integral meter.

d. Process Operating Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F to plus 250 degrees F.

e. Humidity: 0 percent to 100 percent relative humidity. f. Hazardous Location Certifications: If and as noted.

3. Features: a. Linear or square-root output, user-configurable. b. Factory preconfigure for square root output if transmitter tagged

as “FT” or “FIT”. c. Adjustable damping. d. LCD indicator, unless otherwise noted.

1) Display in engineering units, field configurable. e. Wetted Metallic Parts: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise

noted. 1) Includes drain/vent valves; process flanges and adapters,

and process isolating diaphragm. f. Wetted O-Rings: Glass-filled TFE, graphite-filled PTFE, or Viton,

unless otherwise noted. g. Bolts and Nuts (if required): Type 316 stainless steel, unless

otherwise noted. h. Fill Fluid: Silicone, unless otherwise noted.

4. Process Connections: a. Line Size: 1/2 inch. b. Connection Type: FNPT. c. Direct/remote Diaphragm Seal: If and as noted.

5. Signal Interface: a. 4 mA dc to 20 mA dc output with digital signal based on HART

protocol, unless otherwise noted below. 1) Nominal Maximum Loop Resistance with External 24V dc

Power Supply: 550 ohms. 6. Enclosure:

a. Type: NEMA 4X. b. Materials: Coated aluminum, unless otherwise noted. c. Mounting bracket, unless otherwise noted.

1) Bracket and Accessories: Stainless steel; suitable for mounting transmitter to panel or 2-inch pipe.

7. Accessories: a. Three-valve manifold, unless otherwise noted.

1) Includes one equalization and two isolation valves. 2) Type 316 stainless steel.



8. Manufacturer and Product: a. Rosemount; Model 3051 CD. b. No “or-equal” or substitutions allowed.

B. P4 Pressure Gauge:

1. General: a. Function: Local pressure indication. b. Type: Bourdon tube element.

2. Performance: a. Scale Range: As noted. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.50 percent of full scale.

3. Features: a. Dial: 4-1/2-inch diameter. b. Case Material: Black thermoplastic, unless otherwise noted. c. Materials of Wetted Parts (including element, socket/process

connection, throttling device (if specified) and secondary components): 1) Stainless steel, unless otherwise noted.

d. Pointer: Adjustable by removing ring and window. e. Window: Glass or acrylic, unless otherwise noted. f. Threaded reinforced polypropylene front ring. g. Case Type: Solid front with blow-out back. h. Overload Stop: If noted, to protect against abnormal high

pressure. 4. Process Connection:

a. Mounting: Lower stem, unless otherwise noted. b. Size: 1/2-inch MNPT, unless otherwise noted.

5. Accessories: a. Throttling Device: Required, unless otherwise noted.

1) Type suitable for the intended service. 2) Install in gauge socket bore.

6. Manufacturer and Product: a. Ashcroft; Duragauge Model 1279 PLUS. b. No “or-equal” or substitutions allowed.

C. P9 Pressure Transmitter:

1. General: a. Function: Measure pressure and transmit signal proportional to

pressure. b. Type:

1) Electronic variable capacitance or silicon strain gauge. 2) Two-wire transmitter; “smart electronics.”



c. Parts: Transmitter and accessories. 2. Performance:

a. Range: As noted. 1) Select transmitter’s factory upper range limit (URL) such

that upper boundary of noted range is as close as possible to 80 percent of factory URL, but does not exceed it.

b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.075 percent of span, unless otherwise noted.

c. Ambient Operating Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F to plus 175 degrees F, with integral meter.

d. Process Operating Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F to plus 250 degrees F.

e. Humidity: 0 percent to 100 percent relative humidity. f. Hazardous Location Certifications: If and as noted.

3. Features: a. Type: Gauge pressure, unless otherwise noted. b. Adjustable damping. c. LCD indicator, unless otherwise noted.

1) Display in either percent or engineering units, field configurable.

d. Wetted Metallic Parts: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. 1) Includes drain/vent valves; process flanges and adapters,

and process isolating diaphragm. e. Wetted O-Rings: Glass filled TFE, graphite filled PTFE, or Viton,

unless otherwise noted. f. Bolts and Nuts (if required): Type 316 stainless steel, unless

otherwise noted. g. Fill Fluid: Silicone, unless otherwise noted.

4. Process Connections: a. Line Size: 1/2 inch. b. Connection Type: FNPT. c. Direct/remote Diaphragm Seal: If and as noted.

5. Signal Interface: a. 4 mA dc to 20 mA dc output with digital signal based on HART

protocol, unless otherwise noted below. 1) Nominal Maximum Loop Resistance with External 24V dc

Power Supply: 550 ohms. b. FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol: If noted. c. Profibus: If noted.

6. Enclosure: a. Type: NEMA 4X, minimum, unless otherwise noted. b. Materials: Coated aluminum, unless otherwise noted.



c. Mounting bracket, unless otherwise noted. 1) Bracket and Accessories: Stainless steel; suitable for

mounting transmitter to panel or 2-inch pipe. 7. Accessories:

a. Two-valve (Isolate and Vent) Stainless Steel Manifold: If noted. 8. Manufacturer and Product:

a. Rosemount; Model 3051S. b. No “or-equal” or substitutions allowed.

D. P15 Pressure Seal, Annular:

1. General: a. Function:

1) Sense pressure in a process line and transfer to pressure monitoring device.

2) Protect attached pressure monitoring device from sludge or slurry.

b. Type: Annular fluid-filled device that senses pressure through flexible sleeve around full pipe circumference.

2. Performance: a. Operating Conditions: Suitable for line pressures up to pipe flange

rating. 3. Features:

a. Construction: 1) In-line, 8 Inches and Smaller: Full-faced thru-bolted with

outside diameter same as mating flanges, unless otherwise noted.

2) In-line, 10 Inches and Larger: Wafer style. 3) Offline: Threaded, unless otherwise noted.

b. Materials: 1) Body: Carbon steel, unless otherwise noted. 2) Flanges (where applicable): Type 316 stainless steel, unless

otherwise noted. 3) Flexible Sleeve: Buna-N, unless otherwise noted. 4) Fill Fluid: Ethylene glycol/water or propylene glycol, unless

otherwise noted. c. Factory Filled System:

1) Filled and assembled with pressure monitoring device(s). 2) Coordinate attached pressure monitoring device(s) with

system integrator. Seal vendor’s standard pressure monitoring device(s) only acceptable if it meets specification of the related pressure monitoring device.



d. Instrument Connection: Safe quick release feature to allow instrument removal and replacement.

4. Process Connections: a. Mounting: In-line or offline, as noted or shown. b. Pipe Size:

1) In-line: As noted or shown. 2) Offline: 2 inches, unless otherwise noted.

c. Connections: 1) In-line, Full-faced through-bolted: ASME B16.5, 150-pound

flanges. 2) In-line, Wafer style: Compatible with Classes 150/

300 flange drilling. 3) Offline: Female NPT Threaded, unless otherwise noted.

5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Ashcroft 80 Wafer Isolation Ring with Safe Quick Release (SQR). b. Red Valve Company; Series 40, Series 42/742, Series 48, and

with Ashcroft Safe Quick Release (SQR). c. No “or-equal” or substitutions allowed.

2.09 TEMPERATURE COMPONENTS

A. T5 Temperature Switch:

1. General: a. Function: Provide change in contacts as temperature rises or falls

through noted setpoint. b. Type:

1) Vapor pressure thermal bulb sensing element. 2) Fixed differential, unless otherwise noted.

c. Parts: Switch/element assembly and thermowell. 2. Performance:

a. Setpoint: As noted. b. Range: Such that noted setpoint falls between 30 percent and

70 percent of range. c. Repeatability: Plus or minus 1 percent of span.

3. Switch: a. Type: Snap action, SPDT, sealed environment proof, unless

otherwise noted. b. Rating: 125V ac 15A, unless otherwise noted. c. Reset: Automatic. d. Enclosure:

1) Type: NEMA 4X, unless otherwise noted.



2) Mounting: a) Direct mount, unless otherwise noted. b) If remote mounted, furnish capillary with length either

as noted or as required. 4. Element:

a. Type: Bulb. b. Stem mounted to thermowell. c. Length: Coordinate with thermowell insertion length.

5. Thermowell: a. Process Connection: 1/2 inch NPT(M). b. Material: Type 316 stainless steel or Type 304 stainless steel. c. Insertion Length: 3-1/2 inch minimum immersion for liquids and

5-1/2 inch minimum immersion for gases, unless otherwise noted. 6. Electrical Connections:

a. Conduit: 1/2 inch NPT(F). 7. Manufacturer and Product:

a. Ashcroft; B Series (Type 400 NEMA 4X, Type 700 NEMA 7 and NEMA 9).

b. “Or-equal. “

2.10 CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Y50 Programmable Logic Controller System:

1. Control Processor: Units shall be Allen-Bradley; Model 1756-L82 with firmware Version 24.

2. Power Supply Module: Units shall be Allen-Bradley; 1756-PA75. 3. PLC I/O Chassis:

a. Thirteen Slot: Allen-Bradley; Model 1756-A13. b. Seventeen Slot: Allen-Bradley; Model 1756-A17.

4. Ethernet Communication Module: Allen-Bradley; Model 1756-EN2TR. 5. Digital Input Module:

a. 120V ac: Allen-Bradley; Model 1756-IA16I. b. 24V dc: Allen-Bradley; Model 1756-IB16I.

6. Digital Output Module: a. 120V ac: Allen-Bradley; Model 1756-OA16. b. Relay: Allen-Bradley; Model 1756-OW16I.

7. Analog Input Module: Isolated; Allen-Bradley; Model 1756-IF8I with termination module 1492-AIFM8S-3 and 1492-ACABLExxxYA.

8. Analog Output Module: Isolated; Allen-Bradley; Model 1756-OF8I. 9. I/O Module Terminal Interface: Model 1756-TBCH or 1756-TBNH as

required to match module.



10. Ethernet Switch for I/O Network: Managed, Device-level-ring (DLR), 16 node ports plus 2 Combo DLR ports; Allen-Bradley; Stratix 5700 Model 1783-BMS20CA.

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS JANUARY 2020 40 99 90 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 40 99 90 PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): C62.41, IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

2. International Society of Automation (ISA): S50.1, Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electronic Process Instruments.

3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. AB 1, Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. c. ICS 2, Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

5. UL: 508A, Standards for Safety, Industrial Control Panels.


A. Assemble panels and install instruments, plumbing, and wiring in equipment manufacturer’s factories.

B. Test panels and panel assemblies for proper operation prior to shipment from equipment manufacturer’s factory.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Bill of material, catalog information, descriptive literature, wiring diagrams, and Shop Drawings for components of control system.

2. Catalog information on electrical devices furnished with system. 3. Shop Drawings, catalog material, and dimensional layout drawings for

control panels and enclosures. 4. Panel elementary diagrams of prewired panels. Include in diagrams

control devices and auxiliary devices, for example, relays, alarms, fuses, lights, fans, and heaters.

5. Plumbing diagrams of preplumbed panels and interconnecting plumbing diagrams.


PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS PW\DEN003\708335 40 99 90 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

6. Interconnection wiring diagrams that include numbered terminal designations showing external interfaces.

7. Anchorage and bracing data sheets and drawings as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.



2. Programmable Controller Submittals: a. Fully documented program and ladder logic listings. b. Function listing for function blocks not fully documented by

ladder logic listings. c. Cross-reference listing.

3. Manufacturer’s list of proposed spares, expendables, and test equipment.

4. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.


A. Prior to shipment, include corrosive-inhibitive vapor capsules in shipping containers and related equipment as recommended by capsule manufacturer.


A. Spares, Expendables, and Test Equipment:

1. Light Bulb: Two minimum of each type used. 2. Fuse: Five minimum of each type used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. See Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.

2.02 SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

A. Analog Signals:

1. 4 mA dc to 20 mA dc, in accordance with compatibility requirements of ISA S50.1.

2. Unless otherwise specified or shown, use Type 2, two-wire circuits.



3. Transmitters: Load resistance capability conforming to Class L. 4. Fully isolate input and output signals of transmitters and receivers.

B. Discrete Signals:

1. Two-state logic signals. 2. Utilize 120V ac or 24V dc sources for control and alarm signals. 3. Hardwired alarm and interface signals shall be normally open, close to

alarm isolated contacts rated for 5-ampere at 120V ac and 2-ampere at 30V dc.

C. Communicated Signals:

1. Ethernet: Allen-Bradley Ethernet/IP for communication with plant Allen-Bradley PLC network.

2.03 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Corrosion-Inhibiting Vapor Capsule Manufacturers:

1. Northern Instruments; Model Zerust VC. 2. Hoffmann Engineering; Model A-HCI.

2.04 CONTROL PANEL

A. Panel Construction and Interior Wiring: In accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC), UL 508, state and local codes, and applicable sections of NEMA, ANSI, and ICECA.

B. Conform to NEMA ratings as specified in individual equipment sections.

C. Minimum Metal Thickness: 14 gauge.

D. NEMA 250, Type 4X Panels: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel construction unless otherwise specified.

E. Doors:

1. Three-point latching mechanisms for panels with doors higher than 18 inches.

2. For other doors, stainless steel quick release clamps.

F. Cutouts shall be cut, punched, or drilled and finished smoothly with rounded edges.



G. Access: Front, suitable for installation with back and sides adjacent to or in contact with other surfaces, unless otherwise specified.

H. Temperature Control:

1. Size panels to adequately dissipate heat generated by equipment mounted on or in the panel.

2. For panels outdoors or in unheated areas, furnish thermostatically controlled heaters to maintain temperature above 40 degrees F.

3. Calculate panel heat load and heat dissipation. For panels mounted outdoors in direct sun, include solar gain in heat load calculation. If temperature rise caused by heat load exceeds the rating of any interior component, or 104 degrees F maximum, then provide means to dissipate heat: a. Ventilation Only: Where panel ventilation will adequately

dissipate heat, and in indoor, dry, conditioned spaces, furnish cooling fans with panel louvers and air filters.

b. Air Conditioner: Where panel ventilation will not adequately dissipate heat, or in outdoor spaces, furnish panel-mounted air conditioner. Air conditioner to match material and rating of panel enclosure; e.g.; Type 316 stainless steel NEMA 4X air conditioners in Type 316 stainless steel NEMA 4X panels. Provide air conditioners designed for side-panel mounting.

I. Push-to-Test Circuitry: For each push-to-test indicating light, provide a fused push-to-test circuit.

J. Lighting: Minimum of one door-switch controlled internal 40-watt fluorescent or LED light for panels 12 cubic feet and larger.

K. Receptacle: Minimum of one 120-volt GFCI duplex receptacle for panels 12 cubic feet and larger.

L. Finish:

1. Metallic External Surfaces (Excluding Aluminum and Stainless Steel): Manufacturer’s standard gray unless otherwise specified.

2. Internal Surfaces: White enamel.

M. Panel Manufacturers:

1. Hoffman. 2. H.F. Cox.



N. Breather and Drains: Furnish with NEMA 250, Type 4 and Type 4X panels.

1. Manufacturer and Products: Cooper Crouse-Hinds; ECD Type 4X Drain and Breather; Drain Model ECD1-N4D, Breather Model ECD1-N4B.

2.05 CONTROL PANEL ELECTRICAL

A. UL Listing Mark for Enclosures: Mark stating “Listed Enclosed Industrial Control Panel” per UL 508A.

B. Control and electrical components, terminals, wires, and enclosures UL recognized or UL listed.

C. Control Panels without Motor Starters:

1. Furnish main circuit breaker and a circuit breaker on each individual branch circuit distributed from panel.

2. Locate to provide clear view of and access to breakers when door is open. Provide typed directory.

3. Circuit Breakers: a. Coordinate for fault in branch circuit to trip branch breaker, and

not main breaker. b. Branch Circuit Breakers: 15 amps at 250V ac. c. Breaker Manufacturers and Products:

1) Heineman Electric Co.; Series AM. 2) Airpax/North American Philips Controls Corp.; Series 205.

D. Control Panels with Three-Phase Power Supplies and Motor Starters:

1. Interlock main circuit breaker with panel door. a. Mount logic controls, branch circuit breakers, overload reset

switches, and other control circuit devices. b. Mount operator controls and indications on front access door.

2. Separation of Power and PLC Control Components: a. Separate 480V ac power components and wiring terminations

from PLC control components and terminations. b. Provide isolated compartment behind separate doors, or interior

enclosures to provide this separation. c. Access to PLC must be possible without exposure to 480V ac

wiring and components. 3. Circuit Breakers:

a. In accordance with NEMA AB 1. b. Breakers, except Motor Branch Breakers: Molded case thermal

magnetic.



c. 42,000-ampere RMS symmetrical rating, minimum at 480 volts, unless otherwise specified in package system equipment specification sections.

d. Tripping: Indicate with operator handle position. 4. Magnetic Motor Starters:

a. Full voltage, NEMA ICS 2, Class A, Size 0 minimum. b. Include three-pole bimetallic or eutectic alloy thermal overload

relays sized for each motor. c. Manual reset type with reset button mounted on panel door.

5. Motor Control: 120V ac (except intrinsically safe circuits where applicable). a. Control Power Transformer:

1) Sufficient capacity to serve connected load, including 200VA for duplex outlet plus 100VA (minimum).

2) Limit voltage variation to 15 percent during contact pickup. 3) Fuse one side of secondary winding and ground the other. 4) Furnish primary winding fuses in ungrounded conductors.

6. Power Distribution Blocks: Furnish to parallel feed tap on branch circuit protective devices. Do not “leap frog” power conductors.

7. Terminations for Power Conductors: Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity.

E. Wiring:

1. ac Circuits: a. Type: 600-volt, Type MTW stranded copper. b. Size: For current to be carried, but not less than 14 AWG.

2. Analog Signal Circuits: a. Type: 600-volt, Type 2 stranded copper, twisted shielded pairs. b. Size: 18 AWG, minimum.

3. Other dc Circuits. a. Type: 600-volt, Type MTW stranded copper. b. Size: 18 AWG, minimum.

4. Separate analog and other dc circuits by at least 4 inches from ac power and control wiring, except at unavoidable crossover points and at device terminations.

5. Enclose wiring in sheet metal raceways or plastic wiring ducts. 6. Wire Identification: Numbered and tagged at each termination.

a. Wire Tags: Machine printed, heat shrink. b. Manufacturers:

1) Brady PermaSleeve. 2) Tyco Electronics.



F. Wiring Interface:

1. For analog and discrete signal, terminate at numbered terminal blocks. 2. For special signals, terminate power (240 volts or greater) at

manufacturer’s standard connectors. 3. For panel, terminate at equipment on/with which it is mounted.

G. Terminal Blocks:

1. Provision: a. For all external connections. b. For internal power distribution and as needed for device

interconnection. c. Wire spare or unused panel mounted elements to terminal blocks. d. Spare Terminals: 20 percent of connected terminals, but not less

than 10. 2. General:

a. Group to keep 120V ac circuits separate from 24V dc circuits. b. Connection Type: Screw connection clamp. c. Compression Clamp:

1) Hardened steel clamp with transversal grooves penetrating wire strands providing a vibration-proof connection.

2) Guides strands of wire into terminal. d. Screws: Hardened steel, captive, and self-locking. e. Current Bar: Copper or treated brass. f. Insulation:

1) Thermoplastic rated for minus 55 degrees C to plus 110 degrees C.

2) Two funnel shaped inputs to facilitate wire entry. g. Mounting:

1) Rail. 2) Terminal block can be extracted from an assembly without

displacing adjacent blocks. 3) End Stops: One at each end of rail, minimum.

h. Wire Preparation: Stripping only. i. Jumpers: Allow jumper installation without loss of space on

terminal or rail. j. Marking System:

1) Terminal number shown on both sides of terminal block. 2) Allow use of preprinted and field marked tags. 3) Terminal strip numbers shown on end stops. 4) Mark terminal block and terminal strip numbers to match

panel construction and wiring drawings.



k. Wire Size: 22 AWG through 12 AWG. l. Rated Wire Size: 12 AWG. m. Spacing:

1) Unfused: 0.25 inch, maximum. 2) Fused: 0.32 inch, maximum.

n. Manufacturer: 1) Allen-Bradley. 2) No “or-equal.”

3. Terminal Block, 120-Volt Power: a. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. b. Rated Current: 30 amp. c. Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG. d. Color: Gray or beige body.

4. Terminal Block, Ground: a. Color: Green and yellow body. b. Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum. c. Grounding: Ground terminal blocks electrically grounded to the

mounting rail. 5. Terminal Block, Blade Disconnect Switch:

a. Use: Provide one for each discrete input and output field interface wire.

b. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. c. Rated Current: 10 amp. d. Color: Gray or beige body, orange switch.

6. Terminal Block, Fused, 24V dc: a. Rated Voltage: 600V dc. b. Rated Current: 6.3 amp. c. Color: Gray or beige body. d. Fuse: 5 by 20 GMA fuses. e. Fuse Marking: Fuse amperage rating shown on top of terminal

block. f. Indication: LED diode 24V dc. g. Leakage Current: 5.2 mA, maximum.

7. Terminal Block, Fused, 120V ac: a. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. b. Rated Current: 6.3 amp. c. Wire Size: 22 AWG through 12 AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 12 AWG. e. Color: Gray or beige body. f. Fuse: 5 by 20 GMA fuses. g. Fuse Marking: Fuse amperage rating shown on top of terminal

block. h. Indication: Neon lamp 110V ac. i. Leakage Current: 1.8 mA, maximum.



H. Grounding: Internal copper grounding bus for ground connections on panels, consoles, racks, and cabinets.

I. Relays:

1. General: a. Relay Mounting: Plug-in type socket. b. Relay Enclosure: Provide dust cover. c. Socket Type: Screw terminal interface with wiring. d. Socket Mounting: Rail. e. Furnish holddown clips.

2. PLC Interface Relay: a. Type: Narrow design for high density and direct connection of

field wiring to relay terminals. b. Function: Covert PLC output voltage to dry contact for isolated

discrete signal interface. c. Relay Mounting: Plug into terminal block style socket. d. Socket Mounting: DIN rail. e. Socket Width: 0.25 inch nominal. f. Coil Voltage: 120V ac. g. Coil Power: 0.5 VA. h. Expected Mechanical Life: 10,000,000 operations. i. Operating Indicator: LED lights when coil is energized. j. Contact Arrangement: One Form C, SPDT contact. k. Contact Rating: 5A, at 24V dc and 250V ac. l. Connection Type: Screw compression clamp. m. Terminal Marking: Numbered with preprinted or field-marked

tags. n. Manufacturer and Product:

1) Allen-Bradley; Bulletin 700-HL or 700-HJ Terminal Block Relays.

2) No “or-equal.” 3. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Nonlatching:

a. Type: Compact general purpose plug-in. b. Contact Arrangement: 3 Form C contacts. c. Contact Rating: 10A at 28V dc or 240V ac. d. Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. e. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. f. Coil Power: 1.8 watts (dc), 2.7VA (ac). g. Expected Mechanical Life: 10,000,000 operations. h. Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 100,000 operations. i. Indication Type: Neon or LED indicator lamp. j. Push-to-test button. k. Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KUP.



4. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Latching: a. Type: Dual coil mechanical latching relay. b. Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts. c. Contact Rating: 10A at 28V dc or 120V ac. d. Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. e. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. f. Coil Power: 2.7 watts (dc), 5.3VA (ac). g. Expected Mechanical Life: 500,000 operations. h. Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 50,000 operations. i. Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KB/KBP.

5. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Time Delay: a. Type: Adjustable time delay relay. b. Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts. c. Contact Rating: 10A at 240V ac. d. Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. e. Coil Voltage: As specified or shown. f. Operating Temperature: Minus 10 degrees C to 55 degrees C. g. Repeatability: Plus or minus 2 percent. h. Delay Time Range: Select range such that time delay setpoint fall

between 20 percent to 80 percent or range. i. Time Delay Setpoint: As specified or shown. j. Mode of Operation: As specified or shown. k. Adjustment Type: Integral potentiometer with knob external to

dust cover. l. Manufacturer and Product:

1) Allen-Bradley 700-HR. 2) No “or-equal.”

J. Intrinsic Safety Barriers:

1. Intrinsically Safe Relays: Monitor discrete signals that originate in hazardous area and are used in a safe area. a. Manufacturer and Product: MTL, Inc.; Series MTL 5000.

2. Intrinsically Safe Barriers: Interface analog signals as they pass from hazardous area to safe area. a. Manufacturer and Product: MTL, Inc.; Series MTL 5000.

K. Front-of-Panel Devices:

1. Manufacturers: a. Allen-Bradley. b. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. c. General Electric. d. Square D.



2. NEMA 250 Rating: a. In NEMA 250, Type 1 and 12 Panels: Industrial, oil-tight

Type 12. b. In NEMA 250, Type 4X Panels: Heavy-duty, Type 4X watertight,

corrosion-resistant service. 3. Potentiometer Units:

a. Three-terminal, resolution of 1 percent and linearity of plus or minus 5 percent.

b. Single-hole, panel mounting accommodating panel thicknesses between 1/8 inch and 1/4 inch.

c. Include legend plates with service markings. 4. Indicating Lights:

a. Heavy-duty, long life LED. b. Screwed on prismatic glass lenses in colors noted and factory

engraved legend plates for service legend. 5. Pushbutton, Momentary:

a. Heavy-duty, oiltight, industrial type with full guard and momentary contacts rated for 10 amperes continuous at 120V ac.

b. Standard size legend plates with black field and white markings for service legend.

6. Selector Switch: a. Heavy-duty, industrial type with contacts rated for 120V ac

service at 10 amperes continuous. b. Standard size, black field, legend plates with white markings, for

service legend. c. Operators: Black knob type. d. Single-hole mounting, accommodating panel thicknesses from

1/16 inch to 1/4 inch.

2.06 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER

A. Programmable Controller:

1. Solid state unit capable of performing same function as conventional relays, timers, counters, sequencers, arithmetic, PID, and other special functions necessary to perform required control functions.

2. Discrete inputs shall be 120V ac or 24V dc. Discrete outputs shall be rated for 2 amps at 120V ac and 24V dc, minimum. Each input and output shall have an LED ON/OFF status indicator.

3. Discrete outputs for interface to external equipment and systems: Provide dry contact interface using one of the following methods: a. Power interposing relay to generate dry contact. b. Provide relay type discrete output module.

4. Analog Inputs and Outputs: 4 mA dc to 20 mA dc per channel.



5. Minimum of 20 percent excess capacity for inputs, outputs, internal memory, and other necessary functions.

6. Capable of operating in a hostile industrial environment (for example, heat, electrical transients, RFI, and vibration) without fans, air conditioning, or electrical filtering. Units operate from 0 degrees C to 60 degrees C and up to 95 percent humidity, noncondensing.

7. Manufacturer and Product: Allen-Bradley; Control Logix or Compact Logix to match plant standard. Provide L8 series CPU with firmware Version 24.

B. Operator Interface Unit:

1. Color LCD display with graphics and text displays, screen navigation, status and alarm indication, and operator control and setpoint adjustment.

2. Touch screen or membrane keypad interface. 3. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Allen Bradley; Panelview Plus 6; size 1,000 or higher. b. Configuration Software: Developed with Rockwell Software

FactoryTalk View Studio for Machine Edition, v8.1 or later.

C. Communication with Facility PLC and Plant SCADA:

1. Method: PLC data communicated over network via Ethernet/IP protocol.

2. IP Address: Assigned during construction to integrate into plant subnet. 3. Connection: Provide an independent Ethernet copper connection

directly from the PLC, Ethernet module, or industrial Ethernet switch. Connection must be separate from any other internal I/O network. A single operator interface terminal (OIT) is permitted to share the network connection to plant SCADA.

4. Communication Method: Communicate via Ethernet/IP using address arrays to allow CIP messaging reads and writes initiated by plant PLC and/or SCADA.

5. Communicated Data: a. All alarm conditions. b. All equipment running and position status. c. Process analog data such as level, flow, pressure. d. Additionally, as specified in package system specification.

2.07 TAG NUMBERS

A. As shown on the Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs).



2.08 NAMEPLATES, NAMETAGS, AND SERVICE LEGENDS

A. Nametags: Permanently mounted bearing entire ISA tag number.

1. Panel Mounted: Plastic, mounted to instrument behind panel face. 2. Field Mounted: Engraved Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel,

18-gauge minimum thickness, attached with stainless steel wire or ball chain.

B. Service Legends (Integrally Mounted with Instrument) and Nameplates:

1. Engraved, rigid, laminated plastic type with adhesive back. Furnish service legends and nameplates to adequately describe functions of panel face mounted instruments.

2. Color: White with black letters. 3. Letter Height: 3/16 inch. 4. For each panel, face mounted laminated nameplate inscribed with the

panel name and tag number. Color shall be white with black letters 1/2 inch high.

C. Standard Light Colors and Inscriptions: Unless otherwise specified in individual equipment specifications, use the following color code and inscriptions:

Function and Inscription(s) Color

ON Red

OFF Green

OPEN Red

CLOSED Green

LOW Amber

FAIL Amber

HIGH Amber

AUTO White

MANUAL Yellow

LOCAL White

REMOTE Yellow

FORWARD Red

REVERSE Blue



1. Standard Pushbutton Colors and Inscriptions: a. EMERGENCY STOP: Red. b. All Others: Black.

2.09 ELECTRICAL SURGE AND TRANSIENT PROTECTION

A. Equip control panels with surge-arresting devices to protect equipment from damage as a result of electrical transients induced in interconnecting lines from lightning discharges and nearby electrical devices.

B. Suppressor Locations:

1. At point of connection between an equipment item, including ac powered transmitters, and power supply conductor (direct-wired equipment).

2. On analog pairs at each end when the pair travels outside of building. 3. In other locations where equipment sensitivity to surges and transients

requires additional protection beyond that inherent to design of equipment.

C. Suppressor Design:

1. Construction: First-stage, high-energy metal oxide varistor and second-stage, bipolar silicon avalanche device separated by series impedance; includes grounding wire, stud, or terminal.

2. Response: 5 nanoseconds maximum. 3. Recovery: Automatic. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees C to plus 85 degrees C. 5. Enclosure Mounted: Encapsulated inflame retardant epoxy.

D. Suppressors on 120V ac Power Supply Connections:

1. Occurrences: Tested and rated for a minimum of 50 occurrences of IEEE C62.41 Category B test waveform.

2. First-Stage Clamping Voltage: 350 volts or less. 3. Second-Stage Clamping Voltage: 210 volts or less. 4. Power Supplies for Continuous Operation:

a. Four-Wire Transmitter or Receiver: Minimum 5 amps at 130V ac. b. All Other Applications: Minimum 30 amps at 130V ac.

E. Suppressors on Analog Signal Lines:

1. Test Waveform: Linear 8-microsecond rise in current from 0 amp to a peak current value followed by an exponential decay of current reaching one-half the peak value in 20 microseconds.



2. Surge Rating: Tested and rated for 50 occurrences of 2,000-amp peak test waveform. a. dc Clamping Voltage: 20 percent to 40 percent above operating

voltage for circuit. b. dc Clamping Voltage Tolerance: Plus or minus 10 percent. c. Maximum Loop Resistance: 18 ohms per conductor.

F. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Analog Signals Lines: Emerson Edco; PC-642 or SRA-64 series. 2. 120V ac Lines: Emerson Edco; HSP-121. 3. 480-Volt, Three-phase Power Supplies: Square D; Model SDSA3650. 4. Field Mounted at Two-wire Instruments:

a. Encapsulated in stainless steel pipe nipples. b. Emerson Edco; SS64 series.

5. Field Mounted at Four-Wire Instruments: a. Enclosure:

1) NEMA 4X Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel with door. 2) Maximum Size: 12 inches by 12 inches by 8 inches deep.

b. Emerson Edco; SLAC series.

G. Grounding:

1. Coordinate surge suppressor grounding in field panels and field instrumentation as specified in Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems, and suppressor manufacturer’s requirements.

2. Provide control panels with an integral copper grounding bus for connection of suppressors and other devices required to be grounded.

3. Provide control panels with ground terminals for grounding of analog signal cable shield. Ground shield at one end only.

2.10 INSTRUMENTATION

A. In accordance with Section 40 91 00, Instrumentation and Control Components.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ELECTRICAL POWER AND SIGNAL WIRING

A. Restrain control and signal wiring in control panels by plastic ties or ducts. Secure hinge wiring at each end so bending or twisting will occur around the longitudinal axis of wire. Protect bend area with a sleeve.



B. Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus wire. Install abrasion protection for wire bundles passing through holes or across edges of sheet metal.

C. Use manufacturer’s recommended tool with sized anvil for crimp terminations. No more than one wire may be terminated in a single crimp lug. No more than two lugs may be installed on a single screw terminal.

D. Do not splice or tap wiring except at device terminals or terminal blocks.

3.02 PROTECTION

A. Protect enclosures and other equipment containing electrical, instrumentation and control devices, including spare parts, from corrosion through the use of corrosion-inhibiting vapor capsules.

B. During Work, periodically replace capsules in accordance with capsule manufacturer’s recommendations. Replace capsules at Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 JIB CRANES JANUARY 2020 41 22 23.21- 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 41 22 23.21 JIB CRANES

EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENT NUMBER(S)

ME25ZY01: Jib Crane and Hoist.

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK OF THIS SECTION

A. The section covers the Work necessary to provide one jib crane, trolley, and hoist system, complete with all appurtenances as specified herein.

1.02 REFERENCES


1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): MH27.l, Underhung Cranes and Monorail Systems.

2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B30.10, Hooks. b. B30.l l, Monorails and Underhung Cranes. c. HST 4M, Performance Standard for Overhead Electric Wire Rope

Hoists. 3. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA):

a. MG 1, Motors and Generators. b. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum).

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 6. UL: 674, Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1

Hazardous (Classified) Locations.


A. Monorail System: Specifications for Underhung Cranes and Monorail Systems, ANSI MH27.l and ASME B30.l l.

B. Hoist: ASME B30.11, Hoist Manufacturers’ Institute.

C. Trolley: ANSI MH27.l.

D. Wire Rope Hoist Service Class: ASME HST 4M.


JIB CRANES PW\DEN003\708335 41 22 23.21 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 2020 JACOBS

E. Hook: ASME 30.10.

F. Stress and Safety Factors: ANSI MH27.l and ASME B30.l l. Properly select materials of construction for stresses to which subjected.

G. Safety of Operation, Accessibility, Interchangeability, and Durability of Parts: ASME B30.l l and OSHA requirements.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: a. Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment

assembly. b. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, materials of

construction, and specifications on hoist, wheels, gears and bearing, trolley drive system, hoist motor and assemblies, hook, brakes, starting system, festoon conductors, controls, and accessories.

c. Detail Shop Drawings of jib crane base showing bolt hole sizes and layout for final design and selection of anchor bolts by Engineer.

d. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers.

e. As required in Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors, for each motor.

f. Factory finish system.


1. Engineering calculations for all jib cranes indicating maximum reactions at base, stamped by a structural engineer licensed in the State of Washington.

2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

3. Recommended procedures for protection and handling of equipment and materials prior to installation.

4. Factory Test Reports. 5. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,


Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services. 7. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.



8. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of 5 years. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price information.

9. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.

10. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.

11. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.

12. As required in Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors, for each motor.

13. As required in Section 40 99 90, Package Control Systems.


A. Temperature: Maximum 98 degrees F; minimum 35 degrees F.

B. Humidity: 90 percent.

C. Location: Indoors.

D. Atmosphere: Mildly corrosive.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Hoist and trolley manufacturer to coordinate equipment requirements with steel structures, drive motor, hoisting cable or chain, hook, track, stops, and electrical equipment controls.

2.02 BASE PLATE MOUNTED JIB CRANES

A. Features:

1. Base plate mounted with full supporting triangular base plate gussets. 2. Furnish mast, head, and boom in accordance with Section 05 50 00,

Metal Fabrications. 3. Independent bolted head/boom connection. 4. Removeable bolted trolley stops. 5. Recessed bearing assembly with precision tapered roller bearings in top

pivot and trunnion.



6. Furnish complete with required number and size of anchor bolts: a. Anchor bolts indicated on Drawings are based on a preliminary

design by engineer and are subject to change following final approval of crane. Engineer will provide final design.

b. Anchor bolts shall meet the requirements of Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Bent bar ‘J’ bolts shall not be used. Provided cast-in, headed, galvanized steel anchor bolts.

7. Design shall include a factor of 15 percent of jib crane capacity for the hoist and trolley weight with an additional 25 percent of the capacity allowed for impact.

8. Manufacturers: a. Spanco. b. Gorbel Inc.

B. Requirements:

1. Capacity: 1/2 tons. 2. Working Span: 3 feet span through 10 feet. 3. Mast Diameter: 8 inches minimum, sized by manufacturer. 4. Base Plate Bolt Circle: 24 inches minimum, sized by manufacturer. 5. Slewing Range: 120 degrees, minimum. 6. Elevations in Reference to Base of Jib Crane:

a. High Hook (from bottom of electric hoist, not trolley): 10 feet minimum.

b. Low Hook: Minus 0 feet.

2.03 TROLLEY

A. Frame: Welded steel, cast steel, or ductile iron construction, or a combination thereof. Construct to control deflection of trolley assembly while transmitting the carrying load to running surface.

B. Manufacturer standard and in accordance with all other requirements, compatible for mounting hoist provided by manufacturer. Trolley shall be geared with a handwheel and chain or shall travel with less than 30-pound input force while under rated load.

2.04 HOIST

A. Hoisting machinery shall consist of rope drum driven through gear reductions, load blocks, hook, hoisting rope, sheaves, and hoist braking. Drum size and length sufficient for minimum two turns of cable remaining on drum when hook is at lowest position. Furnish reeving as specified on Supplement at end of section. Provide right and left-hand grooved drum when two-part double reeving is specified.



B. Hoist shall be powered by 240V single-phase power supply, 60-Hz, with festoon cabling provided with all mounting accessories required for mounting to mast. Electric hoist shall be controlled by a hanging pendant, to hang 6 feet 6 inches below hoist, with 3 feet of excess coiled cable. The hoist shall contain a 3/4-hp motor and shall be TEFC. Festoon cabling shall terminate in a junction box fixed to the mast of the Crane, provided by manufacturer.

C. Rope drum and surrounding members constructed to minimize abrasion, crushing or jamming of hoist rope. Load blocks enclosed type. Hoisting rope extra flexible, improved plow steel wire rope, made especially for hoist service.

D. Hook: Construct with sufficient ductility to open noticeably before hook failure, equipped with safety latch, free to rotate 360 degrees with rated load and positively held in place with locknuts, collars or other devices.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch die- stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in a readily visible location.

B. Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds.


A. Prepare, prime, and finish coat exposed metal surfaces of equipment and accessories in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, System No. 4, color OSHA Safety Yellow.


A. Factory Inspections: Inspect control panels and equipment for required construction, electrical connection, and intended function.

B. Factory Tests and Adjustments: No-load run test all equipment furnished. Running tests shall be performed with the controls that will operate the hoist and trolley once installed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions with any anchorage modifications based on calculation by Manufacturer.



B. Utilize leveling nuts as required under baseplate to make boom and mast level and plumb within manufacturer tolerances.

C. Weld or bolt rotation limit stops to mast to prevent boom impact with door or building features. Check rotation to ensure boom span covers barrel storage rack prior to welding.

D. Install festoon cabling and appurtenances in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Terminate wiring in accordance with manufacturer requirements and requirements listed in Contract Documents.


A. Repair and refinish equipment as required and in conformance with the requirements of Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

3.03 MANUFACTURER’ S CERTIFICATION OF PROPER INSTALLATION

A. The Contractor shall provide Manufacturer’s Certification of Proper Installation in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.


A. Functional Tests: Conduct on each jib crane system.

1. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for proper alignment, levelness and connection, and quiet operation.

B. Performance Test:

1. Conduct on each jib crane system. 2. Load tests in compliance with OSHA, ASME B30.11, and

ANSI MH27.1.


A. Manufacturer’s Representative:

1. Present at Site or classroom designated by Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded: a. 1 person-day for installation assistance and inspection. b. 1/2 person-day for functional and performance testing and

completion of Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation. c. 1/2 person-day for facility startup.



B. See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, and Section 01 91 14, Testing, Integration, and Startup.

3.06 SUPPLEMENT

A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is a part of this Specification.

1. Jib Crane Data Sheet.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 JIB CRANES JANUARY 2020 41 22 23.21 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

JIB CRANE DATA SHEET

Project: Salmon Creek Phase 5B Manufacturer.:

Owner: Discovery Clean Water Alliance Model No.:

Service: Number of Units: 1

Equip. Tag Number(s): Rev/Date/By: _____/_____/_____

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Equipment Capacity: 1/2 tons Factory Testing:

Required Not Required

Field Testing: Not required

Equipment Location: Required, Load Testing

Indoors Outdoors

TROLLEY HOIST

Type: Type:

Built into Boom

Electric, Wire Rope

Hand Operated, Chain

Service Class (ANSI): Service Class (ANSI):

A (standby) B (light) H1 (standby) H2 (light)

C (moderate) D (heavy) H3 (standard H4 (heavy)

E (severe) F (continuous) H5 (severe)

Speed (fpm): ____

Constant Speed

Variable Speed Hand Operated

Hook: See Drawings

Hook Manufacturer: Mfg’s Standard

Reeving: 2-Part, Single

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

Accessories: Remote Controls: Special Electrical Requirements:

Service Platform Infrared, line-of-sight

Central Lubrication System Frequency Modulated (FM)

OSHA Operating and Safety Manufacturer:

Devices Extended Grease Fittings

See Crane Dimension Sheet for clearances, lift distances, and details.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

JANUARY 9, 2020 CENTRIFUGAL DIGESTER GAS BLOWER SKID


SECTION 43 11 46

CENTRIFUGAL DIGESTER GAS BLOWER SKID

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:

1. This section specifies the digester gas blower skid. The skid shall include

hermetically-sealed, variable speed motor driven, centrifugal blower;

shell and tube heat exchangers; valves; control panel and instrumentation;

and appurtenances for use with low-pressure digester gas (DG).

B. Type:

1. Blowers shall be hermetic, gastight, continuous duty, centrifugal type

of stainless steel construction.

2. Heat exchangers shall be stainless steel shell and tube heat exchanger.

3. Blower skid vendor shall provide inverter duty motor, local control

panel and instrumentation mounted on common skid with blower.

4. Variable frequency drive shall be provided in a separate NEMA 12

enclosure for installation in a non-classified area.

C. Equipment List:

Item Equipment Number

Digester Gas Blower [--]

Digester Gas Blower Heat Exchanger [--]

Skid Mounted Local Vendor Control Panel [--]

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) [--]

Blower Discharge Pressure Transmitter [--]

Blower Inlet High Temperature Switch [--]

Electrically Actuated Drip Trap 1 [--]

Electrically Actuated Drip Trap 2 [--]

Cooling Water Solenoid Valve [--]

[--] – Coordinate with Owner to provide equipment tagging

1.02 SYSTEM DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE

A. General:


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS

CENTRIFUGAL DIGESTER GAS BLOWER SKID JANUARY 9, 2020


1. Size and select blowers to accommodate the digester gas flows and gas

pressures specified. Design base characteristics include the following:

Item Design Value

Number of Blowers 1

Inlet/outlet connection size/nominal, inches

(minimum)

2

Parameter, by volume Units Design Value Range

Methane1 Percent 57 56 to 68

Carbon Dioxide1 Percent 37 32 to 44

Nitrogen1 Percent 1 0 to 2

Oxygen1 Percent 1 0 to 1

Water Vapor Percent 5 0.5 to 6

Sulfides2 ppmv 200 0 to 200

Notes: 1 Methane, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, and oxygen values represent

percent by volume as a dry gas. 2 Sulfides are expected to comprise 90 percent or more hydrogen

sulfide.

B. Operating Conditions:

Digester Gas Blower Design Value

a) Inlet gas temperature, ºF, maximum 145

b) Inlet gas temperature, degrees F, normal 98

c) Gas flow, maximum, scfm 160

d) Gas flow, minimum, scfm 40

e) Skid Inlet gas pressure, design, in WC (gauge) 8

f) Gas pressure at skid discharge connection, design, in

WC (gauge)

30

h) Motor horsepower, maximum, HP 5

i) Motor speed, maximum, rpm 3600

Digester Gas Blower Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger Design Value

a) ASME Stamped Design working pressure, psig 5

b) Corrosion allowance, minimum, in 1/32


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



Digester Gas Blower Design Value

c) Water fouling factor, hr-ft^2-°F/Btu 0.0001

d) Cooling water flow rate, gpm (maximum) 17

e) Cooling water inlet temperature, deg F (approximate) 60

C. Electric Motor:

1. Blower motor shall be integral with blower and cooled by the process

fluid.

2. Size motor to be non-overloading with the blower operating over the

specified conditions. Motor to be rated for Class I, Division 1.


A. References:

1. This section contains references to the following documents. They are

a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced

document contains references to other standards, those documents are

included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In

case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of

the listed documents, the requirements of this section prevail.

2. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents mean the

documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation

to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no

Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing

organization, references to those documents mean the replacement

documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if

there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document

before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the

following listing, references to those documents mean the specific

document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the

document has been superseded by a version with a later date,

discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ANSI H35.1 Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Aluminum

ANSI 5052-H-34 Aluminum Alloy, Sheet and Plate, Strain-Hardened,

Half- Hardened, and Stabilized

ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel

ASTM A276 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



NFPA 820 National Electrical Code (NEC)

UL 508A Industrial Control Panels

B. Factory Testing:

1. Factory test and certify blowers to meet the design operating

requirements.

a. Blower shall be subjected to a factory test. The test shall be

conducted at constant speed and shall extend from the surge

point to not less than 120 percent of design volume at design

pressure. The test shall be sufficiently comprehensive to

produce guaranteed performance characteristics.

b. The test data shall be employed to produce operating curves

showing pressure-capacity, power-capacity, and efficiency-

capacity curves and surge points for each environmental

operating condition specified. Capacity shall be in inlet scfm.

c. Test logs and guaranteed performance curves shall be provided

as Product Data to the Construction Manager.

2. Factory test and certify control panel fabrication and update drawings

with changes following submittal.

C. Warranty:

1. Provide a complete written 1-year warranty for the complete gas

blower skid, including controls, control panel, instrumentation,

accessories, and appurtenances.

D. Unit Responsibility:

1. Design, selection and operation of systems and components, including

gas blower accessories must be performed by equipment manufacturer.

2. Blower skid vendor to assume responsibility for the equipment and

appurtenances in this section.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide submittals with the following information:

1. Use check-marks () to denote full compliance with a paragraph as a

whole. Underline and denote deviations with a number in the margin

to the right of the identified paragraph. Remaining portions of the

paragraph not underlined signify the Contractor’s compliance with the

specifications. Include a detailed, written justification for each

deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification

sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



specification requirements, with the submittal is sufficient cause for

rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Submit a completed Certificate of Unit Responsibility attesting that the

Contractor has assigned and the manufacturer accepts unit

responsibility in accordance with the requirements of this section and

Division 1 requirements. No other submittal material will be reviewed

until the certificate has been received and found to be in conformance

with these requirements.

3. Submit a copy of the contract document control diagrams and process

and instrumentation diagrams relating to the submitted equipment.

Include addendum updates applying to the equipment in this section,

marked to show specific changes necessary for the equipment

proposed in the submittal. If no changes are required, mark the

drawing or drawings with "no changes required". Failure to include

copies of relevant drawings with the submittal is cause for rejection of

the entire submittal with no further review.

a. Contractor shall submit plan for purging gas piping while

making connections to the existing piping.

4. Dimensional drawings of skid-mounted equipment identifying

installation dimensions, required maintenance access points and

clearances, location of piping and electrical connections, anchor bolt

calculations and locations, and any layout requirements of the

equipment.

5. Direction of blower rotation and acceptable gas inlet piping

arrangement for initial pre- rotation of the entering gas to the unit.

6. Predicted performance data and/or curves developed for the specific

application, confirming specified design and operating requirements

and characteristics.

7. Manufacturer's catalog and/or other data, confirming specified design,

material and equipment requirements.

8. Operating limits and equipment protection requirements that will be

needed for proper setup/operation to protect the blowers.

9. Catalog information detailing control devices in the control panel as

well as overall control panel layout interconnection diagrams and

construction.

10. Project-specific control panel detailed design and construction

drawings as listed below, including itemized bill of materials, panel

elevation and layout drawings, panel and VFD power distribution and

monitoring and control wiring diagrams showing internal panel

components, wiring and interfaces with the plant control system.

a. Design submittal.

b. Factory as-built.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



c. Final as-built.

11. Manufacturer's catalog information and drawings.

12. Details and catalog data for instruments and accessories.

13. Recommended spare parts list.

14. Manufacturer warranty.

15. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

a. No less than three weeks before equipment start-up,

manufacturer to submit staff training plans and three

hardcopies of completed, tabbed, and bounded operation and

maintenance manuals. Operation and maintenance manual to

include at minimum: table of contents; as constructed record

drawings including piping and instrumentation diagrams,

mechanical equipment, electrical equipment, control panels and

wiring diagrams; manufacturer cutsheets and operational and

maintenance instructions for provided equipment and

instrumentation; and instructions for recommended routine

maintenance and calibration activities.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Design equipment for continuous indoor duty at approximately 36 feet above

sea-level.

B. Design control panel for Class I Division 2 environment as shown on the

Drawings.


A. Use shipping materials suitable for storage of equipment to protect equipment

from exposure to rain, ambient temperatures above or below manufacturer's

maximum and minimum recommended equipment temperatures, and direct

sunlight unless materials are manufactured for exterior locations. Shipping

materials should not require removal from equipment during unloading.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. The following candidate vendors and/or manufacturers are believed to be

capable of producing equipment and/or products satisfying the requirements

of this section. This shall not be construed to indicate the standard offerings

meet the requirements of this specification.

B. Candidate vendors include:

1. Action Blower and Equipment.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



2. Spencer Turbine.

3. Or submitted and approved equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

Equipment Component Material

Centrifugal

Blower

Casing and heads

Impeller

Shaft

Baseplate

Welded carbon steel, with epoxy coating

Fabricated aluminum

Stainless steel, integral with the motor

Coated carbon steel

Heat Exchanger Component Material

Tube

Shell

Tube sheet

Heads

316 stainless steel

304 stainless steel

316 stainless steel

316 stainless steel

Note: Unless otherwise specified, all aluminum, carbon steel or iron blower

components, including the base, to be coated with Heresite P-403L, Chem-

Tough, ceramic or equivalent heavy-duty coating for corrosion protection.

Heresite or similar corrosion resistant coating to be applied by a licensed

representative of the coating manufacturer.

2.03 EQUIPMENT

A. Centrifugal Gas Blowers:

1. Blowers shall be direct drive, hermetically sealed, multistage

centrifugal type. Fully packaged units.

2. Blowers to be gastight design, featuring heads and intermediate

sections sealed bubble tight.

3. Provide a common shaft for the blower impeller along with the

motor’s rotor.

4. Magnetic drive blowers will not be accepted.

5. Lowest part of each blower casing to include two 1-inch stainless steel

drain connections with 120V automatic drip traps. Automatic drip

traps and actuators shall be suitable for Class I, Division I, Group D

area in accordance with NFPA 820 and NFPA 70. Automatic drip

traps shall be Varec 246AT, Groth Model 8490, or Shand & Jurs

97100E drip trap with electric actuator, or submitted and approved

equal.

B. Motor:

1. Drive motor shall be integral with blower and designed for use in

hermetically sealed equipment, explosion proof and generally in


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



conformance to specified requirements of applicable sections of

Division 26.

2. Motor to be sized to be non-overloading with the blower operating

over the conditions specified.

3. NEMA Premium efficient electric motor to be 460-Volt, 3-phase, 60-

Hz, inverter duty rated with Class F insulation and 1.15 Service Factor

on a sine wave source.

4. Motor to be furnished with overtemperature switch.

5. Motor and components to be UL listed for continuous operation and

installation in a hermetically sealed enclosure and a Class I, Division

1, Group D environment.

C. VFD:

1. Blower skid vendor shall rovide VFD for the blower to vary the flow

of digester gas based on the downstream digester gas pressure signal,

as required to maintain constant discharge pressure from the system.

Skid vendor shall coordinate the VFD requirements with blower and

blower motor manufacturer. VFD shall be in accordance with

applicable sections of Division 26.

D. Heat Exchanger:

1. Blower skid vendor shall provide shell and tube heat exchanger

designed and sized to meet the supplied blower manufacturer

operating requirements based on the conditions specified in paragraph

1.02.B.

2. Heat exchangers shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with

the ASME Pressure Vessel Code and TEMA. Each unit shall bear an

ASME inspector's stamp, complete with design working pressure and

date and place of manufacture.

3. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal

strength and stiffness and to be especially adapted for the work

specified.

4. Process fluid and water channels shall be provided with large inlet

compartment offering tangential entry.

5. Process fluid channels shall be free of any sharp bends, support pins,

or any other obstruction into the process fluid flow.

6. Heat exchanger shall be designed with no sharp bends or obstructions

(studs) in the internal process fluid passages and shall provide full

counter-flow heat transfer.

7. Nozzles shall be ASTM 312 grade 316L SST with ANSI B16.5,

Class 150 flange, for connections. Raised face flanges shall include

adapters to install “flat” to 125 class AWWA flanges.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



8. Stainless steel shall be cleaned and passivated following fabrication in

accordance with ASTM A380.

9. Tubes shall be 3/4-inch O.D. minimum seamless metal. Flanged

connections shall be provided, oriented as shown for connection to

external piping systems. Tube bundles shall be held in place by baffles

for more efficient transfer, and bolted covers shall be provided for tube

cleaning. The heat exchanger shall have drain connections as specified

herein.

10. Gaskets shall match pipe spec or full-face non-asbestos fiber sheet

minimum 1/8 inch thick.

11. To facilitate inspection and cleaning, heat exchangers shall have a

hand cleanout port located near the process fluid inlet.

12. Sharp projections of cut or sheared edges of ferrous metal shall be

ground to a radius by multiple passes of a power finder as required to

ensure satisfactory coating adherence.

13. Low point drains for both the water and process fluid channels shall be

provided. Drains shall be a minimum 3000# couplings of a minimum

1/2 inches diameter and capped or plugged.

14. Each process fluid and water inlet and outlet shall be provided with a

3/4 inch diameter coupling for pressure and temperature test ports.

15. Heat exchanger shall be as manufactured by the following candidate

manufacturers. Listed manufacturers are believed to be capable of

producing equipment and/or products satisfying the requirements of

this section. This shall not be construed to indicate the standard

offerings meet the requirements of this specification. Candidate

manufacturers include:

a. API Basco,

b. Bell and Gossett,

c. American Standard,

d. or submitted and approved equal.

E. Valves:

1. The isolation and bypass butterfly valves and check valve shall be in

accordance with applicable sections of Division 40.

2. Isolation and bypass butterfly valves shall be high performance, soft-

seated lugged type butterfly valve with 316SS body, disc, and shaft

with RPTFE seats bonded to a rigid reinforcing ring. Packing shall be

graphite or PTFE V-Ring and bearings shall be 316SS-backed PTFE.

Candidate manufacturers include but are not limited to Dezurik BHP

series, Bray Series 41, or approved equal.

3. Check valve shall be split disc or swing type check valve of 316SS

construction with Viton or stainless steel seats. Candidate


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



manufacturers include but are not limited to Apco, Crane, Val-Matic,

Velan, or approved equal.

F. Anchor bolts:

1. Provide anchor bolts for anchorage of equipment to concrete in

accordance with Sections 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing and 05 50

00, Metal Fabrications. Provide anchor bolts of the type, size,

minimum embedment, and spacing designated in calculations

submitted by Contractor and accepted by Engineer.

2.04 CONTROLS

A. Control Panel:

1. In accordance with requirements of UL 508A.

2. Designed, constructed and rated for installation in environment or

Class I, Division 2, Group D environment.

3. Provide complete controls for blower including local control panel

with door-mounted start/stop control and status indication, temperature

sensors, alarms and shutdowns.

4. Provide LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE [LOR] hand switch.

5. Provide JOG pushbutton (for local jog control of the VFD).

6. Blower VFD speed controlled by the Plant PLC control system to

maintain approximately 30 inches of water column at discharge of

blower skid.

7. Coordinate Ethernet interface configuration requirements with the

Owner.

8. Blower system control:

a. Set points shall be operator-adjustable.

b. Automatically CALL the blower to run and OPEN Cooling

Water Solenoid Valve if either Boiler No.1 or Boiler No.2 is

“RUNNING” (Note: hard wired control between the control

panels).

c. Automatically CALL the blower to STOP and CLOSE Cooling

Water Solenoid Valve if neither boiler is “RUNNING”.

d. Automatic, PLC-based, proportional-integral-derivative (PID)

blower speed control to maintain DG discharge pressure set

point.

e. If either Digester No.1 or Digester No.2 is IN SERVICE, and

either digester LOW pressure occurs the Plant PLC control

system will STOP the Blower and the DG System shall

SHUTDOWN.

f. Blower System Monitoring:


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



1) LOCAL and REMOTE blower control mode selection.

2) Blower ON/OFF status.

3) Blower system CALL TO RUN signal to Plant PLC control

system.

4) Blower run time (operator-adjustable).

5) Blower discharge pressure.

6) DG pressure.

7) VFD speed, instantaneous and 24-hour trend.

8) Digester No.1 IN SERVICE and operating PRESSURE.

9) Digester No.2 IN SERVICE and operating PRESSURE.

10) Boiler No.1 RUNNING.

11) Boiler No.2 RUNNING.

12) Network VFD communications GOOD/FAIL status.

g. Blower System Alarming:

1) Set points shall be adjustable by the Owner’s personnel.

2) Blower called to run but NOT RUNNING.

3) VFD FAULT.

4) Motor temperature SHUTDOWN (signal to the VFD and

Plant PLC control system via Ethernet connection).

5) Blower system TROUBLE signal (as determined by the

manufacturer) to Plant PLC control system.

6) Digester gas temperature HIGH.

7) Digester No.1 LOW pressure.

8) Digester No.2 LOW pressure.

9) DG blower discharge pressure HIGH.

10) DG blower discharge pressure LOW.

11) Digester Gas Blower Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger

discharge temperature HIGH.

B. Instrumentation:

1. Rated for the specified environmental conditions.

2. UL listed.

3. Pressure indicating transmitter:

a. Product requirements:

1) Capacitance or piezoresistive type.

2) Range: 100:1.

3) Wetted parts: Type 316 stainless steel.

4) Process connection:


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



a) ½-inch female NPT, unless otherwise required by the installation.

b) Isolation valve with calibration port connection, type 316 stainless

steel.

5) Class 1, Division 1 rated.

6) Signal Output: Two-wire transmitter, 4 to 20 mAdc analog

transmission signal.

7) Calibrated range: 0.0 to 50.0 in WC.

8) HART standard data communication protocol.

9) Accuracy: 0.075 percent of calibrated span.

10) Static Pressure Rating: 2,000 psi

11) Indicator: LCD display.

b. Acceptable Manufacturer:

1) Rosemount model 3051.

2) Or approved equal.

4. Pressure gauges:


1) Type: Low range pressure.

2) 4-1/2-inch phenolic turret case construction with

shatterproof glass window and 270-degree milled stainless

steel movement.

3) ASTM A269, Type 316 stainless steel bellows.

4) Provided with a porous metal type snubber with ASTM

A276, Type 303 stainless steel body and Type 316 stainless

steel filter disc.

5) Process connection:

a) ½-inch male NPT, unless otherwise required by the installation.

b) Isolation valve with calibration port connection, type 316 stainless

steel.


1) Ashcroft type 1188.


5. Diaphragm seals:


1) Diaphragm and wetted parts: Type 316L stainless steel.

2) Upper Housing and Mounting Flange: Type 316L stainless

steel.

3) Lower Housing: Type 316 stainless steel.

4) Process connection: ½-inch female NPT, unless otherwise

required by the installation.


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



5) Temperature Limit, High Side: -40 to 300 degrees F.


1) Rosemount model 1199.


6. Temperature switch:


1) Process connection: ½-inch male NPT.

2) SAMA PMC6-10, Class 2 filled thermal element and

switch.

3) ASTM A269, type 316 stainless steel with SAMA PMC6-

10 dimensions of X equal to or less than 5 inches, Y equal

to 3/8-inch nominal, and U as determined by the Blower

skid vendor.

4) Switch performance shall not be altered by bulb exposure

to the units rated over-range temperature.


1) Ashcroft.


C. Contractor shall hire Proctor Sales, Inc. for controls integration of new

digester gas blower to the existing boiler control systems.

D. Controls shall integrate with the plant’s control system via discrete signals and

a common Ethernet interface protocol supported by the plant supervisory

control and data acquisition (SCADA) system consisting of existing PLCs and

an HMI systems.

E. PLC and HMI system program and network modifications required to

integrate and interface the new digester gas blower system, and to provide the

specified automatic control, monitoring and alarming functions with the

existing SCADA system shall be provided by the Owner.

F. Additions or modifications to Owner’s existing control panels shall meet the

requirements of the State of Washington and UL 508A.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide blower skid with the following:

1. Inlet and discharge isolation valves as shown.

2. Inlet check valve where shown.

3. Pressure Gauges and diaphragm seals as shown.

4. Reduced-size gas bypass pressure relief piping arrangement with:


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



a. Adjustable over-pressure safety relief valve. Pressure relief

piping shall be routed to inlet of digester gas blower heat

exchanger.

b. Commissioning bypass valve shall be adjusted during

commissioning of blower skid to ensure adequate flow is

delivered to boiler during an overpressure vent.

5. Temperature gauges on inlet of heat exchanger, and inlet and outlet of

blower.

6. High temperature shutdown instrument on blower inlet. High

temperature shutdown shall be set in accordance with supplied blower

manufacturer’s maximum recommended operating temperature.

7. Cooling Water Solenoid Valve.

8. Rotameter and bronze globe valve for adjusting cooling water flow.

9. Equipment Identification Plate: 16 gauge stainless steel with 1/4 inch

die-stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in a readily

visible location.

10. Lifting Lugs: Lifting lugs shall be provided on equipment weighing

over 100 pounds.

B. SPARE PARTS

1. Provide manufacturer recommended spare parts list plus items listed

below, including but not limited to:

a. One full spare blower and blower motor.

b. Two sets of bearings and packing.

c. One total shaft seal assembly.

d. Two sets of each type gasket used.

e. Special maintenance tools used.

2.06 PRODUCT DATA

A. Provide the following product data:

1. Certification of satisfactory factory testing.

2. Certification of proper installation.

3. Complete control system schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams, list

of instrumentation and control devices, and description of operations

for the control system.

4. Provide specific circuit details and descriptions of the interface circuits

and devices between the blower controls, the separate blower VFD,

and the Plant Control System.

5. Certification of Owner staff training.

PART 3 EXECUTION


PLANT IMPROVEMENTS



A. INSTALLATION

1. Install the equipment in full agreement with the manufacturers printed

guidelines and instructions.

2. Provide new gaskets for all flanged connections that are unbolted

during installation of new blower connections

3. Contractor shall install and interface the new digester gas blower

system with the existing boiler control systems system and network as

directed by Proctor Sales, Inc.

4. Contractor shall install and interface the new digester gas blower

system with the existing plant SCADA system and network.

B. FIELD TESTING

1. Jointly with the manufacturer or manufacturer’s representative, field

test the blowers using digester gas to demonstrate compliance with the

performance requirements as specified. Provide inspection, testing,

and certification services.

2. Testing to be performed at operational conditions. Each control device,

item or mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation equipment, and

control circuits to be included in the testing procedures to demonstrate

that the equipment and system has been properly serviced, aligned,

connected, calibrated, and adjusted prior to operation.

C. START-UP

1. Provide a factory-trained manufacturer representative for a minimum

of 2 working days (16 hours). The factory representative will perform

start up and calibration on the equipment, and train plant personnel on

operating and maintenance requirements.

D. TRAINING

1. Provide staff training plans and operation and maintenance manuals

specified in paragraph 1.04 to Owner before staff training. Hold staff

training sessions at the site and as scheduled with the Owner.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS JANUARY 2020 43 12 01 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 CH2M HILL

SECTION 43 12 01 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): PTC 10, Compressors and Exhausters.

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). b. MG 1, Motors and Generators.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard Cubic Foot Per Minute (scfm): Volume flow rate of air at standard conditions of 60 degrees F, 14.7 psia, and 36 percent relative humidity.

1.03 SUBMITTALS



assembly. b. Manufacturer’s catalog information, descriptive literature, and

specifications. c. Detailed mechanical and electrical drawings showing equipment

fabrications. Include dimensions, size, and locations of connections to other Work.

d. External utility requirements such as air, water, power, and drain for each component.

e. Functional description of internal and external instrumentation and controls including list of parameters monitored, controlled, or alarmed.

f. Control panel elevation drawings showing construction and placement of operator interface devices and other elements.

g. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers.

h. Manufacturer’s diagrams for air compressor piping. i. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by



COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS PW\DEN003\708335 43 12 01 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 CH2M HILL



2. Manufacturer’s Instructions: a. Installation of equipment. b. Installation of vibration isolators.

3. Factory test reports of each test and inspection. 4. Field test reports for each functional and performance test of equipment. 5. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with

Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 6. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,

Operation and Maintenance Data.


A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and special tools:

1. V-Belts: One set per compressor type. 2. Intake Filter Cartridges: Three per compressor type. 3. Prefilter Replaceable Elements: Five for each compressor type. 4. Oil Filter Replaceable Elements: Three for each compressor type. 5. Special Tools: One set.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. General:

1. Furnish air compressors as a complete system that includes compressor, motor, controls, receiver, and accessories.

2. Reference data sheet located at the end of this section as a supplement.

B. Receiver Mounted Air Compressor(s):

1. Manufacturers and Products: a. ITT; Pneumotive. b. Ingersoll Rand. c. Quincy.

2. Single-cylinder, single-stage reciprocating type. 3. Air cooled. 4. Oil pressure lubricating system. 5. Automatic unloading during startup.



6. Mount motor and compressor on common steel base attached to receiver.

7. Compressor connected to motor by V-belt drive system with guard, and convenient method of belt tensioning.

8. Motor to operate at 1800 rpm. Capable of operating continuously at 104 degrees F at specified output without overheating.

9. Equip with combination air intake filter silencer, oil filter, and discharge cushion chamber.

10. Capacity: 17 scfm at specified discharge pressure. 11. Operating Discharge Pressure: 135 minimum psig. 12. Horsepower: 5. 13. Adjustable Control Pressure: 95 psig to START and 115 psig to STOP. 14. Receiver Capacity: 80 minimum gallons, size so that maximum NEMA

starts per hour cannot be exceeded at 50 percent of rated flow with specified pressure settings.

15. Motor: a. In accordance with NEMA MG 1. b. Type: Squirrel-cage. c. Enclosure: Drip-proof for indoor installation. d. Duty Cycle: Continuous. e. Horsepower: 5. f. Rpm: Maximum 1,800. g. Volts: 480. h. Phase: Three. i. Frequency: 60 Hz. j. Service Factor: 1.15. k. Connected Load: Do not exceed motor nameplate horsepower

rating for operating conditions. l. Minimum Full-Load Efficiency: Not less than 93 percent.

16. Receiver: a. Welded steel receiver bearing ASME code stamp and with

inspection openings. b. Maximum Allowable Working Pressure: Greater than compressor

rated output pressure. c. Corrosion Allowance: 1/16 inch. d. Safety relief valve set for 5 psig above compressor rated output

pressure. e. Pressure gauge with gauge cock. f. Automatic condensate drain valve with isolation valve. g. Manual blowdown valve located at low point in receiver.

17. Controls: a. ON/OFF cyclic operation. b. Automatic low oil pressure shutdown with indicating light and oil

pressure gauge.


COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS PW\DEN003\708335 43 12 01 - 4 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 CH2M HILL

c. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12 panel for indoor installation to house complete control system including: 1) Control power transformer. 2) HAND/OFF/AUTOMATIC switch. 3) Pressure switches. 4) Relays. 5) System pressure indicator. 6) Indicating light(s). 7) Combination motor starter (NEMA Size 1 minimum) with

overload protection. d. Control Panel: Mount in accessible location on receiver. e. Prewired control components. f. Control Components: Operate on 120-volt ac power supply. g. Power Supply: 480 volts, three-phase, 60-Hz.

C. Equipment Tag Number: Facility 88 Air Compressor.

D. Lifting Lugs: Provide suitably attached for equipment assemblies and components weighing over 100 pounds.

E. Equipment Identification Plates: Provide 16-gauge stainless steel identification plate securely mounted on each separate equipment component in a readily visible location. Plate shall bear 3/8 inch high die-stamped block type equipment name indicated in this specification.

F. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer, 1/2-inch minimum diameter, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Air Pressure Reducing Valve:

1. Manufacturer and Product: Fisher; Type 95 H. 2. Fabrication: Cast iron body with neoprene diaphragm. 3. Capacity: Reduce pressure to 95 psig from upstream pressure

determined by compressor manufacturer. 4. Size: 3/4-inch IPS.

2.03 SHOP/FACTORY FINISHING

A. Furnish manufacturer’s standard enamel finish.




A. Factory Inspections: Inspect control panels for required construction, electrical connection, and intended function.

B. Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test equipment and control panels furnished for a minimum of 2 hours.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install equipment on vibration isolators in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Piping: Equip with full-size flexible discharge connection, check valve, and isolation valve.

B. Air Compressor Piping:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s piping diagrams. 2. Pipe relief valve, tank drain, and separator drain to floor drain.


1. 1 person-day for installation assistance and inspection.

3.03 SUPPLEMENT


1. Facility 88 Air Compressor Induction Motor Data Sheet.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS JANUARY 2020 43 12 01 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 CH2M HILL

FACILITY 88 AIR COMPRESSOR INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET

Project: Salmon Creek WTP

Owner: Discovery Clean Water Alliance

Equipment Name: Facility 88 Air Compressor

Equipment Tag Number(s):

Type: Squirrel-cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1

Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories of a single manufacturer.

Hazardous Location: Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 and have an applied UL listing mark.

Motor Horsepower: 5 Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: 93 percent

Voltage: 480 Guaranteed Minimum Power Factor at Full Load: _____ percent

Phase: 3 Service Factor (@ rated max. amb. temp.): 1.0 1.15

Frequency: 60 Enclosure Type:

Synchronous Speed: 1800 rpm Multispeed, Two-Speed: _____ / _____ rpm

Thermal Protection: Winding: One Two

Space Heater: _____ volts, single-phase

Mounting Type: Horizontal Vertical

Vertical Shaft: Solid Hollow

Vertical Thrust Capacity (lb): Up _____ Down _____

Adjustable Speed Drive: See Section 26 29 23, Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive Systems.

Operating Speed Range: _____ to _____% of Rated Speed

Variable Torque

Constant Torque

Additional Motor Requirements: See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.

Special Features:


PW\DEN003\708335 BIOTRICKLING FILTER SYSTEM JANUARY 2020 44 31 00 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 CH2M HILL

SECTION 44 31 00 BIOTRICKLING FILTER SYSTEM


Preliminary and Primary Treatment Odor Control (Facility 22): 22TNK0401 and 22TNK0402 Biotrickling Filter Towers. 22LCP0501 Water Panel. 22PMP0501 Nutrient Pump. 22TNK0501 Nutrient Tank.

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. The following is a list of standards which are referenced in this Section:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 3. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. C582, Standard Specification for Contact Molded Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant Equipment.

b. D2563, Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass-Reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts.

c. D2583, Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor.

d. D2584, Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins.

e. D3299, Standard Specification for Filament-Wound, Fiberglass Reinforced Thermoset Resin Chemical Resistant Tanks.

f. D4097, Standard Specification for Contact Molded, Glass Fiber Reinforced Thermoset Resin Corrosion-Resistant Tanks

g. D5504-01, Standard Test Method for Determination of Sulfur Compounds in Natural Gas and Gaseous Fuels by Gas Chromatography and Chemiluminescence.

h. E544; Standard Practices for Referencing Suprathreshold Odor Intensity.

i. E679; Standard Practice for the Determination of Odor and Taste Thresholds by a Forced-Choice Ascending Concentration Series Method of Limits.

4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 5. National Electrical Code (NEC).


BIOTRICKLING FILTER SYSTEM PW\DEN003\708335 44 31 00 - 2 JANUARY 2020


6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 820; Fire Protection in

Wastewater Treatment and Collection Systems. 8. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). 9. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE). 10. Occupational Health and Safety Administration (OSHA). 11. UL. 12. US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. The following is a list of abbreviations which may be used in this Section:

1. BOD: Biological Oxygen Demand. 2. COD: Chemical Oxygen Demand. 3. D/T: Dilutions to Threshold. 4. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic. 5. EPDM: Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer. 6. GC: Gas Chromatography. 7. hp: Horsepower. 8. H2S: Hydrogen Sulfide. 9. PE/RAS: Primary Effluent/Return Activated Sludge. 10. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. 11. ppbv: Parts Per Billion, by volume. 12. ppmv: Parts Per Million, by volume. 13. TSS: Total Suspended Solids. 14. VFD: Variable Frequency Drive. 15. WC: Water Column.


A. Design Requirements:

1. Refer to Contract Drawings for additional information to supplement this Section.

2. Structural design shall be prepared and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Washington.

3. All control components located within 3-feet of odorous air leakage sources shall be UL listed for use in Class 1, Division 2, Group D hazardous area and shall be installed in compliance with NEC 500, NEC 501. a. Biotrickling filter control panels (including electrical and water

panel systems) shall be located outside the Class 1, Division 2, Group D impact zone.



4. All mechanical components shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the latest edition and revision of all applicable codes and regulations, including the following: a. NIST. b. ASTM. c. ANSI. d. ASME.

5. Equipment Components: As applicable, seismic, snow and wind effects shall be considered in design of the equipment, attachments and supports and shall include the dynamic effects of the equipment, contents, and supports. Seismic and wind design criteria as applicable are as required for biotrickling filter anchorage.

6. Equipment Materials: All components of the System shall be compatible with the conditions and chemicals to which they will be subjected to during normal operation.

B. Unit Responsibility and Scope of Supply:

1. A complete Biotrickling Filter System (System) shall be provided by a single Manufacturer having complete system responsibility. The system shall include, but not be limited to: a. Biotrickling filter vessels. b. Biotrickling filter media. c. Temporary recirculation pump and piping as required during

startup to acclimate the system. d. Maintenance platform as shown on Drawings, including access

ladder, and railing around the top of the vessels. Stairs leading to the platform shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with Division 05, Metals.

e. Irrigation system, including vessel interior piping and spray nozzles.

f. Water panel (nutrient pump, interior piping, valves, controls). g. Accessories, appurtenances, and instruments as shown on

Drawings and required for operation and monitoring. h. Nutrient tank. i. Provide media and components suitable for the service conditions

listed herein. j. Provide and guarantee the required hydrogen sulfide removal

performance and overall odor removal as measured by dilutions to threshold (D/T) listed herein.

k. Provide all components and accessories of the system to enhance compatibility, ease of operation and maintenance, and as necessary to place the equipment in operation in conformance with the specified performance, features and functions.




l. The Biotrickling Filter System Supplier is responsible for the biotrickling filter vessel design including all layouts, structural calculations for floors and walls, and vessel material sizing.

m. The Biotrickling Filter System Supplier is responsible for equipment startup, performance testing, and training of Owner’s personnel operation and maintenance staff.

2. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the Biotrickling Filter System Supplier for Contractor’s scope of supply and installation requirements including layout dimensions and coordination with adjacent work, drains, and utility connections. Coordinate stairs and maintenance platform elevations and connection.

3. The Contractor shall be responsible for, but not limited to, the following: a. Receiving and offloading of odor control system equipment. b. Site preparation and clearing of materials. c. Construction or modifications of concrete foundations to

accommodate the biotrickling filter and fan, and odorous air ductwork.

d. Installation and assembly of all equipment and instrumentation components for a complete system.

e. FRP Odorous air ductwork and supports including dampers, transitions, bypass stack, and flexible connectors as shown on Drawings and specified under Section 23 31 16.16, Thermoset Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Ducts and Accessories.

f. External water piping, heat tracing, insulation, and drain piping to and from the water panel. Include unions or flanged connections as required by supplier to facilitate removal of components.

g. Piping between the water panel and the nutrient tank. h. Utility requirements, including electrical service and field wiring,

water supply, and drain. i. Odor Control Fans as specified under Section 23 34 00, Odor

Control Fans, including acoustical enclosure. j. Balancing of odorous air system per Section 23 05 93, Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC and Odor Control.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals; submit shop drawings as follows:

1. Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly. 2. Manufacturer’s catalog information, descriptive literature,

specifications, and identification of materials of construction.



3. Drawings and Calculations: a. All structural drawings and calculations shall be signed and sealed

by a professional engineer licensed in the state of Washington. b. Provide detailed structural and mechanical layout drawings

showing system fabrication, dimensions, size and locations of connections to other work and fully describing system operation.

c. Provide complete process mechanical design calculations for the odor control system, which shall include but not be limited to the following: 1) Estimated annual utility usage (water and power). 2) Estimated nutrient monthly use and cost. 3) Biotrickling filter pressure drop under rated air flows.

d. Provide structural calculations and drawings for the vessels and maintenance platform, which shall include, but not be limited to, consideration of the following: 1) Dead loads. 2) Live loads. 3) Environmental loads (wind, snow, seismic). 4) Anchor lug attachment to shell. 5) Anchor bolt size and embedment requirements. 6) Consideration of effect of all cutouts and openings into the

vessel wall. 7) Attachment lugs for piping, structural members, platform,

ladders and other appurtenances. 8) Packing support design.

4. Process and Instrumentation Drawings (P&ID) showing all components, flow rates, unit requirements and interfaces with plant control systems.

5. Control System: Submittal shall include control narratives required for system operation. Narratives shall be complete to allow programming of the plant PLC, by others.

6. Vessel data indicating pressure rating, diameter, straight shell lengths, overall lengths, wall thickness, and details of irrigation nozzle designs.

7. Manufacturer’s Information on the Biotrickling Filter Media: a. Media Physical Characteristics, including:

1) Media Volume/stage. 2) Media Depth/stage. 3) Number of media sections. 4) Resulting Empty Bed Retention Time in media at rated

flow(s). b. Expected compaction rates of the media.

8. Manufacturer’s data on the mist eliminator including verification of droplet removal performance and pressure drop at design flow rate.

9. External utility requirements such as air, water, power, drain, etc., for each component including required flow rates and pressures.




10. Detailed requirements for biotrickling filter system foundations. 11. Functional description of internal and external instrumentation and

controls to be supplied including list of parameters monitored, controlled, or alarmed.

12. Water panel elevation drawings showing construction and placement of valves, instrumentation and other elements.

13. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 14. Shop and Field Painting Systems: Include manufacturer’s descriptive

technical catalog literature and specifications. 15. Detailed Performance Testing Plan which includes:

a. System acclimation plan. Including requirements for temporary recirculation pump and piping.

b. Test equipment and apparatus. c. Calibration and setup procedures. d. The specific testing methodology to be used. e. The sampling and analysis procedures.

16. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.

17. All deviations and/or exceptions to this Specification, detailed and explained with the reason for the deviation and the effect of the deviation on the maintenance, operation, and performance of the equipment.



2. Support and anchorage calculations stamped by an Engineer licensed in the State of Washington. Anchorage, bracing and support design criteria and calculations shall conform to the manufacturer’s requirements as well as design criteria indicated on the Structural General Notes on Drawings and any other referenced standards. Provide ICC-ES reports and special inspection requirements for anchors to be drilled and installed into completed concrete or masonry. Anchor calculations shall indicate edge distance, embedment, concrete thickness and strength, and other conditions assumed in the design calculations. All assumed field conditions shall be verified by the Contractor prior to installation of the anchors and bracing.

3. Field functional test reports. 4. Final Performance Test Report: Narrative of the sampling activities, a

copy of the original sampling log, photographs showing locations of velocity and pressure measurements, tabular summary of velocity, airflow rates, pressure, H2S and total odor removal data, calculated results, and conclusions of these results.



5. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 6. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 7. Written factory test report of inspection. 8. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with

Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services. 9. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,

Operation and Maintenance Data, including routine maintenance requirements prior to startup.

10. Installation list showing experience with similar installations, as required by Article Quality Assurance.

11. Statement of Warranty as required by Article Special Guarantee.


A. Qualifications:

1. The Biotrickling Filter System Supplier shall be recognized in the design, production and operation of biological air treatment systems in the United States.

2. The Biotrickling Filter System Supplier shall have at least 5 years of experience in design and fabrication of biological odor control systems similar to the type and size specified for this project utilizing same media as proposed for this project.

3. Similar Projects: a. The Biotrickling Filter System Supplier shall provide a list of at

least 10 biological air treatment installations associated with the removal of hydrogen sulfide and/or other typical organic municipal wastewater odor causing compounds. At least five systems must be of comparable size in terms of airflow.

b. The list shall include verifiable contact names, telephone numbers and length of service for each named installation.

c. Installations shall be wastewater applications comparable to the type specified for this project.

d. The list shall be for applications using the specific type of media being proposed.

4. The Biotrickling Filter System Supplier’s place of business shall be open for inspection.

5. The Biotrickling Filter System Supplier shall provide the Owner with training and field monitoring support service during the first year of operation.




1.06 SPECIAL GUARANTEE

A. General: The Performance Guarantee, Biotrickling Filter Media Warranty and Biotrickling Filter Vessel Warranty shall be issued from the Biotrickling Filter System Supplier to the Owner in the form of a certificate signed by the Biotrickling Filter System Supplier that contains the conditions of the warranties as outlined in this section. The certificate shall be issued no later than Substantial Completion.

B. Performance Guarantee:

1. Biotrickling Filter System Supplier shall guarantee that the System shall provide H2S removal and overall odor removal in accordance with the specified removal efficiencies for a period of 24 months after substantial completion of the system. a. If the media is shown to be the cause of not meeting the guarantee

then the Biotrickling Filter System Supplier shall at their sole discretion at no cost to the Owner either (a) add new media, or (b) repair or replace any part of the defective media, or (c) replace the entire media bed.

b. One-time performance testing as described herein shall be means of proving performance criteria is met.

2. This Guarantee shall be contingent on the following conditions: a. The Owner must ensure that system is operated and maintained as

verified through written records in accordance with specified design criteria and in accordance with the instructions provided in the Manufacturer’s Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

C. Biotrickling Filter Media Warranty:

1. The warranty period shall be for 10 years and begin on the date of Substantial Completion.

2. The Warranty shall provide that: a. The media shall not shrink or compact by more than 5 percent of

the original bed depth. b. The media shall not degrade or decompose during the warranty

period. c. The media shall not experience a 15 percent increase in head loss

across the media at the design airflow. d. If the media does shrink or compact by more than 5 percent of the

original bed depth or if the media is found, upon examination, to have degraded or decomposed or to be defective in material or workmanship or if the media begins to create a 15 percent increase in head loss across the media at the design airflow then



the Biotrickling Filter System Supplier shall at their sole discretion at no cost to the Owner either (a) add new media, or (b) repair or replace any part of the defective media, or (c) replace the entire media bed Biotrickling Filter System Supplier shall reinstate the original media warranty with the new media.

3. This Warranty shall be contingent on the following conditions: The Owner must ensure that the System is operated and maintained in accordance with specified design criteria through written records and in accordance with the instructions provided in the Manufacturer's Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

D. Biotrickling Filter Vessel Warranty:

1. The warranty period shall be for 5 years and begin on the date of Substantial Completion.

2. The structural integrity of the vessel shall be warranted.


A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and materials:

Item Quantity

Nutrient

Spray nozzle

One year supply plus startup

One set

B. Delivery: Deliver to Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. The Biotrickling Filter System Supplier shall furnish and assist in the installation of Biotrickling Filter System.

B. Biotrickling Filter System shall include:

1. One Biotrickling Filter System for treating odorous air from the preliminary treatment facility, primary clarifier influent and effluent channels, primary clarifiers, PE/RAS Mixing Box, and force main influent structure.

2. Biotrickling Filter System shall include two vessels both operating in a parallel duty configuration.




3. Bypass stack and damper to allow continued exhaust when one or both biotrickling filter towers are removed from service.

4. Water panel containing piping, valves, automatic valves, nutrient pump, instruments, and accessories as shown on Drawings and required for proper operation.

2.02 BIOTRICKLING FILTER SYSTEM SUPPLIER

A. Materials, equipment, components, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of:

1. Daniel Company. 2. BioAir Solutions, LLC. 3. Evoqua Water Technologies. 4. ECS – Environmental Composite Systems. 5. No “or-equal” or substitution allowed.

B. System shown on Drawings may differ between suppliers. Provide submittals as specified in Article Submittals to show any modifications required to meet specific requirements. Contractor to coordinate all modifications if required.


A. The System shall be designed to remove odorous constituents from process air stream under the following operating conditions:

1. Equipment Numbers: 22TNK0401 and 22TNK0402.

Process Parameter Value

Duty Continuous

Location Outdoors

Inlet Air Temperature 40 to 110 degrees F

Design Air Flow rate (both towers are duty)

19,350 cfm (Initial)

22,350 cfm (Future)

Inlet Relative Humidity 40 to 100%

Type of Contaminants H2S and reduced sulfur organic compounds and other odors typical of municipal wastewater applications. Sources include preliminary treatment, primary clarifiers, PE/RAS mixing box, and force main discharge structure.

H2S at Inlet 2 to 10 ppmv




Odor Level at Inlet 5,000 to 25,000 D/T

Reduced Sulfur Compounds

Total sulfur compounds not including hydrogen sulfide per ASTM D5504 adding up to less than 1 ppm.

H2S Removal Requirements (this requirement is tied to a performance testing guarantee)

For inlet concentrations > 10 ppmv, 99% removal.

For inlet concentrations < 10 ppmv, outlet H2S concentration < 0.5 ppmv.

Odor Removal Requirements

D/T Odor Reduction:

90% removal or <500 D/T, whichever results in the greater reduction in D/T.

B. The System shall conform to the following parameters:

Design Parameter Value

Vessel diameter 12 ft (Basis of design)

Minimum Empty Bed Residence Time. (Provide a higher value if required to meet the performance requirements.)

As required to meet H2S and odor (D/T) removal criteria, but no less than:

14 seconds at 22,350 cfm

Instantaneous Water Supply Not to exceed instantaneous 100 gpm maximum.

Irrigation Water Quality (plant effluent, W3)

COD: < 50 mg/L

BOD: < 10 mg/L

Ammonia Nt: 1 – 15 mg N/L

Total Phosphorus: 0.3to 0.5 mg/L

Total Chlorine: <3 mg/L

TSS: < 10 mg/L

Salts: < 2,000 ppm (NaCl, KCl etc.)

Hardness: < 400 mg/L (when operated at pH 2)





Air Pressure Drop

Maximum: 4 inches wc across the Biotrickling Filter vessels at future flow rate.

2.04 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Biotrickling Filter Vessel:

1. General: a. Free standing tower including media and top spray media bed

irrigation system. b. Designed to support the required number of media layers and

treatment stages. c. Inspection windows, manways, drains, etc., provided as needed

for inspection and access to internals of the biotrickling filter and drainage of the biotrickling filter. At least one access-way per stage or lift of media (for random media type), observation of spray nozzle assembly, and at the sump section.

d. No exposed metal allowed inside the vessel. e. Vessel shall discharge treated exhaust from an integral top

mounted exhaust stack that freely disperses upward. Rain hats are not allowed.

f. Biotrickling filter section is to operate as a counter-current flow system.

g. Provide maintenance platform of general arrangement as shown on Drawings to observe irrigation spray nozzle and access to mist eliminator. Platform shall be provided with guardrailing meeting all local and state requirements. Platform and guardrailing shall be constructed of fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) or aluminum, and self-supported from the tower shell.

2. Vessel Construction: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) only. HDPE is not acceptable. a. Material – FRP:

1) Vessel to be filament wound in accordance with ASTM D3299, Type II, Grade 1.

2) Vessel to be designed for positive pressure service conditions.

3) Contact molded components and accessories shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM D4097.

4) Visual defects shall be in accordance with ASTM C582. 5) Liquid Service Nozzles: Flanged with conical type gusset in

accordance with ASTM D4097 standard (25 psi rating) with minimum flange thickness of 3/4-inch. Flange diameters



and drillings shall meet [GK1]. Back face of flanges shall be spot-faced, flat and parallel to flange face of sufficient diameter to accept SAE metal washer under bolthead or nut. Gaskets to be 1/8-inch thick EPDM full-face gaskets of 60 durometer. Press-molded flanges are not acceptable.

6) Resin: a) Resin shall be premium corrosion-resistant vinyl ester

resin such as Ashland Derakane 510-B, Interplastic Corezyn, “or-equal.” Vinyl ester resin must be provided, no substitute.

b) FRP fabrications shall not exceed a flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 Tunnel Test.

c) Structural wall resin shall contain a minimum of 3 percent antimony trioxide to achieve the designed low flame spread index requirement.

d) Add ultraviolet absorbers to surfacing resin to improve weather resistance.

e) Color: Use no dyes, pigments, or colorants, except in the exterior gel coat.

f) Curing System: Per Biotrickling Filter System Supplier’s recommendations.

g) The Engineer reserves the right to test the vessel for resin quality.

7) Reinforcement: a) Veil: Chemical surfacing mat, Type C (chemical)

glass, 10 mils thick, with a finish and a binder compatible with the lay-up resin.

b) Corrosion Barrier: Resin-rich interior surface of nominal 100 mils using chopped strand mat backing the veil. Use no additive in the corrosion barrier.

c) Chopped Stand Mat: Type E glass, minimum 1-1/2 ounces per square foot, with silane finish and styrene soluble binder.

d) Continuous Roving Used in Chopper Gun for Spray-Up: Type E glass.

e) Woven Roving: Type E glass, nominal 24 ounces per square yard, 4 by 5 weave, with silane type finish.

f) Continuous Roving Used for Filament Winding: Type E glass with a silane type finish, with a nominal yield of at least 110 strand yards per pound.

8) Laminate: a) Laminate shall consist of an inner surface (corrosion

barrier), an interior layer, and an exterior layer.




b) Reinforce inner surface with a resin-rich surfacing veil of 10 mils to 20 mils thick.

c) The resin content of the inner surface shall be minimum of 80 percent by weight.

d) Construct interior layer of resin reinforced with at least two plies of chopped strand mat. Thickness of interior layer shall be at least 100 mils.

e) Glass content of combined inner surface and interior layer shall be 27 percent plus or minus 5 percent.

f) The exterior or structural layer shall be filament wound. Filament winding shall be with continuous strand roving to provide a glass content of 50 percent to 80 percent.

g) Outer Color Requirements: Owner selected custom color.

b. Workmanship: 1) Finished vessel wall shall be free, as commercially

practicable, of visual defects such as foreign inclusions, air bubbles, pinholes, pimples, crazing, cracking and delaminations that will impair the serviceability of the vessel.

2) All cut edges where openings are cut into the vessels shall be trimmed smooth and radiused prior to laminating.

c. Dimensions and Tolerances: 1) The minimum required wall thickness for the cylinder

straight shell shall be sufficient to support its own weight in an upright position without any external support, provide structural support for internals, wind/seismic loading, and meet internal pressure requirements.

2) All dimensions will be taken with the vessel in the vertical position, unfilled.

3) Vessel dimensions will represent the exterior measurements. 4) The tolerance for the outside diameter, including out of

roundness, shall be per ASTM D3299. 5) The tolerance for fitting placements shall be plus or minus

0.5 inch in elevation and 2 degrees radial at ambient temperature.

d. Vessel Access: 1) Provide access manways for observation and access to

internals as required for normal operation and preventive maintenance as shown on Drawings.

2) Access manway flanges shall conform to ASTM D4097.



3) At minimum, provide 24-inch diameter access manways to observe irrigation spray pattern and at sump section. Additional access manways for media removal shall be provided for random type media. Structured media systems shall be limited to a maximum of six modules that can be removed from the top of the vessel. Structured media modules shall contain am attachment to connect to lifting equipment for easy removal.

4) Provide manways constructed of same material as vessel. Manway covers shall be clear polycarbonate covered with a rubber flap to prevent algae growth. Provide FRP backing rings 1/2-inch thick to protect the clear cover from fracturing when bolts are tightened.

5) Fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 6) The gaskets shall be 1/8-inch thick EPDM of 60 durometer.

e. Vessel Attachments: Piping shall be supported at 5-foot maximum intervals along shell of tower. Provide suitable brackets and hardware.

f. Differential Pressure Instrument: Provide 1-inch NPT connections on the tower for sensing pressure above and below the media. Use a 1-inch diameter elbow or tee facing upward to prevent moisture intrusion into the sample/pressure piping. Route piping upward from the elbow or tee, then over and down to the instrument. Provide suitable bracket on the tower wall for mounting the differential pressure instrument as shown on Drawings. Bracket shall be no more than 48 inches above the bottom of the tower. Connect tower connections to instrument using Type 316 stainless steel tubing, minimum 1/2-inch diameter, with condensate drains as shown on Drawings. Support tubing along tower wall at 5-foot maximum intervals.

g. Media Support: 1) Independent supports to separate media layers to avoid

compaction. 2) FRP grating fabricated from vinyl ester resin, sufficient to

hold media plus entrained irrigation liquid. 3) Opening size shall not allow passage of media.

h. Mist Eliminator: Provide mist eliminator to prevent entrainment of spray droplets from exiting the stack. Mist eliminator to remove minimum of 99 percent droplets of 30 micron or larger and maximum pressure drop of 0.5-inch w.c.

i. Provide nonskid surface on top surface of tower.




j. Marking: 1) On small plate, identify vessel with the fabricator’s name,

maximum temperature, design pressure/vacuum, diameter and height, vessel number, vessel name, and date of manufacture.

2) No large signage with vendor name is allowed on vessel. 3. Synthetic Media:

a. Composed of high porosity, chemically resistant polyurethane, polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride.

b. Media shall not shrink or swell with varying moisture content. c. Each media layer shall be self-supporting, removable for

inspection, cleaning or replacement. d. Treatment layers must be constructed in a manner to minimize the

potential for short circuiting of the air being treated. e. Sufficient media to provide at least the minimum contact time

listed herein and meet the required performance. f. Lava rock, expanded clay, fused glass, or ceramic based media is

not acceptable. g. Organic media (noninert) materials are not acceptable.

4. Irrigation System: a. Each reactor shall be configured with at least one fluid injection

spray nozzle. If necessary for system operation, additional nozzle arrays shall be provided.

b. The spray nozzle(s) shall be located above each treatment stage and disperse the fluid evenly over the entire treatment layer.

c. Nozzle spray header(s) shall be easily removable from the outside of the vessel.

d. Provide connection on vessel for connection of temporary recirculation pump as required for acclimation.

e. The irrigation system is to include a nutrient addition system to provide macro and micronutrients if needed by the bacteria for optimal performance to meet the listed design performance criteria. While plant water may have sufficient nutrients to minimize need for supplemental nutrient supply, the system shall include a nutrient supply system, including nutrient storage tank.

5. Drain System: a. Each reactor shall be provided with “normal” drain nozzle at the

bottom of the vessel basin, as shown on Drawings. b. The drain piping shall include a sample valve for pH grab sample

measurement as shown on Drawings. c. Drain piping shall include P-trap to prevent odorous air from

flowing through drain pipe. Coordinate depth of trap with supplier based on expected operating conditions. Heat trace and insulate drain piping to extents shown on Drawings.



d. Provide overflow connection with blind flange. Temporary overflow piping shall be provided during initial acclimation when recirculation pump is used.

6. Water Panel (22LCP0501): a. Type 316 stainless steel, NEMA 4X construction, suitable for wall

mounting. b. Containing valves, flow meter, and plumbing required for

irrigation of synthetic media. c. Mounted remotely (3 feet or more) away from the vessel,

pressurized odorous air ducts or the fan, as shown on Drawings. d. Electric resistance space heater, with thermostat, for condensation

control. e. Nutrient pump shall be located in the water panel. f. Field connection to external water supply and temporary

recirculation pump. g. Provide main circuit breaker for a single 120V ac power

connection and distribution panel with circuit breaker for each 120V ac load inside the panel. Route 120V ac circuits inside panel in conduit.

h. Instrumentation to include: 1) Water Supply Flow Meter with Totalizer:

a) Power: 120V ac. b) Signal: Analog 4 mA to 20 mA proportional to flow

rate. 2) Irrigation Motorized Ball Valves:

a) Quantity: One per tower. b) Power: 120V ac. c) Control: Accept two dry contacts for remote OPEN

and CLOSE control of valve. d) Limit Switch Feedback: Provide two dry contacts, one

for full OPEN and one for full CLOSED valves position, for remote indication

3) Drain line flushing solenoid valve, 120V ac. 4) Water pressure indicators. 5) Isolation ball valves. 6) Flow regulating valves. 7) Other components to allow proper operation.

i. Provide accessories inside, or exterior to, the water panel including: 1) Y-strainer. 2) Water supply isolation valve. 3) Tee with isolation valve for secondary water supply. 4) Water pressure reducing valve.




B. Nutrient Metering Pump (22PMP0501):

1. Materials of construction shall be compatible with pumping supplied nutrient.

2. Pump Capacity: As required for proper biotrickling filter operation. 3. Total Dynamic Head: As required for proper biotrickling filter

operation. 4. Power: 120V ac. 5. Control: Accept dry contact for remote RUN command. Pump runs

when contact is closed. 6. Manufacturers:

a. LMI. b. Wallace and Tiernan.

C. Nutrient Tank (22TNK0501):

1. FRP, Polypropylene or HDPE tank with drain. 2. Volume: 1-month supply, 55 gallons maximum.

2.05 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

A. General:

1. Biotrickling filter odor control system will be controlled by the plant PLC.

2. Provide instrumentation as shown on Drawings in accordance with Division 40, Instrumentation and Control Components.

2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Lifting Lugs: For equipment weighing over 70 pounds.

B. Provide suitably sized anchor lugs integral to the tower. Contractor to provide Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts as required by Biotrickling Filter System Supplier for design conditions detailed herein and complying with all local building and structural codes and requirements.

C. Ladders:

1. As shown on Drawings. 2. FRP construction with stainless steel hardware. 3. Designed and detailed to OSHA standards. 4. Each ladder shall be equipped with a safety climb device as specified in

Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.



2.07 MAINTENANCE PLATFORM

A. The Supplier shall provide a maintenance platform serving both biotrickling filter towers for access to the spray header elevation as shown on Drawings. The platform shall allow for maintenance tasks including spray header removal, spray pattern inspection, and mist eliminator access.

B. Provide additional access to the top of the tower for sample ports and mist eliminator. Provide railing around the perimeter and fall protection devices as required by OSHA.

C. Platform supports shall include structural members connected to clips on the vessel wall. Calculations shall be submitted as described in the submittal requirements in Article Submittals.

D. The Contractor shall provide stairs, railing, and landing leading up to the platform as shown on Drawings and in accordance with Division 05, Metals. Coordinate elevation and attachment details with the Supplier.

E. Include grating platforms, toe-plate and guardrails in accordance with Federal OSHA requirements.

F. All fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

G. Platform and railing fabricated from aluminum or FRP materials.


A. Factory Test: Perform Biotrickling Filter System Supplier’s standard inspection and testing on equipment, which should include, as a minimum, quality control inspection report, nozzle testing and reporting, and airflow modeling through media and report same.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Packaged Equipment: When any system is provided as prepackaged equipment, coordination shall include space and structural requirements, clearances, utility connections, signals, outputs and features required by the Biotrickling Filter System Supplier including safety interlocks.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. In accordance with Biotrickling Filter System Supplier’s written instructions.




B. Anchor Bolts: Supplied by Contractor and accurately place using templates furnished by Biotrickling Filter System Supplier.

3.03 FIELD FINISHING AND CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Touchup damaged areas of painted ferrous metal in accordance with and as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

B. Touchup damaged areas of FRP components in accordance with and as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.


A. System Startup:

1. Performed by Biotrickling Filter System supplier. 2. Startup will commence following a visual inspection and check out of

the System by the Biotrickling Filter System Supplier’s technical representative.

3. Specialized materials to be used during the startup such as inoculums, or nutrients shall be furnished by the Biotrickling Filter System Supplier. Activated sludge for startup is available at the plant and may be obtained upon Owner request from a tank or pipe as designated by the Owner. Contractor shall be responsible for collecting and transporting any activated sludge to the Biotrickling Filter.

4. Temporary recirculation system provided by the supplier shall be used during startup to acclimate system. Provide temporary overflow and drain piping, as needed to accommodate operating the system using the recirculation pump.

5. Coordinate communication network settings such as Ethernet IP address, subnet, and gateway settings with Owner.

B. Functional Tests:

1. Conduct on each piece of equipment in the system. 2. Alignment: Contractor to test complete assemblies for correct rotation,

proper alignment and connection, and quiet operation. 3. Fan Vibration Test by Contractor: Refer to Section 23 05 93, Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC and Odor Control. 4. Ductwork Pressure Testing:

a. Contractor to conduct pneumatic tests on all ductwork at the pressures listed.

b. Test procedures shall be as specified in Section 23 31 16.16, Thermoset Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Ducts and Accessories.



5. Air Balancing: a. Provide for services of an independent air balancing and testing

firm to balance the odorous air into Biotrickling Filter System as shown in the Contract Documents and as required in Section 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC and Odor Control.

b. Test and balance biotrickling filter odor control system in operation at both initial and future air flow conditions.

6. Biotrickling Filter System: a. Test all system components for proper adjustment and operation

in both the manual and automatic operating modes. b. Irrigation System:

1) Allow the biotrickling filters to operate for a 24-hour period. 2) Test system while operating in once-through mode. 3) Monitor proper irrigation system operation; make

adjustments as necessary. c. Provide certification of proper installation prior to commencing

performance testing.

C. Performance Testing:

1. General: a. To demonstrate that the Biotrickling Filter System furnished

hereunder is installed and performs in accordance with the provisions of these Specifications, the Biotrickling Filter System supplier shall conduct a performance test in accordance with an approved testing protocol.

b. The performance test shall not commence until a Performance Testing Plan has been submitted and approved, and the functional testing has been completed.

c. If the schedule allows, the performance test shall occur between May and September.

d. The Biotrickling Filter System supplier shall provide, install, and maintain, if required, all temporary metering or analytical equipment necessary to measure the various performance parameters.

e. The Biotrickling Filter System supplier shall provide for all sampling and laboratory analysis. Laboratory analysis shall be done by an independent testing laboratory and paid for by the Biotrickling Filter System supplier.

f. Before the performance test begins, the Engineer and the Biotrickling Filter System supplier shall meet and agree upon the procedures and guarantee points to be used. Such agreements shall be included in the written Performance Testing Plan submittal.




g. The Biotrickling Filter System supplier shall inform the Engineer at least 14 days prior to the start of any performance testing. The Engineer shall have the right to observe, sample, and make any parallel determinations during the performance test.

h. Within 30 days after the conclusion of the test period, the Biotrickling Filter System supplier shall submit a Performance Test Report, including all laboratory and field test data, stating the conclusions of the test with regard to the performance criteria.

2. Performance Tests: Conduct performance test on Biotrickling Filter System under actual or approved operating conditions as described in this Section. a. Test only after supplier-approved acclimation period for each

biotrickling filter. Acclimation is not to exceed 6 weeks unless allowed by the Engineer.

b. Test using actual H2S loading conditions. c. Test with operation in once-through irrigation using plant effluent

(W3) and with nutrient addition, if required. d. Collect inlet and outlet Tedlar bag odor samples for analysis by

ASTM Standard of Practice E679. e. Collect inlet and outlet Tedlar bag samples for analysis of reduced

sulfur compounds analysis by GC with Chemiluminescence ASTM D5504.

3. Test Conditions: a. The performance test shall be conducted while the sources being

controlled are fully operational and at inlet H2S concentrations within the ranges specified in Article Service Conditions, and acceptable to the Engineer. The biotrickling filter shall have been fully functional and receiving odorous air from these facilities for a minimum of 4 consecutive weeks prior to commencing the testing.

b. All testing, adjusting, and balancing of the odor control fans shall have been completed and approved.

c. The test shall be conducted over a 4-hour period with sampling and data measurements being evenly distributed over that time period.

d. The time when samples are collected shall be when there are low wind speeds and no rain or snow.

4. Sampling and Data Measurement: During the test period, as a minimum, the following data and measurements shall be taken at the frequency indicated. a. Overall System Airflow Rate: Once at the beginning of the test

and once at the end of the test. b. Odor Control Fan Differential Pressure: Recorded hourly.



c. Differential pressure across the biological media bed: Recorded hourly.

d. Drain pH: For both towers, at start of test, once every hour, and at the end of test.

e. Air samples for hydrogen sulfide, reduced sulfur compounds, and odor panel analysis shall be collected from three locations for the purposes of determining removal performance: 1) Common Inlet to the biotrickling filter system. 2) Outlet from biotrickling filter tower 1 stack. 3) Outlet from biotrickling filter tower 2 stack.

f. Hydrogen Sulfide Concentrations (in ppbv and or ppmv): Logged continuously at 1-minute intervals. 1) H2S measurements to be performed using an instrument

previously approved by Engineer, (e.g., Detection Instruments Accrulog), with a lower detection limit no higher than 5 ppbv (outlet location) and an upper range greater than the maximum inlet concentration (inlet location).

2) Use colorimetric tubes or Arizona Instruments Jerome 631-X H2S Analyzer for screening to determine whether sampling equipment has a sufficient upper detection range.

3) The instrument shall be operated in compliance with the Biotrickling Filter System Supplier’s instructions.

g. Odor Concentration (D/T): Twice per sampling location. 1) Two air samples, one near the beginning of the 4-hour

sample period and one near the end, shall be collected and shipped to a qualified odor panel laboratory (e.g., St. Croix Sensory) and analyzed within 24 hours of collection.

2) Samples shall be collected in Tedlar bags, using the sampling procedure described in EPA Method 18 with either a vacuum chamber or vacuum pump.

3) Odor panel shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E679 and odor intensity in accordance with ASTM E544.

4) Odor panelist presentation rates of 20 liters per minute shall be used.

h. Reduced Sulfur Compounds: Twice per sampling location. 1) Two air samples, one near the beginning of the 4-hour

sample period and one near the end, shall be collected and shipped to a qualified analytical laboratory (e.g., ALS, Simi Valley, CA) and analyzed within 24 hours of collection.





3) Reduced sulfur compounds analysis shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D5504.

4) Removal of reduced sulfur compounds is for information only and not part of the performance guarantee.

i. Hydrogen sulfide, reduced sulfur compounds, and odor removal performance shall be determined based on average sample values for each location measured over the 4-hour sampling period and calculated as follows: 1) Removal performance = (Inlet – Outlet) / Inlet.

Note: Percent removal is only applicable when the biotrickling filter inlet sample’s concentrations are higher than those stated in Article Service Conditions.

j. A photographic record of the sampling technique and sampling locations will be completed for each type of sampling.

k. Sampling Log: l. A sampling log shall be maintained that will include:

1) Date, time, location, sampler, and results of each sample. 2) A description of each photograph taken. 3) Weather conditions for the sampling day. 4) A qualitative description of the operation of the wastewater

and wastewater treatment processes. 5) A description of any deviations from the sampling plan. 6) All sampling results, including screening measurements,

shall be recorded. 7) Sampling equipment shall be operated in accordance with

Biotrickling Filter System Supplier’s instructions using equipment that has been calibrated according to the manufactures instructions.

m. System Pressure Drop: Pressure differential measurements shall demonstrate that differential pressure (pressure drop) across each biotrickling filter; does not exceed pressure limits specified.

5. Retesting: In the event the biotrickling filter fails to meet the performance requirements, the Biotrickling Filter System Supplier shall immediately make the necessary modifications, adjustments, and/or facility expansions to meet these requirements. The steps taken by the Biotrickling Filter System Supplier shall include, as necessary, design and construction of additional biotrickling filter capacity, upgrades to



the air distribution system, and replacement of the media, all at no additional cost to the Owner. a. Additional performance tests will be conducted by Biotrickling

Filter System Supplier until the performance requirements are met, at no additional cost to the Owner.

b. If after two retests the performance requirements are still not met, the Owner will have the option, at the Owner’s sole discretion, to accept the system as is or obtain a replacement at the expense of the Biotrickling Filter System Supplier.

c. The maximum time between each retest will be 30 days. 6. Demonstration of Performance: Promptly after the performance test is

satisfactorily completed, the Owner will give written notice of the final acceptance of the biotrickling filter to the Biotrickling Filter System supplier.

7. During the performance guarantee period following an acceptable system performance test, the Owner may, at his cost, inspect or retest the system for conformance to these Specifications. The Biotrickling Filter System supplier will be notified of these tests, and he may at the Biotrickling Filter System supplier’s option witness the test and inspections. If the system fails to meet the performance requirements, the performance guarantee provisions of these Specifications shall apply.


A. Provide manufacturer’s services with the minimum days and trips as follows and in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services:

1. Manufacturer’s Assistance to the Contractor: 2 days and 1 trip. 2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation: 1 day and 1 trip. 3. Manufacturer’s Training Program: 2 days and 1 trip. 4. Functional and Performance Testing: 4 days and 2 trips.

B. Furnish trained, personnel who have had experience in installing, starting up and training for at least three similar biotrickling filter systems to perform the manufacturer’s services.

C. Training Lesson Plan:

1. Provide the following: a. Title and objectives. b. Course description and outline of course content. c. Format (e.g., lecture, hands-on).




d. Instruction material and equipment requirements. e. Resumes of instructors providing the training.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PREFABRICATED ALUMINUM JANUARY 2020 FLAT COVER ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 44 42 25.02 - 1

SECTION 44 42 25.02 PREFABRICATED ALUMINUM FLAT COVER

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This specification is for a fully engineered, substantially airtight, surface mounted aluminum cover structure comprised of panels, support beams and members as required to completely cover basin areas indicated on Drawings.

B. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment to provide a complete, installed system of fixed and removable, custom fit, flat aluminum covers. The Tank Cover system includes cover panels, structural supports, and attaching hardware.

1. Facilities with flat panel covers as shown on Drawings: a. 10 - Preliminary Treatment. b. 20 - Primary Treatment. c. 25 - PE/RAS Mixing Box.

1.02 REFERENCES


1. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 7, Minimum Design Loads for Building and Other Structures.

2. American Welding Society, Inc. (AWS): D1.2, Structural Welding Code Aluminum.

3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Sheet and Plate. b. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. c. B308, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6

Standard Structural Shapes.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Drawings or catalog cuts required for the fabrication and installation of the covers, accurate in every detail and containing information necessary to relate to Drawings and Specifications.


PREFABRICATED ALUMINUM PW\DEN003\708335 FLAT COVER JANUARY 2020 44 42 25.02 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

2. Complete manufacturer’s specifications, including material description. 3. Description of manufacturer’s standard finish. 4. List of materials and supplies furnished with the equipment. 5. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by



1. Complete structural calculations, showing the governing stresses in all members and connections sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Washington.


3. Statement of Qualifications. 4. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 5. Approximate shipping weight of the equipment and, if shipped

unassembled, the number of components and approximate weight of each.

6. Shipping method. 7. Recommended handling method. 8. Requirements for storage and protection prior to installation. 9. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with

Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 10. Recommended spare parts and cost information. 11. List of special tools furnished with the equipment. 12. List of materials and supplies furnished with the equipment. 13. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with



A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: 5 years of experience in design, fabrication, and erection of similar structures proposed.

B. Designer: Professional engineer registered in the State of Washington.

C. Erectors: Trained and approved by the manufacturer.


A. Storage: Off the ground on level surface in such a manner as to prevent damage.

B. Handling: Use spreaders, when lifting, to avoid damage to the covers.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of:

1. Hallsten Corp., Sacramento, CA. 2. Engineer knows of no equal.

2.02 FLAT COVERS

A. Flat Aluminum, Clear-Span Structures:

1. The aluminum cover shall be composed of panels and beams, as required. All panels shall interlock with the adjoining beams without the use of threaded fasteners.

2. Self-supporting from basin walls or slab as shown on Drawings. 3. Beams, as required, shall be located below the panel surface unless

indicated otherwise on Drawings. Support beams to walls or slab edges as required for connection design.

4. Allow for thermal expansion and contraction. 5. Walking Surface Elevation: Installed cover system walking surface

elevation to be approximately 2 inches above top elevation of basin walls, except where indicated otherwise on Drawings.

2.03 DESIGN

A. Conform to generally accepted engineering practice, and to the “Specification for Aluminum Structures” published by the Aluminum Association.

B. Design Stress: All allowable design stresses in structural aluminum shall be in accordance with the “Specifications for Aluminum Structures” for building-type structures by the Aluminum Association.

C. Design the covers to withstand their own dead load, plus the following loads:

1. Snow Load: See Structural General Notes on Drawings for Criteria. 2. Wind Load: See Structural General Notes on Drawings for Criteria.

Design for horizontal and uplift forces in accordance with ASCE 7, except as modified herein.

3. Uniform Live Load: 50 pounds per square foot, except 100 pounds per square foot at facility 10.



4. Concentrated Load: 400-pound load concentrated on 1 square foot at any point.

5. Process piping support loads for cover system framing to support spray bar piping as indicated on Facility 20 Drawings.

6. Seismic Load: See Structural General Notes on Drawings for Criteria.

D. Maximum deflection of cover system components:

1. Subject to Dead Plus Live Loading: Span length divided by 180. 2. Subject to Dead Load Only: Span length divided by 240. 3. Subject to Dead Plus Wind Loading: Span length divided by 180.

E. Configuration:

1. Furnish covers with an integral nonskid surface, without the use of paint or adhesive tapes.

2. Decking Surface: a. Interlock edges of adjacent deck slats so that the slats act together. b. Dovetail interlocks that are easy and readily available to remove

may be used to hold adjacent panels together. Panels designated and shown on Drawings shall be removable without removing adjacent panels.

3. Composition: Panels and beams or trusses. a. Panels: Interlock with the adjoining beam or truss without the use

of threaded fasteners. All panels removable without removing more than two adjacent panels.

b. Weight of Individual Panels: Not exceed 150 pounds. c. Configure beams and coordinate beam depth to clear high-water

level in basins and to facilitate installation of spray bar piping where shown. 1) Facility 20: Water level at 2 feet below top of concrete

walkway. 4. Removable Panels: Require no more lifting force than the dead weight

of the panel. 5. Provide air intake grating as shown on Drawings. Aluminum grating

shall be manufacturer’s standard and flush with the cover.

2.04 COMPONENTS

A. Aluminum Framing Members: ASTM B308, Alloy 6061-T6 or ASTM B221 Alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-T6.

B. Aluminum Panels for Flat Covers: Extruded 6061-T6 aluminum.



2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Furnish doors, hatches, vents, and pipe penetrations of manufacturer’s standard design as indicated on Drawings.

B. Welding Electrodes: An alloy that will produce welds with strength and corrosion resistant characteristics comparable to the base metal.

C. Access Hatch Panels:

1. Flush with cover system. 2. Locations and clear opening as identified on Drawings. 3. Integral gear hinged access hatches. 4. Identical properties as the rest of the aluminum cover including loads,

deflection and slip resistance specifications. 5. Fall arrest shall be installed below each hatch. Fall arrest shall be Hatch

Net 121 manufactured by Safe Approach, Inc, Auburn, ME, “or-equal.”

D. Fasteners:

1. Between Aluminum Components: Stainless steel or structural plastic. 2. Provide protection from dissimilar metals by means of gasketing or

painting system as specified. 3. Anchor Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel as

specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications, and Section 05 05 19, Post-Installed Anchors.

4. Supply a sufficient quantity of adhesive anchor or anchor bolts of suitable size to avoid localized stresses in bolting.

5. Apply anti-seizing compound to stainless steel fasteners as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

E. Sealant: Type 5 as specified in Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants.

2.06 FABRICATION

A. Welding:

1. Components to be welded shall be free of dirt, grease, and other contaminants, and shall fit up properly for sound welding.

2. Surfaces to be welded may not be cut with oxygen; sawing, shearing, or machining may be used.

3. Use inert gas shield arc process. 4. Develop machine settings with test welds of the same material, alloy,

and geometry as the work pieces.



5. Destructively test sample welds.

B. Seals: Replaceable and mechanical with no caulking allowed.

C. Finishing: Exposed surfaces of the structure shall have manufacturer’s standard finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ASSEMBLY AND ERECTION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Erection shall be supervised by the cover manufacturer and performed by skilled and experienced mechanics in accordance with the manufacturer’s standards.

C. Erect plumb and level and in proper alignment.

D. Field Cutting and Patching: Only with Engineer’s approval.

3.02 TESTS AND INSPECTION

A. Air Testing:

1. General: a. Testing shall occur after all covers are installed and the odor

control fans have been tested and duct system balanced. b. Conduct an air test of the completed cover system with the odor

control fans operating at the design volume and also with the air intakes closed.

2. Purpose: Determine air tightness performance of installed covers to verify that the air exchanges, velocity, and extent of air removal over the entire volume under each covered section meet the design requirements to prevent odor and to prevent chemical acid attack to the concrete.

3. Acceptance Criteria: Cover shall maintain an air intrusion leakage rate not to exceed 0.2 cfm per square foot at an applied negative pressure of 0.2 inches of water column with the design air movement equipment operating at design capacity or less.

4. Repairs When Test Fails: Revise cover panels, components, and attachments until the cover successfully passes test.




A. Provide manufacturer’s representative at Site in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, for installation assistance, inspection and certification of proper installation, testing, and training of Owner’s personnel for specified cover system.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 PREFABRICATED FRP SECONDARY JANUARY 2020 CLARIFIER LAUNDER COVERS ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS 44 42 25.04 - 1

SECTION 44 42 25.04 PREFABRICATED FRP SECONDARY CLARIFIER LAUNDER COVERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. This section covers the work necessary for design, fabrication, and erection of the prefabricated secondary clarifier launder covers.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction.

2. Shop Drawings: a. Contractor shall submit such shop drawings and/or catalog cuts

required for the fabrication and installation of the equipment. These drawings shall be accurate in every detail and shall contain all information necessary to relate the equipment to Drawings and Specifications.

b. Where the installation of the equipment requires coordination with work performed by others, such as installation of required embedded items furnished either by Contractor or by others, such coordination shall be clearly identified and indicated on the shop drawings.

c. No work shall be performed in connection with the fabrication or manufacture of materials and equipment, nor shall any accessory or appurtenance be purchased until the shop drawings and data have been reviewed, except at Contractor’s own risk and responsibility.

d. Should Contractor propose any item on his shop drawings, or incorporate an item into the work, and that item should subsequently prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory, regardless of Engineer’s review, Contractor shall, at Contractor’s own expense, replace the item with another item that will perform satisfactorily.

e. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.


1. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.


PREFABRICATED FRP SECONDARY PW\DEN003\708335 CLARIFIER LAUNDER COVERS JANUARY 2020 44 42 25.04 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

2. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. 3. List of location and contact information for installations meeting

Manufacturer’s Qualifications. 4. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance. 5. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation. 6. Anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15,

Anchorage and Bracing.

1.03 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. General: Competent and experienced technical representatives shall represent the manufacturers of all equipment and systems as may be necessary to resolve assembly or installation problems at the Work Site which are attributable to, or associated with, the equipment furnished.

B. Manufacturer’s Certification: Manufacturer’s representative shall certify in writing stating that the equipment or system has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation and has been inspected by a manufacturer’s authorized representative and is complete.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. The covers for existing Secondary Clarifiers 3 and 4 shall completely cover the inboard effluent launder and scum baffle, to the maximum extent possible. The covers shall have nonwalkable hatches along the entire perimeter, except where existing overhead features such as the clarifier bridge, conduit, or piping, would prevent the opening of such hatches. In these places, unhinged sections of FRP shall be mounted underneath such interfering features to provide cover of the launder, weir, and scum baffle. The hatches shall be adjacent to one another, and not spaced apart, such that at least 90 percent of the perimeter can be directly exposed by an overhead hatch. The covers shall be customized prior to shipment to the maximum extent possible to adjust covers to fit existing features on the clarifiers. The manufacturer and Contractor shall coordinate and take any necessary measurements required for manufacturing.

B. Design and erect the covers to block all direct light from the launder and outboard section of the scum baffle when hatches are closed.

C. Design hatches to allow inspection of the scum baffle and inboard side of the clarifier weir to the maximum extent possible.



D. Design hatches to be openable by an operator standing outside the clarifier. Design hatches to prevent them from opening to a degree where an operator cannot close them while standing outside the clarifier.

2.02 DESIGN

A. The launder cover shall consist of a system of molded fiberglass panels that are attached together to form a continuous cover over the launder trough, weir and scum baffle within the treatment tank. The cover shall be designed and manufactured to inhibit incident sunlight from striking the surfaces of the launder and weir. Each cover section shall be molded of UV-protected fiberglass and shall be opaque to sunlight. Individual sections shall be a minimum of 4 feet in length and curved to follow the curvature of the tank. The cover shall extend over the trough and weir as far as possible and may extend to a point immediately inside the scum baffle so long as the cover does not interfere with the sweep arm. The cover shall be designed such that adjacent panels fit together properly and the completed cover, when installed, forms a rigid structure and has a well-engineered and professional appearance.

B. Design anchors to provide adequate anchorage to concrete substructure and safely withstand all design loads and movements. Anchors and templates shall be provided by the cover supplier.

C. The substructure has been designed to be self-supporting under seismic and wind loads.

D. The cover shall be designed to open away from the operator and toward the center of the tank (weir wall mount). Each cover segment shall consist of a fixed mounting section and two hinged cover sections, each connected to the mounting section by a continuous stainless steel hinge. The mounting section shall provide a rigid mount for the cover sections and ensure the proper fixed spacing between them.

E. The mounting section shall be fastened to the weir wall with FRP and/or stainless steel brackets, and extends inward to a point just inboard the scum baffle. The hinged cover sections extend outward toward the tank wall and swing open to allow inspection and maintenance of the launder and weir. The hinge point of the cover is positioned beyond (inboard) the weir to ensure full visibility of the launder and weir when the cover is open. In the closed position, the cover sections rest on an FRP support flange attached to the inner wall of the tank.


PREFABRICATED FRP SECONDARY PW\DEN003\708335 CLARIFIER LAUNDER COVERS JANUARY 2020 44 42 25.04 - 4 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

2.03 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS

A. All proposed manufacturers must have at least 10 successful separate installations with covers on secondary clarifier launders of the exact same design as that proposed for this project. Each project must have been installed for at least 3 years and have a contact for the owner of the facility who must be willing to give a positive reference for the installation to be considered successful.

2.04 MANUFACTURERS

A. NEFCO Systems, Inc. (Palm Beach Gardens, Florida).

B. Engineer knows of no equal.

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Anchor Bolts: Per Section 05 05 19, Post-Installed Anchors, Type 316 stainless steel.

B. Fasteners:

1. All bolts and fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Fastener design capacity shall be based on net cross-sectional area times

allowable stress values as published by the Aluminum Association for aluminum and ASTM F593 and ANSI/ASCE-8 for stainless steel. The use of manufacturer’s test data to rationalize an increase in assumed fastener strengths is prohibited.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FABRICATION

A. All work shall be fabricated in accordance with the reviewed shop drawings, and shall be executed by mechanics skilled and experienced in the fabrication of the material.

3.02 HANDLING, SHIPPING, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Provide suitable lugs or other devices for attachment of lifting lines. Provide spreaders as required to avoid damage to the cover. Provide suitable packaging or crating of materials for shipment to Job Site. At all times, both before and after installation, protect the cover from damage.



3.03 ERECTION

A. Provide suitable equipment for assembly and installation of the covers. Erection shall be observed by a representative of the cover manufacturer and performed by skilled and experienced mechanics in accordance with the manufacturer’s standards. The covers shall be erected plumb and level and in proper alignment. Field cutting and patching will be permitted only with Engineer’s approval. Any material or workmanship which does not conform to the intent of this Specification shall be replaced or repaired by Contractor at Contractor’s sole expense.

B. The presence of the manufacturer’s representative will in no way relieve Contractor of any responsibility concerning guarantees or conformance of equipment with the Specifications.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 CHEMICAL METERING PUMPS JANUARY 2020 44 44 13.01 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 44 44 13.01 CHEMICAL METERING PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES


1. Hydraulic Institute Standards. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 112, Standard

Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. 3. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA): MG 1, Motors

and Generators.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Terminology pertaining to pumping unit performance and construction shall conform to the ratings and nomenclature of the Hydraulic Institute Standards.

1.03 SUBMITTALS



assembly. b. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature,

specifications, and identification of materials of construction. c. Performance data on pumps, including curves showing flow rate

verses pump speed setting (in percent). d. Pump data sheet confirming pump capacity in gallons per hour

and pressure in psig, pumped chemical characteristics, pipe connection sizes, pump speed, materials, testing requirements, intermediate fluid type, and appurtenances to be provided with pumps.

e. Detailed dimensional drawings for pump and driver and engineered panel, including mounting requirements and piping connection sizes and locations.

f. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers.

g. Complete motor nameplate data, as defined by NEMA, motor manufacturer, and including any motor modifications.


CHEMICAL METERING PUMPS PW\DEN003\708335 44 44 13.01 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

h. Manufacturer’s materials compatibility information, confirming compatibility of wetted parts with specified pumped chemicals.

i. Factory finish system. j. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as

required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.


1. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing.

2. Factory Functional Test Reports. 3. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 4. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. 5. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a

period of 1 year and 5 years. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price information.

6. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.

7. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.


A. Furnish for each pump three complete set of tubes and connecting fittings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. No “or-equal” or substitutions will be allowed.

B. Coordinate pump requirements with drive manufacturer and be responsible for pump and drive requirements.

C. Where adjustable speed drives are required, furnish a coordinated operating system complete with pump, drive, and speed controller.

2.02 SUPPLEMENTS

A. Some specific requirements are attached to this section as supplements.



2.03 PUMP

A. Positive displacement peristaltic tube pump, consisting of drive wheel, roller wheels on bearings, with automatic leak detection, integral variable speed drive and integrated controls.

B. Materials exposed to pump fluid during operation or during leak shall be suitably selected to prevent corrosion.

C. Pump leakage shall be prevented through closure of the conveyance tube by pinching and pressure of the roller wheels. Select pump with four roller wheels.

2.04 PANEL

A. Provide a FRP, PVC, or polypropylene constructed panel for mounting all material provided as part of this specification. Factory install all piping and appurtenances, including pump. Design panel for Unistrut wall mounting with adequate anchorage holes. Design panel to optimize maintenance, including possible pump replacement, tube replacement, pressure relief valve removal, or calibration column removal without cutting pipe. Provide drainage valves to empty panel piping of fluid. Panel pipe shall be Schedule 80 PVC, 1/2-inch minimum size, solvent welded, with unions where necessary to allow maintenance or part removal. Provide pump manufacturer’s recommended connection fittings for replaceable tube, as well as the means to change tube sizes.

B. The panel will be wall mounted 10 feet to 15 feet below a hypochlorite tote, and will discharge to piping located above it. Suction lifting will not be required.

C. Panel Integrator/Manufacturer:

1. Goble Sampson Associates, Inc.; Issaquah, WA. 2. TMG Services, Inc.; Tacoma, WA.

2.05 VALVES

A. All valves shall be constructed of material suitable for handling sodium hypochlorite.

B. Adjustable pressure relief type installed on pump discharge.


CHEMICAL METERING PUMPS PW\DEN003\708335 44 44 13.01 - 4 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

C. Isolation valves at panel inlet and outlet, pressure relief valve, and at drain locations necessary to replace pump tubing. Provide recirculation piping and valves necessary for pump calibration without discharge of calibration fluid.

2.06 PUMP OUTPUT CONTROL

A. Adjustable Speed Adjustment: Provide adjustable speed operation of pump. Coordinate pump motor type with drive unit provided. Drive unit shall include integral control panel with speed indication in percent or rpms.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch die-stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in a readily visible location.

B. Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds.

C. Anchor Bolts: Galvanized sized by equipment manufacturer and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

D. Gauge Connections: Tapped and plugged suction and discharge gauge connections on piping headers adjacent to pumps.

E. Calibrated Cylinder: Graduated in 0.05-gallon increments, constructed of clear polypropylene and PVC with ball type shutoff valve. Provide calibration column as shown on Drawings.


A. Manufacturer’s standard finish.


A. Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test equipment actually furnished.

B. Factory Test Report: Include test data sheets.

C. Functional Test: Perform manufacturer’s standard test on equipment.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

B. Anchor Bolts: Accurately place using equipment templates and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.


A. Conduct tests on each pump.

B. Functional Test:

1. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper alignment and connection, and quiet operation.


A. Manufacturer’s Representative:

1. Present at Site or classroom designated by Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded: a. 1 person-day for installation assistance and inspection. b. 1 person-day for calibration, facility startup, and site training.

3.04 SUPPLEMENT

A. The supplement listed below, following “End of Section,” is part of this Specification.

1. Sodium Hypochlorite Feed Pump 1 Data Sheet.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 CHEMICAL METERING PUMPS JANUARY 2020 44 44 13.01 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE FEED PUMP 1 DATA SHEET

Tag Numbers: 47PMP4101

Pump Name: Sodium Hypochlorite Feed Pump 1

Manufacturer and Model Number: (1) Watson Marlow, 530 SN or 530S (2) Blue and White FLEX-PRO (3) No “or-equal” or substitutions allowed

SERVICE CONDITIONS

Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): 12.5% Sodium Hypochlorite

Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 60 Max 80 Min 40

Liquid pH:

Abrasive (Y/N) N Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N): N

NPSHa: 42 feet

Altitude (ft msl): 40 Area Classification: Unclassified

Location (indoor/outdoor): Indoor

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Capacity (US gpm): Maximum: 33 gph Minimum: 1 gph

Maximum Discharge Pressure (psig): 30

Relief Valve Setting (psig/as recommended): 30

DESIGN AND MATERIALS

Pump Type: Single tube, 4 wheel peristaltic pump

Tube material: as recommended by manufacturer for hypochlorite service

Calibration Cylinder: Quantity: 1 Material: PVC Units: Gallons Capacity: 0.5

Pump Speed Control: Constant No Variable Yes

DRIVE MOTOR (See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors)

Manufacturer’s standard; NEMA 4X

TESTING

Pump Tests: Factory Functional (Y/N) Y Factory Performance (Y/N) N

Field Functional (Y/N) Y Field Performance (Y/N) N

Motor Test: Short Commercial (Y/N) Y Other

REMARKS: Select tubing for 1 gph to 8 gph range. If multiple tubes are required, provide extra tube capable of 33 gph range as well as 1 gph to 8 gph range.


PW\DEN003\708335 SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM JANUARY 2020 44 46 13.02 - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

SECTION 44 46 13.02 SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM


Cake Transfer Screw: 72M4401.

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This section covers includes providing a dewatered sludge conveyor and all appurtenance work as specified herein.

1.02 REFERENCES


1. American Bearing Manufacturers’ Association (ABMA): 11, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

2. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA). 3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 4. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. A36A/36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip)

on Iron and Steel Hardware. c. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel

Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.

d. A240, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

e. A385, Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot Dip).

f. A1008/A1008M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.

5. Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association (CEMA): 300, Screw Conveyor Dimensional Standards.

6. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. MG 1, Motors and Generators. b. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts

Maximum).


SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM PW\DEN003\708335 44 46 13.02 - 2 JANUARY 2020 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

7. UL: 674, Electric Motors and Generators Used in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations.


A. The cake transfer screw conveyor shall replace and existing inclined cake transfer screw conveyor.

B. Performance Requirements: Design conveyor system to meet service at less than 70 percent trough filling. Each conveyor drive/motor unit shall be designed for 125 percent of rated capacity (at 70 percent trough fill).

C. Design conveyors without a center shaft for conveying material with minimal maintenance. Spiral flights shall be designed to be self-guiding and aligning in the trough. Guide bearings shall not be permitted.

D. Prior to fabricating the screw conveyor, determine the requirements for and furnish brackets, chutes, and fitments required.

E. The cake transfer screw conveyor is fed by two existing horizontal cake collection screw conveyors (72M4201 and 72M4202).

F. The cake transfer screw conveyor shall provide future odorous air connections sized and located as shown on Drawings.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: a. Detail drawings and specifications for components of equipment

showing all dimensions, parts, construction details, and materials. b. Equipment performance specifications. c. Equipment process schematics. d. Fabricated items, equipment structural supports, platforms,

handrails, and associated items. e. Design loads for load combinations, to be transmitted to

foundations or supports. Conveyor shall use existing support locations as shown in Reference Drawing R-1. Submit loads at existing support locations for Engineer’s review and approval.

f. Upper end of conveyor shall be supported from support beam shown on Drawing M-03. Conveyor and cake chute shall not be supported by cake storage hopper roof.



g. Size, length, and spacing of anchor bolts or attachments to the foundations or supports.

h. Specific details of attachment of bracing members to concrete or steel structures.


1. Signed and stamped Shop Drawings and calculations. a. Calculations shall include design loads and stress levels for

structural members and connections. b. Comply with Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing, for

structural loads and design criteria. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer’s test reports. 4. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,




A. Qualifications: Shop Drawings and calculations shall be stamped by a professional engineer registered in the state of Washington.


A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following special tools:

Item Quantity

Special tools required to maintain or dismantle

One complete set

B. Delivery: In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SUPPLEMENTS

A. See supplements to this section for additional product information.




A. Material Conveyed: Dewatered sludge cake.

B. Material Density: 65 pounds to 75 pounds per cubic foot.

C. Solids, Percent by Weight: 12 percent to 16 percent.

D. Temperature: 80 degrees F to 100 degrees F.

E. Capacity (weight): 25,400 wet lb/hr.

F. Capacity (volumetric): 391 cubic feet per hour at material density of 65 pounds per cubic foot.

G. Screw Speed: 20 rpm (maximum).

H. Nominal Conveyor Length: 72 feet.

I. Incline: 22.4 degrees.

J. Hours of Operation: 24 hours per day.

K. Nominal Horsepower: 15.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS

A. Experience:

1. Manufacturer shall have successfully furnished shaftless screw conveyors of similar length, and configuration for use in dewatered sludge cake.

2. Manufacturer shall have 40 years’ experience manufacturing shaftless screw conveyors.

B. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of:

1. SPIRAC, Inc. 2. JDV Equipment Corporation.

2.04 COMPONENTS

A. Materials:

1. Plate: ASTM A240, Type 304L stainless steel.



2. Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 304L stainless steel. 3. Chutes and Trough: ASTM A240, Type 304L stainless steel. 4. Spiral Flights: Cold-formed spring steel, minimum hardness 200 Brinell

with ability to transmit 32,000 inch-pounds of input torque. High tensile Micro Alloy Steel (HTMAS).

5. Drive Shaft: Heat-treated alloy steel AISI, Grade 4150, of uniform diameter.

6. Wear Liner: HDPE liner, Duraflo SPX with snap-in, snap-out replacement feature and built-in wear indicator. 1/4-inch minimum thickness installed on maximum 12-inch centers and a maximum of 2 inches from the liner top edge. Wear liner bars are not acceptable.

7. Fasteners for Conveyor Supports: Galvanized, ASTM A153 or zinc-plated, ASTM A385.

8. Fasteners in Contact with Sludge: ASTM A193, Grade B8, Type 316 stainless steel.

B. Chute(s):

1. Minimum 1/4-inch stainless steel. 2. Openings shall be flanged and bolted. 3. Rigidly supported following manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Trough:

1. Minimum 1/4-inch stainless steel. 2. 4-inch drain and flange connection. 3. Flange fittings for filling and discharge chutes. 4. Troughs shall conform to the dimensional standards of CEMA 300 and

enclosure Classification IIIE.

D. Spiral Flighting: Design spiral flights with the stability to prevent distortion and jumping in the trough.

1. At its torsional rating, the stress in the spiral flighting shall not exceed 30 percent of the Fy value in the extreme fiber of the flight material.

2. Brake Horsepower: Produce less torque than the spiral flighting is rated for.

3. At 250 percent torque of the motor nameplate horsepower rating, the drive train shall not produce more torque than 250 percent of the spiral flighting’s torsional rating.



E. Bearings:

1. ABMA 11, high capacity roller bearings located in the reducing drive housing with an L-10 life rating of 100,000 hours.

2. Designed to support thrust loads and provide angular alignment with the trough.

3. When recommended by the manufacturer, furnish tail and end bearings. If deflection of the spiral flights in the vertical direction exceeds 1 inch, furnish end bearings.

4. End Bearings: Double pillow block or flange and pillow block type mounted outside the trough; completely serviceable from outside the conveyor; no intermediate bearings.

F. Seals: Compression packing gland between the drive shaft and sleeve.

G. Cover:

1. Quick release cover over trough for portions not covered by a filling chute.

2. All covers shall include heavy-duty stainless steel hinges to provide access for inspection.

3. Minimum 1/8-inch stainless steel. 4. Gaskets between trough and cover. 5. Conform to Screw Conveyor Standards CEMA 300. 6. Provide two sections, 30 inches long, to have odorous air connections as

detailed on Drawings.

H. Gear Reducing Drive:

1. Design for full thrust loads from spiral flights. 2. Bearings: Operating life of L-10 100,000 hours. 3. AGMA, Class II, reduction helical gears. 4. Air-cooled, no auxiliary cooling allowed. 5. Close coupled with drive motor. 6. Applied Torque: Adequate to start the screw conveyor when fully

loaded.

I. Conveyor Supports:

1. Minimum 1/4-inch stainless steel HSS sections. 2. Ratio of unbraced length to least radius of gyration shall not exceed

240 for tensile members and 120 for compression members. 3. Designed to not exceed 1/3 of AISC allowable stresses when loaded to

twice the running torque of the motor.



4. Support Loads: Based on completely filled trough, weight of the conveyor, and dynamic loading when operating.

5. Coordinate support locations with facility structure. Supports shall not restrict access to other process systems.

J. Motion Detector:

1. Detect underspeed or zero speed. 2. Noncontacting motion sensing unit. 3. Adjustable time delay for startup. 4. Operate on 120V ac, 60-Hz. 5. DPDT contacts rated 10 amps at 120V ac. 6. Remote mounted NEMA 250, Type 4X, electronics unit. 7. Sensor cable to connect to electronics unit. length as required for

mounting location. 8. Manufacturer and Product: Siemens; Miltronics MFA-4p relay with

MSP-12 sending probe to match existing equipment.

K. Emergency Pull Cord Switch:

1. Conveyor shall be furnished with emergency pull cords. The cords shall active a dual relay, trough mounted emergency stop switch, intended to provide a signal to immediately stop the conveyor, and any feeding devices, when activated.

2. Two pull cords shall run the full length of the conveyor in a straight path, guided through eyebolts spaced on not greater than 12-foot centers. Cording shall be orange colored, nylon coated, corrosion resistant safety cabling.

3. The pull cord switch shall be housed in an enclosure suitable for the environment. The unit shall be a Model RSS by Conveyor Components Company, “or-equal.”

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A193, Grade B8, Type 316, sized by equipment manufacturer. Minimum 1/2-inch diameter, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

B. Lifting Lugs: Provide suitably attached for equipment assemblies and components weighing over 100 pounds.



C. Equipment Identification Plates: Provide 16-gauge stainless steel identification plate securely mounted on each separate equipment component in a readily visible location. Plate shall bear 1/4-inch high die-stamped block type equipment identification number and letters indicated in this Specification, and as shown on Drawings.

D. Furnish lubricants required for startup, initial operation, and testing of the equipment until final acceptance by the Owner.


A. Performance Tests: Completely shop assemble prior to shipment and run for a minimum of 2 hours to ensure proper operation.

B. Factory Tests and Adjustments: Inspect equipment and test for proper alignment, quiet operation, proper connection, and satisfactory performance of components and controls by means of a functional test conducted using material approved by the Engineer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Anchor Bolts: Accurately place using templates furnished by conveyor manufacturer, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.


A. Manufacturer’s Representative present at Site or classroom designated by Owner for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:

1. 1 person-day for installation assistance and inspection. 2. 1 person-day for functional and performance testing and completion of

Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. 1/2 person-day for facility startup. 4. 1/2 person-day for post-startup training of Owner’s personnel. Training

shall not commence until an accepted detailed lesson plan for each training activity has been reviewed by Owner.

B. See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, and Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.



3.03 SUPPLEMENT


1. Cake Transfer Screw Induction Motor Data Sheet.

END OF SECTION


PW\DEN003\708335 SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM JANUARY 2020 44 46 13.02 SUPPLEMENT - 1 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 JACOBS

CAKE TRANSFER SCREW INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET

Project: Salmon Creek Treatment Plant Improvements, Biosolids Cake Transfer Screw Replacement Project

Owner:

Equipment Name: Cake Transfer Screw

Equipment Tag Number(s):72M4401

Type: Squirrel-cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1.

Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories of a single manufacturer.

Hazardous Location: Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 and have an applied UL listing mark.

Motor Horsepower: 15 Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: _____ percent

Voltage: 460 Guaranteed Minimum Power Factor at Full Load: _____ percent

Phase: 3 Service Factor (@ rated max. amb. temp.): 1.0 1.15

Frequency: 60 Hz Enclosure Type: TEFC

Synchronous Speed: 1,800 rpm Multispeed, Two-Speed: _____ / _____ rpm

Thermal Protection: Winding: One Two

Space Heater: _____ volts, single-phase

Mounting Type: Horizontal Vertical

Vertical Shaft: Solid Hollow

Vertical Thrust Capacity (lb): Up _____ Down _____

Adjustable Speed Drive: See Section 26 29 23, Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System.

Operating Speed Range: 100 to 25 % of Rated Speed

Variable Torque

Constant Torque

Additional Motor Requirements: See Section 26 05 01, Electrical.

Special Features:


PW\DEN003\708335 ACTIVATED CARBON ODOR JANUARY 2020 CONTROL SYSTEMS ©COPYRIGHT 2020 CH2M HILL 44 47 28.26 - 1

FSECTION 44 47 28.26 ACTIVATED CARBON ODOR CONTROL SYSTEMS


Solids Odor Control: 75TNK0401 and 75TNK0402: Activated Carbon Adsorbers.

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This Section covers the work necessary to provide one odor control system as described herein.

1. Solids Odor Control: One single stage carbon odor control system, including carbon adsorbers and all appurtenances as specified herein.

1.02 GENERAL

A. Like items of equipment provided hereunder shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturers’ services.

B. The design of the odor control systems as shown on Drawings is based upon the equipment from the first-named manufacturer listed in this Specification. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary changes to the facility design to accommodate the equipment, including but not limited to layout changes and interfaces connections to other work and equipment which are different than that shown on Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating this work and the changes will be at the sole expense of the Contractor. At a minimum these changes may include:

1. Layout and mounting of the equipment, including concrete equipment pads.

2. Coordination of equipment elevations. 3. Rerouting of any piping required to meet the manufacturer’s system

requirements. 4. Additional utilities required to support manufacturer’s system.


ACTIVATED CARBON ODOR PW\DEN003\708335 CONTROL SYSTEMS JANUARY 2020 44 47 28.26 - 2 ©COPYRIGHT 2020 CH2M HILL

1.03 REFERENCES

A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this Section:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 3. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. C582, Standard Specification for Contact Molded Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant Equipment.

b. D2563, Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass-Reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts.

c. D2583, Standard Test Method for Indentation hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor.

d. D2584, Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins.

e. D2854, Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Activated Carbon.

f. D2867, Standard Test Methods for Moisture in Activated Carbon. g. D3299, Standard Specification for Filament-Wound, Fiberglass

Reinforced Thermoset Resin Chemical Resistant Tanks. h. D3802, Standard Test Method for Ball-Pan Hardness of Activated

Carbon. i. D4097, Standard Specification for Contact Molded, Glass Fiber

Reinforced Thermoset Resin Chemical Resistant Tanks j. D5504, Standard Test Method for Determination of Sulfur

Compounds in Natural Gas and Gaseous Fuels by Gas Chromatography and Chemiluminescence.

k. D6646, Standard Test Methods for Determination of Accelerated Hydrogen Sulfide Breakthrough Capacity of Granular and Pelletized Activated Carbon.

l. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

m. E544, Standard Practices for Referencing Suprathreshold Odor Intensity.

n. E679, Standard Practice for the Determination of Odor and Taste Thresholds by a Forced-Choice Ascending Concentration Series Method of Limits.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 820; Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Systems.



1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. The following is a list of abbreviations which may be used in this Section:

1. D/T: Dilutions to Threshold. 2. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic. 3. EPDM: Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer. 4. GC: Gas Chromatography. 5. H2S: Hydrogen Sulfide. 6. OU: Odor Units. 7. ppmv: Parts Per Million, volume. 8. ppbv: Parts Per Billion, volume. 9. PSI: Pounds per Square Inch. 10. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride. 11. WG: Water Gauge.


A. Unit Responsibility and Scope of Supply:

1. The Work requires that the odor control system manufacturer/supplier furnish all of the following items including: a. The carbon adsorption units (the vessels), activated carbon media

and associated media support system and media grounding hardware complete with all accessories and appurtenances.

2. The products shall be the end product of one responsible system supplier.

3. The system supplier shall provide media and components suitable for the service conditions listed herein.

4. The system supplier shall provide and guarantee the required hydrogen sulfide and odor unit removal performance listed herein.

5. The system supplier shall furnish all components and accessories of the system to enhance compatibility, ease of operation and maintenance, and as necessary to place the equipment in operation in conformance with the specified performance, features, and functions.

6. The system supplier is responsible for the carbon vessel design including all layouts, structural calculations for floors and walls, reinforcing and vessel material sizing.

7. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the system supplier for Contractor’s scope of supply, such as odor control fans and FRP ductwork.

8. The Contractor shall be responsible for, but not limited to, the following: a. Ductwork, piping and supports.



b. Odor control fans as specified in Section 23 34 00, Odor Control Fans.

c. Installation and assembly of all equipment components for a complete system, including labor.

d. External drain piping from odor control system package. e. Connection of media grounding rod to a suitable ground for each

adsorber.

B. Design Requirements:

1. Refer to Contract Drawings for additional information to supplement this Section.

2. Equipment Anchorage: a. Provide structural design and anchorage Drawings and

calculations. b. Drawings and calculations shall be stamped by an engineer

registered in the State of Washington. c. Design shall comply with project design loads provided on the

General Structural Notes on Drawings and all applicable codes and standards.

3. Equipment Components: a. The stiffness of mechanical and electrical component attachments

shall be designed such that the load path for the component performs its intended function.

b. Equipment shall be demonstrated as functionally rugged. The equipment shall provide an ampleness of construction that renders equipment the ability to survive design ground motions without loss of function.

4. Equipment Materials: a. All components of the system shall be compatible with the

conditions and chemicals to which they will be subjected to during normal operation.

b. Compounds with which the materials of construction must be compatible include, but are not limited to: 1) Hydrogen sulfide. 2) Sulfuric acid. 3) Ammonia. 4) Dimethyl sulfide. 5) Dimethyl disulfide. 6) Methyl mercaptan.



1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Procedures:

1. In accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. 2. System supplier shall include project title and date of transmittal on

each submittal. 3. System supplier shall identify and describe each deviation or variation

from Contract Documents. 4. Resubmittals: Clearly identify each correction or change made.

B. Action Submittals:

1. Submit Shop Drawings as follows: a. Make, model and weight of each equipment assembly. b. Manufacturer’s catalog information, descriptive literature,

specifications, and identification of materials of construction. c. Complete design calculations for odor control system including

annual utility calculations, media residence time calculations and component pressure drop calculations.

d. Equipment anchorage and support drawings and/or cut sheets indicating size, material, spacing, embedment and edge distances of anchors and other relevant information. Drawings should reflect the results of the calculations submitted below.

e. External utility requirements such as air, water, power, drain, etc., for each component.

f. Detailed mechanical and structural layout drawings showing system fabrication, dimensions, size and locations of connections to other work.

g. Vessel data indicating equipment number, pressure rating, resin type, diameter, straight shell lengths, and overall lengths.

h. Manufacturer’s Information on the Carbon Media: 1) Pressure drop data through media. 2) Media physical characteristics demonstrating compliance

with this specification. 3) Media bed life calculations based on previous air sampling

data. i. Shop and Field Painting Systems: Include manufacturer’s

descriptive technical catalog literature and specifications. j. Detailed Performance Testing Plan meeting the requirements of

Article Performance Testing. k. Anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by




2. Calculations and Drawings: a. Provide structural calculations and Drawings for the vessels and

maintenance platform, which shall include, but not be limited to, consideration of the following: 1) Dead loads. 2) Live loads. 3) Environmental loads (wind, snow, seismic). 4) Anchor lug attachment to shell. 5) Anchor bolt size and embedment requirements. 6) Consideration of effect of all cutouts and openings into the

vessel wall. 7) Attachment lugs for piping, structural members, and other

appurtenances. 8) Packing support design.

C. Informational Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance: a. Submit prior to shipment of product. b. Refer to Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.

2. Operation and Maintenance Data in accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.

3. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation: a. Submit a certificate for each installed system. b. Refer to Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.

4. Manufacturer’s Training Program in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services.

5. Final Performance Test Report meeting the requirements of Article Performance Testing.

6. All deviations and/or exceptions to this Specification, detailed and explained with the reason for the deviation and the affect of the deviation on the operation and/or performance of the equipment.

7. Support and anchorage calculations stamped by an Engineer licensed in the State of Washington in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 88 15, Anchorage and Bracing. Anchorage, bracing and support design criteria and calculations shall conform to the manufacturer’s requirements as well as design criteria indicated on the Structural General Notes on Drawings and any other referenced standards. Provide ICC-ES reports and special inspection requirements for anchors to be drilled and installed into completed concrete or masonry. Anchor calculations shall indicate edge distance, embedment, concrete thickness and strength, and other conditions assumed in the



design calculations. All assumed field conditions shall be verified by the Contractor prior to installation of the anchors and bracing.


A. Qualifications:

1. The manufacturer shall be recognized in the design, production and operation of activated carbon odor control systems in the United States.

2. The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years’ experience in design and fabrication of odor control systems similar to the type specified for this Project.

3. Similar Projects: a. Upon request, the manufacturer shall provide a list of five

activated carbon odor control installations associated with the removal of hydrogen sulfide and/or other typical municipal wastewater odors.

b. The list shall include contact names, telephone numbers, and length of service for each named installation.

c. Installations shall be of comparable size to the type specified for this Project.

4. The manufacturer’s place of business shall be open for inspection.

1.08 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Materials, equipment, components, and accessories specified in this Section shall be products of:

1. Daniel Company. 2. Evoqua Water Technologies. 3. ECS – Environmental Composite Systems. 4. No “or-equal” or substitution allowed.



2.02 SERVICE CONDITIONS – GENERAL

A. The odor control systems shall be designed to remove odorous constituents from wastewater process air streams under the following operating conditions:


Duty Continuous

Elevation Above Sea Level 40 feet

Location As indicated on Drawings

Ambient Air Temperature 22 to 90 degrees F

Inlet Air Temperature 50 to 100 degrees F

Ambient Air RH 10 to 90%

2.03 SERVICE CONDITIONS – SOLIDS ODOR CONTROL

A. The Solids Odor Control odor control system shall be designed to remove odorous constituents from process air stream under the following operating conditions:


System Design Air Flow 15,310 cfm

Inlet Air RH 10 to approx. 100%

Odorous Air Source Processes

Solids Processing BFP Exhaust Stacks, TWAS Wet Well Exhaust Stack, Filtrate Recycle Wet Well, Solids Processing Cake Storage Hopper and screw conveyer.

Design H2S Concentration at System Inlet

1 ppmv

Design Odor Concentration at System Inlet

4,260 D/T



B. The Solids Odor Control odor control carbon adsorber design shall conform to the following parameters:


Number of Treatment Stages One

Number of Treatment Vessels

Two (both duty)

Vessel Configuration Single horizontal bed, vertical flow

Vessel Design Flow Rate 7,655 cfm

Minimum Residence Time 3.1 seconds

Unit Diameter 13’-0” – Basis of Design, minimum

Unit shell Height 8’-0” – Basis of Design

Total Air Pressure Drop Maximum: 5.0 inches WG at vessel design flow rate

H2S Removal Required Removal efficiency greater than 99 percent for inlet concentrations greater than 1 ppmv

Outlet concentration less than 10 ppbv for inlet concentrations less than 1 ppmv

Odor Removal Required Removal efficiency greater than 90 percent for inlet concentrations greater than 5,000 D/T

Outlet concentration less than 500 D/T for inlet concentrations less than 5,000 D/T

2.04 CARBON VESSEL

A. General:

1. Freestanding vertical single bed, vertical flow tower configuration. 2. Designed to support the required bed depth of activated carbon media. 3. Manways, drains, etc., provided as needed for access to internals of the

vessel and drainage of the vessel. 4. Designed to support the vessel stacks without the use of external

supports or structure. 5. No exposed metal allowed inside the vessel. 6. Vessel configuration, location and orientation as indicated on Drawings.



7. Vessel construction shall conform to the requirements of Article Vessel Construction.

B. Media Support:

1. Quantity: Sufficient to hold required bed depth of carbon media saturated with water.

2. Opening size shall not allow passage of carbon media. 3. Polypropylene screen of sufficient strength to be placed on FRP grating

support.

C. Media Grounding Rod:

1. Provide a Type 316 stainless steel grounding rod for the carbon bed to prevent static electricity from accumulating. Grounding rod shall be inserted a minimum of 14 inches into the bed.

2. Provide a connecting lug located on the vessel wall for connection to grounding system.

D. Vessel Stack:

1. Provide a vertical stack for each vessel outlet. 2. Each stack shall extend a minimum of three feet above the vessel and be

provided with 90 degree elbow to prohibit rain from entering. 3. Stack shall be a freestanding cantilever design with a flange connection

to the outlet with stainless steel bird screen. No guy wires or external support structure will be allowed.

E. Sample Connections:

1. Provide two 1-inch diameter sample ports on vessel wall, each with PVC ball valves, to permit sample of air quality before and after flowing through the media.

2. Provide three 2-inch diameter sample ports on vessel wall, each with PVC ball valves and equally spaced along the media bed, to permit extraction of media. Extend sample port into the media bed 1 foot minimum with PVC pipe.

3. Provide two 1-inch diameter ports for connection of differential pressure sensing tubes above and below the media bed. Provide suitable bracket for mounting differential pressure instrument shown on Drawings. Instrument tubing and associated mounting hardware to be of Type 316 stainless steel, minimum of 1/2-inch diameter.

F. Drain: Provide 2-inch diameter drain connection with PVC ball valve.



2.05 VESSEL CONSTRUCTION

A. Material – FRP:

1. Vessel to be helically filament-wound in accordance with ASTM D2399.

2. Vessel to be designed for positive pressure service conditions. 3. A 10:1 safety factor shall be used for internal pressure loadings and a

5:1 safety factor shall be used for packing support. 4. Contact molded components and accessories shall be fabricated in

accordance with ASTM D4097. 5. Visual defects shall be better than Level II on the inside of the vessel

and better than Level III on the outside in accordance with ASTM D2563.

6. Other than nozzles, couplings, manways, and top and bottom heads, the towers shall be filament-wound in one piece, without joints.

7. Nozzles: Threaded or flanged, gusseted with conical type gusset. Gaskets to be 1/8-inch thick EPDM full-face gaskets of 60 durometer. Press-molded flanges are not acceptable.

8. Resin: a. Resin shall be premium corrosion-resistant vinyl ester resin such

as Ashland Derakane 510-B, Interplastic Corezyn, “or-equal.” b. FRP fabrications shall not exceed a flame spread index of 25

when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 Tunnel Test. c. Structural wall resin shall contain a minimum of 3 percent

antimony trioxide to achieve the designed low flame spread index requirement.

d. Add ultraviolet absorbers to surfacing resin to improve weather resistance.

e. Color: Use no dyes, pigments, or colorants, except in the exterior gel coat. Gel coat color shall be white.

f. Curing System: Per manufacturer’s recommendations. 9. Reinforcement:

a. Veil: Chemical surfacing mat, Type C (chemical) glass, 10 mils thick, with a finish and a binder compatible with the lay-up resin.

b. Corrosion Barrier: Resin-rich interior surface of nominal 100 mils using chopped strand mat backing the veil. Use no additive in the corrosion barrier.

c. Chopped Stand Mat: Type E glass, minimum 1-1/2 ounces per square foot, with silane finish and styrene soluble binder.

d. Continuous Roving Used in Chopper Gun for Spray-Up: Type E glass.



e. Woven Roving: Type E glass, nominal 24 ounces per square yard, 4 by 5 weave, with silane type finish.

f. Continuous Roving Used for Filament Winding: Type E glass with a silane type finish, with a nominal yield of at least 110 strand yards per pound.

10. Laminate: a. Laminate shall consist of an inner surface (corrosion barrier), an

interior layer, and an exterior layer. b. Reinforce inner surface with a resin-rich surfacing veil of 10 to

20 mils thick. c. The resin content of the inner surface shall be minimum of

80 percent by weight. d. Construct interior layer of resin reinforced with at least two plies

of chopped strand mat. Thickness of interior layer shall be at least 100 mils.

e. Glass content of combined inner surface and interior layer shall be 27 percent plus or minus 5 percent.

f. The exterior or structural layer shall be filament-wound. Filament winding shall be with continuous strand roving to provide a glass content of 50 percent to 80 percent.

B. Workmanship:

1. Finished tank wall shall be free, as commercially practicable, of visual defects such as foreign inclusions, air bubbles, pinholes, pimples, crazing, cracking and delaminations that will impair the serviceability of the vessel.

2. All cut edges where openings are cut into the tanks shall be trimmed smooth.

C. Dimensions and Tolerances:

1. The minimum required wall thickness for the cylinder straight shell must be sufficient to support its own weight in an upright position without any external support.

2. Flat areas shall be provided to allow locating large fittings on the cylinder straight shell.

3. All dimensions will be taken with the tank in the vertical position, unfilled.

4. Tank dimensions will represent the exterior measurements. 5. The tolerance for the outside diameter, including out of roundness, shall

be per ASTM D1998. 6. The tolerance for fitting placements shall be plus or minus 0.5 inch in

elevation and 2 degrees radial at ambient temperature.



D. Tank Access:

1. Provide two 30-inch vessel access manways, one on top of the tank and one on the sidewall.

2. Provide sealed carbon media access, constructed of same material as vessel.

3. Bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel material. 4. The gaskets shall be 1/8-inch thick EPDM of 60 durometer.

E. Marking: Identify each tank with the fabricator’s name, maximum temperature, design pressure/vacuum, minimum thickness, vessel number, vessel name, and date of manufacture.

2.06 ACTIVATED CARBON MEDIA

A. Carbon Adsorber media shall be a 50/50 percent blend of potassium permanganate-based media and virgin, pelletized, vapor-phase bituminous activated carbon suitable for control of sewage treatment plant odors. The media shall have the following performance specifications:

Total quantity, cubic feet, minimum 796

Maximum moisture content, percent by weight (per ASTM D2867)

12%

Apparent density, (per ASTM D2854) 0.64 to 0.69 g/cc

Maximum head loss through dense bed at 50 fpm linear velocity, in. water/ft bed depth

1.0

H2S breakthrough capacity, minimum (per ASTM D6646)

0.2 g H2S removal/cc carbon

Mean Particle Diameter 1.5 to 4 mm

Quantity estimate is total for odor control system.

B. Manufacturers and Products:

1. PureAir Filtration; CPS12. 2. Hydrosil; XP-17-P. 3. Carbon Activated; COL-AA KMnO4. 4. “Or-equal.”



2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Lifting Lugs: For equipment weighing over 70 pounds.

B. Provide Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts, as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

C. Equipment Identification Plates: Furnish 16-gauge Type 316 stainless steel identification plate securely mounted on each separate equipment component and control panel in a readily visible location. Plate shall bear 3/8-inch high engraved block type black enamel filled equipment name, model number, and performance data.


A. Factory Test: Perform manufacturer’s standard tests on equipment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Packaged Equipment: When any system is provided as prepackaged equipment, coordination shall include space and structural requirements, clearances, utility connections, signals, outputs and features required by the manufacturer, including safety interlocks.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. In accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Anchor Bolts: Anchor and brace per Contractor’s anchorage and bracing design calculations.

3.03 FIELD FINISHING AND CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Field touchup as determined by manufacturer.

3.04 PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. General:

1. To demonstrate that the odor control systems furnished hereunder are installed and perform in accordance with the provisions of this Specification, the manufacturer shall conduct a performance test in accordance with an approved testing protocol.



2. The performance test shall not commence until a Performance Testing Plan has been submitted and approved, and the functional testing has been completed. The detailed Performance Testing Plan shall include as a minimum: a. Test equipment and apparatus. b. Calibration and setup procedures. c. The specific testing methodology to be used. d. The sampling and analysis procedures.

3. The manufacturer shall provide, install, and maintain, if required, all temporary metering or analytical equipment necessary to measure the various performance parameters.

4. The manufacturer shall provide for all sampling and laboratory analysis. Laboratory analysis shall be done by an independent testing laboratory and paid for by the manufacturer.

5. The manufacturer shall inform the Engineer at least 14 days prior to the start of any performance testing. The Engineer shall have the right to observe, sample, and make any parallel determinations during the performance test.

6. Within 30 days after the conclusion of the test period, the manufacturer shall submit a Performance Test Report, including: a. Narrative of the testing activities. b. All laboratory and field test data, a copy of the original sampling

log, photographs showing locations of flow and pressure measurements, tabular summary of velocity, airflow rates, pressures, H2S and odor removal data, and calculated results.

c. The conclusions of the test with regard to the performance criteria.

d. Description of all deviations to the Performance Testing Plan.

B. Performance Tests:

1. Conduct performance test on the system under actual operating conditions as described in this section.

2. Test under actual loading condition for 8 continuous hours. 3. Collect inlet and outlet Tedlar bag odor samples for analysis by

ASTM E679. Odor panel presentation rate to be 20 liter per minute. 4. Collect inlet and outlet Tedlar bag samples for analysis of reduced

sulfur compounds analysis by GC with Chemiluminescence per ASTM D5504.



C. Test Conditions:

1. The performance test shall be conducted while the sources being controlled are fully operational. The system shall have been fully functional and receiving odorous air for a minimum of 3 consecutive weeks prior to commencing the testing.

2. All testing, adjusting, and balancing of the entire odor control system shall have been completed and approved.

3. The test shall be conducted over an 8-hour period. 4. The actual sample day shall be chosen for low wind speeds and no rain.

D. Sampling and Data Measurement:

1. During the test period, as a minimum, the following data and measurements shall be taken at the frequency indicated: a. System Airflow Rate:

1) Every 2 hours. 2) Measurement of airflows will be performed using an

anemometer or pitot tube instrument previously approved by Engineer.

b. Differential Pressures: 1) Vessel Differential Pressure in Inches of WC: Every

2 hours. 2) Measurement of airflows will be performed using an

approved micromanometer and pitot tube instrument. c. Hydrogen Sulfide Concentrations (in ppbv and or ppmv): Logged

continuously at 1-minute intervals: 1) H2S measurements to be performed using an instrument

previously approved by Engineer, (e.g., Detection Instruments Accrulog), with a lower detection limit no higher than 5 ppbv (outlet location) and an upper range greater than the maximum inlet concentration (inlet location).

2) Use colorimetric tubes or Arizona Instruments Jerome 631-X H2S analyzer for screening to determine whether sampling equipment has a sufficient upper detection range.

3) The instrument shall be operated in compliance with the Activated Carbon Odor Control System Supplier’s instructions.

d. Odor Concentrations: 1) Samples shall be taken over a period of 4 hours. 2) Samples shall be taken at the inlet and outlet of each vessel.



3) The samples shall be taken at two intervals per testing period: a) The first sample shall be taken after 1 hour of the

testing period and the second sample shall be taken 2 hours after the initial sample.


5) Odor panel shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E679 and odor intensity in accordance with ASTM E544.

6) Odor panelist presentation rates of 20 liters per minute shall be used.

e. Reduced Sulfur Compounds: Twice per sampling location. 1) Two air samples, one near the beginning of the sample

period and one near the end, shall be collected and shipped to a qualified analytical laboratory (e.g., ALS, Simi Valley, CA) and analyzed within 24 hours of collection.


3) Reduced sulfur compounds analysis shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D5504.

4) Removal of reduced sulfur compounds is for information only and not part of the performance guarantee.

f. Sampling Log: 1) A sampling log shall be maintained that will include:

a) Date, time, location, sampler, and results of each sample.

b) A description of each photograph taken. c) Weather conditions for the sampling day. d) A qualitative description of the operation of the

biosolids treatment processes. e) A description of any exceptions from the sampling

plan.

E. Analysis:

1. Vessel Pressure Drop: Pressure differential measurements shall demonstrate that differential pressure (pressure drop) across the vessel does not exceed pressure limits specified.



2. Hydrogen Sulfide Sampling and Analysis: a. Individual performance results will then be calculated by Percent

Removal equals (Inlet - Outlet)/Inlet. Individual removal rates shall demonstrate that the minimum removal efficiencies or minimum outlet concentrations are achieved as specified.

3. Odor Sampling and Analysis: a. Odor panel shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E679

and odor intensity in accordance with ASTM E544. b. Hedonic tone shall also be reported. c. Odor panelist presentation rates of 20 liters per minute shall be

used. d. Individual performance results will then be calculated by Percent

Removal equals (Inlet - Outlet)/Inlet. Individual removal rates shall demonstrate that the minimum removal efficiencies or minimum outlet concentrations are achieved as specified.

F. Retesting: In the event the system fails to meet the performance requirements, the manufacturer shall immediately make the necessary modifications, adjustments, and/or facility expansions to meet these requirements. The steps taken by the manufacturer shall include, as necessary, design and construction of additional capacity, upgrades to the system, and replacement of the media, all at no additional cost to the Owner.

1. Additional performance tests will be conducted by manufacturer until the performance requirements are met, at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. If after two retests the performance requirements are still not met, the Owner will have the option, at the Owner’s sole discretion, to accept the system as is or obtain a replacement at the expense of the manufacturer.

3. The maximum time between each retest will be 30 days.


A. System Startup:

1. Performed by manufacturer. 2. Startup will commence following a visual inspection and check out of

the system by the manufacturer’s technical representative.




A. Provide manufacturer’s representative at site in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers’ Field Services, for installation assistance, inspection and certification of proper installation, equipment testing, startup assistance, and training of Owner’s personnel for specified component, subsystem, equipment, or system.

B. Manufacturer’s Representative:

1. Present at Site or classroom designated by Owners, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded: a. 2 person-days for installation assistance and inspection. b. 3 person-days for functional testing and completion of

Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation. c. 1 person-day for facility startup. d. 1 person-day for post-startup training of Owner’s personnel.

END OF SECTION